Home

User's Guide

1. Ctrl PgUp Uploads data into the selected input field PgDn Downloads data from all input fields Ctrl PgDn Downloads data from the selected input field Ctrl R Sets input focus to the recipe object and prepares for a recipe restore Ctrl W Sets input focus to the recipe object and prepares for a recipe save Up Arrow Moves the selection bar on the Object Key menu Down Arrow Left Arrow Moves the cursor one position left or right Right Arrow Esc Closes the Object Key menu or exits the input mode of a continuously updating input field Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor 15 17 Setting up navigation 15 18 This reserved key Does this Del Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Shift End Delete Deletes all characters from the cursor position to the end of the line Home Shift End Delete Deletes the contents of the input field Ctrl C or Ctrl Ins Copies the selected items to the clipboard Ctrl X or Shift Del Cuts the selected items and places them in the clipboard Ctrl V or Shift Ins Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor position Home Positions the cursor at the beginning of the data entry field Ctrl Alt P Toggles the Project Manager Ctrl F4 or Closes the active window Ctrl Shift F4 Ctrl F6 Moves focus to the next window Ctrl Shift F6 Moves focus to the previous window I
2. SLC 5 timer counter and control files SLC 5 timer counter and control files bit member addressing optional syntax wy sas ko Sesanes vee ous SLC 5 timer counter and control files bit member addressing by bit address optional syntax SLC 5 timer counter and control files analog member addressing optional syntax a asc dasvea se we bee ees SLC 5 Enhanced I O files i635 ics aaiedlse tenons ns SLC 5 Enhanced status files sus ea esis ewe ea a ve SLC 5 Enhanced binary integer float ASCII and string tiles OF aac er patie ata nears A S SLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files bit member addressing optional syntax SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files bit member addressing by bit address optional syntax SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files analog member addressing optional syntax SoftLogix 5 addressing sy ntaX 5 ccc uuienaced enn scangenes SoftLogix 5 I O and status files s 165 aloes dover bees SoftLogix 5 binary BCD integer long integer ASCII float and string tiles 33 icae tai etter eelans SoftLogix 5 binary files optional syntax SoftLogix 5 timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files D 22 21 Contents Mnemonic tables 0
3. o Pepe ee Orion U O O K A o QU 0 erii Ethernet RSView32 PLC 3 DH 117 a J PLC 5 DH 4 RS PLC 5 DH DH 310 A 1785 KA DH 10 E 11 Glossary Acknowledge bit A bit in the programmable controller that is set when an alarm is acknowledged The acknowledge bit is monitored by all RSView32 stations so when the bit is set by one RSView32 station all other stations then acknowledge the alarms associated with that bit ActiveX object A software component supplied independently of RSView32 that provides features that RSView32 can access using the object s properties events and methods ActiveX objects are sometimes known as ActiveX controls OLE custom controls or OCXs Configured in the Graphic Display editor See also Event Method and Property Activity log An RSView32 component that records system activity and stores it in log files Useful for tracking operator activity diagnosing problems or tracking system load Configured in the Activity Log Setup editor Advanced object A type of graphic object These objects are created in the Graphic Display editor some can also be created as separate project components through the Project Manager Alarm fault An RSView32 generated message that results from improperly configured alarm thresholds G 1 m Glossary Alarm monitoring The process by which a tag receives data compares this data to alarm limits and reacts t
4. 006 A 3 Precedence seria pea iraia te Pee a Bt otih eta ieee A 4 Using the command litie lt icv Ast aaieremsies weve ahead A 5 Using the Command Wizatdei i435 Getchnds eee tens Fees A 5 Building a command string evn cee poiiis ny aietew a spars A 6 Appendix B System Tags Alaris AE E Casa Wipe eal EE B 1 Communications 0 cece cece ee eee ee eee eens B 2 Graphicsi aain hha aie tu E e EE B 4 TIe e a a a e a N a A E aT A B 4 EET AE E EE E SN A B 5 BNS EEE EEE E EAA T E E As B 7 Windows memory resources 4 sic duv ecw ee hie vade days B 7 19 Contents 20 Appendix C Differences Between RSView32 and ControlView Importing ControlView projects 00 eee ee eee Activity lOp en eo oaen KEE aE E AREE E cerned ent SNS ar a a dol a EA E O a a E EEA Alarm banner and alarm status display Alim GS Koroi aE E cases Mane E OS Alarorsuminary Stores sep eae RE ORR E R Commands csr hea eaa aeaa iaaa EAA a aN ED aS Obsolete commands o lt h0 1 00hstnes ote sasha tee Renamed commands ots ecu oe hues ca cntceed ae bus Data log rate tars nate eal oitea A Na a inh aie OES inde Derived tags 3144 ccehot eh asteng pias ta iar eeedes 4 EVENTS attacks Crea We Reinet Caw hile sa Comba E A E Global keves ae Pots oma petals oer Pane Graphics pean ae bs Meee wa E E eee aw SCAN classes ier hae ahaha teal E eddie t ances SLC addressing syntax cu dreustewea wy ncelewe ka peaeigrmnutanss Tag catal
5. Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range AD Done Digital AE Error Digital CO Continuous Digital DATAI Reserved Internal Use Analog 0 51 DLEN Done Length Analog DN Synchronization Done Digita EN Enable Digita ER Synchronization Error Digita ERR Error Code Analog EW Enable Waiting Digita NR No Response Digita RLEN Request Length Analog ST Start Transmission Digita TO Time Out Digita D 25 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers Block transfer mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type CO Continue Digita DLEN Done Length Analog DN Done Digita ELEM Element Number Analog EN Enable Digita ER Error Digita EW Enable Waiting Digita FILE File Number Analog NR No Response Digita RGS Rack Group Slot Analog RLEN Requested Length Analog RW Read Writes Digital ST Start Digital TO Time Out Digital Token data mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type LO Low Analog HI High Analog SFC status mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type DN Done Digita ER Step Error Digita FS Forced Scan Digita LS Last Scan Digita OV Timer Overflow Digita PRE Preset Analog SA Scan Active Digita TIM Active Time Analog Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices This appendix describes local station addressing remote station addressing Local station addressing The following table lists vali
6. Range To use the minimum and maximum values for the first tag in the expression clear the Specify check box To specify a minimum and maximum value that is different than the first tag s enter values in the Min and Max fields Direction Select Vertical or Horizontal 5 Click OK 11 54 Creating graphic displays Button tool Creating buttons Use the Button tool to create buttons that work like standard Windows buttons You can attach RSView32 commands to the buttons so they trigger actions when pressed and released You can apply visibility color horizontal and vertical slider horizontal and vertical position width and height animation to the button To create a button 1 Click the Button tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw a button about the size you want 3 Release the mouse button Button Configuration x General Action Up Appearance Down Appearance Style C Recessed Raised Raised C Beveled Beveled eo Index i Capture cursor M Highlight Cancel Help 4 Fill in the fields in each tab to configure how you want the button to look and act as described in the sections that follow When finished click OK 11 55 Creating graphic displays _ 11 56 General 1 In the General tab click a button style 3D Recessed and Raised styles can be used only for rectangular shaped buttons The Beveled style supports rectangular and polygonal shapes I
7. A 52 RTDataServerOn Quiet NetDDE The RSView32 OPC or DDE server is also known as the realtime data server This command runs the RSView32 realtime data server allowing OPC and DDE client applications to read but not write tag values To enable writes use the RITDataWriteEnable command Quiet Makes RSView32 use the current Remote Users accessibility setting in the Windows Registry Without this parameter or if the setting is not configured correctly RSView32 displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the setting when you issue the command NetDDE Enables RSView32 as a NetDDE server to remote DDE clients If the realtime data server is already running this parameter is ignored RTData WriteDisable Quiet NetDDE Disables writes by external Windows applications running OPC or DDE so these applications cannot change tag values in RSView32 The RSView32 OPC or DDE server is also known as the realtime data server If the RSView32 realtime data server is not running that is if the RTDataServerOn command has not been run RTWriteDisable also starts the RSView32 realtime data server Quiet Makes RSView32 use the current Remote Users accessibility setting in the Windows Registry Without this parameter or if the setting is not configured correctly RSView32 displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the setting when you issue the command NetDDE Enables RSView32 as a NetDDE server to re
8. Select the directory and file to open Click Open If the Convert Object dialog box appears click Yes to convert the object to a native RSView32 object or click No to leave the object in its original format Converting imported objects to RSView32 native objects Converting imported objects to native objects offers the following advantages graphic files are smaller objects are groups of objects rather than a single object This means you can edit the individual parts of the object including attaching animation to individual parts Bitmaps consume Windows resources so when using bitmaps follow these guidelines Use device dependent bitmaps Device dependent bitmaps bmp files display faster than display independent bitmaps dib files because the RSView32 Graphic Display editor is optimized for device dependent bitmaps Also you can in place edit device dependent bitmaps using the Microsoft Paint program Creating graphic displays Avoid unnecessary color depth Create bitmaps in the lowest color depth possible The more colors you use the more memory that is consumed 16 color bitmaps consume 4 bits per pixel 1 2 byte per pixel 256 color bitmaps consume 8 bits per pixel 1 byte per pixel 24 bit bitmaps consume 24 bits per pixel 3 bytes per pixel If possible use 16 color bitmaps To change a higher resolution bitmap to 16 colors open the bitmap in the Microsoft Paint program and save the
9. A 54 SendKeys lt keystring gt Sends the specified keystrokes to the active window lt keystring gt A list of keys The quotes must be included The following syntax rules apply Use braces to enclose special keys such as F3 or Enter for lt 3 example Enter sends Enter Use to send a control key For example A F2 sends Ctrl F2 Use to send a shift key For example F3 sends Shift F3 Use to send an alt key For example A sends Alt A Special keys can be in upper and or lower case letters You can type any of the following to represent the special keys on the keyboard Backspace BkSp BS Insert End Left Enter PgDn Escape Esc PgUp Delete Del PrtSc Down Right F1 to F12 Tab Home Up amp Set V lt tag_name gt lt value gt Writes a value to a tag Waele if anode has been disabled the Set command changes the value in the value table but not in the programmable controller amp Forces the command to be executed asynchronously which makes the command faster RSView32 commands V Performs a read immediately after the write to verify that the value was altered in the programmable controller or server This parameter is useful if the network is in poor condition or susceptible to noise interference If the verification fails the error message is logged to the activity log activity bar
10. 2 In the Object Keys dialog box type the tag name in the Current Tag field for each valve object Type the tag name here a oo At runtime the operator can select any valve object and press F2 to open the valve and F3 to close it 12 48 Animating graphic objects Example 2 Opening object specific Help Imagine you have a graphic display containing various graphic objects that represent plant floor equipment If something goes wrong with a piece of equipment you want operators to be able to select the appropriate object and display a Help file that suggests steps for correcting the situation 1 In the Display Keys dialog box assign a display key In the Press Action field type Help tag Fam Fe Open vale F3 oun vaha 2 In the Object Keys dialog box type the appropriate help file name in the Current Tag field for each equipment object 12 49 Animating graphic objects Type the name of the help file here 12 50 Se a Le Beri aah to At runtime when an operator selects any equipment object and presses F4 the help file for that piece of equipment is displayed Example 3 Opening an object specific alarm summary Imagine you want to have alarm information available for a specific machine If something goes wrong and causes an alarm you want the operator to be able to display an alarm summary for that machine 1 Create an alarm summary that uses a fi
11. RSView32 commands DataLogOn DataLogPath DataLog RenamefFile DataLogOn lt file gt Starts data logging for the specified model lt file gt The name of a data log model without a file extension To have data logging automatically start when a project starts open the Startup editor click the Data Logging check box and specify a file DataLogPath lt file gt Opens the Data Log Path editor You can use the editor to change the primary and secondary paths for dBASE IV data log models and the backup path for ODBC data log models You cannot change the ODBC database using the Data Log Path editor lt file gt The name of a data log model without a file extension DataLogRenameFile lt file gt lt LogFileIDString gt Changes the log file identifier string that is used as part of the file name for dBASE IV log files and ODBC backup files that use long file names The change affects the current logging session only including the current set of log files lt file gt The name of a data log model without a file extension lt LogFileID The log file identifier string up to 20 characters String gt A 25 RSView32 commands DataLogSnapshot DataLog SwitchBack DDEExecute A 26 DataLogSnapshot lt parameter gt Logs one snapshot of data to the data log file for the specified model or all models lt file gt The name of the data log model without a file extension Logs a snapshot of d
12. TERMINATE A7 RETURN gt gt i Macro Sheet A Sheet2 A Sheet A Sheet A ul af 16 27 Sharing data with other Windows applications Sending DDEEXecute commands to other applications 16 28 You can use RSView32 to send DDEExecute commands to other applications However RSView32 does not accept DDEExecute commands from other applications To send commands to RSView32 from other applications use the RSView32 Object Model with a programming language such as Visual Basic For more information about using the RSView32 Object Model see Help 1 Run the application to which the command is being sent 2 Issue the DDEExecute lt application gt lt topic gt lt command gt command You can issue this command from the command line or from another RSView32 component For details about this command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Example Sending a command to RSLinx The following example sends the Who_Active command to RSLinx application name rslinx DDEExecute rslinx _ Drivers Who_Active Drivers must be preceded by two underscores When this command runs the default RSWho window is displayed Using networks With RSView32 on a network you can share project components among multiple workstations during development and runtime share data logged by one workstation use OPC to share tag values among multiple workstations Sharing project compone
13. To add an alarm to a tag select this check For each analog and digital tag that will be monitored for alarms specify the alarm conditions in any of the following ways by configuring alarm tags in the Tag Database editor For more information about using the Tag Database editor to configure alarms see this section by importing tags into the tag database using the Database Import amp Export Wizard For more information about using the Database Import amp Export Wizard see page 4 25 by using the RSView32 Object Model with VBA For more information about using the RSView32 Object Model see Help To open the Tag Database editor 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Tag Database editor by doing one of the following double click the Tag Database icon right click the Tag Database icon and then click Show box When a tag has an alarm an X appears in this column l anA ider giia liider in anmai Hopa eenn eE mpi Divider happen le empty Ho par ern el Sa Hopper omorgency sholdows wakes bas boon baqeerned Happen Alem sir ual Diugh kapper t tell Hopa prius glr Dough bopper ic lew Configuring alarms When can configure an alarm for a tag You can configure an alarm for a tag at the time you create the tag or later To configure an alarm for an existing tag select the tag in the Tag Database spreadsheet and then click the Alarm check box Click the Al
14. 2 In the Command field type a command or macro you want users who are assigned this code to have access to Ensure you include the Login and Logout commands and assign them the security code 3 In the Security Code field select a code for the command or macro 4 If you like type a descriptive remark in the Description field 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each command and macro 6 Save the configuration by choosing Close Preventing access to the Security Godes and User Accounts editors Both the Security Codes editor and the User Accounts editor have commands that can be used at runtime to open these editors The Security command opens the Security Codes editor and the Account command opens the User Accounts editor Be sure to secure the Security and Account commands in the Security Codes editor to prevent users from accessing these editors at runtime If users open the editors they can edit any information Also be sure to restrict access to the ProjectShow command as it allows access to these editors For additional information see Securing the Project Manager on page 10 18 Adding security Using strict security When strict security is on the system checks the security codes of commands and macros no matter where they are issued from When strict security is off the system checks the security codes of commands and macros only when they are issued from the command line When strict security is on R
15. 2 To disable the event clear the Enabled check box When the event file runs this disabled event will not be evaluated 3 In the Description field type a brief description to document the event s function This description is for your information only it doesn t appear anywhere else 4 In the Expression area create an expression to specify the conditions that will trigger the action For more information on expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions 5 Click Accept 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to create more events Use the Next button to move to a new record in the spreadsheet You can edit events during development or when you run the project using RSView32 Works 1 Open the event file you want to edit 2 Use the Prev and Next buttons to move among events Make the required changes 3 Save the changes If you change the event file while running the project the changes won t take effect until you stop running the file and then restart it Configuring events Starting and stopping event processing There are many ways to start and stop event processing Choose the way that works best for your project For a complete list of RSView32 commands and their command syntax see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Ways to start event processing In the Startup editor select the Event Detector check box and specify an event file In the Macro editor create a startup or login macro t
16. 6 Click OK 7 Reboot your computer With user level access control enabled all users will still be able to log in and log out of your project but you will not be able to change the user list and synchronization of the RSView32 user list with the Windows NT user list will fail You will also not be able to change users passwords When you load a project with the Windows NT security option enabled on a computer running Windows 9x the project opens with the DEFAULT user logged in With Windows NT the project opens with the current user logged in Adding security To disable the Windows NT security option after moving your project to Windows 9x 1 On the Windows 9x computer in the Project Manager double click the System folder and then double click User Accounts 2 On the Setup menu click NT Security options 3 Clear the checkbox Use NT User Accounts as Source for RSView32 User Accounts 4 Create or modify user accounts using the standard RSView32 method For details about creating user accounts see page 10 13 Login and logout macros Each person with a user account can have a login and logout macro Any macro file can be a login or logout macro and the file can contain any RSView32 command For example a login macro could contain a command to bring up a graphic display for an area of the plant A logout macro could contain commands to close all active screens and redefine sensitive keys For more i
17. a description of how you tried to solve the problem Working with projects This chapter describes files and components adding renaming removing and deleting components printing from editors What is a project A project consists of a folder on your hard disk that contains at a minimum the following items project file rsv tag folder comprf communications profile folder cache folder The rsv file contains general project information such as a list of project components and their directory locations and version numbers By default all project components are located locally in folders under the project folder but they can also be located in other directories or on other computers 1 1 Working with projects Project files The following table lists the RSView32 folders and the types of files they contain Folder Contents File extension s Project name RSView32 project file system files PSV and the folders described below System files User accounts act Security command list sec Project name Actlog Activity log files dbf Project name Almlog Alarm log files dbf Project name Als Alarm summary files cals Project name Cab ActiveX control setup files cab Project name Cache RSView32 internal files ctl dat idx Project name Comprf Internal information on channels csv ctl nodes and scan classes Project name Diglog Dat
18. 1 tag2 AND tag3 1 2 tagl gt 1 1 The expression evaluates to 1 true NOT tagi AND tag2 gt tag3 2 is evaluated in this sequence 1 NOT tagl 0 2 0 AND tag2 0 3 tag3 2 100 4 0 gt 100 0 The expression evaluates to 0 false Creating expressions if then else If then else expressions carry out an action conditionally or branch actions depending on the statements in the expression The if then else statements enable the expression to perform different actions in different situations and to repeat activities until a condition changes To build conditional expressions use the relational operators and the logical operators The if then else structure is if statement then valuel else value2 If the statement is true then the expression returns value if the statement is false then the expression returns value2 Keep in mind that the statement is a mathematical equation and true means a non zero value and false means zero The if then else structure is illustrated below al true false LA value2 value v e i 14 23 Creating expressions Nested if then else structure It is common to nest an if then else structure inside the then or gt si else part of an if then else structure Example 1 Nested if then else This expression if statement1 then value1 else if statement2 then value2 else value3 has this interpretation true v
19. 2 Click Duplicate Folder on the Edit menu or click the Duplicate Tag Folder button on the toolbar Duplicate F older Ea From Hopperl To H opper2 3 In the To field type the new folder name 4 Click OK Creating tags Delete Folder Deleting a folder 1 Select one or more folders in the hierarchy 2 Click Delete Folder on the Edit menu or click the Delete Folder button on the toolbar Using the spreadsheet Insert Row Use the spreadsheet to view tags Use the query box or folder hierarchy to select the tags you want to view Moving through the spreadsheet To scroll through the spreadsheet rows do one of the following use the Prev or Next buttons in the form area use the up arrow and down arrow keys use the scroll bars on the spreadsheet To select a row click anywhere in the row or click the row number Resizing columns and rows To resize a column or row 1 Place the cursor over the division between the column or row in the top or side border until it changes to a double arrow 2 Drag the column or row to the required size Adding a tag To add a tag do one of the following click the New button in the forms area This inserts a new row above the highlighted row click Insert Row on the Edit menu or click the Insert Row button on the toolbar This inserts a new row above the highlighted row 4 11 Creating tags Duplicate Delete 4 12 Duplicati
20. Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Bit member mnemonic see mnemonic tables starting on page D 23 Example C77 99 OV SLC 5 timer counter and control files bit member addressing by bit address optional syntax Fnnn eee bb F File type T Timer C Counter R Control D 13 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers 0 14 nnn optional File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control eee Element number 0 255 decimal bb Bit number Timer 13 15 Counter 10 15 Control 8 11 13 15 Example T87 133 14 SLC 5 timer counter and control files analog member addressing optional syntax Fnnn eee o bb F File type T Timer C Counter R Control nnn optional File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication
21. Example Less specific time parameters Following are valid examples of time parameters 17 00 Means any day at 5 00 pm a cc 30 Means any hour on the half hour cc mon 17 Means 5 00 pm each Monday 14 117 Creating expressions 14 18 The interval parameter has this format lt number gt lt units gt where lt units gt is one of mil millisecond sec second min minute hou hour day day wee week mon month yea year Examples Time and interval functions TIME sun aug 18 1997 14 30 Returns 1 true if it is exactly 2 30 pm and 0 seconds on Sunday Aug 18 1997 otherwise returns 0 false AFTER_TIME sun aug 18 1997 14 30 Returns 1 the first time the expression is evaluated after 2 30 pm on Sunday Aug 18 1997 BEFORE_TIME aug 18 1997 Returns 1 true the first time the expression is evaluated before Aug 18 1997 Creating expressions INTERVAL 1 min Returns 1 true if a minute has elapsed since the expression last returned a 1 tag1 gt 500 and INTERVAL 30 sec Returns 1 true when tag1 gt 500 on some 30 second interval since the event file started running It does not mean 30 seconds after tag1 gt 500 File functions The following built in functions check if a file exists and check the amount of free disk space The file parameter is the DOS path name surrounded b
22. How to share components To share project components follow these steps 1 Create projects on each machine that will be accessing the shared components On each machine use the Project Paths dialog box to set up paths to common comp onents For detailed information about the Project Paths dialog box see Setting the project path on page 18 8 Example Data logging on one RSView32 station and displaying a historical trend on another station The following example outlines how to log data on one computer and display a historical trend on another computer using that data For this example Computer1 contains the remote data log model and Computer2 contains the trend object Computer1 and Computer2 must be on the same network 1 Configure a data log model call it LogModel on Computer1 LogModel s data log path can use a drive on Computer1 that Computer2 can map to or a common network drive that both Computer1 and Computer2 can map to for our purposes on a computer called NetworkComputer For this example we will use the common drive and path NetworkComputer RSVProj Datalog When logging LogModel data is written to this file NetworkComputer RSVProj Datalog LogModel filename dbf A file named LogModel dlg is also created in the same LogModel folder 17 3 Using networks 2 On Computer2 in the Trend Configuration dialog box select Historical and choose Remote for t
23. NodeSwitch lt node name gt lt station gt lt node name gt The name of the node that you want to change to another programmable controller address lt station gt For device nodes the physical address for the programmable controller you want to change to When you use the NodeSwitch command to change a node s address the change appears in the Node editor s spreadsheet If the Node editor is open when you use the command the change will not appear until you have refreshed the display by closing and re opening the editor You can also enable and disable nodes at runtime using the NodeEnable and NodeDisable commands For more information see Appendix A RSView32 commands Scanning for new tag values When your RSView32 project is running it must periodically update its tag values in the value table This is done by scanning For projects communicating through direct drivers values are updated by scanning the programmable controller address at the foreground and background scan rates specified by the scan class 2 15 Setting up direct driver communications RSView32 scan classes Any tag that communicates with Allen Bradley or SoftLogix 5 programmable controllers through direct drivers must be assigned to an RSView32 scan class Each tag can then be assigned different foreground and background scanning periods In this way you determine how often a tag value is updated A scan class has two scan periods t
24. ROCKWELL FES SOFTWARE iim RSView 32 Expand Your View User s Guide Doc ID 9399 2SE32UG Allen Bradley EEE DeQcE iin Rockwell Automation Bringing Together Leading Brands in Industrial Automation Contacting Rockwell Software Copyright Notice Trademark Notices Warranty Technical Support Telephone 440 646 7800 Technical Support Fax 440 646 7801 World Wide Web Support Library www5 software rockwell com 1999 Rockwell Software Inc a Rockwell Automation Company All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Portions copyrighted by the Allen Bradley Company LLC a Rockwell Automation Company This manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Software Inc Any reproduction and or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Software Inc is strictly prohibited Please refer to the license agreement for details VBA and DCOM Copyright 1996 1997 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved WINtelligent Series is a registered trademark The Rockwell Software logo RSAssistant RSBatch RSData RSEmulate 5 RSEmulate 500 RSGuardian RSHarmony RSKeys RSLinx RSLogix 5 RSLogix 500 RSPower RSPowerCFG RSPowerRUN RSServer32 RSServer RSServerToolkit RSSql RSToolbox RSTrainer RSTrend RSTune RSView32 RSView32 Resource Kit RSView RSWire A I Series Advanced Interface A I Series AdvanceDDE ControlGuardian ControlVi
25. Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices Remote Network Station Address Valid Entries DH ILrrr ss ll local bridge address 0 77 octal rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal ss station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or ILrss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal rss combined remote bridge address and 0 376 octal remote station address The address Il rss is an offlink address shortened by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter address that still points to the same node Example The following figure shows an RSView32 system connected to a DH network with a KT family card The local DH network is bridged to a remote DH network which is bridged to a second remote DH network The 1785 KA interface modules are used to bridge the networks The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are Station Address Valid Entries 14 14 220 7 220 21 7 310 21 or 7 321 Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices Remote DH 21 PLC 5 Remote DH PLC 3 Local DH 10 RSView8e with KT family Card DH and DH 485 networks bridged by a 1785 KA5 Only bridging from DH to DH 485 is supported The format of the stati
26. To include a pen in the legend leave the box checked To label the pen type a label such as a tag name or description If you do not type a label the pen s tag name appears in the legend If you use a tag placeholder in the Tag or Value field you can also type the tag placeholder here to insert the tag name in the legend at runtime m Legend LM Include in Legend 13 25 Configuring trends Ensuring realtime trends have data Realtime trends collect data only while the trend is displayed This means that a trend will not contain any data when it starts To ensure a trend contains data once it has started keep the trend updating in the background by loading it into the display cache Example Ensuring a realtime trend has data 1 Create a startup macro that includes this command Display Trend1 ZA where Trend1 is the name of the display containing the realtime trend and ZA is the parameter for loading the display into the display cache but not making it visible and continually updating the display even when it is not visible The display is loaded when you start the project and remains in the cache until you use the FlushCache command or stop running the project 2 When you want the realtime trend to become visible specify the following command Display Trend1 Trend1 will then be displayed in the foreground and will contain data 13 26 Configuring trends Comparing realtime and historic
27. fold tom WU m ce oi OS The list box displays the values and colors for each threshold To return to the default DisjeulnGakors ink Aiste econctsyc arok Eeit Tose Hap colors and thresholds click this button The parts of the list box Line color Fill color The boxes show the line and fill colors for each threshold If you select white as the line and the fill color the boxes will not be visible over the white background of the dialog box A box with two colors shows the colors Threshold value the object will alternate between when Threshold blinking 12 13 Animating graphic objects To configure color animation 1 Select the object 2 Click the Color tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the color 4 In the list box select a threshold A through P for which you will configure a value and colors You can change the default values and colors for thresholds A and B The other thresholds have no defaults 5 In the Value field type the threshold value When the expression 12 14 value reaches this threshold the object s color changes Enter threshold values in ascending order That is A must be lower than B and B must be lower than C and so on To delete a value for a threshold A P select the threshold and delete t
28. gt Trend Display Process Wide System Process Management Status Overview Summary Alarm Summar Process Process Process Monitoring 1 Monitoring 2 Monitoring 3 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Trend Display Trend Display Trend Display Methods for moving among displays To set up displays so operators can easily move among them you can create a keyboard based project create a mouse or touch screen based project You can use one or both of these methods in your project Although the methods look different to the operator they work similarly That is they all initiate RSView32 commands 15 2 Setting up navigation Commands for moving among displays To open close and switch between displays use these commands RSView32 Command Function Display Opens the specified graphic display If a display is already open and the display allows multiple running copies specified in the Display Settings dialog box in the Graphic Display editor this command will open another display and make it active If the display is already open but does not allow multiple running copies this command simply makes the display active If a display of type Replace overlaps any other display s when it opens the display s it overlaps will be closed Displays of type Overlay open on top of any other open displays without closing them Displays of type On Top will remain on top of any other open graphic displays Abort Us
29. i Artemi Severity i Des ki Then By E Aepoereriray Tag Nan j Di Daicanding By default alarm information is sorted first by date and time then by severity and finally by tag name This means that the alarms will be presented chronologically If two or more alarms have the same time and date these alarms are presented in order of severity If any alarms have the same time and date and the same severity they are then presented by tag name You can sort data that has been filtered 6 65 Configuring alarms Using alarm data with commands Use the Execute item in the Data menu to execute a command whether an RSView32 command an RSView32 macro or a VBA program and to append data items derived from the highlighted alarm to the command imni Cima Teer gt J Paaretos amp ayaa F dTa E grei F Yaa F ete F Tra E TaT G prse Parmin h por Alarm information is appended to the command in the same order in which the parameters appear in the dialog box Parameters are separated by a space unless you click Separate Parameters with commas am A space is not automatically appended to the end of the command text If you are using parameters and require a space between the end of the command macro or VBA program and the first parameter be sure to include the space with the command text Severity and value are shown only for alarms of type IntoAlarm For alarm types OutOfAlarm and IntoFaul
30. lt application gt The path and executable required to start the program RSView32 commands Class CommandLine ComStatus Examples The AppStart command AppStart c windows notepad c autoexec bat Opens Notepad and displays the autoexec bat file AppStart c Program Files Plus Microsoft Internet Iexplore exe Opens Internet Explorer Beep Runs a wave file to produce a sound from the computer speaker The sound is a wave file assigned to the Default Beep in the Windows Control Panel Channel Opens the Channel editor Class Opens the Scan Class editor CommandLine Opens the command line ComStatus Obsolete Use ComStatusOff or ComStatusOn A 21 RSView32 commands ComStatusOff Database DatabaseSync A 22 ComStatusOff Stops logging of communication errors ComStatusOn Starts logging of communication errors if RSView32 is set up to do SO To log communication errors ensure the Communications category is selected in the Activity Log Setup editor To have error logging automatically start when a project starts open the Startup editor and click the Communication Status check box Database Opens the Tag Database editor DatabaseSync Makes RSView32 convert the tag database into binary format the next time the project opens Use this command if you change the tag database that a project uses using the Project Paths dialog box after changing a node s data source or
31. s actual minimum and maximum values might be greater than those specified in the Tag Database editor If so you might want to specify the tag s actual minimum and maximum values when configuring an object On the other hand you might want to limit the range of values which you can also do by specifying minimum and maximum values yourself For example if you specify a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 100 the object will not react to values outside of this range So even if the expression results to 200 the object does not change from its At Maximum position If an expression uses more than one tag the first tag in the expression is used for the minimum and maximum values Animating graphic objects Defining a range of motion To define a range of motion for an object do one of the following move the objects in the Graphic Display editor This is called OSP Object Smart Path type values in the At Minimum and At Maximum fields All motion is defined in pixels Objects that do not have a range of motion Objects with visibility color and touch animation do not have a range of motion because these types of animation represent a change of state not a range Using OSP Object Smart Path With OSP you can easily set the range of motion for an object The following example shows how OSP works Example Using OSP to define the range of motion for horizontal slider animation To define a range of motion for a
32. 12 12 width 12 21 Application commands AppAbort A 20 AppActivate A 20 AppStart A 20 Applications Windows A 20 sharing data with 16 1 16 3 Arc graphic object 11 32 Arithmetic operators 14 9 Arrow graphic object 11 53 Asynchronous execution and the Equal command 14 6 A 8 and the Set command A 54 D l 4 Background scan period 2 16 2 17 Bar graphs importing from ControlView C 6 Beep command A 21 Bells for alarms 6 33 Bitwise operators AND amp 14 12 complement 14 12 exclusive OR 14 12 inclusive OR 14 12 left shift lt lt 14 12 right shift gt gt 14 12 Blinking colors 6 58 12 14 Block transfer mnemonics D 26 Built in functions file 14 19 math 14 20 tag 14 14 time 14 16 Buttons 11 55 highlight enabling or disabling 11 56 C C Toolkit C 8 Channel commands Channel A 21 DriverPrimary 2 10 A 34 DriverSecondary 2 10 A 34 DriverToggle 2 10 A 34 Channel editor 2 6 Channels 2 2 G 2 configuring 2 6 2 19 configuring nodes for 2 12 Circle graphic object 11 30 Class command A 21 Client G 2 See also DDE OPC Index Color in alarm summaries 6 58 in graphic displays 11 6 11 21 11 93 animating 6 10 12 13 in trends 13 19 13 37 COMM_ERR function 2 11 14 14 Command line using A 5 Command Wizard A 5 CommandLine command A 21 Commands 15 4 A 1 See also Individual command entries assigning security to 10 5 attaching to ActiveX events
33. 12 36 differences from ControlView C 3 in buttons 11 57 in events 9 1 logging execution of 8 12 placeholders in 15 8 A 3 precedence over macros A 4 startup and shutdown 11 22 using with alarms 6 13 Communications DDE configuring 3 1 devices 2 2 direct driver configuring 2 1 errors 2 11 14 14 logging 2 18 8 12 monitoring 2 18 B 2 OPC configuring 3 1 setting up without hardware or software 2 3 2 9 setting up without network 2 19 timeouts preventing 2 13 3 6 3 12 Communications commands ComStatusOff A 22 ComStatusOn A 22 DriverPrimary 2 10 A 34 DriverSecondary 2 10 A 34 DriverToggle 2 10 A 34 NodeDisable 2 15 3 14 A 43 NodeEnable 2 15 3 14 A 43 NodeSwitch 2 15 3 14 A 43 RTDataServerOff A 51 RTDataServerOn 16 24 17 6 A 52 RTDataWriteDisable A 52 RTDataWriteEnable 16 27 17 6 A 53 Components 1 3 17 1 Constants in expressions 14 9 Context menus 11 3 Control See Animation Control mnemonics D 23 ControlNet 2 7 G 2 Control View differences from RSView32 C 1 features no longer supported C 8 importing projects into RSView32 C 1 Counter mnemonics D 23 Crystal Reports 7 1 8 1 Ctrl key combinations disabling 10 18 18 5 Current Tag parameter 12 46 Current tag parameter 12 54 Data log files and third party software 7 1 bringing into Microsoft Excel 16 5 creating 7 28 deleting 7 33 maximum at runtime 7 1 naming 7 4 sharing at runtime 17
34. 16 28 A 26 NodeDisable 3 14 A 43 NodeEnable 3 14 A 43 NodeSwitch 3 14 A 43 RTDataServerOff A 51 RTDataServerOn 16 24 17 6 A 52 RTDataWriteDisable A 52 RTDataWriteEnable 16 27 17 6 A 53 DDE nodes assigning to tags 4 19 changing at runtime 3 14 A 43 creating 3 11 enabling and disabling 3 12 naming G 5 Data types for tags 4 15 Deadband for alarms 6 2 6 5 6 45 Database command A 22 Define command 15 12 A 28 Database Import amp Export Wizard 4 21 Derived tag commands 4 25 4 26 Derived A 29 DatabaseSync command A 22 DerivedOff 5 8 A 29 dBASE IV See dbf files DerivedOn 5 7 A 30 DCOM 17 5 Index Derived tags G 3 and cached displays 5 8 creating 5 5 creating expressions for 14 2 differences from ControlView C 5 editing 5 6 evaluation interval for 5 4 maximum files at runtime 5 2 maximum in a file 5 2 starting and stopping processing 5 7 18 7 Derived Tags editor 5 3 Device nodes 2 3 assigning to tags 4 18 changing at runtime 2 15 A 43 creating 2 12 enabling and disabling 2 13 naming G 5 station addressing for E 1 Device tags D 1 G 3 DH 2 7 E 1 G 3 DH 2 7 E 1 G 3 DH 485 2 7 E 1 G 3 Digital tags 4 2 G 3 alarms for 4 26 6 7 6 46 configuring 4 16 Direct drivers 2 2 backup 2 9 configuring RSLinx 2 5 None Loaded type 2 9 2 19 primary 2 9 secondary 2 9 selecting 2 5 setting up 2 3 setting up tags for 4 18 switching at runtime
35. 16 3 and activity logging 8 1 16 5 16 7 and alarm logging 6 8 16 5 16 9 and data logging 7 1 16 5 16 12 and DDE 3 12 and OPC 3 2 creating a pivot table 16 17 requesting data from RSView32 using 16 2 16 25 using to create tags 4 21 viewing log files in 16 7 Microsoft Query 7 16 16 3 displaying log data in 16 8 16 10 16 15 Microsoft SQL Server 7 8 Microsoft Visual Basic 3 2 6 8 Mnemonic tables block transfer D 26 control D 23 counter D 23 message D 25 PID D 24 SFC status D 26 timer D 23 token data D 26 Modicon devices 3 1 3 2 Modules KA E 2 E 6 E 9 RM E 2 E 6 E 9 Momentary Off button 11 57 Momentary On button 11 57 Monitor command A 41 Narrow dbf format data log files 16 12 NetDDE G 3 command parameter A 52 A 53 Networks See also OPC choosing 2 7 failure at runtime 2 10 sharing project components over 17 1 NextPosition command 12 43 A 42 NextWindow command A 43 Node commands Node A 43 NodeDisable 2 15 3 14 A 43 NodeEnable 2 15 3 14 A 43 NodeSwitch 2 15 3 14 A 43 Node editor 2 12 3 5 3 11 Nodes See DDE nodes Device nodes OPC nodes Non Allen Bradley devices 3 1 3 2 NT 4 0 Desktop Lock tool 10 18 18 5 NT user accounts moving to Windows 9x 10 16 Number format 18 12 Numeric display graphic object 11 49 Numeric input graphic object 11 42 11 46 and on screen keyboard 11 25 11 48 0 Object keys 15 5 G 6 creating 12 40 edit
36. 3 Create a node by filling in the following information Data Source Select DDE Server The Tag Database editor does not check addressing syntax for programmable controllers that communicate through a DDE server If the syntax is invalid an error will be generated at runtime 3 11 Setting up OPC and DDE communications 3 12 For details about the OPC Server data source see Creating an OPC node on page 3 5 For details about the Direct Driver data source see Chapter 2 Setting up direct driver communications Name Type a name of your choice to represent the DDE node The name can be up to 40 characters long and can have upper and lower case letters numbers dashes and underscores Spaces are not permitted Enabled Normally nodes are enabled allowing collection of values from the device However during setup or troubleshooting you might want to disable a node to prevent communication timeouts or invalid data When a node is disabled tag values can still be read and written but the values are read from and written to the value table instead of the device When a tag uses a disabled node at runtime the tag s state will change from valid to disabled A tag s state can be seen by viewing the tag in the tag monitor To disable nodes clear the Enabled check box You can also enable and disable nodes at runtime using the NodeEnable and NodeDisable commands For more information see Appendix A RSView32
37. Alarm Summary editor 6 52 Alarm system tags 6 11 B 1 Alarm thresholds 6 2 6 4 6 41 AlarmEvent command A 14 AlarmLogRemark command 6 38 A 17 using with Execute button in alarm summary 6 67 AlarmLogSendToODBC command A 18 AlarmPrintOff command 6 68 A 19 AlarmPrintOn command 6 68 A 19 Alarms acknowledging 6 12 6 16 adding to tags 4 26 6 2 assigning sounds to 6 33 configuring 6 4 for analog tags 6 40 for digital tags 6 46 using Tag Database editor 6 2 6 21 6 39 expressions in 6 15 14 2 identifying 6 14 6 44 6 49 suppressing 6 12 6 69 viewing suppressed alarms 6 69 Allen Bradley devices 2 1 2 3 ALM_ alarm functions 6 15 6 16 14 14 Alt key combinations disabling 18 5 Analog tags 4 2 G 2 alarms for 4 26 6 2 6 39 configuring 4 13 3 Index Animation 12 1 12 7 12 60 checking 12 57 defining range of motion for 12 9 for ActiveX objects 12 32 for grouped objects 11 83 12 56 setting minimum and maximum values for 12 8 testing 12 6 using Current Tag parameter 12 46 using display keys 12 52 using object keys 12 40 12 43 using Object Smart Path 12 6 12 9 using tags and placeholders 12 6 viewing 12 58 Animation dialog box 12 4 Animation types 12 2 color 6 10 12 13 fill 12 18 height 12 23 horizontal position 12 19 horizontal slider 12 28 OLE verb 10 10 12 31 rotation 12 24 touch 12 27 vertical position 12 20 vertical slider 12 30 visibility 6 10
38. Analog CA Control Action Digital CL Cascaded Loop Digital CT Cascaded Type Digital DATAI Reserved Internal Use Analog 0 13 DB Deadband Analog DO Derivative Of Digital DVDB Deviation Alarm Deadband Analog DVN Deviation Alarm Analog DVNA Deviation High Alarm Digita DVP Deviation Alarm Analog DVPA Deviation Low Alarm Digita EN Enable Digita ERR Error Analog EWD Error Within Deadband Digita INI PID Initialized Digita KD Derivative Time Analog KI Integral Gain Analog KP Proportional Gain Analog MAXI Input Range Maximum Analog MAXO Output Limit High Analog MAXS Setpoint Maximum Analog MINI Input Range Minimum Analog MINO Output Limit Low Analog MINS Setpoint Minimum Analog MO Mode Digital OLH Output Limit High Digital OLL Output Limit Low Digital OUT Output Analog PE PID Equation Digital PV Process Variable Analog Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers PID mnemonics continued Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range PVDB Process Variable Alarm Deadband Analog PVH Process Variable Alarm High Analog PVHA Process Variable High Alarm Digital PVL Process Variable Alarm Low Analog PVLA Process Variable Low Alarm Digital PVT Process Variable Tracking Digital SO Set Output Analog SP Setpoint Analog SPOR Setpoint Out of Range Digital SWM Software A M Mode Digital TIE Tieback Analog UPD Update Time Analog
39. CT centered in the top half CB centered in the bottom half CL centered on the left side CR centered on the right side CC centered in the screen Xnnn nnn pixels from the left edge Ynnn nnn pixels down from the top Examples The Display command Display Sample The first time the graphic display called Sample is opened it will be positioned and sized as specified in its Display Settings dialog box When the display is closed its size and position will be saved so the next time it is opened it will be the same size and position as when it was last closed Display Picture PNames CB Positions the graphic display called Picture in the bottom half of the screen using the file called Names to replace tag placeholders with tag names Display Picture H300 w400 CC Makes the graphic display called Picture 300 pixels high and 400 pixels wide and positions the display in the center of the screen RSView32 commands Example Replacing tag placeholders in a graphic display If a graphic display called Canning uses three tag placeholders and you want to substitute tags for canning corn you would type Display Canning Tcorn off corn on corn weight Placeholder 1 is replaced by the corn off tag placeholder 2 is replaced by the corn on tag and placeholder 3 is replaced by the corn weight tag Download Writes the value in the selected input field of the active graphic display to the programmable controller or
40. Dota Source Device Channel Station ar Server Timema OPC Server Type Update Rael Server Computer Manal 1 fiva DEM Serve Hiline GA Senator biti Hem nite LEL ASE TM EE a L PE Once you have created the node assign it to a tag in the Tag Database editor The address tells RSView32 where in the node to get the data Address N7 12 The PLC 5 programmable controller called PLC_HVACt has been previously set up as a 17 11 Using networks 17 12 DDE OPC topic in RSLinx N7 12 is the address in the PLC If you don t include the access path when configuring the node you can enter the tag s address as PLC_HVAC1 N7 12 The figure below shows how the tag looks in the Tag editor i Tag Database olx Name nt_Temperatu Type J Security Close Description i E Minimum 40 Scale 1 Units Fahrenheit Next Maximum fino Offset fo Data Type D efault i ew Tag Data Source Type Device Memory Help Node Name PLANT_BOILERS a Ades N7142 0 z Summary of steps Running your project Once you have developed your project you are ready to run it The steps involved in running a project are specifying startup settings if necessary moving the project to another drive such as a network drive or to another computer configuring communications and communication hardware if you moved the project running the project 18 1 Running your project Specifying
41. Fama Fane ca gine hep cage raang i Filey i reap hen fcheres happern bol 2 Under Start New Files click a button to specify when you want to have new files created See the topics below for information on the different times Creating files periodically Click Periodic and then click a time period A new file is created after the specified interval has elapsed For this period The new file is created Hourly Approximately on the hour Daily Each day approximately at midnight Weekly Each Sunday approximately at midnight Monthly On the first day of each month approximately at midnight 7 29 Configuring data logging 7 30 Creating files at specified times Click At Specified Times and then type a time or list of times when you want data to be logged to a new file Start a new line for each new time and allow at least five minutes between start times Use any of the following to specify time Time Format Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Sat Date 1 31 Specifying 31 means that months that do not have 31 days will not have new log files Hour OO to 23 Minute 00 to 59 You can combine hours and minutes with a day or date Example Creating a new file To have a new file start every Wednesday at 2 00 am and every Friday at 2 00 pm type the following start times Stan Times one per lime Wod 7 Fri 14 00 Configuring data logging Creating files when a parti
42. Fua med bol check fen se daisi afer che panaan bane oa ales thes rainane rianda or Flee a anha fhe happern bol 71 33 Configuring data logging 1 34 2 If you are using dBASE IV storage format under Delete Oldest Files select one or both check boxes and type a number to specify when to delete the dbf log file sets If you select both check boxes files sets are deleted after the maximum time or after the maximum number of files is reached whichever happens first If you do not want files deleted leave the check boxes under Delete Oldest Files blank After Maximum Time File sets are deleted after the maximum time has expired For example if two days is the specified time file sets are deleted at midnight of the third day so you always have the two previous days data and the current day s data After Maximum Files The oldest log file set is deleted after the specified maximum has been reached The files currently being logged to are not included in this number For example if you specify 10 you will have a maximum of 11 data log file sets at any time 10 old ones and the current set When a new set is started the oldest file set is deleted These options apply to dbf files on the primary path only not the files on the secondary path RSView32 deletes files on the secondary path only when the DataLogMergeToPrimary command is issued Configuring data logging When you have finished specif
43. I iHipp er Hgh j hen 1 sham ii pirap l Abd iigh tee 7 how d Hoppel pilre GSA Hoppar ihosi hun i Description d hepper High then 20 belte H Hopper iwidhi then 2 leise hi Chopper A Dough hopper level ff Diablos High then Shes H Hvi TUE High Hen Aiek tf Dieider ial Dhider hopper kea Divider Meel Hipper TW Gale fe Hopper ica es dale poskr Lorveskinuni LomeAMZD 4 1008 Lonvesil SE Leet coment Doh arl ThoughiMSt 1000 Doughill So Total doh car Tyee Do not create derived tags that depend on the results of other derived tags At runtime tags are not processed sequentially and the time it takes to process a tag can vary To create a derived tag 1 In the Tag Name field specify the name of the tag that will hold the derived tag value This tag can be analog digital or string and can have device or memory as the data source The tag name is also the name of the derived tag file Teva Limit the use of tags with device as their data source If the system is continuously writing the derived value to the device it can flood the communication channel with traffic Also if writing occurs too often the buffer for the communication channel can overflow and generate communication errors 5 5 m Creating derived tags 2 In the Description field type a brief description of the derived tag s function This description is for your information only it does not appear anywhere else 3
44. Marker The marker is not over a point in the data so No Value appears in the legend When the data reaches the marker the date time and value of the data at that point is displayed in the legend 14411 es 14461 14 50 11 By default the marker is at the right most edge of the trend and might not be visible To move the marker position the cursor on the trend and then click The marker moves to the point you clicked To hide the marker click the vertical axis Changing the marker s color By default the marker is black which means it is not visible on a trend with a black background The marker uses the same color as the text for the time axis labels if used and for the time and date in the legend so changing the marker color also changes this text color To change the marker color 1 Select the trend 2 Right click point to Attributes and then click Font 3 In the Font dialog box select a new color 13 39 Configuring trends Editing a trend 13 40 You can edit the physical characteristics of the trend object as well as the trend configuration Editing the trend object You can edit a trend object as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it attach animation to it and so on For detailed information about working with graphic objects see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays Editing the trend configuration 1 Open the Trend dialog box by doing one
45. Opens the VBA integrated development environment IDE so you can edit a VBA program program Any Sub statement in the ThisProject module If you _name don t specify a program name the IDE opens at the first program If you specify a program name the IDE opens with the cursor at the specified Sub statement The program name is not case sensitive VbaExec lt program_name gt parameters Runs a VBA program lt program The name of the program as specified in the Sub _name gt statement parameters Any argument that a particular program requires Separate arguments must be separated with commas Alarms System tags System tags are preconfigured tags created by RSView32 Use system tags for read only applications in your project The following tags display alarm information Tag Name Type Displays information about system AlarmBanner String The most recent most severe alarm If an alarm of an equal or higher severity occurs it replaces the first alarm even if the previous alarm has not been acknowledged system AlarmMostRecentDate String The date of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentLabel String The threshold label of the tag of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentSeverity Analog The severity of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecent lagDesc String The description of the tag of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostR
46. Select all the objects you want grouped 2 Click Group on the Arrange menu or click the Group button on the toolbar Group The handles around each object are replaced by a set of handles around the group R N 4 N Select the objects Group them Deleting a group deletes all individual objects in the group Changing the color or fill pattern of the group changes the color or fill pattern of all individual objects in the group _ 11 84 Creating graphic displays To ungroup objects 1 Select the objects you want to ungroup 2 Click Ungroup on the Arrange menu or click the Ungroup button on the toolbar Ungroup The handles around the group are replaced with handles around each object O O ae Select the group Ungroup it Ungrouping deletes any animation attached to the group because the group no longer exists However animation attached to the individual objects that were in the group remains active 11 85 Creating graphic displays 11 86 Performing group editing With group editing you can edit the objects in a group as you would individual objects This allows you to edit a group of objects without breaking the group which is particularly useful when you have animation attached to groups To use group editing double click on the grouped object A rope like border appears around the group Double click inside this box to access another group or to access the individual objec
47. Startup editor to run this macro when your project starts For more information about the Startup editor see Chapter 18 Running your project 15 11 Setting up navigation Creating symbols 15 12 If you have long commands or commands with parameters that are hard to remember or easy to mix up you can rename those commands with a single word called a symbol Symbols can be used anywhere a command can be used in a field that requires an action in a macro or on the command line You can define symbols in a macro or on the command line However symbols are mainly an operational convenience when using the system from the command line To define a symbol gt On the command line or in a macro type Define lt symbol gt lt string gt lt symbol gt the abbreviated command without spaces lt string gt an existing command with or without parameters It can contain spaces and other symbols Example The Define command Define Show Display Overview The Define command id The symbol The string In this example the command Display Overview is replaced with the word Show Setting up navigation Important guidelines When creating symbols keep the following in mind RSView32 does not check for security access on symbol names Therefore be sure to put security on the underlying RSView32 command For more information see Chapter 10 Adding security A symbol and a macro should not ha
48. Tag name The tag name if the name is 10 characters or less Otherwise Tag index contains the index number for the tag The tag name that corresponds to the number is listed in the tag name file Status D if a node is disabled E if a communication error occurred while RSView2 was trying to acquire the tag value S if the tag value is stale that is if the tag value was acquired but has not been updated U if the tag is uninitialized Blank if communications are working properly Tag values The analog digital or string values for the tag Tag name 8 1999 02 05 0001 Paper T agname DBF OF x B G D E 1 Tagname TTagIndex TagType TagDataTyp 2 PAPER ANA DRIVE DM _TORG 0 2 D 3 PAPER ANA DRIVE DM _FPM 1 2 oja l4 4 PPh 1999 02 05 0001 Paper Tagname l4 HT This column Contains Tagname The tag name TTaglndex The index number assigned to the tag name Taglype The tag type 2 analog tag 3 digital tag 4 string tag TagDataTyp The tag data type O long 1 float 2 string 16 14 Sharing data with other Windows applications Data log ODBC format ODBC format log data uses up to three tables The illustrations show ODBC tables that have been opened in Microsoft Query For more information see The ODBC storage format on page 7 8 Floating point and string data Log tables for floating and string data are the same except one contains analog and digital tag data and the other
49. allowing collection of values from the programmable controller However during setup or troubleshooting you might want to disable a node to prevent communication timeouts or invalid data When a node is disabled tag values can still be read and written but the values are read from and written to the value table instead of the programmable controller When a tag uses a disabled node at runtime the tag s state will change from valid to disabled A tag s state can be seen by viewing the tag in the tag monitor To disable nodes clear the Enabled check box You can also enable and disable nodes at runtime using the NodeEnable and NodeDisable commands For more information see Appendix A RSView32 commands Channel Select the channel number on which this node resides Station Type the station address of the programmable controller For addressing syntax see Appendix E Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices 2 13 Setting up direct driver communications 2 14 If RSLinx 2 0 or later is installed and running on your computer click the button next to the Station field to open the RSWho window that displays all active PLC stations for the selected channel When you select a station from the RSWho window the Station and Type fields are filled in automatically RSView32 substitutes PLC 5 Enhanced for all PLC 5 series device types Change the entry in the Type field to PLC 5 if you are
50. and the operator can modify or add to the contents of the Text parameter before it is logged to the alarm log file If the tag name T parameter is specified the prompt dialog box will display the tag name at runtime but the operator cannot change the tag name Associates an alarm severity with the remark The severity is an integer from 1 to 8 This value is shown in the Severity column of the alarm log file If the remark is logged to a printer the alarm severity determines which printer will print the remark If both the P parameter and the Sn parameter are specified the prompt dialog box will display the alarm severity at runtime but the operator cannot change the severity A 17 RSView32 commands AlarmLogSend ToODBC A 18 R Ttagname Logs the remark to a printer as well as to the alarm log file If the alarm severity is not specified Sn parameter the printer for Severity 1 is used If no printer is assigned to the specified severity the alarm log remark is not printed The string that is logged in the Tagname column of the alarm log file This string can be a tag name the name of a user generated alarm event or any other string that matches the syntax of a tag name You can use this parameter to correlate remarks with specific alarm transactions for generating reports later AlarmLogSendToODBC lt data_source gt lt target_table_name gt Wn Uuser_name Ppassword Exports alarm
51. by being dragged with the mouse the slider s value is written to Tag Not Bindable When the tag value changes the property value changes However the reverse is not true For example if the slider object described above has a property Value that is Not Bindable Tag1 s value will not change when the slider s knob is changed but the slider s knob will change when Tag1 s value changes If a property is Not Bindable and read only it does not appear on the Animation tab of the ActiveX Property Panel To attach an RSView32 tag to a property 1 Right click the object then click ActiveX Property Panel on the context menu To open the property panel you can also right click the object to open the context menu point to Animation ActiveX Control and then click Properties 12 35 Animating graphic objects 12 36 2 Click the Animation tab if it is not already selected Button Start_ExhFan1 Label Click for help on the selected property Properties Animation i ize BackColor BackStyle BorderColor BorderStyle Caption Enabled ForeColor MousePointer PicturePosition aaa amp Drag splitter bar to see more properties Click for help on the property panel The middle column indicates whether the property updates the tag or the tag updates the property A left arrow indicates the tag updates the property A right arrow indicates the property updates the tag A
52. click Next Step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard appears here E pou acter date coed Cik ian Rea data Fink hava beer retsarvecd E w j e f u j a e Click Get Data This brings up Microsoft Query and the Select Data Source dialog box This dialog box displays a list of the available data sources If the ODBC data source you want to use in this case dBASE Files is not listed you can add it by clicking the Browse button and selecting a data source from the Program Files Common Files Odbc Data Sources directory Deae Dues Hea Lake Source eect reste E M jepe p iad bo cama quer 3 Click dBASE Files not sharable and then click OK Sharing data with other Windows applications The Add Tables dialog box appears oo Ei Ss co Fe ml Tabip See cd Fim of bpp Bice ces Fines cll r Chia 4 In the Look in field choose a project directory Then choose the directory containing the data log files If you used the default logging path the files will be in C Proj1 Dlglog Model name where Proj1 is the name of your project and Model name is the name of the data log model 5 Under Table Name choose the file with a t before the dbf extension For example 990208at dbf The t stands for tag name It is important to select this file first because it supplies the tag names for the other files PP 8 The dBASE IV ODBC driver will not read files with long file names
53. logged activities from dBASE IV dbf format to an ODBC database If the table in the database to which you are attempting to export data is not ODBC compliant the export will fail If an ODBC compliant table does not exist RSView32 will try to create it RSView32 supports the following ODBC compliant databases Microsoft Access Sybase SQL Server Oracle and Microsoft SQL Server When you export data to an ODBC table RSView32 keeps track of the data that was exported in a control file Activity exp This is located in the log path where the dbf files are stored The next time you export data only the newest data will be exported If the control file is deleted all the activity log data in the dbf file will be exported when you issue the export command If you have set up file management to delete the oldest files when a new set is started and you are exporting data to an ODBC database make sure you export the data before the oldest files are deleted Configuring activity logging Example Exporting activity log files to ODBC once a day To export the contents of the activity log files to an ODBC database once every day create an event file that specifies when and where to export the data ActivityLogSendToODBC exports only the records added to the activity log files since the last export 1 If required using the ODBC Administrator set up an ODBC data source name For more information about setting up an ODBC da
54. map tags to event parameters Which objects can have animation All graphic objects can have animation attached to them Groups of objects can also have animation attached You can attach as many types of animation to an object as you like For example apply both width and height animation to an object to give it the appearance of moving into or out of the display as it shrinks and grows 12 2 Animating graphic objects Using the Animation dialog box To attach animation use the Animation dialog box To open the Animation dialog box do one of the following select an object and click Animation on the View menu select an object click Animation on the menu bar to open the Animation menu and then click a menu item right click an object to open the context menu select Animation and then click a menu item Test Bun Show Grid Snap On Grid Settings View Entire Graphic Zoom In Zoom Out v Toolbar v Status Bar v Drawing Toolbox v ActiveX Toolbox Alignment Toolbar Fill Style Toolbar Line Color Palette Fill Color Palette Peek On Peek Settings ActiveX Property Panel Visibility Color Fill Horizontal Position Vertical Position Width Height Rotation Touch Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider Object Keys Display Keys OLE Verb Animation ActiveX Control gt To attach key animation use the Object Key and Display Key di
55. on the channel each controller has its own buffer If a buffer overflows at runtime a communication error is generated If this happens reduce the number of messages The Messages field applies to both the primary and secondary communication drivers Setting up direct driver communications Primary and Secondary Communication Drivers The primary driver is the one your system will use most of the time By default this driver is the active driver The secondary driver is a backup Primary and secondary drivers must use the same network type Tyee Do not select a secondary communication driver for TCP IP or TCP IP Bridge channels To create communications redundancy use a second Ethernet card and configure each card uniquely in Windows Then use the NodeSwitch command at runtime to change the IP number if communication errors are detected To specify a driver select the appropriate driver from the list This list contains the drivers installed and running in RSLinx that are valid for the selected network type To configure communications without the appropriate hardware or software installed select None Loaded as the driver To test your project without the appropriate hardware installed see Developing your project without a communication network on page 2 19 For details about configuring drivers see Configuring RSLinx drivers on page 2 5 Active Driver The active driver can be Primary Secondar
56. or printer using the Tag Write category Specify where to send Tag Write errors using the Categories tab of the Activity Log Setup editor lt tag_name gt The name of a tag lt value gt One of the following For analog tags Numeric value within the range specified by the tag s minimum and maximum values Percentage of the total min max range The formula is value min percentage 100 max min Tag name of another analog or digital tag For digital tags Numeric value of 0 or 1 Tag s on or off label specified in the tag database Setting a digital tag to its on label writes the value 1 and setting the tag to its off label writes the value 0 Name of another analog or digital tag If it is an analog tag with a value that is not 0 the value 1 is written to the digital tag otherwise the value 0 is written For string tags String enclosed in quotation marks The string can contain any character and can include spaces Name of another string tag A 55 RSView32 commands SetFocus A 56 Examples The Set command Set Hopperl1 Flow 10 Hopper1 Flow is a tag This command writes the value 10 to the programmable controller or server Set Hopperl Level 50 Hopper1 Level is a tag with the minimum specified as 100 and the maximum defined as 900 This command writes the value 400 to the programmable controller or server Set Valve 23 open Valve 23 is a digital tag with
57. parameter The change to the logging rate applies during the current logging session only When you stop and restart logging RSView32 uses the logging rate you specified in the the data log model Configuring data logging Changing the log file identifier string You can change the log file identifier string that is used as part of the file name for dBASE IV log files that use long file names The log file identifier string is also used in the names of ODBC backup files that use long file names To change the string use the DataLogRenameFile lt file gt lt LogFileI String gt command lt file gt is the name of the data log model lt LogFileIDString gt is the log file identifier string up to 20 characters The change to the log file identifier string applies during the current logging session only When you stop and restart logging RSView32 uses the log file identifier string you specified in the the data log model Displaying data in a trend The data for historical trends comes from data log files You can set up trends to display data from one file set or from all file sets When data comes from one file set it is called file based trending When you configure trending you can specify exactly which file you want to see When data comes from all the file sets it is referred to as historical trending For more information about trends see Chapter 13 Configuring trends 7 45 Configuring data logging S
58. s function Form Shows the command syntax Angle brackets lt gt indicate a required parameter Square brackets indicate an optional parameter 4 Click Next to add parameters or click Finish If a command has parameters the Next button will be active If a command doesn t have parameters only the Finish button will be active 5 Choose parameters Fam Drp aa eat 10 LE EAL DAE Fie Panes Evian Foiapin a E Dipy in Background Dibibi Erie Tep AU Woboed Dats Enip Finca AY Cananhde Reg Lai i Cache Deplp E A Cacha Dusia Alsager Updaing r r a F Praa Tage gt m e o Poe Eleven Foudre EH Dv ib ma eii Tisa namei Hann Peters Min 7 Window Pain M H Feighi FF oa aidh po FF g e po F di Top E r Paran fi D Ain Dipli biii D Mi Da had 6 When the command is complete click Finish A 7 m RSView32 commands D A 8 amp lt tag_name gt lt expression gt Writes the value resulting from an expression to a tag 8 lt tag_name gt lt expression gt Forces the command to be executed asynchronously which makes the command faster The name of the tag that will store the result of the expression A value string tag name or a more complex expression Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces when you use them in an expression This distinguishes the characters in the tag name from the charac
59. so commands such as DownloadAll or RecipeSave will not work in a shutdown macro If you use the Always Updating option with the Cache After Displaying option the startup command is executed when the display is loaded into the cache The shutdown command is executed only when the cache is flushed using the FlushCache command or when you stop the project If you do not use the Always Updating option the startup and shutdown commands work as described in the previous paragraph For a complete list of RSView32 commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help _ 11 22 Creating graphic displays Specifying colors for input fields input Farid Colora When Field ig Poot Se ected Text Bill E Wihan Field is selected Teed Fil LJ Input fields are created with the Numeric Input String Input and Recipe drawing tools At runtime operators can use these fields to read values from or write values to the programmable controller Click the colored boxes to open the color palette and then choose colors Text color is the color of the text in the input field Fill color is the background color of the input field When choosing colors for the input fields be sure to choose colors that will stand out from the background color of the display Choose different colors for when the field is selected so the operator can tell that the field is highlighted Specifying the behavior of interactive objects Bahaso of ininr
60. that is being switched from its primary to secondary driver DriverToggle lt channel gt Switches from the current driver to the one not being used on the specified channel lt channel gt The number of the channel 1 through 4 that is being switched from one driver to another Setting up direct driver communications Switching drivers automatically To switch drivers automatically create an event in the Events editor In the Action field of the Events editor type a driver command as the action that will be triggered when an expression results to true In the Expression field create an expression that will trigger the action Example An event for switching drivers In the Events editor use the following Action DriverToggle 1 Expression comm_err tag1 where tag1 is a tag that is configured with a node on channel 1 When the expression evaluates to true the action is triggered Switching drivers manually To switch drivers manually operators must have a way to issue a driver command Possible methods are creating a button and specifying one of the driver commands as the press action When the operator activates the button the driver on the specified channel is switched displaying a command line When the operator enters a driver command on the command line the driver on the specified channel is switched 2 11 Setting up direct driver communications Creating a node A node allows you
61. timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers eee Element number 0 255 decimal o Word offset 1 2 decimal bb optional Bit number 0 15 decimal Example R44 72 1 14 SLC 5 Enhanced 1 0 files F ss www bb F File type I Input O Output ss I O slot number 0 30 decimal www optional I O word number expansion 0 255 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal When input slot is 0 0 23 decimal Example 22 254 13 Waele Writing to the output files of an SLC 5 is not recommended However if you do be sure the SLC is not in RUN mode If it is in RUN mode the write will fail and an error message will be logged to the activity log file SLC 5 Enhanced status files F ww bb F File type S Status ww Word address SLC 5 03 0 68 decimal SLC 5 04 0 96 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example 15 6 D 15 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers D 16 SLC 5 Enhanced binary integer float ASCII and string files Fnnn www bb F nnn optional www bb optional Example F8 129 File type B Binary N Integer F Floating Point A ASCII ST String File number Binary 3 9 255 deci
62. uses the log rate you set up here Logging on change On change logging is used to log only tags whose values have changed when the change occurs You can use the dBASE IV narrow dBASE IV wide or ODBC storage format for on change logging For on change logging to dBASE IV files the dBASE IV narrow file format is most efficient for storing the data The dBASE IV wide format is not recommended because records are logged for all tags whether their values have changed or not making the wide format inefficient 1 Click On Change 1 37 Configuring data logging 7 38 In the Change Percentage field type the percent the tag value has to change in order to trigger logging The percentage is based on the tag s minimum and maximum values as configured in the Tag Database editor Only the tags that change by the specified percentage are logged Zero means all changes are logged In the Heartbeat field type a time and then click a time unit to specify how often tag values will be logged even if no change has occurred If you do not want to use the heartbeat type 0 The heartbeat ensures that the data in the log file is current The heartbeat is also a good way to ensure that data logging is working and acquiring valid data Logging on demand Logging on demand means that data is logged for a model only when the DataLogSnapshot command is issued When the DataLogSnapshot command is executed tag values for
63. 000 3 y 1 000 2 y 1 1 Thresholds must be configured in ascending order time 4 42217 These alarms are triggered only if Generate alarms when approaching normal operating range is selected in the Alarm Setup dialog box The illustration shows the changing values of a tag monitoring a motor s revolutions per minute rpm With the threshold settings illustrated the motor must run between 2 000 rpm and 3 000 rpm or an alarm is triggered In the illustration an X shows when the tag goes into alarm and an O shows when the tag goes out of alarm Configuring alarms D 6 4 If the motor speed It triggers an alarm of this severity exceeds 3 000 rpm 8 exceeds 4 000 rpm 4 exceeds 5 000 rpm 1 falls below 5 000 rpm 4 falls below 4 000 rpm 8 falls below 2 000 rpm 8 falls below 1 000 rpm 6 falls below 1 rpm 4 These alarms are triggered only if Generate alarms when approaching normal operating range is selected in the Alarm Setup dialog box You can specify whether or not to generate alarms when an analog tag value is moving back to normal operating range and recrosses the alarm trigger threshold If you choose to generate alarms when the motor is moving back towards normal operating range an alarm would be triggered when the motor speed falls below 5 000 rpm and 4 000 rpm and when it rises above 1 rpm and 1 000 rpm If you don t want to generate these alarms mak
64. 15 Example T87 133 14 SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files analog member addressing optional syntax Fnnn eee o bb F File type T Timer C Counter R Control nnn optional File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control D 19 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers SoftLogix 5 addressing syntax eee o bb optional Element number 0 255 decimal Word offset 1 2 decimal Bit number 0 15 decimal Example R44 72 1 14 The following section provides addressing syntax for SoftLogix 5 controllers SoftLogix 5 1 0 and status files F eee bb F eee bb optional File type I Input O Output S Status Element number For I O files 0 277 octal For status files O 511 decimal Bit offset within word For I O files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 167 11 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers SoftLogix 5 binary BCD integer long integer ASCII float and string files Fnnnn eeee bb F nnnn eeee bb optional File type B Binary D Decimal BCD N Integer L Long integer A ASCII F Floating poin
65. 2 5 Selecting a driver in RSView32 os uiexsa pe vares acess 2 5 Configuring channels oic20d icine cheeks she taeh yet ee 2 6 Changing the channel configuration 2 10 Switching communication drivers at runtime 2 10 Commands for switching drivers 004 2 10 Switching drivers automatically 000 2 11 Switching drivers manually 2 66 cceds Goss tena eeas 2 11 Creating a nodenn ar ea a A bas T E Rea 2 12 Changing node information at runtime 04 2 15 Scanning for new tag values ceiusocs cy iedee uci cieegieneralis 2 15 RSView32 scan classes nuuennnnnu eunan 2 16 Guidelines for configuring scan classes 2 16 Monitoring communications 0 s eee eee eee 2 18 Developing your project without a communication network 2 19 Chapter 3 Setting Up OPC and DDE Communications Overview of OPC communications 00000 3 3 Overview of DDE communications icc ico ev cect cew ea eas 3 4 Summary Of Steps ns os Anstey aan male hinds one EW eG 3 5 Creating an OPC Nodes inns eta et alo pee ire ates 3 5 Creating 4 DDE node ise creiere eventa sa seesaw ease 3 11 Changing node information at runtime 66 3 14 Scanning for new tag values scy sinks one chk SRE kas 3 15 Contents Chapter 4 Creating Tags Tags and the tag database toy cae swasstee da ea ee aw awa Jagty pes sree ne ets cy Alien N agenda Data SOULCES onee e ee a e teats
66. Excel to read a tag value Microsoft Excel is the DDE client application RSView32 is the server application To read the value for Tag1 from an RSView32 project named Sample type the following in the spreadsheet cell RTDatalSample Tag1 Getting tag values from servers 16 26 When RSView32 requests tag values from other Windows applications such as RSServer or another RSView32 project RSView32 is the OPC or DDE client and the application providing the tag values is the OPC or DDE server Setting up RSView32 as the client To request tag values from a server you must set up an OPC or DDE node and then use that node name when creating a tag For details about creating an OPC node see page 3 5 For details about creating a DDE node see page 3 11 For details about creating tags see Chapter 4 Creating tags Sharing data with other Windows applications Enabling RSView32 for tag writes By default other applications cannot write to tags in RSView32 To enable writing to tags you have to issue the RTDataWriteEnable command from the command line or another RSView32 component Example Writing to a tag The following example shows a Microsoft Excel macro that will write to the Process Ingred1 SP tag in the Samples project Microsoft Excel is the DDE client and RSView32 is the DDE server oi Pokemcr xls Iof x Processilngred1 SP Value to write into tag 75 INITIATE RTData B3 POKE A7 B4 B5
67. For details about assigning reserved keys as object display or global keys see 15 18 Click OK The key you added is displayed in the Key field If you specified a modifier the first letter of that modifier is also displayed If you create a label in the next step it is also listed in this field The information in the Key field is used in the key list which appears at runtime so operators know which keys are associated with an object and a display For details about the key list see Viewing the key list at runtime on page 12 55 In the label field if desired type a label for the key In the Press Action field and if desired in the Release Action field type an RSView32 command or a macro The command or macro is the action that will occur when the key is pressed or released Separate multiple commands or macros with a semi colon or place them on separate lines If you want the command to perform an action on a tag include a tag name or the Current Tag parameter The Current Tag parameter is a placeholder for a tag name or any character string For details about the Current Tag parameter see Using the Current Tag parameter on page 12 46 If you want an action to repeat while the key is held down type the RSView32 command or macro name in the Repeat Action field Animating graphic objects The repeat action repeats at the rate specified in the Keyboard properties of the Windows C
68. Graphic Display editor open Display Settings by doing one of the following click Display Settings on the Edit menu right click the mouse button and then click Display Settings Select a security code 2 Select a security code 3 Click OK 10 9 Adding security Assigning security to an OLE object Security is assigned to a graphic object with OLE verb animation in the Graphic Display editor Mee Once an OLE object is activated there is no security within the associated application Therefore the only way to secure the application is to assign security to the OLE object 1 Open the Graphic Display editor 2 Select the OLE object you would like to secure 3 Open the Animation dialog box by doing one of the following click an item on the Animation menu click Animation on the View menu click Animation on the context menu and click an item 4 Click the OLE Verb tab Aram n lcm Bl iti C m Taga zj Espre maior OLE werk Select a security code Di Pe e Pee 5 In the OLE Verb field select the verb you want to secure 6 Select a security code 7 Click Apply 10 10 Adding security Assigning security to a tag i Tag Database Security is assigned to tags in the Tag Database editor By assigning security you can restrict write access to a tag so a user cannot change the tag s value 1 Open the Tag Database editor 2 Select the tag that re
69. If it is outside the object will appear as if it is moving in an arc 12 25 Animating graphic objects Rotate Tool 12 26 Using the Default Center Points J F T 774 A To use the default center points select a button Why use the default center points If you set the center of rotation with the default center points the object will rotate around the same point even if the object is resized For example the top middle corner will always be the center of rotation no matter what size the object is Specifying Coordinates oe sza The default coordinates 0 0 are the center of the object all coordinate values are relative to the center To specify coordinates do one of the following using the mouse place the crosshair at the desired center of rotation and select the button beside the coordinates field type values in the coordinates field and then select the button beside the field Set the range of motion for the object To set the minimum do one of the following and then select the At Minimum check box click the Rotate tool and visually set the degree of rotation type the desired degree of rotation this value is relative to the object s current position For clockwise rotation use a positive number For counterclockwise rotation use a negative number To set the maximum do one of the following and then select the At Maximum check box click the Rotate tool and visually
70. If you see the error message Invalid string or buffer length after selecting a file copy the file to a path that does not contain long file names for example c data and rename it using a short 8 3 character file name If you rename the file without copying it Trend objects will not be able to find the data in the file 16 19 Sharing data with other Windows applications 16 20 6 Click Add The table appears as a field list at the top of the Query window 7 Choose one other file either floating point data f or string data lt gt S 8 Click Add The new field list appears beside the first field list Joining tables and selecting data For narrow format dbf files the tag name file contains tag names and index numbers Each tag you create in the tag database is assigned an index number The tag index number is stored in the floating point and string files the tag name is not stored When retrieving data from log files you will likely want the tag names not the tag index Therefore you have to retrieve data from more than one table To do this you have to join tables When you join tables you connect one or more fields in the tables These fields must have the same name and must contain the same type of data 1 Join the TTagindex field in the tag name field list to the Tagindex field in the other list When you drag TTagindex from one 990208at 990208af table to the TagDataT
71. Loaded to display type of network the list of you are using T Secondary Communication Driver ae for the selected network type When you select a Active Driver Primary Secondary None network type these fields OK Cancel Hel become active _ 0K Cancel SE Setting up direct driver communications 3 Select a channel and fill in the following information Network Type Using the following table as a guide select a network type To Select Communicate with programmable controllers on a ControlNet ControlNet network Communicate with programmable controllers on local or remote DH DH networks Communicate with programmable controllers on local or remote DH DH networks or Communicate with SLC controllers on remote DH 485 networks or Connect to Channel O of an Enhanced PLC Communicate with SLC controllers on local DH 485 networks DH 485 or Connect to an SLC with an RS 232 port Communicate with Ethernet programmable controllers directly TCP IP connected to the TCP IP network or Communicate with SoftLogix 5 controllers or Communicate with SLC 5 05 controllers Communicate with programmable controllers through the TCP IP Bridge Ethernet interface of a Pyramid Integrator or RSLinx Gateway Not use a channel None Loaded or Clear a channel configuration 2 7 m Setting up direct driver communications To set a configured
72. Microsoft Excel Data log files Use the following procedure to bring the information from dBASE IV log files into Microsoft Excel 1 Open Microsoft Excel 2 On the File menu click Open 3 In the List Files of Type field click dBase Files dbf 4 In the Look in field choose a project directory and the subdirectory containing the log files If you used the default logging paths when setting up logging the files will be in the following subdirectories substitute the drive and project name you used for C and Example activity log files C Example Actlog alarm log file C Example Almlog data log file C Example Dlglog Model name ia e a mi eE aal Ej EAS T Caca hal ins ct wehercad i ch rme Jah eck F Hea Dri a er Dec L EE T Fired Hen tat reich Fene rio Rae i l w Fim af pw iia F ext 3 Liami ia Abba bored When this box is checked RSView32 can write data to the log file while the log file is open in Excel 16 5 m Sharing data with other Windows applications 16 6 SU eee cl Ae viaj 5 Select a dbf file 6 To allow RSView32 to continue writing data to the log file while the file is open in Microsoft Excel select the Read Only check box If the Read Only check box is not selected RSView32 cannot write to the log file If the Error category is selected in the Activity Log Setup editor an error is reported in the activity ba
73. ODBC format stores data in up to three tables similar to narrow format Tag table optional stores tag names in an index so they can be referenced using a 2 or 4 byte numeric field rather than a 40 byte character field in the float and string tables Float table stores analog and digital tag values String table optional stores string tag values For a detailed description of the tables contents see page 16 15 ODBC backup files are stored as binary files with the extension obf You cannot view the contents of the obf files How ODBC tables are named The ODBC tables are created with the default names TagTable FloatTable and StringTable However you can edit these names before creating the tables or specify different tables to use in the Data Log Setup dialog box If you specify a backup path for an ODBC model RSView32 names the backup log files as described for narrow dbf files If you use long file names you can specify a log file identifier string for the backup file names Using an existing ODBC data source You can log data to an existing ODBC data source but its tables must contain fields that are formatted for the RSView32 data log There are two ways to prepare tables for data logging to an existing database set up the RSView32 data log fields in the existing ODBC tables before setting up your data log model automatically or manually create new tables in the existing database in the Data Log
74. Once the RSView32 station is set up it must periodically update its value table This is done by scanning its nodes Setting up direct driver communication to programmable controllers The instructions below summarize the steps for connecting to Allen Bradley or SoftLogix 5 devices Wem YOU Cannot connect to an Allen Bradley PLC 5 250 or ControlLogix 5550 using direct drivers To connect to these types of programmable controllers use OPC or DDE based communications as described in Chapter 3 Setting up OPC and DDE communications Setting up communications without hardware or software You can set up communications in RSView32 even if you do not have one or both of the following RSLinx drivers installed the appropriate communications hardware installed To do so follow the steps below but skip step 1 and start with step 2 To test your project without the appropriate hardware installed see Developing your project without a communication network on page 2 19 Setting up direct driver communications Summary of steps Follow the steps below to set up direct driver communication with Allen Bradley or SoftLogix 5 programmable controllers 1 Start RSLinx Configure and load the appropriate communication driver 2 Start RSView32 and create or open a project 3 In the Channel editor select a channel and assign the appropriate network type to it In the Primary Communication driver field assign a
75. Property Panel and the ActiveX Control commands on the Animation context menu For details see Configuring ActiveX control on page 12 32 You can also create an ActiveX object using the ActiveX Toolbox as described in Using the ActiveX Toolbox on page 11 75 Using the ActiveX Property Panel Use the ActiveX Property Panel to set up or modify properties for an ActiveX object With multiple ActiveX objects selected you can simultaneously set up or modify the properties they have in common attach control to object properties For details see Configuring ActiveX control on page 12 32 For information about the Name property see Naming an ActiveX object on page 12 34 To set up or modify properties 1 Right click the object then click ActiveX Property Panel on the context menu To open the property panel you can also use the View menu on the Graphic Display editor s menu bar Click View then click ActiveX Property Panel 11 73 Creating graphic displays 2 Click the Properties tab if it is not already selected Property Panel Click for help on the ActiveMovieControl3 ActiveMovieControl i selected property Properties Animation AboutB ox Custom Name ActiveMovieControl3 AddRef 0 AllowChangeDisplayMod True AllowHideControls True AllowHideDisplay True Appearance 1 amy3D AutoRewind True AutoStart False Balance 10001 Drag splitter bar
76. RSView32 commands or see Help For details about macros see Creating macros on page 15 7 8 pag Using expressions Many types of animation require an expression You can use expressions involving tag values constants mathematical equations and if then else program logic for animation A tag name or tag placeholder can be included as part of an expression or it can stand alone as the entire expression This chapter does not provide detailed information on creating expressions If you are not familiar with the expression language see Chapter 14 Creating expressions before you begin 12 7 Animating graphic objects Setting minimum and maximum values 12 8 Many types of animation require a minimum and maximum range for an expression These values determine the start and end points for a range of motion When configuring animation do one of the following use the tag s minimum and maximum values this is the default so you do not have to do anything The values are taken from the Minimum and Maximum fields in the Tag Database editor specify minimum and maximum values by selecting the Specify check box and then typing minimum and maximum values Why specify minimum and maximum values The minimum and maximum values specified for a tag in the Tag Database editor limit the range of values that can be written to the programmable controller but do not limit the values that are read Therefore a tag
77. Setup dialog box Configuring data logging To use the tables in an existing ODBC data source 1 Add fields for the data log data to the tables in the ODBC database See the example on page 7 16 for information about adding fields to an existing table Data loge ODBC format on page 16 15 describes the order and type of fields needed to log data to an ODBC database Edit the tables as described in the documentation for the ODBC relational database you are using Set up your data log model as described in Setting up a model on page 7 11 Specify the existing ODBC database as the ODBC Data Source and specify the tables you edited To create new tables in an existing ODBC data source 1 Specify the name of the existing ODBC data source in the ODBC Data Source field of the Data Log Setup editor See Setting up a model on page 7 11 for more information Click Create Tables RSView32 automatically creates new data log tables in the existing database You can also create tables manually as described in the example on page 7 16 Set up the rest of your data log model as described in Setting up a model on page 7 11 Creating a new ODBC data source You can also create a new ODBC data source when you set up your data log model as described in Setting up a model on page 7 11 RSView32 can create the ODBC tables automatically or you can create the tables manually See page 7 16 for
78. Stops ach loggimng Berts acy lagging CENENE thn Ane dh ore l Logic end Cantal T E boxes drag this bar to the left or right Hap Cancel ties gt I 2 In the Command Categories list click a folder To see the commands and macros you last used click this folder J Most Recently Used To see all commands and macros click this folder All Commands and Macros To see the commands that can be used for a particular part of the system click one of these folders System Graphics Alarms H E Data Log Logic and Control RSView32 commands To change the order in which commands are listed click the column title To see all the information for a command use the scroll bar As you add parameters they are listed here 3 Select a command by clicking it in the Commands field Commands Abort Account Acknowledge Acknowledgeall Activity Activity off ActivityOn Writes the value resulting from an expressi Starts activity logging Closes the specified item Abort Opens the User Accounts editor Accou Acknowledges an alarm or a group of alar Ackno Acknowledges all outstanding alarms Ackno Opens the Activity Log Setup editor Activity Stops activity logging Actiwity Activity Command Name Lists the commands in the open folder Command Description Describes the command
79. To run the Identify command you can highlight the alarm in the alarm summary and then click the Identify button or type the Identify command on a command line When you use the Identify command the command or macro runs whether or not the tag is in alarm For detailed information about the Identify command and other RSView32 commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help For detailed information about macros see Chapter 15 Setting up navigation Configuring alarms Alarm expressions When a tag goes into alarm certain information about the alarm is recorded in the value table along with the tag s value Using expressions information about alarms can be retrieved on a tag by tag basis For example if the system detects that a tag is in alarm it sets an internal alarm bit and resets the bit when the tag is out of alarm The following expression checks if a tag is in alarm ALM_IN_ALARM tag where tag is the name of the tag you want to check for alarms When a tag is in alarm the expression result is 1 When a tag is out of alarm the expression result is 0 One way to use this expression is to animate the visibility of a graphic object in a display When the tag goes into alarm the ALM_IN_ALARM expression is set to 1 making the object visible This is an effective way to draw the operator s attention to the alarm The following expression checks if an alarm has ever been acknowledged ALM_ACK ta
80. To supply a tag name do one of the following type a tag name You can type a tag name that does not exist in the tag database When you click OK a dialog box appears prompting you to create the tag click the Tags button and select a tag from the Tags list Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces when you use them in an expression This distinguishes the characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression Also use braces when using wildcards or to represent multiple tags in an expression This character Does this Matches any single character Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Use this wildcard by itself to display all the tags in the tag database For detailed information about tags see Chapter 4 Creating tags Using tag placeholders instead of tag names The Graphic Display editor accepts tag placeholders instead of tag names Placeholders allow you to use the same display with a variety of tags You can use tag placeholders in the same way you use tag names A tag placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 For detailed information about placeholders see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays Creating expressions Constants A constant can have any of the following formats integer 123 floating point 123 45 scientific notation 1 2345E2 string con
81. When tag1 goes into alarm the DataLogSnapshot lt file gt command runs All tags in the model will then be logged not just the tag in alarm 7 39 Configuring data logging 7 40 Combining logging You can combine periodic or on change logging with on demand logging This enables data to be captured at particular times as well as when a particular event occurs To combine logging 1 In the Data Log Setup editor choose Periodic or On Change as the log trigger Type the DataLogSnapshot lt file gt command or the DataLogSnapshot command anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be used Providing operators with a way to log on demand At runtime operators might need to take a snapshot of data To do this they need a way to issue the DataLogSnapshot lt file gt command or the DataLogSnapshot command Possible methods include creating a button object and using the command as the press action operators can then press the button to take a data log snapshot creating a display key or global key and using the command as the press action operators can then press a key to take a data log snapshot providing a command line operators can then type the command directly on the command line Configuring data logging Choosing the data to log For narrow format dBASE IV models and ODBC models the model can contain up to 10 000 tags For wide format dBASE IV models the model can contain up to 100
82. You can also enable and disable nodes at runtime using the NodeEnable and NodeDisable commands For more information see Appendix A RSView32 commands Setting up OPC and DDE communications Server Do one of the following a Click beside the Name field and select a server from the list of registered servers RSView32 fills in the remaining Server fields To use another RSView32 station as your OPC server select RSI RSView32OPCTagServer Select Remote as the Type and specify the Server Computer Name or Address as described next Fill in the Server fields manually You can fill in the fields for an OPC server that has not been installed yet and install the server later Name Type the name of the OPC server that RSView32 will communicate with typically in this format lt Vendor gt lt DriverName gt lt Version gt If the OPC server is RSView32 or RSLinx you don t need to specify a version number For RSLinx you don t need to specify the vendor name either Type Select the OPC server type In Process if the server is a dll file Local if the server is an exe file running on the same computer as the OPC client Remote if the server is an exe file running on a different computer connected to the OPC client computer via a network 3 7 m Setting up OPC and DDE communications Server Computer Name or Address If the OPC server is remote type the server computer s name or address or
83. _ te Mers rk dadek iriri iDersun Pawwork Library ierann l Use Tused Connection Orione i 5 In the ODBC SQL Server Setup dialog box enter the data source name Bakery_Stats and a description 7 17 Configuring data logging 6 In the Server field select Athena the name of the server where the SQL database is located Click Options Hiriak Libary Ea SS F Uka Tresied Comedi bigin Tainha s Miage Loeswraganes pet hee Ja eis TF Garaia Sho red Frocedues for Proseved Malarneril Trarlebon Gone OFM ip ANS cheers 7 In the Database Name field type Bakery the name of the SQL database to log the data to 8 Deselect Generate Stored Procedure for Prepared Statement Click OK 9 In the Select Data Source dialog box select Bakery_Stats and click OK Note that you could also create the ODBC data source in the Windows Control Panel then select the data source in the ODBC Data Source field of the Data Log Setup editor 1 18 Configuring data logging To set up the ODBC data tables You must have access to the SQL Server to log in and create the tables 1 Double click Microsoft Query in the MSOffice directory and choose Table Definition from the File menu 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box specify the data source you just created and click Use Enter your login ID and password 3 Click New in the Select Table dialog box 4 Enter information to set up the fir
84. after changing a direct driver s device type To synchronize the tag database 1 On the command line type DatabaseSync and then press Enter 2 Close the project 3 Open the project The database will be synchronized as the project opens RSView32 commands DataLog DataLog ChangeRate DataLogMerge ToPrimary DataLog file Without the parameter opens the Data Log Setup editor With the parameter opens the specified data log file file The name of a data log model you want to edit in the Data Log Setup editor If you don t specify a file name the editor opens so you can create a new model file DataLogChangeRate lt file gt lt value gt unit Changes the periodic log rate The change affects the current logging session only and won t be retained if data logging is stopped and restarted lt file gt The name of a data log model without a file extension lt value gt The numeric portion of the time interval for the log rate For example if you want to log data every 20 seconds the value is 20 The value must be an integer from 1 to 64 000 unit The time unit of the log rate hundredths tenths seconds minutes hours or days If you omit the unit parameter the default is seconds DataLogMergeToPrimary lt parameter gt Moves data from the secondary or backup path to the primary path or ODBC database for a specified model or for all models that are currently running lt fil
85. an asterisk which means unlimited access If you leave it as an asterisk you have to list all RSView32 commands and macros you want to secure This is referred to as security by inclusion If you change the default to a letter you have to list only those commands you want users who are assigned this code to have access to This is referred to as security by exclusion Setting up security by inclusion Security by inclusion means all RSView32 commands and all macros requiring security are listed in the Security Codes editor 1 For Default leave the security code as 2 In the Command field type the command or macro you want to assign security to If you assign security to the Login and Logout commands be sure to give all users including Default access to these commands Otherwise users might be locked in or out of the system It is recommended that Login and Logout keep the security code 3 In the Security Code field select a code for the command or macro 4 If you like type a descriptive remark in the Description field 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each command and macro 6 Save the configuration by choosing Close 10 5 Adding security 10 6 Setting up security by exclusion Security by exclusion means only the RSView32 commands and macros you want users who are assigned this code to have access to are listed in the Security Codes editor 1 For Default change the security code to any letter
86. an RSView32 OPC server for reading and WOUNE sa ete See eed wa Eh a ita abit Lilet aor Configuring the RSView32 OPC client application Connecting to RSLinx Gateway as a remote OPC server Configuring RSLinx Gateway eee eee eee Configuring RSView32 for use with RSLinx Gateway 17 1 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 5 17 6 17 6 17 7 17 10 17 10 17 10 Contents Chapter 18 Running Your Project Summary OPSIEDS ga kines a AR sie haan aan ate a 18 1 Specifying startup settings jo 5 ce44 bows vee edieh caer ren 18 2 Preferentes paste iore y neh EA UA ees 18 3 StartUp sess Bae REEE eh ERARE OOA 18 6 Setting up a project in a new location 00 eee 18 8 Setting the project path ssssssrurrsrrererrerrrrru 18 8 Changing application paths 4 2s lt scns ia eee ves esha 18 10 Changing the database patho cick sonss awe peeks es 18 11 Specifying time date and number formats 18 12 Running a project 2553664 wea ses Ne NS Hawa eNeS 18 13 Running a project automatically 4 18 13 Monitoring disk space is cua cai pias phe See ee ae es 18 14 Stopping a project lt 2 4 c405 55 Vices ace eda oe ut ees ee eb 18 15 When a project Stops si5canc en eecukh axes soos 18 15 Appendix A RSView32 Commands Using RS View 32 commands 4 245 bese pee years A 1 Where to use commands s cin lt cs eicaks otc saeks aes A 1 How to use ComiMahds i 6 yes qatar eekeeed eeaqcs A 2 Using placeholders in commands
87. an example of how to create anew ODBC data source 7 9 m Configuring data logging The Data Log Setup editor To open the Data Log Setup editor ES Data Log 1 In the Project Manager open the Data Log folder L 3 Data Log Setup 2 Open the Data Log Setup editor by doing one of the following double click the Data Log Setup icon right click the Data Log Setup icon and then click New i Untitled Data Log Setup Ea Log Triggers Tags in Model Set up general aspects of the model Specify the paths to which to log the data Storage Format C dBase lV Narrow dBase lY Wide C Ol Specify when you want log data Number of Digits including decimal point created and deleted Digits After Decimal Point Number of Characters in String Specify how and when logging should occur V Log Milliseconds in Separate Field Specify which tags to log data for 7 10 Configuring data logging Setting up a model 1 In the Data Log Setup editor click the Setup tab 2 Type a description of the model This is for your information only 3 Specify whether to use long file names for the data log files If you choose to use long file names type a log file identifier string up to 20 characters This string of text forms part of the file name for the data log files For more information about long file names see Long file names on page 7 4 If you choose the ODBC stor
88. and release actions 11 57 Creating graphic displays _ 11 58 Up Appearance In the Up Appearance tab specify what the button will look like when it is not pressed 1 In the Button Label field type a label for the button Click the color box to specify the label s color and then click Font to specify a font for the button Choose only TrueType fonts 2 In the Fill field choose a fill pattern for the button 3 If desired click Import to import a bitmap that will appear in the center of the button The label as specified in step 1 appears on top of the bitmap If the button is a polygon the label text and any imported bitmap graphic are clipped at the rectangular extents of the button Down Appearance In the Down Appearance tab specify what the button will look like when it is pressed If you want the button to appear the same when it is not pressed and pressed click Same as Up Appearance If you want the button to appear differently choose different options See Up Appearance above for details about the fields Editing a button object To edit a button object double click the button object to open the Button Configuration dialog box To change a button s label use the font style and color in the Button Configuration dialog box or use the commands on the Attributes menu Creating graphic displays Recipe tool Reshaping a button object If you reshape or rotate a button th
89. as the positions of switches contacts and relays which can only be on or off Its value can be 0 or 1 Can be linked to an alarm Configured in the Tag Database editor Display cache An area in RAM where up to 40 graphic displays can be stored Displays in the cache start up and change more quickly Displays can be added to the cache using the Cache After Displaying option in the Graphic Display editor s Display Settings dialog box or by using the Z or ZA parameter with the Display command Glossary D 6 4 Display key A type of control key that is attached to a graphic display Configured in the Graphic Display editor See also Key definition Editor A tool for creating or configuring the files that make up an RSView32 project Editors can be accessed from the Project Manager Event 1 In the RSView32 Events editor an expression and an action An action is an RSView32 command or macro Whenever an expression changes from false to true the action is performed 2 An ActiveX attribute the actions triggered by the ActiveX object in response to an external action on the object such as a mouse click Event Detector An RSView32 component that at runtime monitors events and triggers the specified actions Expression An equation containing tag names mathematical operators if then else logic or built in functions Folder A tool in the Tag Database editor for organizing tags Form A data entry area in some edi
90. beans The machinery used in both processes is identical Instead of drawing two displays and specifying corn related tags in one display and bean related tags in another you can create one display and not specify any tag names Where a tag name is required type a tag placeholder When the display is run the tag each placeholder represents must be specified This can be done in two ways with a parameter file or by specifying the tag names 11 37 Creating graphic displays Creating a tag placeholder A tag placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 as shown in the example below mechan 1 Gels Drini Dam i E Coniruosdy ipda Beale p Fam peora De orn el Places EF Dakr Emmm r Jairi Laming aade R La r Capa T pia Bienen i ai You can also add a folder name to the placeholder For example 1 PV is a valid placeholder and requires only one parameter the folder name For tag placeholders in alarm summary objects when they are contained in graphic displays only you can use wildcards in the placeholder For example 1 PV is a valid placeholder You cannot use wildcards in tag placeholders in alarm summary files when they are not contained in a graphic display That is you cannot use wildcards if the alarm summary was created using the Alarm Summary editor For more information about alarm summaries see Creating an alarm summary on page 6 52 Using a parameter
91. bitmap as a 16 color bitmap In 256 color systems match palettes In a 256 color system if bitmaps use two different color palettes Windows must recalculate and redraw all bitmaps when window focus changes Redrawing the bitmaps causes delays and can make a scanned image or photograph sparkle or appear as a negative To match palettes use a bitmap oriented graphical tool that lets you match palettes Palette matching is an issue only for 256 color video adapters 24 bit color systems do not match palettes and 16 color systems dither colors that is alternate pixels of different colors to approximate another color Do not use the Scale option The Scale option in the Display Settings dialog box causes the contents of a graphic display to change size to suit the size of the graphic display s window To speed up the display of a graphic containing bitmaps choose Pan rather than Scale because bitmaps take longer to draw when they are scaled to a size different from their original size An OLE object can be a bitmap or a bitmap wrapped ina metafile These types of OLE objects will also draw more slowly when scaled 11 101 Creating graphic displays Avoid large bitmaps Graphic displays that contain large bitmaps consume memory and can be very slow to display because of the delay in loading them from disk You can change a bitmap to a native RSView32 object by converting the bitmap to wallpaper tracing o
92. box 13 2 Trends 13 1 G 8 comparing data using 13 27 configuring 13 2 13 5 13 37 grid lines 13 13 legend 13 4 13 17 13 25 marker 13 39 pens 13 3 13 18 13 32 shading 13 4 13 22 time axis 13 7 using the graphic library 13 35 vertical axis 13 12 x axis See time axis y axis See vertical axis controlling with expressions 13 31 with tags 13 15 13 27 13 35 data source 7 45 13 3 13 13 differences from ControlView C 8 displaying tag values in 13 3 13 19 editing 13 40 file based 13 13 historical 13 13 local 13 14 realtime 13 13 13 26 remote 13 14 start time 13 8 13 33 using at runtime 13 38 Undefine command 15 13 A 59 Unsolicited messages 2 1 Update rate for OPC nodes 3 15 Upload command 11 47 11 65 A 60 UploadAll command 11 47 11 65 A 60 User account commands Account 10 6 A 11 Login 10 5 10 19 A 40 Logout 10 5 A 41 Password 10 20 A 44 User accounts 10 12 assigning passwords to 10 14 changing at runtime 10 20 displaying current user B 7 login and logout macros for 10 17 maintaining in Windows NT 10 1 10 12 modifying after moving project 10 16 tracking system usage by 8 16 User Accounts editor 10 12 preventing access to 10 6 V Value table 4 1 4 3 5 1 updating 2 15 3 15 VBA commands VbaEdit A 60 VBAExec 9 1 VbaExec A 60 VBA programs See Getting Results with RSView32 Scripting Vertical position animation 12 20 Vertical slider animation 12 30 Vis
93. brackets acknowledges alarms for the tag associated with the highlighted object in the active graphic display MMT if alarms are occurring rapidly don t run the Acknowledge command without a tag name The Acknowledge command could acknowledge a new alarm rather than the intended alarm Examples The Acknowledge command Acknowledge Hopper1 Flow Acknowledges all outstanding alarms for the tag Hopper1 Flow Acknowledge Hopper1 Acknowledges all outstanding alarms for all tags in the folder called Hopper1 Acknowledge Acknowledges all outstanding alarms A 11 5 RSView32 commands AcknowledgeAll Activity ActivityBarOff ActivityBarOn A 12 Acknowledge tag Acknowledges the alarm for the tag associated with the highlighted object in the active graphic display AcknowledgeAll Acknowledges all outstanding alarms This command runs more quickly than Acknowledge It gives no indication that it has run but will display a message if not executed properly If an acknowledge bit is associated with an alarm acknowledging the alarm sets the acknowledge bit There is no limit to the number of tags that can be acknowledged with this command Activity Opens the Activity Log Setup editor ActivityBarOff Hides the activity bar ActivityBarOn Shows the activity bar You can undock the activity bar and move it anywhere on the screen To move the bar click between the Clear and Clear All b
94. by RSView32 You can use these tags to control the view of the trend at runtime for example you can scroll and zoom in on the trend Configuring trends Summary of steps These are the steps for creating a trend create a trend object in the Graphic Display editor configure the trend in the Trend dialog box provide a method for controlling the trend Creating a trend object To create a trend object Graphic 1 Open the Graphic Display editor E Display ff Library 2 Choose the Trend drawing tool by doing one of the following open the Objects menu click Advanced Objects and then click Trend click in the Drawing Tools toolbox The cursor changes to the trend drawing tool 3 Drag the mouse to create a box approximately the size you want for the trend When you release the mouse the Trend dialog box opens 4 Configure the trend as described on the following pages Once you have configured the trend you can edit it as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it attach animation to it and so on You can also use this object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it into another For detailed information about graphic objects see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays 13 5 m Configuring trends Instead of creating a trend from scratch you can use the trend in the Trends graphic library For more information see Using the Trends grap
95. cache You can place up to 40 graphic displays in the cache To cache displays select the Cache After Displaying option in the Display Settings dialog box For details see page 11 15 use the cache parameter with the Display command The cache parameter loads a graphic display into the cache without displaying it The cache parameter has two options Z and ZA For example the command Display Bakery Z loads the graphic display called Bakery into the cache but does not display it When the graphic is called up it is displayed quickly The command Display Bakery ZA loads the display into the cache and continually updates the values in the display For more details about the Display command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Removing displays from the cache To remove all graphic displays from the display cache use the FlushCache command To remove a specific graphic display from the display cache use the FlushCache lt file gt command Graphic displays are also removed from the cache when a project is closed or stopped If a display uses the Always Updating option with the Cache After Displaying option the display s shutdown command is executed when you issue a FlushCache command or when you close the project For details about the FlushCache commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help 11 27 Creating graphic displays Types of graphic objects You can create the following types
96. change a tag value without the proper security code For details see Chapter 10 Adding security Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Length Type a number between 1 and 82 to specify the length of the string tag in characters RSView32 will accept only a length that is a multiple of the size of the Allen Bradley programmable controller data element you are addressing Specifying a data source 4 18 The following topics describe how to complete the Data Source fields For details about configuring analog digital and string tag types see Configuring tag type on page 4 13 Specifying device as the data source A tag with device as its data source receives its data from a source external to RSView32 The data can come from Allen Bradley or SoftLogix 5 programmable controllers through RSLinx direct drivers programmable controllers through an OPC or DDE server another Windows program through an OPC or DDE server Creating tags To specify device as the data source 1 Click Device Data Source Type Device Memory Node Name a Scan Class Address 2 Supply a node name by doing one of the following type anode name double click in the Node Name field to add a new node click B to open a selection list and select a node name 3 If you are connecting to Allen Bradley or SoftLogix 5 devices through direct drivers select a scan class For more
97. click and select a server computer from the list that appears You can use these formats to specify the name or address Use this syntax For this format Example ComputerName UNC Universal Naming DTB1 Convention ComputerName Domain com DNS Domain Name DTB1 NET2 COM System XXX XX XXX XXX Raw TCP IP address 1384 87 167 148 You set up the computer s name or address in the Windows Control Panel as described in Identifying the RSView32 server computer on page 17 6 For more information about IP Internet Protocol addresses see page E 8 Access Path Use of this field is optional Use the access path field in the Node editor when you want to be able to switch between PLCs using the NodeSwitch command for node redundancy you want all tags in RSView32 to have the same update rate You must leave the access path blank if you want to use different update rates for different tags in the tag database If you leave the access path blank in the Node editor specify the access path in the Tag Database editor s tag address field For information about the syntax for the access path see your OPC server documentation If you use this field and you are communicating with RSView32 using OPC the access path is the name of the current project on the server Setting up OPC and DDE communications If you use this field and you are communicating with an RSLinx OPC server the access path is the n
98. click the Color tab Attach color animation as follows in the Expression field type 0 Zero is the default value for threshold A in the list box click threshold A leave the value in the Value field as 0 for Line color click Blink only line color affects text click each color box to open the color palette and then click a color 4 Click Apply 12 15 Animating graphic objects 12 16 Example 2 Creating an object that changes color as the fill level changes This example describes how to create a rectangle object that changes color as the object s fill level increases This example uses a tag called Hopper1 FlourLevel The tag has a range of 1 to 100 When the flour level reaches 80 the rectangle blinks between gray and yellow to warn the operator that the hopper is nearly full When the flour level reaches 95 the rectangle blinks between gray and red 1 Using the Rectangle tool create a rectangle Select the rectangle Using the Fill Style toolbar make the the rectangle solid Using the Line Color and Fill Color palettes make the rectangle gray Open the Animation dialog box and click the Fill tab Attach fill animation as follows inthe Expression field type Hopper1 FlourLevel this is the tag that controls the fill level for Fill Direction click Up click Apply Click the Color tab Attach color animation as follows Create the expression inthe Expression field
99. click the Derived Tags check box and specify a file Display lt file gt B E U O cache Pfile Ttag_name Hnnn Wnnn Min Max position Runs the specified graphic display file Parameters specified here override settings in the Display Settings dialog box in the Graphic Display editor If you are using the Cache After Displaying option in the Display Settings dialog to cache displays use the position parameters with the Display command to ensure that displays open in the correct position after caching Otherwise if a user moves a display at runtime the new position is remembered by the cache option Do not cache more than 40 displays using the cache parameter and or the Cache After Displaying option lt file gt The name of a graphic display file without a file extension B Displays the specified graphic display in the background E Disables the Enter key so it does not download values in numeric input fields to the programmable controller or server unless the Display On Screen Keyboard option is selected in the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box U Updates tag values in all input fields when the display first opens O Suppresses the display of the key list RSView32 commands cache Pfile Ttag_name Hunn Wnnn Min Max Specifies how to load the specified graphic display into the display cache as follows Z Loads the specified
100. commands Application Type the name of the DDE server or other Windows application that RSView32 will communicate with For example if Microsoft Excel is the server type Excel Topic Type the subject of the DDE communication For example if Excel is the application the topic is a particular Excel spreadsheet 4 Click Accept to save the node configuration 5 When you finish configuring nodes click Close Setting up OPC and DDE communications The application and topic appear in the spreadsheet s Station or Server column separated by a vertical bar Example Configuring a DDE node The following example describes how to create a node to connect to a GE programmable controller using the RSServer for GE Series 90 protocol Application SNPWIN The application name is the server s name Topic cpuid connection_ID poll_rate The topic name is made up of a CPU ID string an optional connection ID string preceded by the character and an optional poll rate preceded by the character The figure below shows how the node looks in the Node editor The CPU ID is CPUID1 the connection ID is PORT5 and the poll rate is 10 tiee Gampular DDE Siar ijja Pant Compa QFC ferar Falie OPC Server Pani Compete OA Server HSL HS A a TPP CT ae SKF el CPL EF ant SLG Draci Uriar SLEJ Enhanmiad 1 HAR J0 Some columns do not apply to DDE nodes and are left blank 3 13 Setting up OPC a
101. description of how to use tag names and placeholders For more information see Using tag names on page 11 37 Tag names You can use tag names that you have already added to the tag database or you can use a new tag name Animating graphic objects Tag placeholders Tag placeholders allow you to create displays that can be used with different tags A placeholder is a cross hatch character followed by a number between 1 and 500 Tag names are substituted for placeholders when the display is run Folder names can also be substituted for part of the tag name For example 1 2 MotorValve This allows the same animation to be added to multiple objects where only the folder name is different When setting up object keys you can specify the Tag parameter as a placeholder for a tag name or any character string The Tag parameter is used for object keys only For more information on this parameter see Using the Current Tag parameter on page 12 46 Using commands and macros Some types of animation such as touch animation require you to specify an action The action is an RSView32 command or a macro The command or macro you use depends on what type of action you want For example if you want the action to open another graphic display use the Display command This chapter does not provide detailed information on using RSView32 commands or macros For a complete list of commands and command syntax see Appendix A
102. device it is connected to and stored in computer memory referred to as the value table so it is immediately accessible to all parts of RSView32 For example graphic displays use tag values to control animation or update a trend alarm monitoring compares current tag values to pre defined limits and data logging stores tag values to create a historical record 4 1 Creating tags Tag types Data sources D 4 2 RSView32 uses the following types of tags Tag Type of data stored Analog Range of values These tags can represent variable states such as temperature or the position of rotary controls Digital Oor 1 These tags can represent devices that can only be on or off such as switches contacts and relays String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters These tags can represent devices that use text such as a bar code scanner which uses an alphanumeric product code System Information generated while the system is running including alarm information communication status system time and date and so on RSView32 creates system tags when it creates a project The system tags are stored in the folder called system in the tag database You cannot edit system tags You can use system tags anywhere you would use any other type of tag When defining an analog digital or string tag you must specify a data source The data source determines whether the ta
103. distance apart horizontally Space Vertical Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart vertically E Stare errr Centers are A separated by E ee ass egal verti es Eer distance Select objects Space vertically Centers are lt gt separated by an equal horizontal distance Select objects Space horizontally 11 91 Creating graphic displays Flipping objects Flipping an object creates a mirror image of that object You can flip most objects 1 Select an object 2 Click the appropriate button or menu item This button or menuitem Flips selected objects Flip Vertical Top to bottom upside down Flip Horizontal Left to right Select object Flip vertical E E a E a E Select object Flip horizontal _ 11 92 Creating graphic displays Applying colors You can define both line and fill colors for an object Line color applies to the outline of an object Fill color applies to the inside of an object To make objects blink attach color animation to the objects For details see page 12 13 To apply colors before drawing 1 Select line and fill colors from the color palette or from the Attributes menu 2 Select a drawing tool and draw the object To apply colors to existing objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 Select line and fill colors from the color palette or from the Attributes menu Applying colors to text To apply color to
104. documentation Selecting a network printer RSView32 can print to a network printer For detailed information about setting up network printers refer to your Windows documentation Printing at runtime You can also print graphic displays at runtime using the PrintDisplay command You must provide the operator with a way to issue the command when you create the display For example create a button object display key or global key with the PrintDisplay command as the press action or provide a command line in the graphic display For more information about creating graphic displays see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays When you use the PrintDisplay command RSView32 prints the entire display even if parts are covered by other displays You can also use the ScreenPrint command to print an image of whatever shows on the monitor For more information about these commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands Setting up direct driver communications RSView32 uses a direct connection to the drivers in RSLinx to communicate with most Allen Bradley devices as well as SoftLogix 5 devices This chapter describes how to set up direct driver communications You can also use DDE Dynamic Data Exchange or OPC OLE for Process Control to connect to third party devices or servers as described in Chapter 3 Setting up OPC and DDE communications You must use an OPC or DDE connection to handle unsolicited messages and to communi
105. double quotes except when using the P parameter with the Display command For details about commands see Appendix A RS View32 commands Each RSView32 editor has a Print item on its File menu To print selections 1 Select the item you want to print The item can be a record in an editor s spreadsheet or it can be an object in a graphic display 2 On the File menu click Print Working with projects 3 Under Print Range click Selection 4 Click OK To print the entire contents of the window 1 On the File menu click Print 2 Under Print Range click All 3 Click OK Selecting a printer You can select only a printer that has been installed on your system For information on installing a printer see your Windows documentation MILITA The settings in the Print Setup dialog box do not affect runtime log printing set up in the Activity Log Setup and Alarm Setup editors To select a printer 1 On the File menu in any RSView32 editor click Print Setup Pali Pisin Tape DR 1A Fini Se Hrem Wis TUTENDE iang Paper oreo Sap e i Porbsi a bega Bt r Leech apna e Carnal 1 9 m Working with projects 1 10 2 If you don t want to use the default printer specify another printer 3 Choose the appropriate orientation and paper options 4 Click OK Selecting printer setup options For detailed information about printer options refer to your Windows
106. exclusively through X Open Company Limited Visio is a registered trademark of Visio Corporation Sybase is a registered trademark of Sybase Inc Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license The product s performance will be affected by system configuration the application being performed operator control and other related factors The product s implementation may vary among users This manual is as up to date as possible at the time of printing however the accompanying software may have changed since that time Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information contained in this manual or the software at any time without prior notice The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details of variations in the equipment procedure or process described nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation operation or maintenance Doc ID 9399 2SE32UG March 1999 Contents Preface About the documentation qin ciuis Sd een Xa oes P 1 Technical support services 5 sae UN laren ete eae ee P 2 Whentvyoui calls isco cuca cand hed eth ot bance ate P 2 Chapter 1 Working with projects Whatis a project rearea Srna ew nh aaa ETO wars 1 1 Project files 4455 eosin i a R 1 2 Working in the Proj
107. file gt command as the press action When the button is pressed derived tag processing starts In the Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the DerivedOn lt file gt command as the action When the object is touched derived tag processing starts In the Events editor specify the DerivedOn lt file gt command as the action for an event On the command line type DerivedOn lt file gt and then press Enter 5 7 m Creating derived tags 5 8 Ways to stop derived tag processing When a project stops derived tag processing stops as well To stop derived tag processing without stopping the project use any of the methods below Inthe Graphic Display editor specify the DerivedOff lt file gt command in the Shutdown field in the Display Settings dialog box When the display closes derived tag processing stops Note that if the display is cached using the Always Updating option the DerivedOff command won t be executed until the display is removed from the cache for example by using the FlushCache command Inthe Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the DerivedOff lt file gt command as the press action When the button is pressed derived tag processing stops Inthe Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the DerivedOff lt file gt command as the action When the object is touched derived tag processing s
108. files 11 99 mgx files 11 99 obf files 7 8 pcx files 11 99 rsv files 1 1 tif files 11 99 wav files 6 33 A 21 A 45 wmf files 11 99 in input fields 11 43 11 46 11 63 tag parameter using 12 46 as placeholder 12 7 for display keys 12 54 for object keys 12 42 to acknowledge alarms A 11 with the Identify command A 38 Equal command 14 2 14 6 A 8 and memory tags 4 20 Numbers 1784 KT KTX 2 2 1785 KA5 E 2 E 4 1785 KA E 2 E 3 6200 Series Programming Software E 6 A Abort command 15 3 A 10 Access See Microsoft Access Account command 10 6 A 11 Acknowledge bit 6 16 6 45 6 50 Acknowledge command 6 12 A 11 AcknowledgeAll command 6 12 A 12 ActiveX events 8 12 12 36 G 4 ActiveX methods 12 38 12 39 A 39 ActiveX objects 11 1 11 28 11 71 attaching control to 12 2 12 32 editing 12 32 ActiveX properties 12 32 12 35 A 39 ActiveX Property Panel 11 73 12 32 12 35 ActiveX Toolbox 11 75 Activity bar 8 13 Activity commands Activity A 12 ActivityBarOff A 12 ActivityBarOn A 12 ActivityLogSendToODBC A 13 ActivityOff 8 18 A 13 ActivityOn 8 18 A 13 ActivityPrintOff A 14 ActivityPrintOn A 14 Activity Viewer A 14 ComStatusOff A 22 ComStatusOn A 22 EchoOff 8 13 A 35 EchoOn 8 13 A 35 Remark 8 12 A 51 l 1 m Index Activity log files and third party applications 8 1 contents of 8 17 16 7 creating 8 4 deleting 8 8 exporting to ODBC 8 10
109. graphic display into the cache but does not make it visible so the display appears quickly when it is first used ZA Loads the specified graphic display into the cache but does not make it visible and continually updates the graphic display even when it is not visible For example use ZA for a display that contains a realtime trend so that the trend displays data for its entire time range when you view it To remove all displays from the cache use the FlushCache command To remove a particular display from the cache use the FlushCache file command The name of the parameter file that contains the tag names to be substituted for placeholders in the display If the display does not contain placeholders do not use this parameter If the parameter file has a long file name enclose the file name in quotes for example P Long file name One or more tags separated by commas and no spaces to be substituted for placeholders in the display If the display does not contain placeholders do not use this parameter Specifies the height of the graphic display in pixels Specifies the width of the graphic display in pixels Runs the graphic display minimized as an icon Runs the graphic display maximized full screen size A 31 RSView32 commands A 32 position Specifies the position of the window as follows Q1 top right corner Q2 top left corner Q3 bottom left corner Q4 bottom right corner
110. grid settings any time during the drawing process Check this box to make the grid Click here to save the visible settings ind Setliiege Altibulas Spacing Eee ome gt F Beep Ta Grid z E E iii coo e watical y Po Set the spacing of the grid Select a color for the grid points da a points in pixels ____ Check this box to make the grid active The grid can be active or passive If you turn on Snap to Grid the grid is active and all the objects you draw or position are pulled to the closest grid point This makes it easy to align and size objects If you turn off Snap to Grid the grid is passive and does not affect your drawing or the position of your objects Turn off the grid to either draw or position an element between the grid lines Turn on the grid and the next object you draw or place will automatically be aligned with the grid Turning on the grid does not affect the placement of existing objects You can click Show Grid and Snap On on the View menu Creating graphic displays Rotate tool Using the Rotate tool Use this tool to rotate an object or group of objects around an anchor point You can also use the Rotate tool when attaching rotation animation to a graphic object For details about rotation animation see Configuring rotation animation on page 12 24 You cannot rotate OLE objects ActiveX objects bitmaps and text Rotation of rounded rectan
111. hard disk is full activity logging stops and no more log files are created To monitor disk space see page 18 14 To specify when to start new files 1 In the Activity Log Setup editor click the File Management tab 2 Under Start New Files click a button to specify when you want to have new files created See the topics below for information on the different times Configuring activity logging Creating files periodically Click Periodic and then click a time period A new file is created after the specified interval has elapsed For this period The new file is created Hourly Approximately on the hour Daily Each day approximately at midnight Weekly Each Sunday approximately at midnight Monthly On the first day of each month approximately at midnight Creating files at specified times Click At Specified Times and then type a time or list of times when you want activities to be logged to a new file Start a new line for each new time and allow at least five minutes between start times Use any of the following to specify time Time Format Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Sat Date 1 31 Note Specifying 31 means that months that do not have 31 days will not have new log files Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 You can combine hours and minutes with a day or date Configuring activity logging Example Creating a new file To have a new file start every Wednesda
112. how to use pen masking to show or hide a pen To hide Pen 10 without affecting other pens use the bitwise AND operator and the complement of the pen s decimal value PenMask PenMask amp 512 To show Pen 10 again use the bitwise OR operator and the pen s decimal value PenMask PenMask 512 Specifying a Start time To specify an absolute trend start time use the StartTimeDate control tag The StartTimeDate control tag overrides the time specified in the Start Time field of the Trend dialog box Create a string input object so that the operator can enter the date and time of the start time To specify a relative trend start time create an Equal command that uses the system DateAndTimelInteger tag as the current time and performs calculations relative to its value The value that is added to or subtracted from the current time must be in seconds 13 33 Configuring trends 13 34 Example Specifying an absolute start time The current display contains these objects A historical trend with a Control Tag folder called Trend A string input object configured with the control tag Trend StartTimeDate To specify a start time of 1 00 pm on January 1 1998 the operator enters this string in the string input object JAN 01 1998 13 00 00 Example Specifying a start time one hour before the current time Display Process Trend Trend StartTime system DateAndTimelInteger 3600 Whe
113. ida eg han AAG ay Olas Device aia naia ia EAE Peer gt eee es INICOIORY eien ai e pda pine pe AE aa ot Orpa ZINE TAGS eun a ae eases eee aA ELANA Name TABS essere at RETA RR OR Gee CA SME Using folders to group tags 0 ee eee eee eee The tag database editor sccv saa eva tes ee tee aa ets Using the Accept and Discard buttons SING tHE TORY abori eos tue tL Ma eats EER bases Using the query DOK 4 war cater MALS ae aa E omens Using the folder hierarchy eva ois again ae eh Pa ocr Creating 4 folder sies 5h 45 de8 oot ntek anaE tee Opening a folder 2 sccteced cs pense Sake aed Adding tags to a folder lt a vita apa ieee Goal e ets Nesting a folder as cic taciwi4 ewasetiuaieraeeaess Duplicating atoldercacenct tesa ormuies wontons Deleting a folder sine a sci eels Cee ope Using the spreadsheets since sivaa wate beta cece aaa Moving through the spreadsheet 06 Resizing columns and rows eee eee een Adding a tag iin iia pola whether ween Duplicating a tag ata ae elie dears ee isn pete edie cee cs Edits tae pi ance duet ea o AIRE E EAEE OE Deleting atag corre setter ae eee EREA oa bed Configuring tag type sus ces bed eae whats one BREWS es Configuring an analog tag sees esta a one tees Configuring a digital tag o 005 choses ahs enana aden Configuring a string tag ic cvin nese ou leon eats Specifying a data source chick Sakae dE AER Snes Specifying device as the data source 006 Specifying
114. if the tag is not in alarm ALM_LEVEL tag If examining multiple tags the highest level of the tags that are in alarm For example if the current alarms are levels 2 6 and 8 this function returns the value 8 Creating expressions This function Returns ALM_SUPPRESSItag 1 true if the tag s alarms are suppressed or ALM_SUPPRESSItag If examining multiple tags 1 true if one or more of the tags alarms are suppressed ALM_FAULTCtag 1 true if there has been an alarm fault for the specified tag or ALM_FAULT tag If examining multiple tags 1 true if there has been an alarm fault for one or more of the tags COMM_ERRItag 1 true if the last read or write operation for the specified tag indicated a communication failure Note that you can examine the status of only one tag with this function To examine multiple tags at once use a wildcard in the expression argument This wildcard Does this Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Matches any single character Example Tag functions ALM_IN_ALARM vessel3 TIC3 pv Returns 1 true if one or more tags in the specified folder have a name beginning with the letters pv and are in alarm Returns 0 false if none of the specified tags are in alarm 14 15 Creating expressions 14 16 Time functions The following built in functions examine system time These functi
115. information about scan classes see page 2 16 4 In the Address field do one of the following to connect to Allen Bradley and SoftLogix 5 devices specify the physical memory location in the programmable controller The address syntax depends on the programmable controller For addressing syntax see Appendix D Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers to connect to other devices specify the name of the tag in the OPC server or specify the DDE item If you are using an OPC node click the Browse button to select the OPC tag address If you are using a DDE node the DDE item name and format depend on the DDE server and are not validated by RSView32 For more information see your OPC or DDE server documentation For more information about OPC or DDE see Chapter 3 Setting up OPC and DDE communications Also see Sharing tag values locally on page 16 24 and Using OPC for peer to peer network communications on page 17 5 4 19 Creating tags Specifying memory as the data source 1 Click Memory Data Source Type C Device Memory Initial Value 2 In the Initial Value field type the tag s starting value When you first run a project a memory tag has the value defined in the Initial Value field All subsequent runs of the project use the tag s last value before the project stopped To ensure a memory tag uses a particular value when the project starts use the Set or
116. interpolation determines how a line is drawn The choices are This item Does this Automatic Draws the appropriate type of line based on the tag type For example for a digital tag digital interpolation is automatically used For an analog tag linear interpolation is automatically used Linear Draws a straight line between two points which suggests a gradual change from the first point to the second point For example A Digital Draws a line along the time axis at the first value then when the value changes draws a vertical line to the second value For example x val Full Width Draws the most recent value for a tag horizontally across the trend For example if the most recent value for a tag is 75 draws a line across the trend at 75 When the value changes redraws the line at the new value You can use full width to display values that act as high and low setpoints 13 20 Configuring trends Custom Pen Width The custom pen width affects the thickness of the line and the plot symbols Check this box if you want to specify a different pen width If you do not specify a width the line for the pen will be the same as the grid lines Configuring pen scale Pen Scale C Use Tag s Min Max Custom Min Max Minimum po Maximum The pen scale defines the range of numbers on the vertical axis The vertical axis changes to reflect the minimum and maximum values for the sel
117. like this 11D 8T Tag 10N is out of alarm is displayed like this 03 09 97 11 45 00 Tag PUMP3 is out of alarm Do not give placeholders too much space or your messages might not fit in the alarm log In the example above the tag name has 10 spaces 10N User default messages The user default messages are messages you create to replace the system default messages To create these messages select the User Msgs tab in the Alarm Setup editor and type a message in some or all of the fields Your message can say whatever you want and can use both words and placeholders For a list of placeholders see page 6 35 Configuring alarms To create a user default message type a message in the appropriate field i Alan Serie h Aam Fie ond Primer Moesnges Hapan ia em aO ee iid ee bei Teg 4 hii id Vi Det of etre Filo aad Priamar Mosipeges Kild ee ued Tag hiin yidi amp i Oud Tagan yi E Aghoueladiged Fiju aod Polos Meeuge fina VE Arked Tag 40n Ez Be Ackod Tag in To select the user message as the default message click the User Defaults button when you are configuring analog and digital alarms Custom messages Custom messages apply on a per tag basis To create a custom message type any message you want For more information see Configuring alarms for analog tags on page 6 40 and Configuring alarms for digital tags on page 6 46 Your message can say whatever you want
118. lines If you want the command to perform an action on a tag include a tag name or the tag parameter For details about the tag parameter see Using the Current Tag parameter on page 12 46 Click OK Editing display and object keys Editing display and object keys is the same except that for object keys you must first select an object Modifying a key 1 On the Animation menu do one of the following to modify object keys you must have an object or group of objects selected first click Object Keys to modify display keys click Display Keys 2 In the Key field select the key you want to modify 12 54 Animating graphic objects 3 Click the Modify button 4 Make the necessary changes and then click OK Removing a key 1 On the Animation menu do one of the following to remove object keys you must have an object or group of objects selected first click Object Keys to remove display keys click Display Keys 2 In the Key field select the key you want to remove 3 Click the Remove button and then click OK Removing all keys 1 On the Animation menu do one of the following to remove object keys you must have an object or group of objects selected first click Object Keys to remove display keys click Display Keys 2 Click the Remove All button and then click OK Viewing the key list at runtime At runtime users can use the key list to see which keys are
119. log data from DBF files to the ODBC database The connection to the ODBC database is maintained for the length of time specified by the wait W parameter lt data_source gt A valid ODBC data source name If the name has a space embedded in it enclose the name in quotes lt target_table_ The name of a table in the ODBC database where name gt Wn the data will be exported If the table does not exist RSView32 attempts to create it The time the connection to the ODBC database will be maintained If nothing is specified the wait time defaults to about 5 minutes A wait time of zero keeps the connection open until the project is stopped This parameter allows frequent exports to the database without having to connect every time Once the connection is established RSView32 waits the specified time and if another command is received to export data the command is executed and the wait timer is reset If no command is received within the wait time the connection is closed RSView32 commands AlarmOff AlarmOn AlarmPrintOff AlarmPrintOn AlarmViewer Uuser_name A user ID that is valid on the data source Ppassword A password that is valid on the data source AlarmOff Stops alarm monitoring Once this command has run it displays a message indicating that alarm monitoring has stopped AlarmOn H Starts alarm monitoring Once this command has run it displays a message indicating th
120. log files using any software that reads these formats ODBC format is available for data logs only not alarm or activity logs unless you send the alarm log or activity log data to an ODBC database online Many software products are available for retrieving and analyzing data This chapter briefly describes how to bring data from dbf log files into Microsoft Excel It also describes how to create a pivot table using dbf data from data log files For information about how alarm log files are named see page 6 29 For information about how the dBASE IV data log files are named see page 7 4 For information about how ODBC data log tables and backup files are named see page 7 8 For information about how activity log files are named see page 8 9 For information about how to send activity log data or alarm log data to an ODBC database see page 6 30 Before retrieving data consider how the data will be used This will help you choose the best method for retrieving it For example you can bring dbf data from log files directly into Microsoft Excel However it might be more valuable to limit the data you retrieve Suppose you want to examine the values of certain tags over time To do that you could perform a query with Microsoft Query using tag names and time as criteria so you retrieve only relevant data For detailed information about working in Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Query see your Microsoft documentation 16 3 Sharin
121. memory as the data source 4 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 Contents Other methods for creating tags 0 0 eee ee eee Creating tags in a third party application Creating tags as needed in other RSView32 editors Using the Tag Browser 74 cixs ste seaes oh avn be Importing tags from a PLC database Using the Database Import amp Export Wizard Creating tags using the RSView32 Object Model and VBA ranures ouch ioe weir saed shears yes Adding alarmstOtavsuc wcctiegt ec punaran ee tnca ea bad Logging tag values sucine nn pois aie hints ante b REN S Gace Using the tag monitor ce ac 4i stinks tis nee tee eA Creating a tag monitor object dts srcarysinase Cow Asia Creating a tag monitor file wing eal eee eeu eoa8 Selecting tags pts chi ass elds a i ig eR align Understanding what you see eee eee eee Changing what you see 0 008 cereus eae cy eee Viewing details 165 005 6c sid a epnaedee nied eoeus Chapter 5 Creating Derived Tags How to use derived tags iui nucuteny aeiee hora enone How to use multiple derived tag files 00 Suminal y OF Steps tasers i lw bodes a aa as The Derived Tags editor ccs av agi nionsep a iieraeeaens Using the Accept and Discard buttons Setting up the evaluation interval 0 eee eee Creating derived tags sony ahi sath Uh ed wae cata ache Editing derived tags iness oi G ence Sue aes wage eee Startin
122. messages on page 6 34 6 43 m Configuring alarms Advanced 1 Click the Advanced tab Tog Hope bora Lice lene diical PHa o Onosma Hopea ebd OOOO p Deedes R Ahron value E Precewiage kja Acknisiedga Aganda Fi F Ago Parri Hoadibabe G F ro Pssst 2 Fill in the fields as follows Alarm Identification E Type a command or macro file name or click the Selection button to open the Command Wizard Selection button This command or macro runs in RSView32 when you highlight the alarm in the alarm summary and click Alarm Identify on the menu The command or macro also runs when you use the Identify command whether or not the tag is in alarm Out of Alarm Label Type a message up to 21 characters long that will be displayed in the alarm summary when the tag is no longer in alarm This message can also appear in the alarm banner if the banner is configured to display it 6 44 Configuring alarms Deadband Click Absolute or Percentage and then type a value The deadband is a buffer zone on the edge of an alarm threshold For more information see Deadband on page 6 5 Alarm Acknowledge In the Acknowledge Bit field type the name of the tag that refers to the acknowledge bit s address When the operator acknowledges the alarm the acknowledge bit is set to 1 and RSView32 logs an alarm acknowledgment When another RSView32 station detects the acknowledge bit changing from 0
123. of logging For more information see Combining logging on page 7 40 To specify what should trigger logging 1 In the Data Log Setup editor click the Log Triggers tab tag 1 _Eube Fie ionsgemen Log Tringes Tape toes Configuring data logging 2 Click a button to specify a log trigger and fill in any additional information See the topics below for information on the different types of log triggers Logging periodically Periodic logging is used to take a snapshot of all tag values at a particular point in time You can use the dBASE IV narrow dBASE IV wide or ODBC storage format for periodic logging For periodic logging to dBASE IV files the dBASE IV wide file format is most efficient for storing the data 1 Click Periodic 2 In the Interval field type a time and click a time unit to specify how often tag values will be logged All tags in the model will be logged each time this interval expires Do not set the interval faster than the scan class rate OPC update rate or DDE poll rate or you will log redundant data For information about scan classes see Scanning for new tag values on page 2 15 For information about update rates see Scanning for new tag values on page 3 15 You can change the periodic log rate at runtime as described on page 7 44 However the runtime change affects the current data log session only When you stop and restart the model RSView32
124. of the expression For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be half the full height Howirontsl Esai tion price Ponor Honora Sidar wapen Side m gyeh ol eet O ee Gio O A Haight Expression Flow Poio Tage Ej Erenin Verio Change Percer Anchor Top An kai raer ai Aine F io Wiid Brimi Deea fm PO ten Bette core oir To configure height animation 1 Select the object When the object is first selected its height is 100 percent 2 Click the Height tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the object s height 12 23 Animating graphic objects Set the minimum height for the object by doing one of the following click a handle on the top or bottom of the object and drag it to resize the object type the height you want the object to be when the expression evaluates to its minimum value Click the At Minimum check box Set the maximum height for the object by doing one of the following click a handle on the top or bottom of the object and drag it to resize the object type the height you want the object to be when the expression evaluates to its maximum value Click the At Maximum check box Click an anchor point This is the part of the object
125. of the following double click the trend select the trend place the cursor over it right click to display the context menu and then click Edit Trend select the trend object click Edit on the menu bar and then click Edit Trend 2 Edit the information in any of the fields For detailed information about the fields see Trend configuration on page 13 7 and Pen configuration on page 13 18 3 Click OK Creating expressions This chapter includes instructions for creating expressions description of the components used for building expressions About expressions Sometimes the data you gather from devices is only meaningful when you compare it to other values combine it with other values create a cause effect relationship with other values Expressions allow you to create mathematical or logical combinations of data that return more meaningful values 14 1 Creating expressions Expression components Expressions can be built from tag values constants mathematical relational logical and bitwise operators built in functions if then else logic Where you can use expressions 14 2 Expressions can be used in the following editors Graphic Display You can define an expression to control various aspects of a graphic object s appearance You can also display the value of an expression in numeric and string display objects Derived Tags You can define an express
126. on oO Q true value false valued value2 lt lt A 14 24 Creating expressions Example 2 Nested if then else This expression if statement1 then if statement2 then value1 else value2 else value3 has this interpretation false false y lt lt y 14 25 Setting up navigation An important part of the complete operator interface is the way operators navigate through and interact with your project RSView32 gives you the tools for linking displays and creating an overall project structure that is easy for operators to use This chapter provides examples and ideas for creating a hierarchy of displays examples of how users can move among displays procedures for linking displays Developing a hierarchy of displays A display hierarchy is a series of displays that provide progressively more detail as users move through them A hierarchy should meet the needs of the various users including managers supervisors and operators A hierarchy could include an initial graphic display that serves as a menu an overview of the plant acomprehensive display of each process being monitored process specific displays 15 1 Setting up navigation management summary displays trend displays of historical and realtime data The following illustration shows a display hierarchy Main Menu Graphic Display Link to Historical
127. or the items under the Advanced Objects sub menu The basic steps are 1 Click a drawing tool and drag it to create a box approximately the size you want for the object When you release the mouse button a dialog box opens 2 Configure the object by entering the required information Most advanced objects display information about a tag Therefore as part of configuration you have to supply a tag name or tag placeholder Creating graphic displays Browse Objects described in other chapters Detailed information about configuring certain advanced objects is contained in other chapters The following table lists where you can find information To configure this object See Tag monitor Chapter 4 Creating tags Alarm summary Chapter 6 Configuring alarms Trend Chapter 13 Configuring trends Command line Appendix A ASView32 commands Using tag names When creating advanced objects you can use the name of an existing tag or a tag that is not yet in the tag database If you specify a tag that does not exist you are prompted to create it To supply a tag name do one of the following type a tag name ina Tag Name field or in an Expression field click the Browse button and select a tag from the list Using tag placeholders Tag placeholders provide a way to use one graphic display to represent a number of similar operations For example imagine you are creating displays for a plant that cans corn and
128. other chapters Using tae Names unis gels chek Meee Ree a Using tag placeholders vy cu cash Avei oe tees eer aren Using a parameter file to replace tag placeholders Listing tag names to replace tag placeholders Creating numeric and string input fields Using input fields at runtime 54 s4 sce tiie edeeeaess Continuously updating tag values 006 So eee ee are ee eee are re ere re ee are eter DAN RSView32 commands oiiiitsda hee vee ea Using the on screen keyboard 0004 Creating numeric and string display fields Creating labels tnd oad aa are tines Se SU ee Creating arrows sia oe ih eT EENE eee ee Creating uttonS srs cote hot taes oritis ieni ts Editing a button object aca ccd s husce ta cnt eek baad Reshaping a button object wars sass ae Pees ee 11 21 11 21 11 22 11 23 11 23 11 24 11 25 11 27 11 27 11 28 11 28 11 29 11 29 11 30 11 30 11 31 11 32 11 32 11 33 11 35 11 35 11 36 11 37 11 37 11 37 11 38 11 40 11 42 11 46 11 46 11 47 11 47 11 48 11 49 11 52 11 53 11 55 11 58 11 59 11 Contents 12 Using input fields at runtime continued Creating a recipe field sicuiits ete da eS Sa 11 59 Creating a tecipe es ind pave jisa pica mcm Re aie 11 60 Using a recipe at runtime 65 oven cake oeeencken bee 11 63 Replacing text associated with objects 06 11 66 Creating and editing OLE objects yc 400s
129. pce eae ees 11 67 Other methods for inserting OLE objects 11 69 Converting OLE objects x45 asennad Ga aawae nee 11 69 Creating and editing ActiveX objects 2 000 eee 11 71 Using the ActiveX Property Panel 11 73 Using the ActiveX Toolbox 2c cece 11 75 Naming graphic objects ox sind conan cemonsianss raw dwiete 11 77 Working with objects 5 fo 45 ae eae Sed olde eee eas 11 78 Moving OBJECTS Ho iia scien aoe bien wee oes awe 11 78 Copying objects sa453 haben ie eae leaders 11 79 Duplicating objects kis sates eee Naame ems 11 81 Resizing objects suigeigee ated weak ates tots VERE 11 82 Arranging O DIECIS new oh ea ae dancay a wae s Rea oa 11 83 Grouping and ungrouping objects 11 83 Performing group editing Ses ict wins tacos cyesed ACs 11 86 Stacking objects nuenian ei tke Sole Gate PAE a s 11 86 Aligning objects esa ett a ak BAe ale portotaaie eh 11 88 Spacing Objects 34 945 surre a ra Suara 11 91 Flipping objects ainw ee eke he webs eat Eee abe ae 11 92 Applying colors rea ik hes pe ER IRSA Co EPRI 11 93 Applying fill patterns fsb oy tag ex vbpsongpe vs pe Acree 11 94 Selecting fill patterns si c3 c0ns otter cake on eaiee wba 11 94 Applying fill patterns s3 35 oes eh eee be eres baba 11 94 How colors and patterns work 000 eee 11 95 Changing line properties 235 5 rie55 ex hee tia dessa 11 95 Peekingat objects inn vinsien ac empan Lem ieA deem aea 11 96 Creating a
130. recipe file at runtime 1 At development time in a graphic display create an input field for each value the recipe is to contain Create a recipe field for the display Save the graphic display At runtime type values in the input fields Type a file name in the recipe field and press Enter The recipe dialog box opens with the name in the recipe file field If the display has been set up to use the on screen keyboard pressing Enter brings up the on screen keyboard Pressing the Download button on the on screen keyboard opens the Recipe dialog box where you can save the recipe file To save the values in the input fields and at the same time create a recipe file click Save A recipe file is created When the Recipe icon is selected the file appears in the right pane of the Project Manager 11 61 Creating graphic displays Example Creating a recipe file at runtime The following display was used to create a recipe file for chocolate chip cookies PER us Dry Gand Chooalste Chips Pec Numeric input ge gazaeernineey fields String input Baich Destas riptin Reipa File field Phocolate chip pacan cook las Bi ties Recipe field A Index number Value Tag name _ 11 62 This is the recipe file that was created CH_CHIPS Reeipa La Liquids hb Dry Goods 47 Ghocolate chips 107 Pecans Chocolate chip pecan cookies BatchDescription Cr
131. save the data log model RSView32 informs you if the fields in a selected table are not in the order or of the type required to log data In this case you must edit the table as described in the documentation for the ODBC relational database you are using See Data log ODBC format on page 16 15 for information about the order and type of fields needed to log data to an ODBC database To automatically create the tables at the data source you specified type the table names to use in the table fields then click Create Tables Delete the name in a table field if you don t want to create that table If RSView32 is unable to create the tables automatically you must create the tables manually Follow the instructions in Using an existing ODBC data source on page 7 8 or see the example next If RSView32 cannot create an index automatically a message informs you that you must create it manually as described in the example on page 7 20 8 If the ODBC database you are using requires that you enter a password to connect to it click the Login Required checkbox and enter your user ID and password The use of this option is database dependent For example you must log in to SQL Server but you may not need to log in to Microsoft Access depending on how your database is configured 7 15 Configuring data logging 7 16 Example Creating a new ODBC data source This example shows how to create a new ODBC data s
132. security codes The following security codes are set up the DataLogOn command is assigned security code B agraphic display named Boiler is assigned security code D atag named Tag is assigned security code E In the User Account editor the following security codes are assigned Alice is assigned security codes B D and E Simon is assigned security codes B and D Oem Accuunic This means that Alice has access to the command the display and the tag Simon has access to the command and display but not the tag Adding security Summary of steps The steps involved in setting up security are Before you begin assigning security codes to RSView32 commands and macros in the Security Codes editor assigning security codes to graphic displays and OLE objects with verb animation in the Graphic Display editor assigning security codes to tags in the Tag Database editor assigning security codes to users in the User Accounts editor Before you begin gather a list of RSView32 commands and macros For a complete list of RSView32 commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help graphic displays OLE objects with verb animation and tags users or groups of users requiring accounts Configuring security codes In the Security Codes editor you create a list of RSView32 commands and macros and then assign a security code to each item in the list Here you can also turn off strict security
133. server This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored Ctrl PgDn also downloads the value in the selected input field The Enter key also downloads the value in the selected input field However if the E parameter is used with the Display command the Enter key is disabled unless the Display On Screen Keyboard option is selected in the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box If the selected input field is a recipe field pressing the Enter key opens the Recipe dialog box A 33 RSView32 commands DownloadAll DriverPrimary DriverSecondary DriverToggle A 34 DownloadAll Writes the values in all input fields of the active graphic display to the programmable controller or server This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored PgDn also downloads all the values in the input fields DriverPrimary lt channel gt Switches from the secondary driver to the primary driver on the specified channel lt channel gt The number of the channel 1 through 4 that is being switched from its secondary to primary driver DriverSecondary lt channel gt Switches from the primary driver to the secondary driver on the specified channel lt channel gt The number of the channel 1 through 4 that is being switched from its primary to secondary driver DriverToggle lt channel gt Switches f
134. slider object 1 In the Graphic Display editor create a slider object or copy a slider object from a library 2 Open the Animation dialog box and click the Horizontal Slider tab 3 In the Graphic Display editor select the slider button 4 In the Tag field of the Animation dialog box specify a tag name 12 9 m Animating graphic objects 5 In the Graphic Display editor drag the button object to the position that will indicate the lowest number in the range 12 10 Animating graphic objects In the Animation dialog box set this position by clicking the At Minimum check box Horizontal Offset Pixels At Minimum M o At Maximum rf 6 In the Graphic Display editor drag the button object to the position that will indicate the highest number in the range F In the Animation dialog box set this position by clicking the At Maximum check box At Minimum M oo At Maximum vir 7 To save the settings click Apply Horizontal Offset Pixels When you finish configuring the button object it returns to its starting position 12 11 Animating graphic objects Configuring visibility animation With visibility animation an object becomes visible or invisible based on a tag value or the result of a logical expression If an object is invisible no other animation attached to the object is evaluated to prevent unnecessary processing Aram aii o
135. status bit for the tag is set in the value table which notifies other applications that an alarm fault has been generated the Alarm Type column in the alarm summary states that the tag is in Alarm Fault When the faulty thresholds are returned to their normal operating range the alarm fault condition is cleared The out of alarm fault status is generated and logged and alarms for that tag resume normal operation Deadband With certain kinds of measured values such as line pressure tag values can fluctuate rapidly above and below a critical threshold Where such conditions exist you can create a deadband as a buffer to prevent the fluctuations from triggering and retriggering unnecessary alarms If the threshold is increasing monitoring rising values the deadband range lies below the threshold If the threshold is decreasing monitoring falling values the deadband lies above the threshold The following illustration shows an increasing threshold of 4 000 rpm with a deadband value of 500 rpm In this example the rpm would have to fall to 3 500 and then rise above 4 000 rpm before it would retrigger the alarm 6 5 m Configuring alarms rpm In alarm In alarm again Threshold time 40218 LULIT Use the deadband carefully in safety critical applications In the above example the variable would have to fluctuate by more than 500 rpm before retriggering an alarm A deadband ran
136. tag values Data logs can also use the ODBC storage format See also ODBC Macro A series of commands and or symbols stored in an ASCII text file The name of the macro file is then used like a command When the file name is entered the macro runs Created in the Macro editor Memory tag An analog digital or string tag with memory as its data source The value for a memory tag comes from RSView32 s internal value table Configured in the Tag Database editor Method An ActiveX attribute the actions triggered by the ActiveX object in response to an external action on the object such as a mouse click NetDDE See DDE Node name For communication with devices a node name combines a channel number and a station address to uniquely identify a programmable controller For DDE communications a node name combines a DDE application and topic to uniquely identify a DDE server For OPC communications the name of the OPC server Generally referred to as a node in RSView32 Configured in the Node editor 6 5 m Glossary Object key A type of control key that is assigned to a graphic object Configured in the Graphic Display editor See also Key definition ODBC Open Database Connectivity Data log models using the ODBC storage format store data directly in an ODBC compliant database OLE Object Linking and Embedding a way to transfer and share information among Windows applications OLE object A graphic object create
137. the toolbar Creating graphic displays Setting up the display The Display Settings dialog box contains many options for defining the appearance of a graphic display You can edit these options any time during the drawing process To set up a graphic display use the Display Settings dialog box To open the Display Settings dialog box do one of the following click Display Settings on the Edit menu right click in an empty area of the display and then click Display Settings on the context menu Tiaplin Sotings Properties Batea p Ciapa Type emiso T hie r On Top a F dbs aipa Faraj Capea aie dher Dep iena Ho r The Bar E piem ben T hiramgp Deion F bimini oe rion M Diret hian vardia of Autini Chow Lac Anri wain Saving the display settings Ta E ee Coren Se C Speri Sane is Prais ne at Fe Aive Dl ppb tn tee Pea od Wi Far betel D Pan Sooke Foange E Uaa Cima Pipik D Bpad Peatanig Feah mea a maryo Bacaymued Dolor wo Cancel Sree etm Hen You can save the settings for the current graphic display or you can save the settings as the default for all new graphic displays To save the settings for the current display click OK 11 11 Creating graphic displays Set as Default 11 12 Creating a default To create your own default settings click Set as Default When you open a new graphic display it will use the display setting
138. the RSLinx drivers with a direct connection the drivers must be installed on the same computer as RSView32 Once the drivers are configured RSView32 automatically starts the driver software whenever communication with a programmable controller is required for example to test run a graphic display or to run a project WULE You must use the version of RSLinx that came with your RSView32 software This version has been tested for compatibility with RSView32 Other versions may not function correctly Selecting a driver in RSView32 To select a driver in RSView32 the driver must first be configured in RSLinx All configured drivers appear in the RSView32 Channel editor Primary or Secondary Communication Driver fields If the Channel editor is open when you add a driver in RSLinx close the Driver list by clicking another part of the editor and then re open the list 2 5 m Setting up direct driver communications Configuring channels To configure a channel 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder B System 2 Open the Channel editor by doing one of the following i double click the Channel icon Channel B Node IM Scan Class right click the Channel icon and then click Show E Tag Database Channel x Define up to four different Channel communication Network Type DH x Messages E channels F Primary Communication Driwer Click here Specify the Nona
139. the RSLinxOPCRemote program provided on the RSLinx CD to register the RSLinx Gateway on the computer on which RSView32 is installed inthe Node editor set up a remote OPC node for each PLC For more information about setting up an OPC node see page 3 5 create tags For more information about creating tags see page 4 13 At runtime use the same login name and password for the computer running RSLinx Gateway and for the computer running RSView32 If this is not practical on the computer running RSLinx configure DCOM to grant the RSView32 user access to the RSLinx computer For more information about configuring DCOM see the Help supplied with the DCOMCNFG utility 17 10 Using networks Example Configuring an OPC node for RSLinx Gateway The following example describes how to create a node to connect to RSLinx Gateway as a remote OPC server Server Name RSLinx OPC Server or RSLinx Remote OPC Server If you are using RSLinx 2 0 the driver name is RSLinx OPC Server If you are using RSLinx 2 1 the driver name is RSLinx Remote OPC Server You don t need to specify a vendor or version number Access Path PLC _HVAC1 The access path is the DDE OPC topic name in RSLinx The figure below shows how the node looks in the Node editor i Kod REE Danie O D e i pEr C jii ire Cie Pinger prec E Erabi Sareea EE Tre Le Progen Local Bemis areas SPHOUCTION Z Acces Path PUCAT Upisa fsi 00 marae Name
140. the changes or click Cancel to discard the changes 11 77 Creating graphic displays Working with objects Once you have drawn an object you can select the object and edit it You can move objects copy objects duplicate objects resize objects except text objects Moving objects You can move objects using the mouse or the keyboard The keys give you fine positioning allowing you to move objects in small increments To drag objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 Place the pointer on an object not on the edge or on the handles 3 Drag the objects to the desired position TTT S Select the object Drag the object to the desired position You can move several objects at once by selecting them all and then dragging one of the selected objects _ 11 78 Creating graphic displays To move objects in small increments 1 Select one or more objects 2 Hold down Shift while you press an arrow key Holding Shift is the same as pressing the left mouse button Use the plus and minus keys to increase or decrease per press the distance moved by the arrow keys Copying objects To copy objects you can drag and drop objects copy and paste objects to and from the clipboard Dragging and dropping objects You can drag and drop objects between displays This is particularly useful for copying objects from a graphic library To drag objects between displays 1 Selec
141. third party applications on the same computer see Sharing tag values locally on page 16 24 For information about connecting to third party applications on a network see Connecting to RSLinx Gateway as a remote OPC server on page 17 10 DDE servers provide a way to connect an RSView32 station the DDE client to communication devices such as Siemens or Modicon For details see the topics in this chapter athird party DDE server such as Microsoft Excel or Visual Basic For details about connecting to third party applications on the same computer see Sharing tag values locally on page 16 24 Setting up OPC and DDE communications Overview of OPC communications The following illustration shows the different ways RSView32 can use OPC for communications RSView32 OPC client module Computer running RSView32 Third party RSServer Third party application OPC server with OPC server support OPC network link via DCOM PLC network Network or third party communication link Remote Remote Remote Non Allen Bradley Non Allen computer computer computer programmable Bradley device RSLinx RSView32 Srd party controller Gateway OPC server OPC server OPC server 3 3 m Setting up OPC and DDE communications Overview of DDE communications D 3 4 Computer running RSView32 The following illustration shows the different ways RSView32 can use DDE for communicatio
142. to 1 the RSView32 station acknowledges all tags associated with this acknowledge bit and RSView32 logs a remote acknowledgment to the alarm log file The bit is set only once per acknowledgment To have the acknowledge bit automatically reset set back to 0 when the tag goes back into alarm check the Auto Reset box Otherwise the programmable controller must reset the bit For more information see Acknowledge bit globally acknowledging alarms on page 6 16 Alarm Handshake In the Handshake Bit field type the name of the tag that refers to the handshake bit s address When a tag goes into alarm the handshake bit is set to 1 To have the handshake bit automatically reset set back to 0 when the tag goes out of alarm check the Auto Reset box Otherwise the programmable controller must reset the bit For more information see Handshake bit on page 6 18 6 45 Configuring alarms Configuring alarms for digital tags These are the main steps to configure alarms for digital tags configure alarm states configure the messages that are sent when a tag goes out of alarm and when an operator acknowledges an alarm configure advanced features such as handshake Alarm states 1 Click the Alarm States tab Digna Alarm Aam Sisto j Mam jiga Bdr l Tay Hopper lorem JE i Ajam Tepe dicen iiobel femarqnncy Sikatan roe OF T Any Go C Chagai m Os Chagges m Oe 2 Fill in the fields a
143. to open the Command Wizard and choose it The command or macro is the action that will occur when the key is pressed or released You can type multiple commands or macros If you do separate them with a semi colon or type them on separate lines 8 If you want an action to repeat while the key is held down type the RSView32 command or macro name in the Repeat Action field The repeat action repeats at the rate specified in the Keyboard properties of the Windows Control Panel Click OK to save the global key file Running global key files Use the RSView32 Key command to run global key files Type this command in a macro or anywhere else you can use an RSView32 command Tye Wm You cannot run more than one global key file at a time If you try to run more than one file the files are not merged Instead the second file overrides the first file 15 21 Setting up navigation To start running a global key file do one of the following Inthe Startup editor select the Global Key File check box and specify the file you want to run On the command line or in a macro type Key lt file gt lt file gt the name of the global key file without an extension To stop running a global key file On the command line or in a macro type Key R R removes all key definitions For a complete list of RSView32 commands and command syntax see Appendix A RS View32 commands or see Help 15 22 Sh
144. type Hopper1 FlourLevel the same tag that was used in the Fill tab Configure the color for the normal state in the list box click A inthe Value field leave the value as 0 for Line and Fill colors click Solid for each open the color palette and click gray the same gray used for the rectangle Animating graphic objects Configure the color for the first warning in the list box click B Yellow in the Value field type 80 G for Line and Fill colors click Blink ime C Sot e Bie ED for Line and Fill open the color palettes and click gray for the re Sd oe first color and yellow for the second color Configure the color for the second warning Red in the list box click C G in the Value field type 95 tne C gid a pi for Line and Fill colors click Blink mo sod 7 ok for Line and Fill open the color palettes and click gray for the first color and red for the second color 7 Click Apply Configuring fill animation With fill animation the level of fill in an object changes based on a tag s value in relation to its minimum and maximum values The object s fill level is proportional to the value of the expression For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be half full Fill animation does not affect string input numeric input or recipe fields nor does it affect arrow objects It also does not affect hollow
145. values The trend provides operators with a way of tracking plant activity as it is happening You can plot data for as many as sixteen tags on one trend use shading to emphasize when a particular tag crosses a reference value create a trend that is part of a graphic display or acts as the entire graphic display The illustration on the following page shows a trend that has been added to a graphic display 13 1 Configuring trends Trend object Key concepts 13 2 mi rr p jP F AIEE oe uF i Trend object A trend object is created in the Graphic Display editor It can be created and edited like any other advanced object Trend dialog box The Trend dialog box contains two tabs for configuring the appearance and content of the trend Trend Configuration and Pen Configuration By filling in the fields under these tabs you specify what kind of data the trend will plot and how the data will look Configuring trends Both of these lines are pens Pens can be different colors widths and symbols so operators can easily distinguish one pen from another Data source The data displayed in a trend can come from two sources For realtime trends data comes from the value table as it is collected For historical trends data comes from a data log model s set of files Historical trends can also be set up to display data from a single log file at a time This is called file based tre
146. values data You specify the type of data to collect when to collect it and where to store it by defining a data log model The data that is collected is stored in dBASE IV dbf format or ODBC Open Database Connectivity format You can display the data in trends archive it for future use or analyze it using third party software such as Microsoft Excel Seagate Crystal Reports and Microsoft Visual FoxPro What is a model A data log model defines which tags to log data for when to log the data and what file to log the data to In the model you also specify the format of the log files ABASE IV or ODBC and when to create and delete the files How to use multiple data log models At runtime up to 20 models can run simultaneously Use multiple data log models to store related information in separate files log groups of tags at different rates log groups of tags based on events 7 1 m Configuring data logging Summary of steps To set up a data log model specify what format to use where to store data log data primary and secondary paths when to create and delete log data what actions will trigger logging which tags to log data for what to call the model About data log storage formats D 7 2 For easy access logged data is stored in either dBASE IV dbf format or using the ODBC connectivity standard If you use the dBASE IV format data log files are created in sets T
147. want to switch to computer For OPC servers the computer name server name name server and access path if in use for the OPC server you name laccess want to switch to Separate the access path from the path server name with the character application For DDE servers the application and topic separated topic by the character for the DDE server you want to switch to When you use the NodeSwitch command to change a node s address or server information the change appears in the Node editor s spreadsheet If the Node editor is open when you use the command the change won t appear until you ve refreshed the display by closing and re opening the editor Parameter file In edit mode without the parameter opens the Parameter editor with the parameter opens the specified parameter file file The name of a parameter file without a file extension Password Displays the Password dialog box so users can change their password Users must already be logged in to use this command RSView32 commands PlayWave Position Pause lt seconds gt Specifies a pause between the execution of two commands You can use this command in macros from the command line or as an action for a button All commands or macros that follow the Pause command must not be asynchronous preceded by the amp sign otherwise the Pause command has no effect lt seconds gt The number of seconds that will elapse between the
148. was altered in the programmable controller or server This parameter is useful if the network is in poor condition or susceptible to noise interference If the verification fails the error message is logged to the activity log activity bar or printer using the Tag Write category Specify where to send Tag Write errors using the Categories tab of the Activity Log Setup editor lt tag_name gt The name of an analog or digital tag Undefine lt symbol gt Deletes a symbol definition that was created using the Define command Example The Undefine command Undefine test Deletes the definition for the symbol test that was previously created with the Define command Undefine Deletes all symbol definitions See also Define A 59 RSView32 commands UploadAll VbaEdit VbaExec A 60 Upload In a graphic display reads a value from the programmable controller or server and displays it in the selected input field This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored Ctrl PgUp also uploads the value to the selected input field UploadAll In a graphic display reads values from the programmable controller or server and displays them in all the input fields This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored PgUp also uploads all the values to the input fields Vbakdit program_name
149. when the button is released mouse down no action mouse up Set lt tag gt to 1 Reset Sets the specified tag to 0 when the button is released mouse down no action mouse up Set lt tag gt to 0 Toggle Sets the specified tag to 0 or 1 depending on its current state If the tag s value is 0 the tag is set to 1 when the button is pressed If the tag s value is any non zero value the tag is set to 0 when the button is pressed Momentary On Sets the specified tag to 1 when the button is pressed mouse button is pressed and held down and sets the tag to 0 when the button is released mouse button is released Momentary Off Sets the specified tag to 0 when the button is pressed mouse button is pressed and held down and sets the tag to 1 when the button is released mouse button is released Command Runs the specified RSView32 command or macro In the Press action Repeat action and Release action fields type an RSView32 command or macro or press the button to open the Command Wizard You must specify either a press or release action both are not required If you specify a repeat action the action is repeated at the rate specified in the Repeat rate field for as long as the mouse button is held down Pressing the Enter key does not cause a repeat action to be executed because Windows interprets this as a series of press actions so the repeat action is not carried out The Enter key works for the press
150. which means commands or macros issued from somewhere other than the command line such as from a graphic object with touch animation are not checked for security For details see Using strict security on page 10 7 10 3 Adding security E3 System To open the Security Codes editor H Channel 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder ee Node WI Scan Class 2 Open the Security Codes editor by doing one of the following a gasni double click the Security Codes icon E User Accounts right click the Security Codes icon and then click Show kal 5 ecurty Codes l Baur thy Codes Gormend EF ALLT ey Beary Tode t a Demplon Dasal undsinad objad sacenty code Security codes RSView32 has 17 security codes an asterisk and the letters A through P The asterisk is for unlimited access and the letters are for limited access The letters are not hierarchical that is all letters provide the same level of security You do not have to use all of the security codes nor do you have to assign the codes in a particular order For example you can choose to use only the codes D and P and you can assign P before you assign D 10 4 Adding security The default The first record in the spreadsheet is called Default Any commands or macros that are not listed in the spreadsheet use the security code selected for the default You can change the security code for the default Initially it is
151. will always appear behind On Top displays and will be replaced by Replace displays Use Overlay with care as keeping multiple displays open can affect system performance adversely Keep at Back Check this box if you always want this graphic display at the back However we recommend that you use the On Top display type to control the layering of displays Note that you must choose the Overlay option to use Keep at Back On Top Use this option to keep the graphic display on top at all times It will remain on top even if another display has focus However if more than one graphic display of the On Top type is open at once the display that has focus or had the most recent focus appears on top Use the PullForward PushBack and SetFocus commands to cycle through multiple On Top and Overlay screens 11 13 Creating graphic displays 11 14 Allowing multiple running copies Use this option with displays of type Overlay or On Top Check this box to allow more than one copy of the graphic to be displayed at runtime When this option is not selected running displays are brought to the foreground when they are called via the Display command rather than a new copy being loaded You can also run multiple copies without checking this option by using the Display command with different parameter files for each copy of the display For example to display two copies of the same graphic in different places on the screen you could u
152. within the field 7 Click OK Creating a recipe file A recipe file contains tag values for all the numeric and string input fields in a graphic display The recipe file uses index numbers to specify which tag value goes into which input field RSView32 automatically assigns index numbers to input objects and button objects as you create them To check the index number for an object double click the object to open its configuration dialog box and then check the number in the Index field For details about index numbers see Using index numbers on page 12 43 Two ways to create a recipe file You can create a recipe file with the Recipe editor or at runtime you can create a recipe file by specifying a file name in the recipe field and then saving values to that file Creating graphic displays E Graphics fax Display E Library a Parameters n Recipe To create a recipe file with the Recipe editor 1 3 Open the Recipe editor Type one entry per line Type one entry for each input field in the display You can have up to 500 entries An entry is the index number a comma and the value you want to load into the input field with no spaces Index numbers must start at one and increase by one If you want you can include the tag name preceded by an exclamation mark as a comment Tag names are automatically added to the file when values are written to the file Save the file To create a
153. 0 15 decimal Applies to analog members only Example R67 123 EN D 17 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers D 18 SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files bit member addressing optional syntax Fnnn eee MNE F nnn optional eee MNE File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Bit member mnemonic see mnemonic tables starting on page D 23 Example C77 99 OV SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files bit member addressing by bit address optional syntax Fnnn eee bb F File type T Timer C Counter R Control Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers nnn optional File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control eee Element number 0 255 decimal bb optional Bit number Timer 13 15 Counter 10 15 Control 8 11 13
154. 0 eee cece eee eee eee ees D 23 Timer mnemonics 00 c eee eee ee ee ee eee eee D 23 Counter Mnemonics 0 cece eee ee eens D 23 Control mnemonics 000s cece ee ee eee eee D 23 PID mnemonics 0 ccc ec eee eee eens D 24 PID mnemonics continued 000eee eee D 25 Message Mnemonics 5 4564 cs 0 ee Sowers oA eee eS D 25 Block transfer mnemonics 0 eee eee D 26 Token data mnemonics cece eee eee eee D 26 SFC status mnemonics 0 00 e eee eee eee D 26 Appendix E Station Addressing for Nodes Connecting to Allen Bradley Devices Local station addressing 4 0c4c be aeeedcehetine casts E 1 FAOSE MAIC ssie er eiia wail ence wae ates mete aris E 2 Remote station addressing i i ie dee etneed ice saved ete cs E 2 DH and DH networks bridged by a 1785 KA E 2 DH and DH 485 networks bridged by a1785 KA5 E 4 Multiple DH networks connected by a Pyramid Integrator 4c civiwa eked y iawn wigan E 6 DH and DH connected to a TCP IP network by a Pyramid Integrator ioac weit aca eehe rrr E 8 Glossary Index 1 22 Preface Thank you for choosing RSView32 RSView32 is an integrated package for developing and running automation applications Designed for use with Microsoft Windows NT and Windows 9x RSView32 gives you all the tools you need to create effective monitoring and supervisory control applications About the documentation The RSView32 documentation se
155. 0 This column Contains SQL Data Type Length TagName The tag name SQL_VARCHAR 40 or SQL_CHAR Taglndex The index number assigned to the SQL_SMALLINT 2 tag name or SQL_INTEGER Taglype The tag type SQL_SMALLINT 1 2 analog tag 3 digital tag 4 string tag TagDataType The tag data type SQL_SMALLINT 2 O long 1 float 2 string 16 16 Sharing data with other Windows applications Creating a pivot table in Microsoft Excel Use a pivot table to display and analyze data from any narrow format dbf log file The basic steps for creating a pivot table are Open Microsoft Excel and start the PivotTable Wizard Select the data source Join tables and select data Organize the pivot table Once you have created the pivot table you can then display the data in a chart This additional step is also described Starting the PivotTable Wizard 1 Open Microsoft Excel 2 On the Data menu click PivotTable Report If you did not install the Microsoft Office Data Access components the PivotTable Report item cannot be selected from the Data menu in Excel The PivotTable Wizard appears PivotT able Wizard Step 1 of 4 1 1x Where is the data that you want to analyze or database Multiple consolidation ranges Ca z Cancel Finish 16 17 Sharing data with other Windows applications 16 18 Selecting the data source 1 In the PivotTable Wizard click External Data Source and then
156. 1 30 ellipses 11 30 freehand 11 32 labels 11 52 lines 11 30 numeric display fields 6 10 11 49 numeric input fields 11 42 OLE objects 10 10 11 67 polygons 11 31 polylines 11 31 recipe fields 11 59 rectangles 11 29 simple objects 11 28 G 7 squares 11 29 string display fields 6 10 11 49 string input fields 11 42 tag monitor 4 28 text 11 33 trend 13 5 wedges 11 32 Graphic objects G 4 aligning 11 88 animating See Animation arranging 11 83 11 91 converting 11 100 to wallpaper 11 98 copying from other Windows applications 11 1 creating expressions for 14 2 cutting and pasting 11 79 deselecting 11 7 duplicating 11 81 Index Graphic objects continued editing 11 78 11 86 flipping 11 92 formatting 11 93 grouping and ungrouping 11 83 importing 11 99 moving 11 78 naming 11 77 12 34 positioning 11 86 with grid 11 8 replacing text in 11 66 reshaping 11 36 11 59 resizing 11 82 rotating 11 9 using keys to work with See Special keys using tags and placeholders in 11 37 using with object keys 12 40 viewing hidden objects 11 96 Grid in graphic displays 11 8 in trends 13 10 13 13 13 37 H Handshake bit 6 18 6 45 6 50 HandshakeOff command A 36 HandshakeOn command 6 18 A 37 Height animation 12 23 Help online P 1 Help command A 37 Help files displaying 12 49 Highlight enabling or disabling 11 24 for buttons 11 56 Historical tr
157. 1 79 11 83 Tab 11 47 12 45 A 42 Spreadsheets in editors G 7 Square graphic object 11 29 Startup command in graphic displays 11 22 macro 15 11 settings 18 2 18 6 Startup editor 18 2 StartupConfig command A 57 States in alarms 6 46 in tag monitor 2 18 4 31 Station address G 7 entering 2 13 local E 1 offlink E 9 remote E 2 Status bar 11 3 String display graphic object 11 49 String input graphic object 11 42 11 46 and on screen keyboard 11 25 11 48 String tags 4 2 G 7 configuring 4 17 Summary command A 57 Suppressed command A 58 Suppressed List editor 6 12 6 70 SuppressOff command A 58 I 17 Index SuppressOffAll command A 58 SuppressOn command 6 12 6 69 A 58 Symbol commands Define 15 12 A 28 Undefine 15 13 A 59 Symbols 15 7 15 12 G 7 Syntax addressing for PLCs and SLCs D 1 System tags 4 2 B 1 G 8 for alarms 6 11 B 1 for communications 2 18 B 2 for trends 13 28 B 5 System time and date B 4 T Tag browser using 4 22 Tag commands Equal 14 2 14 6 A 8 using for memory tags 4 20 Database A 22 DatabaseSync A 22 Monitor A 41 Ramp A 49 Set 4 20 9 1 A 54 Toggle A 59 Tag Database editor 4 4 6 21 6 39 Tag folders 4 7 Tag Monitor editor 4 28 Tag monitor graphic object 2 18 4 27 Tag placeholders 11 36 12 6 G 8 creating 11 38 parameter for Display command A 31 replacing by listing tag names 11 40 replacing using a parameter file 11
158. 1 if retrieving data and O if not Read only YMag Analog Magnification of the vertical axis in percent 0 No magnification 100 Twice the resolution half the range 100 Half the resolution twice the range Read and write YOffset Analog Offset of the vertical axis in percent Moves the view up or down but does not change the time range Read and write System tags User The following tag contains the name of the current user in the activity log file Tag Name Type Function system User String Contains name of logged in user Windows memory resources The following tags are no longer valid Tag Name Type Provides this data system MemoryB1Meg Analog This tag is no longer valid and has a value of 0 system MemoryGDI Analog This tag is no longer valid and has a value of 0 system MemoryUser Analog This tag is no longer valid and has a value of 0 system MemoryVirtual Analog This tag is no longer valid The value is unreliable B 7 m Differences between RSView32 and ControlView This appendix describes how to import ControlView and ControlView Builder projects into RSView32 differences between RSView32 and ControlView and ControlView Builder Importing ControlView projects Activity log You can import most components from a Control View or ControlView Builder project into RSView32 using the Control View Project Import Wiz
159. 16 octal timing bit 17 octal enable bit Example of digital address TCTL 125 17 Example of analog address CPRE 125 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers D D 4 PLC 5 data files Fnnn eee bb F nnn eee bb optional File type B Binary N Integer D Decimal BCD F Floating point A ASCII File number 3 999 decimal For direct driver communication binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Element number 0 999 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Not applicable to floating point file types Example of bit address B3 173 15 Example of word address N7 12 PLC 5 binary files optional syntax Fnnn bbbbb F nnn bbbbb Example B3 1024 File type B Binary File number 3 999 decimal For direct driver communication the default file number 3 is used if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file O 15999 decimal Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers PLC 5 1 0 and status files F ee bb F File type O Output I Input S Status ee Element number For I O files PLC 5 10 0 037 octal PLC 5 12 0 037 octal PLC 5 15 0 037 octal PLC 5 25 0 077 octal For status files 0 31 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word Fo
160. 2 storage format 7 2 narrow dbf 7 3 16 12 ODBC 7 1 7 8 16 15 wide dbf 7 3 16 13 Data log models 7 1 7 11 7 42 Data Log Setup editor 7 9 7 10 A 23 Index Data logging G 2 and events 7 39 9 1 changing rate at runtime 7 44 A 23 choosing the data to log 7 41 creating expressions for 14 2 differences from ControlView C 4 displaying data in trends 7 45 13 13 on demand 7 38 7 40 A 26 paths 7 22 A 25 backup 7 21 moving data between 7 27 A 23 switching at runtime 7 26 7 42 7 43 K 26 setting up 7 1 7 36 A 25 starting and stopping 7 46 18 7 A 24 A 25 using a new ODBC data source 7 13 7 16 using an existing ODBC data source 7 8 7 13 Data logging commands DataLog A 23 DataLogChangeRate A 23 DataLogMergeToPrimary 7 27 A 23 DataLogNewFile 7 32 A 24 DataLogOff 7 47 A 24 DataLogOn 7 46 A 25 DataLogPath 7 43 A 25 DataLogRenameFile A 25 DataLogSnapshot 7 39 9 1 A 26 DataLogSwitchBack 7 26 A 26 Data source for tags 4 2 4 18 DDE 3 4 G 3 and Microsoft Excel 3 12 16 25 16 27 and RSLinx 16 28 A 27 and RSServer 3 1 and WINtelligent LOGIC 5 A 27 and WINtelligent RECIPE A 27 poll rate 3 15 RSView32 as client G 2 assigning server to RSView32 tags 4 19 requesting values from server 16 26 setting up 3 5 3 11 RSView32 as server G 7 enabling 16 24 A 52 at startup 18 7 for tag writes 16 27 A 53 setting up local client 16 25 DDE commands DDEExecute
161. 2 10 Disk space monitoring 6 27 Display cache 11 15 15 4 G 3 Display command 15 3 A 30 and events 9 1 and graphic displays 11 19 11 20 11 27 and key lists 12 56 and parameter files 11 38 11 40 and trends 13 26 Display editor See Graphic Display editor Display keys 15 5 G 4 creating 12 52 editing 12 54 key list 12 54 precedence among key types 15 14 Display Settings dialog box 11 11 Display types 15 3 Displays See Graphic displays Documentation for RSView32 P 1 Download command 11 47 11 64 A 33 DownloadAll command 11 47 11 64 A 34 Drawing objects See Graphic object types Graphic objects Driver commands DriverPrimary 2 10 A 34 DriverSecondary 2 10 A 34 DriverToggle 2 10 A 34 EchoOff command 8 13 A 35 EchoOn command 8 13 A 35 Edit mode See Getting Results with RSView32 Editors G 4 Activity Log Setup 8 2 Activity Log Viewer 8 16 Alarm Log Viewer 6 9 6 51 Alarm Setup 6 21 6 22 Alarm Summary 6 52 Channel 2 6 Data Log Setup 7 9 7 10 Derived Tags 5 3 Index Editors continued Display 11 2 Events 9 2 Global Keys 15 19 Library 11 103 Macro 15 8 Node 2 12 3 5 3 11 Parameters 11 39 Recipe 11 61 Scan Class 2 17 Security Codes 10 4 Startup 18 2 Suppressed List 6 12 6 69 Tag Database 4 4 6 21 6 39 Tag Monitor 4 28 User Accounts 10 12 Ellipse graphic object 11 30 Ethernet E 2 E 8 Event ActiveX 12 36 G 4 Event commands Event A 35 EventOf
162. 2 43 A 46 PrevWindow A 46 PrintDisplay 11 104 A 46 PullForward 15 3 A 48 PushBack 15 3 A 49 RecipeEdit A 50 Index using parameter files in A 31 Graphic libraries See Libraries Graphic object types 11 28 Graphic display commands continued RecipeRestore 11 64 A 51 RecipeSave 11 65 A 51 ScreenPrint 11 104 A 53 SendKeys A 54 SetFocus 11 14 A 56 Upload 11 47 11 65 A 60 UploadAll 11 47 11 65 A 60 Graphic Display editor 11 2 Graphic displays G 4 background color of 11 21 caching 11 15 15 4 with the Display command 11 27 A 30 creating 11 1 creating a background for 11 98 creating a template for 11 12 differences from ControlView C 6 displaying alarm information in 6 10 displaying in background A 30 downloading values from 11 42 11 46 moving among 15 1 15 3 A 48 A 49 positioning 11 20 A 32 preventing scroll bars in 11 18 printing 1 8 11 104 A 46 reducing call up time of 11 15 11 27 A 31 replacing text in 11 66 running multiple copies of 11 14 securing 10 9 11 21 sharing at runtime 17 2 sizing 11 17 11 19 A 31 specifying runtime appearance of 11 16 starting at runtime 18 7 startup and shutdown commands for 11 22 testing 11 4 animation 12 6 types 11 13 uploading recipes to 11 59 11 63 uploading values to 11 42 11 46 ActiveX 11 71 12 32 advanced objects 11 36 alarm summary 6 10 6 54 arcs 11 32 arrows 11 53 buttons 11 55 circles 1
163. 3 27 Trend control tags a Petit ines Peale pte iee i ekti 13 28 How the trend control tags work 4 13 30 Creating objects to animate a trend 4 13 31 Masking pens ereenn en SG oboe Hee Sheesh oboe 13 32 Specifying a Start time fis ces aren Vitra aca Pla eco ik 13 33 Using the Trends graphic library 2006 13 35 Setting the name of the Control Tag folder 13 35 Choosing fonts colors and lines eee e eens 13 37 15 Contents 16 Using the trend at tunities d1 ane dua eareed nsnur ennen 13 38 Selecting Pens iier enh a AAEE were eae 13 38 Selecting pOint einna ienaa eee Ea wea ee eee 13 39 Changing the markers color s 04 ssc c424 ona antan hie 13 39 Cutie a trend hen Rane eas nao hes be Roe Aeon Rea 13 40 Editing the trend object iys sks ik pbk aa ee a ene 13 40 Editing the trend configuration 04 13 40 Chapter 14 Creating Expressions A DOULEXPLESSIONS a pery Sai eA oan SPE ee WG Stee 5 14 1 Expression components oi New ted Mewsnys os exter ee 14 2 Where you can use expressions 00 e eee eee 14 2 Using expressions in a command 0006 14 2 Creating expressions lt Sain nies a bas Hind aw VAs Bae 14 3 Expression buttons saan saree pada nec twete eee 14 3 Cutting copying and pasting expressions 14 4 Formatting expressions 0s pai kaw kOe ee Oe oe 14 5 Using the Equal command oo stue Sind cet oan aaipat
164. 38 using in commands A 33 using in expressions 14 8 using in trends 13 19 using the tag parameter 12 46 using with object keys 12 47 Tag substitution 11 66 13 35 1 18 Tag values changing 4 20 displaying in a label object 11 52 downloading 11 42 11 46 logging 4 27 7 41 sharing locally 16 24 sharing over a network 17 5 updating 2 15 3 15 11 46 uploading 11 42 11 46 Tags 4 1 11 36 G 8 See also tag parameter Analog tags Derived tags Digital tags String tags System tags adding alarms to 4 26 6 2 addresses 4 19 and events 9 1 checking in a graphic display 12 58 creating 4 6 4 20 data sources 4 2 4 18 data types 4 15 differences from ControlView C 7 editing 4 12 importing 4 21 4 23 4 25 4 26 logging reads and writes 8 12 securing 10 11 states 2 18 4 32 using in expressions 4 4 12 4 14 8 with built in functions 14 14 using in graphic objects 11 37 using in trends 13 19 using with object keys 12 42 12 54 using with placeholders in commands 15 8 A 3 writing to 16 27 TCP IP 2 9 E 8 G 8 channel network type 2 7 station addressing 17 6 E 1 E 2 Technical support P 2 Text graphic object 11 33 Thresholds for alarms 6 2 6 4 6 41 Time and date 18 12 B 4 Index Timer mnemonics D 23 Toggle command A 59 Token data mnemonics D 26 Toolbars 11 3 11 4 Toolbox ActiveX 11 75 Tooltips adding to graphic objects 11 77 Touch animation 12 27 Trend dialog
165. 4 00 Configuring alarms Creating files when a particular event occurs 1 Click On Event 2 In the Expression field create the expression that will trigger creation of a new file For details on creating expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Example Creating a new file for a new shift You can set up your project so it creates a new log file at the end of a shift or batch process For example create a tag called NextShift In the Alarm Setup editor click On Event and then type NextShift as the expression Expression HaxiShili When the tag evaluates to true a new alarm log file is created to store the data from the new shift Never creating new files Click Never Logged data is added to a single file To manage disk space if a log file grows too large stop alarm monitoring delete the alarm log file and then restart alarm monitoring You cannot delete an alarm log file while RSView32 is monitoring alarms For details about how to monitor disk space see Monitoring disk space on page 18 14 6 27 Configuring alarms Deleting log files You can delete log files after a specified period or once a specified number of files has been created If you never want files deleted leave the check boxes under Delete Oldest Files blank Alarm log files are deleted only when a new file is created So if your project creates a new file each day and deletes the oldest file every third day y
166. 4 is assigned to the tag Tag1 which is then used in a macro Type the following text in a button s press action Tagl 4 Set the value of Tag1 to 4 Display_Detail Tag1 Execute the Display_Detail macro using Tag1 as a parameter In the Display_Detail macro type the following Display Screen 1 Displays a graphic display whose name is Screen plus the value of Tag1 for example Screen 4 RSView32 replaces the placeholder in the command with the tag s current string value The graphic display Screen4 appears Tag placeholders are evaluated before commands are executed You can ensure Tag1 evaluates to 4 by embedding the tag placeholder in a macro not in the button If you include the tag placeholder in the button the tag placeholder evaluates before the value of the tag is set to 4 Tag1 will therefore evaluate to zero the tag s initial value not 4 You don t need to put braces around tag names when using placeholders in commands Precedence Commands take precedence over macros For example if you have a macro called Activity the Activity command will run whenever you try to run the Activity macro RSView32 commands Using the command line Use the command line during development and runtime To use a command line either create a command line within a graphic display by choosing the Command Line tool from the Drawing Tools toolbox or by choosing Command Line from the Objects menu 5 fi
167. 44 6 49 Silence A 57 SilenceAll A 57 Summary A 57 Suppressed A 58 SuppressOff A 58 SuppressOffAll A 58 SuppressOn 6 12 6 69 A 58 Alarm deadband 6 2 6 5 6 45 Alarm events 6 18 Alarm faults 6 5 G 1 Index Alarm log files 6 8 adding remarks at runtime 6 38 and third party applications 6 8 contents of 6 9 6 51 16 9 creating 6 24 deleting 6 28 exporting to ODBC 6 30 logging destinations 6 23 8 3 maximum number of 6 29 naming 6 29 short file names 6 24 sharing at runtime 17 2 storage format ODBC 16 10 storing in version 6 0 format 6 23 Alarm Log Viewer 6 9 6 51 Alarm logging See Alarm monitoring Alarm message types 6 8 6 34 in alarm 6 42 6 47 out of alarm 6 44 6 50 system default 6 35 user default 6 36 Alarm messages 6 37 configuring 6 34 6 43 6 48 Alarm monitoring 6 1 G 2 acknowledge bit 6 16 6 45 6 50 alarm events 6 18 differences from ControlView C 2 handshake bit 6 18 6 45 6 50 starting and stopping 6 71 18 6 Alarm printing suppressing 6 68 Alarm Setup editor 6 21 6 22 Alarm severity 6 7 G 2 configuring 6 32 6 42 6 47 Alarm states 6 7 6 46 Alarm status display C 2 Alarm summary 6 10 G 2 configuring alarm label 6 42 6 47 buttons 6 59 colors 6 7 6 58 fonts 6 57 headings 6 56 creating 6 52 displaying 12 50 filtering data in 6 62 sorting data in 6 65 using commands in 6 66 6 67 using system tags in 6 11 using wildcards in 6 63
168. 5 Events al Macro Global Keys A global key is a key that has been assigned commands or macros At runtime when the key is pressed the assigned action is triggered A global key is active at all times because it is not associated with a particular graphic object or display To create a global key 1 In the Project Manager open the Logic and Control folder 2 Open the Global Keys editor by doing one of the following double click the Global Keys icon right click the Global Keys icon and then click New 15 19 Setting up navigation Untitled Global Keys Miel x Modify Remove Remove All Help 3 Click Add Add Key m Modifiers Cancel I Control M Shift Help 4 Specify a key and if desired click one or both modifiers Some keys are reserved for use by Windows and RSView32 Reserved keys do not appear in the Key field in the Add Key dialog box 15 20 Setting up navigation 5 Click OK The key you add is displayed in the Key field If you specified a modifier the first letter of that modifier is also displayed If you create a label in the next step it will also be listed in this field As you continue to add keys they will be listed here 6 In the Label field if you want type a label for the key 7 In the Press Action field and if desired in the Release Action field specify an RSView32 command or a macro by typing it or by clicking the button
169. 6 Click OK Other methods for inserting OLE objects You can also insert OLE objects by copying the information from the source file onto the clipboard and then choosing Paste Special choosing Insert Object on the Edit menu You can then select an object type or file Converting OLE objects The reasons to convert an object are to change any type of embedded vector based object into a polygon that is more readily manipulated to reduce the size of a graphic display file Embedding an object in a graphic display increases the size of the graphic file because the embedded object includes information about its source application This lets you double click the object and edit it using the source application To reduce the size of the graphic file convert the object to an RSView32 graphic object You can no longer use its source application to edit the object but you can still use the editing tools in the Graphic Display editor to work with the object 11 69 Creating graphic displays To convert an object 1 Do one of the following select the object and cut it to the clipboard copy the object from its source application to the clipboard 2 On the Edit menu click Paste Special The Paste Special dialog box opens 3 Click the Paste or Paste Link button Pails Special Source Linking Soar T Pasta eos Mert LTO 910 Picie Wot eh ie C Pase Link alia r ti Joe in Fiesult Fracas h
170. 71028cs dbf was created in the year 97 month 10 and day 28 The c indicates that this is the third file set created that day The s indicates that this is a file containing string tag data Example Log file set If you were to look in the directory containing the data log files you would find three files with almost the same name 971028ct dbf contains the tag name data 971028cf dbf contains the floating point data from analog and digital tags 971028cs dbf contains the data from string tags Configuring data logging Example of short file names for wide dbf format For wide dbf file format data log files are created in sets of two Example Log file name The log file named 971028dw dbf was created in the year 97 month 10 and day 28 The d indicates that this is the fourth file set created that day The w indicates that this file is in wide file format and may contain both floating point and string tag data Example Log file set If you were to look in the directory containing the data log files you would find two files with almost the same name 971028dt dbf contains the tag name data 971028dw dbf contains the floating point data from analog and digital tags and the string data from string tags 1 7 m Configuring data logging The ODBC storage format D 7 8 Use the ODBC storage format to store your data using an ODBC data source such as Microsoft Access or Microsoft SQL Server The
171. 767 records A record is made up of the items shown below Activity Log Viewer of x Ea z ca DEFAULT Stopping Derived Tags File E Prog 24 pren Derived 2 ags m DEFAULT Stopping Derived Tags File E Progr 13 24 22 Applications Data Log Runtime DEFAULT Stopping Data Log model Paper 13 24 22 Applications Alarm Quarterback DEFAULT Alarm deactivation has completed 13 24 22 Applications Data Log Runtime DEFAULT Stopping Data Log model Process 13 24 22 Commands Command erver DEFAULT Project Stop 13 24 22 Commands Command erver DEFAULT Shutdown sical 2 01 06 99 24 Command erver DEFAULT a i DEFAULT Drag to resize columns The icon at the beginning of the record can be red yellow or blue The colors provide a visual cue to the importance of the record Red indicates an error yellow indicates a warning and blue indicates information Tracking system usage If you have set up security for your project you can use the activity log file to track what users are doing on the system As shown in the figure above when an activity is logged the ID of the current user is also logged 8 17 Configuring activity logging Starting and stopping activity logging 8 18 By default activity logging is on when you start a project However if you need to start or stop activity logging you can use any of the following methods Ways to start activity logging Inthe Macro editor create a startup or login macro
172. 83 647 Floating Point Single precision 32 bit 3 402823E 88 to floating point 1 175494E 38 0 1 175494E 38 to 3 402823E 88 Byte Unsigned 8 bit integer 0 to 255 3 Digit BCD 3 digit binary coded decimal 0 to 999 4 Digit BCD 4 digit binary coded decimal 0 to 9 999 For tags with Device as the data source select the data type that matches the format of the data stored in the programmable controller or Windows application If you are using direct driver nodes use the Default data type to automatically match the data format specified by the address If you are using OPC or DDE nodes do not use the Default data type because the default might not be as expected 4 15 Creating tags For tags with Memory as the data source select the data type that matches the format of the data you will store in the tag Choosing Default is the same as choosing Floating Point TIETE For a tag with a Long Integer data type if the minimum maximum scale offset or initial value is used with a decimal point RSView32 stores the value in floating point format This means that the maximum value for the tag is 16 777 216 which is the maximum integer value for single precision floating point numbers Configuring a digital tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is
173. A Py Tag Proce ape A P Tag Pemi Toney aghraetonped SORE tached Ting Protege BP The Alarm Log Viewer opens displaying the contents of the most recent log file 6 51 Configuring alarms 3 To select another file for viewing click Select Log File on the Records menu One or more log files is displayed The number of files depends on how you set up file management in the Alarm Setup editor Alam Log vireg Laskin aj imio fa gj m S06 100M al db Sii Di Sadh HAFID bidht 206 OD eldhe Bey ed ib HGH dh TO 0ol db 4 Click the file you want to view The contents of the file are then displayed in the viewer 5 To close the viewer click Close on the File menu Creating an alarm summary The alarm summary displays the alarms recorded in the computer s memory To configure an alarm summary specify what data to display and create the format you want the data to appear in At runtime operators can use the alarm summary to view and interact with the alarms To create an alarm summary you can use the Alarm Summary editor in the Project Manager use the Alarm Summary tool in the Graphic Display editor No matter where you create the alarm summary you use the same methods to customize how the information will appear 6 52 Configuring alarms E Alarms Al Alarm Setup ra Alarm Log Viewer Alarm Summary amp Suppressed List Embedding the alarm summary as an object in a gr
174. Button Bar Position Text and Background are the colors the message initially appears in If you select the blink option the default blink colors are the text and background colors reversed Highlight Text and Highlight Background are the colors the message changes to when it is selected If you select the blink option the default colors are the highlight text and highlight background colors reversed When you are finished click OK Formatting buttons You can specify which buttons you want on the button bar and where you want the bar located To choose which buttons to include click Buttons on the Format menu The Buttons dialog box appears If you do not want certain buttons displayed clear the check boxes for those buttons When you are finished click OK If you select the Execute check box the Execute Command dialog box appears For information about using the Execute button see page 6 66 Runtime Buttons M Ack Current M Ack Page M Ack All M Silence Current MV Silence Page M Silence All T Execute M Identify M Filter M Sort Cancel Help 6 59 Configuring alarms The following table describes what the buttons do This button Does this Ack Current Marks the highlighted alarm as acknowledged If a bell is associated with the alarm acknowledging the alarm turns off the bell If the tag has gone out of alarm it is removed from the alarm summary when it is acknowle
175. CmdLineToggle LPRCancel PanelOn Time CmsConfig LPRCapture PathConfig TopLevelOff CVDos LPRConfig PCIMConfig TopLevelOn DataLogExport Macro Plot TouchConfig DataLogRpt Menu PMClear TouchOff DBExp MenuBar PMConfig TouchOn DBlmp MenuBoxOff PMDisplay Trend DBRpt MenuBoxOn PMEventLog TrendRpt DCConfig MenuBoxToggle PMLimits Unload DerivedRpt ModDiag PMRealTime UnsCacheOff DeviceRpt ModemCommand PMSnapshot UnsCacheOn Dial ModemDirectory PMStatus WindowConfig ModemSetUp PMWaveform Differences between RSView32 and ControlView Data log D C 4 The following table lists ControlView commands that have been renamed in RSView32 This ControlView command Is this RSView32 command BatchRestore RecipeRestore BatchSave RecipeSave Hello Login Bye Logout Key KeyEdit Macro MacroEdit RSView32 still has a Key command but this command runs a global key file The KeyEdit command opens a global key file for editing For a list of all RSView32 commands and a definition of the actions they perform see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help You cannot import ControlView data log models into RSView32 In RSView32 data log files are not stored in a circular file set Instead you configure when to create and delete files Information in the data log file is stored in dbf dBase IV file format or in ODBC storage format You can access the information in the dbf file with any third party software that reads dbf suc
176. Command dialog box by clicking Execute on the Data menu Type a command or macro in the Execute Command Text box and then select one or more parameters to append to the command or macro For details about using alarm data with commands see page 6 66 By default the Execute button is not included on an alarm summary The Execute button will be added when a command is assigned to the button For information about adding buttons to an alarm summary see page 6 59 6 13 Configuring alarms 6 14 To run the command macro or VBA program associated with the Execute button either highlight an alarm in the list and then click Execute or double click an alarm in the list For more information about using the Execute button in an alarm summary and for an example see page 6 66 About the Identify button With the Identify button you can specify a command or macro that operators can run when a tag is in alarm Use this button to provide information about an alarm For example use the Display command to open a display that contains instructions on how to handle a motor that is running too fast To set up the Identify button specify a command or macro in the Alarm Identification field in the Advanced tab of the Analog Alarm editor or Digital Alarm editor For details about setting up Identify for analog tags see Advanced on page 6 44 For details about setting up Identify for digital tags see Advanced on page 6 49
177. D 5 Click OK 11 51 Creating graphic displays Label tool Select a label Creating labels Use the Label tool to create fields that display different types of tag information at runtime All the information comes from fields you configure for the tag in the Tag Database editor You can create the following types of labels This label Displays Minimum An analog tag s minimum value Maximum An analog tag s maximum value Status The current status of a digital tag When the tag value is 1 On Label is displayed when the tag value is O Off Label is displayed Units An analog tag s units label Name A tag s name Description A tag s description Off Label A digital tag s off label On Label A digital tag s on label To create a label 1 Click the Label tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw the label field 3 Release the mouse button from the list _ 11 52 Creating graphic displays Arrow tool 4 Fill in the fields as follows In this field Do this Tag Name Specify a tag name or placeholder For information on placeholders see Using tag placeholders on page 11 37 Field Length Type a value to specify the maximum number of characters that will be displayed in this field Be sure the field is long enough to accommodate the label The maximum field width depends on the type of label you are creating Label Type Select a type J
178. Displays can be added to the cache by using the cache parameter with the Display command or by selecting the Cache After Displaying option in the Display Settings dialog box of the Graphic Display editor You can cache up to 40 graphic displays If a display uses the Always Updating option with the Cache After Displaying option the display s shutdown command is executed when you issue the FlushCache command Graphic file In edit mode without the parameter opens the Graphic Display editor with the parameter opens the specified graphic display file file The name of a graphic file without a file extension HandshakeOff Disables alarm handshaking regardless of whether the individual handshake bits are configured This command gives no indication that it has run but will display an error message if not executed properly RSView32 commands HandshakeOn HandshakeOn Enables alarm handshaking By default this setting is off Handshaking can be disabled with the HandshakeOff command This command gives no indication that it has run but will display a message if not executed properly Tee This command will not set the handshake bit for any tag already in alarm when the command is executed Help word Ffile Displays a Windows help file word A word you want to search for in the help file When you specify a search word the command will either open the help file at a topic if the word uniquely ident
179. Equal commands in a startup macro to specify the tag s value The value of a memory tag can also be set using derived tags events or graphic objects Other methods for creating tags In addition to creating tags in the Tag Database editor as described earlier in this chapter you can create tags in a third party application and import them into RSView32 create tags as needed in other RSView32 editors import tags from a PLC or SLC database create tags using the RSView32 Object Model and VBA 4 20 Creating tags Browse button Tags button Creating tags in a third party application You can use a third party spreadsheet editor such as Microsoft Excel to create your tags and then import the tags into RSView32 using the Database Import amp Export Wizard in the RSView32 Tools folder When you import tags they are merged with tags already in the tag database and any tags with the same name are updated with the new information For more information about the Wizard see Using the Database Import amp Export Wizard on page 4 25 Creating tags as needed in other RSView32 editors Any editor that uses tags has access to the tag database You can access the database by doing one of the following click the Browse button or the Tags button whichever is available to open the Tag Browser type anew tag name When you try to save or close a message appears prompting you to create the tag For examp
180. Fj Egronin Wartical Oira Fomin At Minima ju Ad Meodmure Popes I apad i am trot Daia Care Help To configure vertical position animation 1 Select the object 2 Click the Vertical Position tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the vertical position 12 20 Animating graphic objects 4 Set the starting point for the object by dragging the object or by typing a value Click the At Minimum check box 5 Set the ending point for the object by dragging the object or by typing a value Click the At Maximum check box 6 To specify minimum and maximum values click the Specify check box and type the values 7 Click Apply Configuring width animation With width animation an object s width changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression The object s width is proportional to the value of the expression For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be half the full width e ianzonis Eosi aca Pornon Homama Sidar vara Side m auch oh OLE Ymi Eies Flow Posio Tage Ej Eresin Horzontel Change Percent Anchor T Le At Minimo Y a ahem Fi E Camin f Fig Made e a 12 21 Animating graphic objects 12 22 To configure width animation 1 Sel
181. For example if you specify 10 you will have a maximum of 11 alarm log files at any time 10 old ones and the current one When a new set is started the oldest file is deleted If you have set up File Management to delete the oldest files when a new one is started and you are exporting data to an ODBC database make sure you export the data before the oldest file is deleted About alarm log files Alarm information is stored in dBASE IV dbf format How log files are named When a log file is created it is automatically named The name is based on the date the file was created and the type of data it contains The format for the name is YYYYMMDDnz dbf where YYYY are the four digits of the year MMis the month DD is the day nis the sequence letter a b c and so on This letter indicates the sequence files were created in You can have up to 26 files a to z oe 7 per day At midnight the sequence starts at a again zis the file type l is for alarm If you are using short file names or if the path where the log files are stored does not support long file names the format for the name is YYMMDDnz dbf where YY are the last two digits of the year Configuring alarms Example Log file name The log file named 19971028bl dbf was created in the year 1997 month 10 and day 28 The b indicates that this is the second file created that day The indicates that this is an alarm log file Expo
182. Gy Ty E Cancel Help Configuring alarms Tag Names Specify the tag names you want to appear in the alarm summary entering each tag on a separate line You can use wildcards to select tags These are the wildcards This wildcard Does this Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Matches any single character When placed before a tag name excludes the tag When placed before a folder name excludes the tags in the folder By default the Tag Names field contains an which means all tags are displayed If the alarm summary is an object embedded within a graphic display you can also use tag placeholders to specify the tag names to appear in the alarm summary A tag placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 The placeholder can also contain wildcards and folder names See Using tag placeholders on page 11 37 for more information If you use tag placeholders at runtime you must specify the tag each placeholder represents either by using a parameter file or by typing the tag names on the command line You can also use wildcards in the parameter file or on the command line Configuring alarms 6 64 Example Using a parameter file to replace tag placeholders The parameter file called Beans specifies which tags to use for the placeholders in a display 1 bean_weight 2 bean_level 3 bean_temp To run the disp
183. In the Expression area create the expression that will determine the derived tag value For more information on expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions 4 Click Accept 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to create more derived tags Use the Next button to move to a new record in the spreadsheet Editing derived tags D 5 6 You can edit derived tags during development or runtime 1 Open the derived tag file you want to edit 2 Use the Prev and Next buttons to move among derived tags Make the required changes 3 Click Accept to save the changes If you change the derived tag file at runtime the changes do not take effect until you stop running the file and then start it again Creating derived tags Starting and stopping derived tag processing There are many ways to start and stop derived tag processing Choose the way that works best for your project For a complete list of RSView32 commands and their command syntax see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Ways to start derived tag processing In the Startup editor select the Derived Tags check box and specify a derived tag file In the Macro editor create a startup or login macro that includes the DerivedOn lt file gt command In the Graphic Display editor specify the DerivedOn lt file gt command in the Startup field in the Display Settings dialog box In the Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the DerivedOn lt
184. In the Macro editor create a startup or login macro and include the AlarmOn command In the Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the AlarmOn command as the press action When the button is pressed alarm monitoring starts In the Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the AlarmOn command as the action When the object is touched alarm monitoring starts In the Events editor specify the AlarmOn command as the action for an event On the command line type AlarmOn and then press Enter In the Graphic Display editor specify the AlarmOn command in the Startup field in the Display Settings dialog box 6 71 Configuring alarms 6 72 Ways to stop alarm monitoring When a project stops alarm monitoring stops as well To stop alarm monitoring without stopping the project use any of the methods below Inthe Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the AlarmOff command as the press action When the button is pressed alarm monitoring stops Inthe Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the AlarmOff command as the action When the object is touched alarm monitoring stops Inthe Events editor specify the AlarmOff command as the action for an event On the command line type AlarmOff and then press Enter Configuring data logging Data log is an RSView32 component that collects and stores tag
185. KeyEdit command A 40 Keypad for numeric input 11 26 Keys See also Special keys reserved 15 17 tips for using 15 19 KT card E 2 E 3 E 6 L Label graphic object 11 52 Libraries 11 1 11 102 using for alarm displays 6 10 using for trends 13 35 Library editor 11 103 Line graphic object 11 30 Local station E 1 G 5 Local tags See Memory tags Local trends 13 3 13 14 See also Trends Log files G 5 See also Activity log files Alarm log files Data log files File types ODBC storage format 1 12 Logging in and Windows NT security 10 19 at runtime 10 19 Logging paths See Data logging paths Logical operators 14 11 Login command 10 5 10 19 A 40 macro 10 17 Logout command 10 5 A 41 macro 10 17 Long file names 1 8 for data logs 7 4 7 8 Macro editor 15 8 MacroEdit command A 41 Macros 15 7 G 5 attaching to ActiveX events 12 37 creating 15 7 login and logout 10 17 startup and shutdown 11 22 15 11 18 7 using the Command Wizard A 5 nesting 15 11 precedence of 15 7 A 4 securing 10 5 using commands in 15 8 using in events 9 1 using in graphics 12 7 using parameters in 15 10 using to identify alarms 6 14 Memory tags 4 3 4 20 G 5 Messages See also Alarm messages clearing in activity bar 8 15 mnemonics D 25 number of on a channel 2 8 unsolicited 2 1 Method ActiveX 12 38 12 39 A 39 Index Microsoft Access 6 8 7 8 16 2 Microsoft DCOM 17 5 Microsoft Excel
186. LogSnapshot command Combining logging j cc2 Sac ced ee jane Peas Providing operators with a way to log on demand Choosing the data to log cndct onteqadnn acted Sudie tans sates Editing the data log model lt sc04 ccmuicace eked kat Changing logging paths using RSView32 Runtime Changing logging paths using the DataLogPath command sies saniem ote E mals aires E e neat EA Making runtime changes without editing the data log model Changing the log rate for periodic logging Changing the log file identifier string Displaying data in a trend ie nes ep racket eedhe wide ty ond Starting and stopping data logging 00 Ways to start data logging oi 45 gk eesk series Ways to stop data logging is tes eveetcssavdeudews Chapter 8 Configuring Activity Logging Which activities can be logged 00 eee eee Summary Ol Steps si e c e a EEA Ea e The Activity Log Setup editor 6 ar npteccmoasiea see waves Specifying where to store activity log files Creating log files v 6 vie ey acuta atetlueds owe Aiea a ieee Monitoring disk spaces cy cacedtes 25450 seme tees Creating tiles periodically 3 cy s xsa5 coweeawses eng Creating files at specified times 00 eee ee Creating files when a particular event occurs Never creating new I68 s5 00 a0raerd at ioe ones Deleting log files sopiros een cad ra keia cela ce ea bad About activity log files aus c
187. Ment Conine Dimri Driver PC 6 Enksacad 1 COMTAN 11 3 P PE DDE Sprer SNPA pui dpnt i e Some columns do not apply to OPC nodes and are left blank Once you have created the node assign it to a tag in the Tag Database editor The address tells RSView32 where in the node to get the data Address N7 12 The PLC 5 programmable controller called PLC_HVACt has been previously set up as a DDE OPC topic in RSLinx N7 12 is the address in the PLC 5 250 If you don t include the Access Path when configuring the node you can enter the tag s address as PLC_HVAC1 N7 12 Setting up OPC and DDE communications The figure below shows how the tag looks in the Tag editor i Tag Database iof x Name l Type Analog z Security F Close Description o O Minimum jo Scale 1 Units Nest Maximum foo Offset fo Data Type Default Tag New Data Source Type Device Memory Hep Node Name PLANT_BOILERS K Address N7 12 a r Creating a DDE node E3 System w Channel Node IM Scan Class g Tag Database A DDE node allows you to assign a logical name for each DDE application and topic you wish to communicate with The DDE node name can then be used throughout RSView32 To create a DDE node 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Node editor by doing one of the following double click the Node icon right click the Node icon and then click Show
188. Onilabet On C ue OF Diil ie To see the details for another tag select the tag You do not have to close the Tag Details dialog box Creating derived tags A derived tag is a tag whose value is the result of an expression The expression can be made up of mathematical operations tag values from the value table if then else logic and other special functions You should not write to derived tags because the derived tag is only evaluated when the expression changes For example if the derived tag tag3 has the expression of tag1 tag2 and if you set tag3 0 the value of tag3 becomes zero and will only be updated when the value of tag2 or tag3 changes The value table is the part of memory that stores current tag values when RSView32 is running The current value of the derived tag is stored in an analog digital or string tag in the value table Derived tags can be device tags or memory tags 5 1 m Creating derived tags How to use derived tags Here is an example of how a derived tag can be used Suppose there are five weight sensors on a conveyor belt The tag database contains one tag for each sensor so the weight at each point on the conveyor belt is monitored If the weight at any point is excessive RSView32 triggers an alarm However what happens if no individual sensor detects an excessive weight but the total of all five sensors is too high In this case you could set up a derived tag to sum the weights of al
189. Position gece Postion Hon ontal Jidor vora Edo Enpi HoifiFositon Tage Ej Exoressson Honontal Ofre fies At Winia Ajbiwimue F pers C apad Loo Jm tept Daia cosa Help To configure horizontal position animation 1 Select the object 2 Click the Horizontal Position tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the horizontal position 4 Set the starting point for the object by dragging the object or by typing a value Click the At Minimum check box 5 Set the ending point for the object by dragging the object or by typing a value Click the At Maximum check box 12 19 Animating graphic objects 6 To specify minimum and maximum values click the Specify check box and type the values 7 Click Apply Configuring vertical position animation With vertical position animation an object moves vertically based on the result of an expression in relation to its minimum and maximum values The object s vertical position is proportional to the value of the expression For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum offset Fl Touch oiar i OLE verb Fal belt Riches Wid Figh Horizona Foston Vertical Postion Hormonal Jidor egos Eider Eqpressan HosftiliPogton a Tag
190. RSView32 information must be in the same format as the RSView32 tags that is an analog or digital number or a string RSView32 does not support pointer parameters in an ActiveX object An ActiveX object has three types of attributes Properties named characteristics and values of an object such as shape color position or number For details about attaching control to an object s properties see page 12 35 Events actions triggered by the ActiveX object in response to an external action on the object such as a mouse click In RSView32 you can use events to change the value of an RSView32 tag or to run an RSView32 command or a macro When the event happens the command or macro runs To use the ActiveX object to change a tag s value associate the tag with one of the object s event parameters For details about attaching control to an object s events see page 12 36 11 71 Creating graphic displays ActiveX Control 11 72 Methods functions implemented in the ActiveX object that allow external actions to change the object s appearance behavior or properties A call to a method might be made in response to events from other controls and could trigger other events You can use the RSView32 Invoke command as the external event that calls a method For details about attaching control to an object s methods see page 12 38 To create an ActiveX object 1 Click ActiveX Control on the Objects menu or click the b
191. SView32 checks security access to commands or macros issued from macros command line button objects object display and global keys objects configured with touch animation Alarm Identification field in the Tag Database editor By default strict security is on For most projects strict security is desirable MITIA Strict security always applies to graphic displays OLE verbs and tags If you assign security to any of these items their security is always checked 10 7 Adding security 10 8 Turning off strict security If you turn off strict security security access to graphic displays OLE verbs and tags is still checked As well commands issued from the command line are checked However the system does not check security access to commands issued from components other than the command line For example if strict security is off commands issued from a graphic display are not checked for security access To turn off strict security 1 Open the Security Codes editor 2 On the menu bar click Setup and then click Strict Security Cancel Help If you do NOT want strict security clear this check box 3 Clear the check box 4 Click OK Adding security Assigning security to a graphic display Security is assigned to a graphic display in the Graphic Display editor You can assign security while you are creating a graphic display or you can assign it later 1 In the
192. Status bar Describes the action to be performed by the selected menu item or button The status bar also displays the x and y coordinates and width and height of the selected object Mastering basic techniques When working on a graphic display certain actions and techniques are used frequently Knowing how to perform these actions can save you time Using the context menu No matter where you are in the Graphic Display editor you can open a context menu by clicking the right mouse button The items on the menu depend on the cursor s location For example when you right click on an object the menu contains items relevant to that object When you T right click an paaa i object eee the context apie E menu opens lt contains menu items ag Seabehhuten for working with the Dirin ames Tees selected object rrema ts ples Cut fom te Drake 11 3 Creating graphic displays 2 Test mode j Normal mode 11 4 Switching between normal and test modes To quickly test objects in a graphic display use test mode When you are finished testing switch back to normal mode to continue editing To switch between test and normal modes use the buttons on the toolbar or the items on the View menu If your graphic displays contain objects associated with device tags your system must be set up to communicate with programmable controllers OPC servers or DDE servers in order for you to use t
193. Symbols are typically defined in a startup or login macro lt symbol gt The abbreviated command It cannot contain spaces string An existing command with or without parameters It can contain spaces and other non alphanumeric characters Omitting the string parameter deletes the symbol definition See also Undefine RSView32 commands Derived DerivedOff Examples The Define command Define Di Display Creates the symbol Di for the command Display Typing Di as a command in any valid command syntax will have the same effect as typing Display Define Show Display Overview CC Creates the symbol Show for the command Display Overview CC Whenever Show is used the graphic called Overview is displayed in the center of the screen Define Di Deletes the symbol Di Derived file In edit mode without the parameter opens the Derived Tag editor With the parameter opens the specified derived tag file file The name of a derived tag file without a file extension DerivedOff lt file gt Stops running the specified derived tag file lt file gt The name of a derived tag file without a file extension A 29 RSView32 commands DerivedOn Display A 30 DerivedOn lt file gt Starts running the specified derived tag file lt file gt The name of a derived tag file without a file extension To have a derived tag file automatically start when a project starts open the Startup editor
194. System folder 2 Open the Node editor by doing one of the following double click the Node icon right click the Node icon and then click Show 3 Create a node by filling in the following information Data Source Select OPC Server 3 5 m Setting up OPC and DDE communications The Tag Database editor does not check addressing syntax for programmable controllers that communicate through an OPC server If the syntax is invalid an error will be generated at runtime For details about the DDE Server data source see Creating a DDE node on page 3 11 For details about the Direct Driver data source see Chapter 2 Setting up direct driver communications Name Type a name of your choice to represent the OPC node The name can be up to 40 characters long and can have upper and lower case letters numbers dashes and underscores Spaces are not permitted Enabled Normally nodes are enabled allowing collection of values from the device However during setup or troubleshooting you might want to disable a node to prevent communication timeouts or invalid data When a node is disabled tag values can still be read and written but the values are read from and written to the value table instead of the device When a tag uses a disabled node at runtime the tag s state will change from valid to disabled A tag s state can be seen by viewing the tag in the tag monitor To disable nodes clear the Enabled check box
195. The object s source file is active 11 67 Creating graphic displays If you move your project remember to move copy or update the link for the source file to the new location embedding pastes the object into the graphic display and allows it to be edited If the source file is changed the object in the display is not affected When you double click an embedded object to edit it the Graphic Display editor s toolbar is replaced by the application s toolbar A border appears around the object to indicate that it can be edited This is called in place editing If you move your project embedded objects are automatically moved with the project To create an OLE object 1 Click OLE Objects on the Objects menu or click the button in the Drawing Tools toolbox OLE Tool 2 Draw a box about the size you want for the object OF e Come jjam Fig Faint Shop Pio Inger a Cresehonfie C I Disl Hews Inert a pia of the Ale condents into pour AEF ecu ment The piua albe linkedin Fa Es so a khat gharayas bap thes fhe all eee eat eect i year E nent 3 Click Create New to create and embed a new object Click Create from File to insert an existing file To create a link to the source file click Link To embed the file do not click Link 4 Select an object type or file _ 11 68 Creating graphic displays 5 If you want the embedded object displayed as an icon click Display As Icon
196. a Date1 Time Tag1 value Tag2 value Tag3 value Date2 Time2 Tag1 value Tag2 value Tag3 value Date3 Time3 Tag1 value Tag2 value Tag3 value Date4 Time4 Tag1 value Tag2 value Tag3 value Dated Time5 Tag1 value Tag2 value Tag3 value Date6 Time6 Tag1 value Tag2 value Tag3 value 7 3 m Configuring data logging Choosing between narrow and wide dbf file formats The following table summarizes the features of each file format Narrow Wide Limit of 10 000 tags in the model Limit of 100 tags in the model Most useful for storing data that changes Most useful for storing frequently changing infrequently as in on change logging data as in periodic logging Particularly useful for storing data from batch applications Data is harder to use for sums and Data is more easily used for sums and averages because it crosses rows averages because it is all in one column Does not create a new log file set if tags Creates a new log file set if tags are added are added to or deleted from the model to or deleted from the model Stores numeric and string values in Stores numeric and string values in the separate files same file Preferred for queries because you can join Can t join tables for queries tables How dbf log files are named When a dbf log file is created it is named automatically The name is based on the date the file was created and the type of data it contains Long fi
197. a File Local amp Remote maaa je For detailed information about how data log files are named see Chapter 7 Configuring data logging Configuring control To configure control fill in the fields as outlined below Control Rate Seconds ContolTag 13 15 Configuring trends 13 16 Rate Type a number to specify how often to update the trend For realtime data the rate determines how often the value table is checked for new data If you have specified a scan class for the tags do not specify a rate faster than the scan class rate For historical data the rate determines how often the log file is checked for new data Do not specify a rate faster than the rate at which the data is logged to the file For example if you set up periodic logging with a 20 second interval do not specify a rate less than 20 seconds because no new data will be available Control Tag Type a name for the folder that will contain the trend control tags Control tags are used to control the view of the trend at runtime When you save the trend configuration a folder by this name will be created in the Tag Database This folder will contain the trend control tags For example if you type Trend1 in the Control Tag field the system will create a folder called Trend1 Each tag in the folder will have Trend1 as the first part of its name For more information about these tags see Creating control for a trend on p
198. a eee ohe Cine ae inn yei see ert a iis Peer ema Graphar City i Paste copies the contents of the clipboard into the active graphic but does not link to the source application This is an embedded object Paste Link copies the contents of the clipboard into the active graphic and links it to the source application This is a linked object This option is not available if the object comes from an application that does not support OLE linking 4 Click RSView Graphic Object 5 Click OK _ 11 70 Creating graphic displays Creating and editing ActiveX objects An ActiveX object is a software component that is supplied independently from RSView32 through products such as Microsoft Visual Basic Rockwell Software RSTools Office 97 and many other third party applications An ActiveX object provides functions that can be accessed through the object s properties events and methods By embedding an ActiveX object in an RSView32 graphic display and then assigning properties or specifying handlers for the object s events the object can interact with RSView32 Information is passed between an ActiveX object and RSView32 using RSView32 tags For example you can embed an RSTools gauge in an RSView32 graphic display and attach an RSView32 tag to the gauge s Value property As the tag s value changes the gauge s needle changes position to reflect the tag s value To pass information between an ActiveX object and
199. a log models mdf Data log files dbf Information for current file set dns Information for historical file sets dig Project name Dts Derived tag files dts Project name Eds Events files eds Project name Gfx Graphic display files gfx Project name Key Global key files key Project name Mcr Macro files mer Project name Par Parameter files par Project name Rcp Recipe files Pcp Project name Tag Tag database files db ctl dat Tag cache file cac Project name Tgs Tag monitor files tgs Project name Vba VBA program files vba D 1 2 Working with projects Working in the Project Manager Project name The Project Manager is the main tool for working with RSView32 Each time you create a project a Project Manager appears showing the project name w GARE AW RSW Prr ject Library Bj Perarneters ei Aecipe 5 Alame E Deia Log 23 Loge and Conirol OD GOORIES a DETAL O HOPPER D MAME D OWERWIEW 0 TAMET D TANE D TANK Ci TANK Component The Project Manager window is divided into two panes When you first create a project the left pane appears with a series of folders and the right pane is empty As you create project components they are displayed in the right pane Component The Project Manager manages components not files A component is a file reference that is associated with the physical file s name and path The file can be located in a folder under the project directory o
200. a stored Get Data Data fields have been retrieved 2 Cancel lt Back j Einish 16 21 Sharing data with other Windows applications Organizing the pivot table After you have selected the data for your pivot table specify how you want that data to appear Prl ahin Waad Siep 3 ol 4 C yaar a Corpses yom Pink Tile lng dregging n jrma thene buiiong gr ths digit bo ihs chiag am an Ha baft 5 _ oy Use these Date 1 gute buttons to i organize 1 your table 1 In the Wizard drag the field buttons and place them in the table 2 When the table is set up click Next 3 Specify a location for the pivot table PivotT able Wizard Step 4 of 4 HEI Where do you want to put the PivotTable New worksheet Existing worksheet z Click Finish to create your PivotTable Cancel Options lt Back Next Finish 16 22 Sharing data with other Windows applications 4 To display the table click Finish The pivot table is displayed in the worksheet 13 21 20 052 13 21 22 075 13 21 24 408 13 21 26 451 13 21 28 754 10 13 21 30 777 11 13 21 32 780 12 13 21 34 903 13 13 21 37 096 14 13 21 39 149 15 13 21 41 252 16 13 21 43 425 47 13 21 45 578 Creating a chart 1 To create a chart from the pivot table select the data you want to use 2 On the toolbar click the Chart Wizard button 3 Follow the instructions in the Wiza
201. acknowledgment If an alarm appears in the alarm summary or some other alarm display an operator can acknowledge the alarm Acknowledging an alarm does not correct the condition causing the alarm but indicates that an operator is aware of the alarm A tag not an alarm is acknowledged A single tag might have caused several alarms For example a tag representing temperature might have triggered Warm Hot and Overheat alarms by the time it is acknowledged The tag could also have gone in and out of alarm several times before being acknowledged One acknowledgment is all that is required for all previous and current alarms for a tag so alarm log files often show fewer acknowledgments than alarms To acknowledge alarms operators can click the Acknowledge or Acknowledge All button in the alarm summary use the RSView32 Acknowledge command by itself or with parameters to name a tag or group of tags use the RSView32 AcknowledgeAll command Unless an alarm is acknowledged it remains outstanding until the system is shut down the alarm summary is full or alarm monitoring is turned off Alarm suppression You can suppress alarm monitoring for tags This is useful for testing or for performing repairs or maintenance on a piece of equipment To suppress alarm monitoring for tags use the RSView32 SuppressOn command To view a list of the tags not being monitored use the Suppressed List You can also turn monitoring back o
202. ag ited 16 9 Alarm log filee ODBC format 004 16 10 Data log files narrow dbf format 4 16 12 Data log files wide dbf format 0006 16 13 Data log ODBC format 345 sere kadai obag 16 15 Contents 18 Creating a pivot table in Microsoft Excel Starting the PivotTable Wizard 0006 Selecting the data source bocca gence wea anaes Joining tables and selecting data 0 Organizing the pivot tables iy lt t 545 eeaeeaosas tenes Creatine a chart revcatea he bane seed tay anaes Sharing tag values locally x75 v4 Gey ace A Aaa peewee Providing tag values to local OPC or DDE clients Enabling RSView32 as a server ci cicies yeaoves baba Setting up a local OPC client application Setting up a local DDE client application Getting tag values from servers so sacivotnelss wire ears Setting up RSView32 as the client 006 Enabling RSView32 for tag writes 2s iiiss eas eee Sending DDEExecute commands to other applications Chapter 17 Using Networks Sharing project components during development and rOntiMe aaNet nan ee eae Ren eer ne ome ee ee ore Sharing components during development Sharing components at runtime 0ee eee How to share components evsgntgh casa as Using OPC for peer to peer network communications Identifying the RSView32 server computer Enabling
203. ag names at runtime A placeholder is a cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 For details about placeholders see Using tag placeholders on page 11 37 avalue When you specify a value the pen draws a constant horizontal line on the trend Use horizontal lines to provide a frame of reference for your tags For example if you define values that are the limits within which a tag should operate when a tag crosses one of these limits the tag s alarm condition is obvious on the trend Configuring pen style To configure pen style fill in the fields as described below Style M Show Line Color E M Show Plot Symbol Hollow Square Line Interpolation Automatic M Custom Pen width Show Line Check this box if you want to draw a line between the plotted symbols If you want only plot symbols visible leave this box empty Color Select a color for the pen Do not choose the same color as the background of the trend object 13 19 Configuring trends Show Plot Symbol Check this box if you want a plot symbol The plot symbol appears at each point that is plotted The plot symbols are Name Symbol Name Symbol Hollow Square Filled Diamond Filled Square B Hollow Circle we Up Hollow Triangle A Filled Circle Up Filled Triangle A Dot Down Hollow Triangle V Cross x Down Filled Triangle v Star x Hollow Diamond O Line Interpolation Line
204. age 13 27 Configuring trends Creating a legend To include a legend check the Show Legend box Legend M Show Legend In the Pen Configuration tab you can specify which pens you want included in the legend and create a label for each pen The following illustration shows a trend with a legend 147746 1407 36 SE 2 1A BRIE BO S6 ERILE bte mte r EDIO Pen value gt Pen label 13 17 m Configuring trends Pen configuration To configure the pens that will plot the data for the trend 1 In the Trend dialog box click the Pen Configuration tab Trend Configuration iF Pen Selection Shading B Upper Bound 3 None z 4 5 To begin configuring pens select a pen here Lower Bound S None When you select another pen the configuration for the previous pen is saved Style M Show Line Color E I Show Plot Symbol Line Interpolation Automatic I Custom Pen Width Pen Scale Legend Use Tag s Min Max M Include in Legend Custom Min Max Label i Cancel Help 2 Select a pen For each pen you select fill in the fields in this tab The fields are described below To move to another pen select it in the Pen Selection field 13 18 Configuring trends Configuring the tag or value In the Tag or Value field specify one of the following an analog or digital tag or a tag placeholder Tag placeholders allow you to insert t
205. age format in step 4 long file names apply to the backup files only You can change the log file identifier string at runtime as described on page 7 45 However the runtime change affects the current data log session only When you stop and restart the model RSView32 uses the string you set up here 4 Click a file storage format Narrow dBASE IV format stores one tag value per line with multiple time and date stamps per record Wide dBASE IV format stores multiple tag values per line with one time and date stamp per record For more information about dBASE IV dbf log file formats see The dbf file format on page 7 2 ODBC format logs tag values to tables in an ODBC database For more information about ODBC tables see The ODBC storage format on page 7 8 If you choose this format go to step 6 7 11 Configuring data logging These fields apply to floating point data This field applies to string data 7 12 m gt hrii of Deg da fn Gud ng decened poet Dihina a gt hiui of Chenectern it Strong 5 If you chose the dBase IV Narrow or dBase IV Wide storage format in step 4 specify storage options for the dbf log file Number of Digits including decimal point Type the number of digits including the decimal point to be stored for floating point numbers Use this field and the Digits After Decimal Point field to achieve the precision you want Borage Foara C dasti Heres F Biss
206. ags work When a trend is running the data for a trend either realtime or historical is stored in a buffer The trend is a view of this buffer The values of the control tags determine how the data is viewed The following illustration shows what the OldestTime TimeRange StartTime and NewestTime control tags represent LX A A OldestTime TimeRange StartTime NewestTime When the value of one control tag changes some aspect of this view changes For example the TimeRange tag determines how much of the data is shown at one time and the StartTime determines where the right margin of the trend is in relation to the total time span represented by the data The values for the trend control tags initially come from the information configured in the Trend dialog box As the trend runs some values are updated such as the times of the newest and oldest data The time of the oldest data changes when the trend s buffer becomes full and the oldest data is discarded The time of the newest data changes when new data is available for the trend Configuring trends Creating objects to animate a trend To provide animated objects use the items in the Trends library or create your own objects and configure animation for them See Using the Trends graphic library on page 13 35 for details about the Trends graphic library To create your own objects follow the steps in Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays To configure anim
207. ain dialog Click the option Use NT User Accounts as Source for RSView32 User Accounts Select the NT domain that contains the users you want to add to the RSView32 user list Do one of the following Select users from the NT Domain User Accounts list and then click the single right arrow gt or double click one of the user names to copy them into the RSView32 User Accounts list To copy all the users from the NT Domain User Accounts list click the double arrow gt gt Check the option Synchronize RSView32 User Accounts with NT User Accounts to use all NT user accounts for the RSView32 user accounts list and have it automatically updated whenever new users are added to or removed from the domain 10 15 Adding security 10 16 Moving a project with Windows NT user accounts to a Windows 9x computer When you move a project that uses the Windows NT security option to a computer running Windows 9x you can continue using your project with the Windows NT security option enabled provided you enable user level access control in Windows 9x To enable user level access control in Windows 9x 1 On the Windows 9x computer click Start point to Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Double click the Network icon 3 Click the Access Control tab 4 Click User Level Access Control 5 In the Domain field type the name of the Windows NT domain on which you want to authenticate your user name
208. al data You can layer trends which is useful for comparing realtime and historical data in order to see process changes To layer trends 1 Create two or more trends of the same size 2 Configure the trends 3 Select the trend that will be on top On the Attributes menu click Hollow 4 Move the trend that will be on top over the other trend 5 With the trend still selected click Bring to Front on the Arrange menu Creating control for a trend To control a trend operators require buttons and other graphic objects that are associated with the trend s control tags You can draw your own buttons and objects for controlling a trend or you can use the objects in the Trends library For details see Using the Trends graphic library on page 13 35 Control tags are a type of memory tag that is they are tags that are created and updated by RSView32 You can use these tags to control the view of the trend at runtime for example you can scroll and zoom in on the trend To create control tags you have to type a name in the Control Tag field in the Trend dialog box When you do a folder with that name containing the trend control tags is created in the tag database Waele if at runtime you display multiple trends that use the same control tags changes to one trend affect all the other trends that use the tags including trends that are loaded in the cache and are not visible 13 27 Configuring tre
209. al data from a different project from another location on the same computer or from another computer click Historical then click Remote In the Model field type the complete path to the logged data to the dlg file or click and select a dlg file Gets Source C Res Tome Heinl Oldest Fie C Meses Fie Choose File C Loa F Asmoa Model pE For a file based trend Click Oldest File to display data from the oldest file in the data model For local data specify a data log model in the Model field For remote data type the complete path to the logged data to the dlg file or click and select a dlg file Dima Source RaslTime C Hiimeai F DiiesiFia Hesadfia Chaca Fila o l Pemo Modal Configuring trends Click Newest File to display data from the newest file in the data model For local data specify a data log model in the Model field For remote data type the complete path to the logged data to the dlg file or click and select a dlg file Onin Source C RealTime C Hitenen C Gidari Fite Hisa Fike Chania File O O Click Choose File to select the data file that will be used For local data specify a data log model in the Model field For remote data type the complete path to the logged data to the dlg file or click and select a dlg file In the File field select a data log file Onin Source C RealTime Hitenesl C Cikdasi Fite i Hesa Fike Chani
210. al key pressing that key will trigger both the action defined for the embedded object and the action defined for the global key Setting up navigation Reserved keys The following keys and key combinations are normally reserved for use by Windows and RSView32 This reserved key Does this on the numeric keypad Displays the Recipe dialog box or saves the recipe if Ctrl W was pressed previously or restores the recipe if Ctrl R was pressed previously Enter If Enter is pressed when a button has focus the button s press and release actions are executed If Enter is pressed when an input field has focus the field s value is downloaded to the PLC If the input field is configured to display the on screen keyboard pressing Enter displays the on screen keyboard If Enter is pressed when a recipe field has focus the Recipe dialog box is displayed If Ctrl W was pressed previously the recipe is saved If Ctrl R was pressed previously the recipe is restored If the recipe field is configured to display the on screen keyboard pressing Enter displays the on screen keyboard Tab Moves focus to the object with the next highest index number Shift Tab Moves focus to the object with the next lowest index number Ctrl Up Arrow Ctrl Left Arrow Ctrl Down Arrow Ctrl Right Arrow Moves focus to an object in the direction in which the arrow points PgUp Uploads data into all input fields
211. al number indicating current status of DDE client communications Will be the same as system ComErrorValueDDE if the error condition still exists System tags Graphics The following tags can be used to make graphic objects appear as though they are blinking on and off Tag Name Type Function system BlinkFast Digital Toggles on and off every 100 ms 10 times per second system BlinkSlow Digital Toggles on and off every 500 ms twice per second A more efficient way to make graphic objects blink is to use the blinking color option in color animation For details see page 12 13 Time The following tags record time and date information in various formats Tag Name Type Provides this data Read or write system Date String System date Read only system DateAndTimelnteger Analog Number of seconds elapsed since midnight Read only 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time UTC system DateAndTimeString String Complete date and time display Read only For example Monday December 12 1997 10 47 50 AM system DayOfMonth Analog Day of the month 1 31 Read only system DayOfWeek Analog Day of the week 1 7 Sunday 1 Read only system DayOfYear Analog Day of the year 1 366 Read only system Hour Analog Hour of the day 0 23 Read and write system Minute Analog Minutes 0 59 Read and write system Month Analog Number for month Read only s
212. alarm expressions may have an impact on performance if the pattern matches a large number of tags See Tag functions on page 14 14 for a list of the alarm functions Acknowledge bit globally acknowledging alarms When you set up an acknowledge bit for a tag all RSView32 stations can be set up to monitor that bit automatically at runtime When an operator acknowledges an alarm for that tag the acknowledge bit is set If an alarm is acknowledged on one machine all other machines log a RmAck Remote Acknowledge transaction in the alarm log file All other RSView32 stations then acknowledge the alarms associated with that bit In this way operators can acknowledge alarms globally Configuring alarms Set up acknowledge bits in any of the following ways one acknowledge bit for each tag When an alarm is acknowledged on one RSView32 station that alarm is automatically acknowledged on all other RSView32 stations Keep in mind however that RSView32 will be monitoring each bit so using many acknowledge bits can result in substantial system overhead one acknowledge bit for a group of tags When an alarm is acknowledged on one RSView32 station all alarms associated with the acknowledge bit are automatically acknowledged on all RSView32 stations Keep in mind however that RSView32 will be monitoring each bit so using many acknowledge bits can result in substantial system overhead one acknowledge bit for all tags When any
213. alarm is acknowledged on one RSView32 station all alarms are automatically acknowledged on all RSView32 stations This means alarms cannot be acknowledged individually Therefore the Acknowledge command and the alarm summary s Acknowledge button have the same effect as the AcknowledgeAll command and the Acknowledge All button To set up acknowledgment use the Acknowledge Bit field in the Advanced tab of the Analog Alarm and Digital Alarm editors Or to set up global alarm acknowledgment without using acknowledge bits use the global alarm acknowledgment features in the RSView32 Active Display System available separately from Rockwell Software 6 17 Configuring alarms 6 18 Handshake hit When a tag goes into alarm RSView32 can set a handshake bit to notify a programmable controller that the tag is in alarm To set up handshaking use the Handshake Bit field in the Advanced tab of the Analog Alarm and Digital Alarm editors By default handshaking is off To turn on handshaking do one of the following use the H parameter with the AlarmOn command use the HandshakeOn command For detailed information about commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Alarm events You can customize and extend the RSView32 alarm monitoring system by writing your own alarm detection algorithms using PLC ladder logic VBA programs or any other appropriate tools You can then add alarm events to the the RSView32 ala
214. alarm occurred SQL_INTEGER or 4or SQL_SMALLINT 2 16 10 Sharing data with other Windows applications This column Contains SQL Data Type Length Taglype The type of the tag in alarm A for SQL_VARCHAR 4 analog D for digital or SQL_CHAR ThreshVal The threshold value SQL_DOUBLE or 8or SQL_INTEGER or 4or SQL_SMALLINT 2 ThreshNum The threshold number SQL_SMALLINT 2or or SQL_LINTEGER 4 ThreshLabl The threshold label SQL_VARCHAR 20 or SQL_CHAR Severity The alarm severity SQL_SMALLINT 2or or SQL_LINTEGER 4 DstFlag The Daylight Savings Time DST SQL_VARCHAR 4 flag where Y means DST is in or SQL_CHAR effect and N means DST is not in effect for RSView32 internal use only UserlD The user that was logged in when SQL_VARCHAR 20 the alarm occurred or SQL_CHAR AlarmType The number RSView32 assigns to SQL_SMALLINT 2or the transaction type or SQL_LINTEGER 4 Dscription The message that is associated SQL_VARCHAR 132 with the transaction alarm type or SQ L_CHAR the log message for the alarm event or the alarm log remark UserStn For future use SQL_VARCHAR 15 or SQL_CHAR LoggingStn The name of the computer on SQL_VARCHAR 15 which the logging server is or SQL_CHAR running If the ODBC database doesn t support the SQL_TIMESTAMP data type then the data may be truncated For example the Oracle ODBC driver does not support the SQL_TIMESTAMP type Use SQL_DATE instead to store both the date
215. alarm was generated Time The time the alarm was generated Militime The number of milliseconds TransType The type of alarm that was generated The types are InAlm In Alarm severities 1 through 8 OutAlm Out of Alarm Acked Acknowledged RmAck Remote Acknowledged InFlt In Fault OutFit Out of Fault SupOn Suppress On SupOf Suppress Off TagName The name of the tag or alarm event that caused the alarm TagValue The value of the tag at the time the alarm occurred Taglype The type of tag in alarm A for analog D for digital S for string ThreshVal The threshold value ThreshNum The threshold number ThreshLabl The threshold label Severity The alarm severity 1 is highest severity and 8 is lowest severity 16 5 Sharing data with other Windows applications This column Contains DstFlag The Daylight Savings Time DST flag where Y means DST is in effect and N means DST is not in effect This number is for RSView32 internal use only Userld The user that was logged on when the alarm occurred AlarmType The number RSView32 assigns to the transaction type Dscription The message that is associated with the transaction alarm type UserStn For future use LoggingStn The name of the computer on which the logging server is running Alarm log files ODBC format ODBC format alarm log data uses one table The illustrations show ODBC tables that have been opened in Microsoft Query For more information about ho
216. all tags in the specified model or models are logged To log on demand 1 Click On Demand Run the model or models for which data will be logged To run a model select the model in the Startup editor or issue the DataLogOn lt file gt command where file is the name of the data log model Issue the DataLogSnapshot command as described next Configuring data logging Using the DataLogSnapshot command You can record tag values using the DataLogSnapshot lt file gt command or DataLogSnapshot command The DataLogSnapshot lt file gt command records tag values for all tags in the specified model at the instant the command is executed The DataLogSnapshot command records tag values for all tags in all running models at the instant the command is executed Use these commands anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be entered For example enter the command as the action for an event Operators can also use these commands at runtime For details see Providing operators with a way to log on demand on page 7 40 Example Creating an event for on demand logging To create an event that will trigger logging when an alarm occurs 1 Click On Demand as the log trigger 2 Open the Event editor Create an expression such as If alm_in_alarm motor_fault and new_batch_started then 1 else 0 3 In the Event editor s Action field type DataLogSnapshot lt file gt where file is the name of the data log model
217. alog boxes For information about key animation see Associating objects and displays with keys on page 12 40 12 3 Animating graphic objects About the Animation dialog box The Animation dialog box is a floating dialog box which means you can have it open all the time and can move it around the screen select other objects and open other dialog boxes Animation tabs Expression area Expression result Expression Tue Site T eta ibo E visibde Minimum and sie values at ee i ae Dee em He Animation Tabs Click the tab for the type of animation you want to configure Expression Area Create one or more expressions either by typing them choosing the Expression button or both Multiple expressions are evaluated in the order they are listed To supply a tag name for an expression click the Tags button and then select a name or type the name If you use multiple tags in an expression the first tag is used for the minimum and maximum values if you do not specify these values Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces when you use them in an expression This distinguishes the characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression Also use braces when using wildcards or to represent multiple tags in an expression 12 4 Animating graphic objects For more information about creating expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Expr
218. alog box choose the Pen Configuration tab and then choose a symbol in the Show Plot Symbol field You must configure each pen separately 13 37 Configuring trends To choose Do this Marker color Choose Font from the Attributes menu and then choose a color For information about the marker see page 13 39 The marker color is also used for time axis labels if used and for the time and date in the legend Choose Font from the Attributes menu and then choose a font size and color The font and size are used for all the text used for axis labels and all the text in the legend Text font family size and color The font color is used for time axis labels if used for the time and date in the legend and for the marker color Using the trend at runtime Selecting pens To display details about a pen select the pen by clicking it in the legend When the pen is selected the vertical scale changes to reflect the minimum and maximum values for that pen 1427 46 142A When you click AOE ATLI this pen gt 14 Ag A Te 13 38 14 07 46 sy Bee Hopper Guresyor specail the scale shows the minimum and maximum range for this pen Configuring trends Selecting points To view details about a specific point in the trend use the marker When the marker is over a point in the data the pen s date time and value at the marker s location are displayed in the legend
219. ame of a DDE OPC topic on the server If you leave the access path blank you must specify the DDE OPC topic as part of the tag s address when you create the tag using the Tag Database editor Update Rate Specify the fastest rate at which the OPC server sends data to the OPC client The default is every 1 second The rate that the OPC server uses may be slower than the rate you specify Type 0 to specify that the server use the fastest possible rate If the OPC server s access path is a DDE OPC topic the update rate should not be faster than the topic poll rate 4 Click Accept to save the node configuration 5 When you finish configuring nodes click Close Example Configuring an OPC node The following example describes how to create a node to connect to a local OPC server using RSLinx Server Name RSLinx OPC Server or RSLinx Remote OPC Server If you are using RSLinx 2 0 the driver name is RSLinx OPC Server If you are using RSLinx 2 1 the driver name is RSLinx Remote OPC Server You don t need to specify a vendor or version number Access Path PLC _HVAC1 The access path is the DDE OPC topic name in RSLinx Setting up OPC and DDE communications 3 10 The server name appears in the spreadsheet s Station or Server column The figure below shows how the node looks in the Node editor Loty Fah P var Co iodo Fite 7 LR iena a E E EE Heni Haila OF sarsar HaLien OFT a prar HVAT
220. ames for narrow dbf format Example of short file names for wide dbf format The ODBC storage format cscagc awake or teien eae How ODBC tables are named sscc ec d eves eae Using an existing ODBC data source Creating anew ODBC data source The Data Log Setup editor os eek woh aaiemoasiea x events Setting up a models cy acs eek he a heals eens a a8 Setting up logging paths vx iowaetcasiee orea Nae a ase Switching logging paths 3i tes bbs eeenbes Specifying logging paths 2 0 e eae Using the DataLogSwitchBack command to switch logging paths pioneers ves eu rds ate eis I ea eek Using the DataLogMergeToPrimary command to move secondary files to the primary path iy soiorss benceed a0 S468 Creating dbf loptilesct ene a see lads Wend s ane bee haces Monitoring disk space icles tis tea ene tee BEA Creating files periodically sas basic ae5 om eaux aeaies Creating files at specified times 0 00 0c e ee Creating files when a particular event occurs Never creating new files os cei nicl uel phe ees eh Using the DataLogNewFile command to create files Deleting ODBC database records and dbf log files 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 Contents Specifying when to log datas haven muceenniianes wean Logging periodically fw susn ee eats seek Rave d ees Logging on Change sse morte tra a ai aise Logging on demand ces sien bits ies aye sidiee Sens Using the Data
221. an ODBC data source name For an example see page 7 16 Double click Events in the RSView32 Logic and Control folder In the Expression box type time 01 00 This expression runs the command or macro you type in the Action box at 1 00 am every day If the ODBC data source is called RSView32AlarmLog the target table name is AlarmTable the user name is Derek and the password is golf in the Action box type AlarmLogSendToODBC RSView32AlarmLog AlarmTable UDerek Pgolf Click Accept to save the event Click Close to save the event file At the command line type EventOn lt filename gt where lt filename gt is the name of the event file you saved For information about the format of the alarm log ODBC tables see page 16 10 6 31 Configuring alarms Configuring alarm severity For each alarm severity and alarm incident you can configure logging destinations You can also specify how you want alarms of a particular severity to be annunciated To configure alarm severity 1 In the Alarm Setup editor click the Severities tab Setup Fila Waragarant Sayvrtiies Leverage Seva Loggar Cle hinaia E Lng in Aerm Log Fie Alarm Severities inair F Login Parir Alarm Incidents 2 Select an alarm severity or an incident Configuring alarms 3 Specify the logging destination You can log to the alarm log file to a printer or to both Alarm severities and
222. an use some or all of the listed tags A tag monitor can contain up to 100 tag names Haktan Hoppe Ader Orada Ce Happ LAr Ep Hoppala ES Tamu Hoppa Ader Pel Hoppla Loo Hepp aie Hime Click this button to select all the listed tags To select all tags 4 Click Select All 2 Click OK To select a range of tags 1 Click the first tag name you want to select 2 Press and hold down Shift while you click the last tag name you want to include Tag Mauve Friar Poppea i Hoppnli Hoppe liides 3 Click OK Creating tags A single tag is displayed in the form All selected tags are displayed in the spreadsheet To select individual tags 1 Click the first tag name you want to select 2 Press and hold down Ctrl while you click one or more tag names Tag Hama Fran Pappea Hoappn LAleero Drader Hepp darm E pe Hoppar Adore E T Hoppa Ader Ped Hepp Lidaro 3 Click OK Understanding what you see The following illustration shows the tag monitor file called Hopper1 2H HE gy LOLLL eames tamed Tag Pewee a L Taptype Magis a A a fan haebaon puz ppor Tiie Giog oF Hoppa li mi mpi ii walid Roper Tarn So Closed saij People TL eres et Lasts aaa Hepp Thi ie Lar PI walled Poppi THD Lalit 1 cri Hopuor Tidal 75 wadal Papper TH H welled Hoppor T rael M wai Piapp r TiLa i ai Bopper Tikki 4 weird Happier TL case 41 weld Dien
223. and Server DEFAULT detivedon paper PRODUCTION This column Contains SQL Data Type Length Type The number of activity type O for SQL_SMALLINT e2or error 1 for warning 2 for or SQL_LINTEGER 4 information ld The number of the RSView32 SQL_INTEGER 4 component that sent the log message for RSView32 internal use only DateAndTime The time and date data was SQL_TIMESTAMP _ Driver logged dependent Millitm Millisecond time when data was SQL_SMALLINT 2or logged or SQL_INTEGER 4 DstFlag The Daylight Savings Time DST SQL_VARCHAR 4 flag where 1 means DST is in or SQL_CHAR effect and O means DST is not in effect for RSView32 internal use only Category The activity category SQL_VARCHAR 20 or SQL_CHAR Source The RSView32 component that SQL_VARCHAR 20 generated the activity or SQL_CHAR UserID The user that was logged on when SQL_VARCHAR 20 the activity occurred or SQL_CHAR Dscrptn The description of the activity SQL_VARCHAR 132 or SQL_CHAR UserStn For future use SQL_VARCHAR 15 orSQL_CHAR LoggingStn The name of the computer on SQL_VARCHAR 15 which the logging server is or SQL_CHAR running 16 8 Sharing data with other Windows applications A Snr on mY ed F lM p Alarm log files E L Savedty DeFa l p H FH FH Jh H H Ihi This column hahha Miagi Saray fi o o H sr es S bagn Lappeyi PaA Contains Date The date the
224. and can use both words and placeholders For a list of placeholders see page 6 35 6 37 Configuring alarms Adding remarks to the alarm log file at runtime Using the AlarmLogRemark command you can add information to the alarm log file at runtime Alarm log remarks appear in the alarm log file and can also be printed You cannot display alarm log remarks in alarm summaries The AlarmLogRemark command has parameters that let you add a text comment the alarm severity and the tag name to the alarm log file Other parameters let you prompt the operator for the text part of the remark at runtime and log the remark to a printer as well as to the alarm log file eased parameter with the Enter Alarm Log Remark AlarmLogRemark Tag PapenAna DivesD MIO FE command you can Cancel prompt the Severity pa Tase operator for an Motor overload fault cleared alarm log remark at runtime At runtime only one Alarm Log Remark dialog box is displayed at a time and the operator must respond to the dialog box before the next one is displayed Alarm logging must be on before you can use the AlarmLogRemark command To start alarm logging issue the AlarmLogOn command For details about the AlarmLogRemark command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Configuring alarms Specifying alarm conditions for analog and digital tags E System ky Channel Sib Node MIJ Scan Class Tag Database ie Tag Monitor
225. and then click Delete on the Edit menu or press Delete on the keyboard Creating graphic displays Duplicate Duplicating objects Unlike Cut and Copy Duplicate does not use the clipboard 1 Select one or more objects 2 Click Duplicate on the Edit menu or click the Duplicate button on the toolbar The duplicated object is placed slightly offset from the original Select object Duplicate object Move object Duplicate again Duplicate also duplicates actions For example if you duplicate an object move it and then duplicate it again the second Duplicate will in one step duplicate and move the object This is useful for creating a series of objects with an equal distance between them Duplicate works until you deselect the object When an object is duplicated any animation attached to the object is also duplicated If a group is duplicated the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original 11 81 Creating graphic displays _ 11 82 Resizing objects You can resize objects using the mouse or using the keyboard The keys let you resize objects in small increments When you select an object handles appear around it Use these handles to resize the object E Drag a side handle to change either the width or height Drag a corner handle to change both the width and height To resize an object by dragging the mouse 1 Select the object 2 Place the pointer on one o
226. and time without truncating the data in Oracle 16 11 Sharing data with other Windows applications Data log files narrow dbf format Narrow dbf format log files are created in sets of three For more information about dbf data log files see The dbf file format on page 7 3 Floating point and string data Log files for floating and string data are the same except one contains analog and digital tag data and the other contains string tag data OMS st Set 4B il MSG 15 5852 S10 1 TJ ASE 13 S655 Fa F OE eo FA j This column Gimus bisbe EENEN EE ii E SS 00000000 E 7 00000000 E EEE OE E E Contains Date The date the tag values were logged Time The time the tag values were logged Taglndex The index number for the tag The tag name that corresponds to this number is listed in the tag name file Value The analog digital or string value of the tag Status Blank if communications are working properly D if a node is disabled E if a communication error occurred while RSView32 was trying to acquire the tag value S if the tag value is stale that is if the value has been acquired before but has not been updated U if the tag is uninitialized Marker B when the DataLogOn command was issued and logging began E when the DataLogOff command was issued and logging ended S when the DataLogSnapshot command was issued Internal Information re
227. ange its properties or you can select the properties before drawing an object 1 On the Attributes menu click Line Properties Lins Proparimta mawan ff Line Style Snid 2 Specify a line width and style Line styles are available only when the line width is 1 The styles are Solid Dash Dot Dash Dop vse aim a a Dash Dot Dot Creating graphic displays Peeking at objects _ 11 56 3 Click OK 4 Click Line Color or Fill Color on the Attributes menu to apply line or fill colors Line style uses both the line color and fill color attributes Line color applies to the line and fill color applies to the spaces in the line For example to obtain the dash dot line choose black as the line color and choose white as the fill color Black is applied to the dots and dashes and white is applied to the spaces between the dots and dashes 5 Select a color then click OK For trend objects you can also customize line width and color using the Pen Configuration tab of the Trends dialog box Use Peek to view any or all of the following objects in a graphic display obscured hidden objects numeric or string input objects the recipe object objects with animation objects linked to a particular tag When Peek is turned on a red box appears around all selected graphic objects For example if you se
228. any action For example a macro can open a group of windows and define their initial positions define temporary key definitions close any open windows set tag values Instead of using macros to set tag values you can also set tag values using the tag collections in the RSView32 Object Model s WritePendingValues method For more information about using the RSView32 Object Model see Help 15 7 Setting up navigation E Logic and Control 22 Derived Tags i Events A Global Keys 15 8 To create a macro 1 In the Project Manager open the Logic and Control folder 2 Open the Macro editor by doing one of the following double click the Macro icon right click the Macro icon and then click New 3 Type your macro commands and if required add command parameters When entering commands follow these guidelines Separate each identifier specification or string with a space or a tab Start each command on a new line or separate commands on the same line with a semicolon Precede comments with an exclamation mark The comment lasts until the next semicolon or line break To replace a tag name with its current value when the command is evaluated enclose the tag name in dollar signs to create a placeholder in the command To indicate a percent in a macro use two percent signs because a single percent sign indicates a parameter For information about pa
229. aper Creating graphic displays Objects that cannot be converted The following objects cannot be converted to wallpaper numeric inputs string inputs numeric displays string displays labels and trends To convert objects to wallpaper 1 Select one or more objects 2 On the Edit menu select Wallpaper and click Convert to Wallpaper To unlock wallpaper On the Edit menu select Wallpaper and click Unlock Wallpaper All objects that were previously converted to wallpaper will be unlocked Importing graphic files from third party applications RSView32 can import the following types of files File extension Type of file gfx Graphics mgx mgl ControlView for DOS graphic files wmf clp Windows metafiles omp gif tif pcx Bitmap files dxf AutoCAD files jpg JPEG files RSView32 does not import AutoCAD 13 or later dxf files To import an AutoCAD 13 or later graphic export it as a wmf file from within AutoCAD and open the wmf file in RSView32 Before importing files configure your video adapter to display more than 256 colors to ensure that the colors of imported objects appear the same as in the original 11 99 Creating graphic displays Using bitmaps 11 100 To import files 1 In the Graphic Display editor click the File menu and then click Open In the Open dialog box go to Files of type and select the type of file you want to import
230. aphic display offers better screen management than creating an alarm summary file When the summary is embedded in a graphic display you can use the Display command which allows you to specify screen properties such as size and position You can also use the Cache After Displaying and Allow Multiple Running Copies options in the Display Settings dialog box Creating an alarm summary file 1 In the Project Manager open the Alarms folder Open the Alarm Summary editor by doing one of the following double click the Alarm Summary icon right click the Alarm Summary icon and then click New An empty alarm summary window appears You can configure all aspects of this window s appearance Configure the appearance of the alarm summary as described on the following pages When you are finished click Save on the File menu Type a file name The file you have created is listed in the right pane of the Project Manager At runtime use the Summary command to display the alarm summary 6 53 Configuring alarms 6 54 Creating an alarm summary object An alarm summary object can be part of a graphic display or it can be the entire graphic display You can use the pre built alarm summary called Alarm Information in the graphics objects library or you can create your own alarm summary object To create the alarm summary object 1 Open a graphic display On the Objects menu click Advanced Objects and
231. ard in the RSView32 Tools group For details see the documentation accompanying this tool Activity log files are not stored in a circular file set Instead you configure when to create and delete files Information in the activity log file is stored in dbf dBase IV file format You can access the information in the file with any third party software that reads dbf such as Microsoft Excel Seagate Crystal Reports and Visual FoxPro C 1 m Differences between RSView32 and ControlView Alarms Alarm banner and alarm status display The alarm banner and alarm status display are not preconfigured in RSView32 To include these items in your project either use the objects in the graphic library called Alarms or create them yourself in the Graphic Display editor The information for an alarm banner and alarm status display comes from system tags that report on alarms System tags are preconfigured tags provided with RSView32 These tags are in the System folder in the Tag Database editor To create an alarm banner or alarm status display use the numeric display or string display objects with the appropriate alarm system tags Alarm log Alarm log files are not stored in a circular file set Instead you configure when to create and delete files Information in the alarm log file is stored in dbf dBase IV file format You can access the information in the file with any third party software that reads dbf such as Micros
232. aring data with other Windows applications Methods for sharing data RSView32 is based on standards that allow data to be accessed and shared among Windows applications With RSView32 you can retrieve historical data using other Windows applications RSView32 stores all historical data in dBASE IV dbf format so you can access data from log files using any software that supports this file format With data logs you also have the option of storing the data in ODBC compliant databases With activity logs and alarm logs you can optionally send the data to an ODBC compliant database This chapter includes a procedure for accessing data from activity alarm and data log files It also shows one way to display historical data using a pivot table created in Microsoft Excel access and update tag values RSView32 works as a DDE Dynamic Data Exchange server and client as well as an OPC OLE for Process Control server and client This means you can exchange tag values with a wide range of devices and other Windows applications 16 1 Sharing data with other Windows applications 16 2 You can also use the RSView32 Object Model to read and write tag values or to execute RSView32 commands from another application For more information about using the RSView32 Object Model see Getting Results with RS View32 and see Help This chapter describes how to set up RSView32 as a local server or client for OPC and DDE and inc
233. arm button to open the Analog Alarm or Digital Alarm dialog box Configuring alarms for analog tags 6 40 These are the main steps to configure alarms for analog tags configure the alarm threshold and choose the message that will appear if the threshold is crossed configure the messages that are sent when a tag goes out of alarm and when an operator acknowledges an alarm configure advanced features such as deadband and handshake Configuring alarms To configure a threshold first select the threshold in this box y Alarm thresholds 4 Click the Alarm Thresholds tab Mon leeg Alam Taq Hopparl Alena Loe Salect Thpexhnict Temata ft0 a moeng a Alem iobel ftom Dower ina C Cuson Mes age Coes Sh E ak seb Da ithe TA eg hit 2 Select a threshold You do not have to configure all eight thresholds but you have to configure the ones you use in ascending order For example you can configure thresholds 1 2 5 and 8 as long as you configure them in that order 3 Fill in the fields as follows Threshold To define a constant threshold type a number To define a variable threshold specify a tag name WEILGI At runtime a variable threshold must not become higher than the threshold above it or lower than the threshold below it or an alarm fault will be generated for the tag 6 41 Configuring alarms 6 42 Increasing Decreasing To monitor for a rising val
234. arted in paused mode Configuring trends Tag name Function Read or Write PenMask A 16 bit mask that controls the visibility of the trend pens If the bit corresponding to a pen is set in this mask the pen is displayed For example PenMask 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 No pens are displayed PenMask 0000 0000 0000 0100 4 Only Pen 3 is displayed Read and write StartTime Long integer tag specifying the time at the right margin of the time scale The start time value is the number of seconds elapsed since midnight 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time UTC Read and write StartTimeDate String tag representing the start time and date for the trend at the right margin of the time scale For example JAN 01 1998 13 00 00 Read and write TimeRange Time range of the time scale in seconds Read and write Updating Digital tag that indicates whether the trend object is retrieving data log data The tag value is 1 if retrieving data and O if not Read only YMag Magnification of the vertical axis in percent 0 No magnification 100 Twice the resolution half the range 100 Half the resolution twice the range Read and write YOffset Offset of the vertical axis in percent Moves the view up or down but does not change the time range Read and write 13 29 Configuring trends 13 30 How the trend control t
235. ase age ae cit ed Sid DRE ERARA Et Trends eina omen pune eto ee Rela wane nee pat ae ControlView features integrated into RSView32 Appendix D Addressing Syntax for Allen Bradley Programmable Controllers PLC addressing syntax sae cea ee etnena tere eatehaa oe oct PSG AD Rats cia8 k eraa naa bie wie aes aveste a Cua ated usec T PLC 3 data table sections fyas nn vocd ae ck Seta ek PLC 3 timers and counters 00ccseecceeeves PE CSc tates code oad ke ERE ADR BRS RARE RAS PLC 5 binary files optional syntax PLC 5 I O and status files y vse ee Looked et eek PLC 5 timers counters and control files PLC 5 Enhanced I O and status files PLC 5 Enhanced binary BCD integer ASCII float and string MICS tay ode tee nls aati E e has PLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax PLC 5 Enhanced timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files C 1 C 1 C 2 C 2 C 2 C 2 C 3 C 3 C 4 C 4 C 5 C 5 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 7 C 7 C 8 C 8 D 2 D 2 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 4 D 5 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 8 Contents SLC addressing syntax vce avon meee uliaaies ween SLC SO tiles 5 ase ier neat Sues ena at pies Important information for addressing SLC 5 VO nied ules i lt 05 os ororena ned exes EAER ee se SUG 5 stat s files Sealers er nea eran tents SLC 5 binary and integer files s inca bie cade tau oaks SLC 5 binary files optional syntax
236. associated with an object and display and to see what actions the keys will perform F3 Close Valve F4 Home F5 sc Display Text Entry Screen Key L Modifiers Label 12 55 Animating graphic objects The key list displays the keys listed in the Key fields of the Object Keys and Display Keys dialog boxes All object keys are displayed and then all display keys The key list does not separate the two types of keys because this distinction does not matter to operators they only need to know what action will occur when they press a key To display a key list at runtime 1 Place the cursor over an object with key animation 2 Click the left mouse button The key list is displayed It lists keys associated with this object and all keys associated with this display Disabling the key list To disable the key list use the O parameter with the Display command For details see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Applying animation to groups 12 56 You can apply animation to objects and then group those objects and apply animation to the group When the display is running animation is evaluated from the inside out To apply animation to objects within groups use the group edit feature For details see page 11 86 Animating graphic objects Checking the animation on objects To see what type of animation an object or group of objects has use the Animation menu or the Animation dialog
237. at alarm monitoring has started H Turns on handshaking the moment alarm monitoring starts and sets the handshake bit for any tags in alarm at that moment To have alarming start when a project starts open the Startup editor and click the Alarming check box AlarmPrintOff Stops alarms from printing AlarmPrintOn Starts alarm printing Alarm printing is on by default Alarm Viewer Opens the Alarm Log Viewer A 19 RSView32 commands AppAbort AppActivate AppStart A 20 AppAbort lt application gt Closes the specified Windows application lt application gt The name of a Windows application exactly as it appears in the application s title bar Example The AppAbort command If Notepad is open and contains an untitled file the Notepad title bar will read Untitled Notepad To close Notepad you must type exactly what s in the Notepad title bar as follows AppAbort Untitled Notepad AppActivate lt application gt Activates pulls forward the specified Windows application The application must already be running You can use the AppStart command to start the application lt application gt The name of the Windows application you want to activate Typically this is the name that appears in the application s title bar AppStart lt application gt Runs the specified application which can be another Windows application or an application extender you ve programmed
238. ata for all models that are running MILIA The data log model must be running before the DataLogSnapshot command is issued DataLogSwitchBack lt parameter gt Switches data logging back to the primary dBASE IV file path or ODBC database for the specified model or for all models This command switches data logging for a model only if the model is running RSView32 is logging data to the secondary or backup path and the primary path or ODBC database is available For dbf files RSView32 creates a new set of files when it switches back to the primary path lt file gt The name of the data log model without a file extension Switches data logging for all models that meet the conditions outlined above DDEExecute lt application gt lt topic gt lt command gt Sends a command or series of commands to an application through a DDE channel lt application gt The name of the server application you want to send PP y a command to This is usually the name of the application s exe file without the exe extension lt topic gt The name of the subject of the communication preceded by the character Many applications that support DDE recognize a topic named System which is always available RSView32 commands lt command gt A command or series of commands recognized by the server application Multiple commands must be in one string If the command string contains an exclamation mark enclose the string in q
239. ated If you never want files deleted leave the check boxes under Delete Oldest Files blank Activity log files are deleted only when a new file is created So if your project creates a new file each day and deletes the oldest file every third day your project will have files for the three previous days data as well as a file for the current day To specify when to delete files 1 In the Activity Log Setup editor click the File Management tab Sia Pate Tia EB A oppaita A pise T w Hea 1 C ega ai iiigh C Wiyak karaya at cheng Eaire P kiris J Jeerepa fbb ra Pa eel liry m Ba kiraki Diet fidem Pik D Afi ia Tee L r F baean Fie c yrs smeni kes coeckhvee bine ces drini Fer aon Pai ns cata ae race Camber otic cached niches beepers ni Configuring activity logging 2 Under Delete Oldest Files select one or both check boxes and type a number to specify when to delete the log files If you select both check boxes files are deleted after the maximum time or after the maximum number of files is reached whichever happens first If you do not want files deleted leave the check boxes under Delete Oldest Files blank After Maximum Time Files are deleted after the maximum time has expired For example if two days is the specified time files are deleted at midnight of the third day so you always have the two previous days data and the current day s data After Maximum Files The oldest log file is deleted a
240. ation 20000 Configuring color animation i234 100 0higiecdeeden The parts of the list box tc pswiasie sd errmoawie wes nnana Configuring fill animation 01 0 s0 4 0200s eee e den sees Configuring horizontal position animation Configuring vertical position animation Configuring width animation lt 0 ibe daales betas hems Configuring height animation s 44 a4 eo heoee toes Configuring rotation animation vast vbydsape ia Fe sowed Configuring touch animation 5 1544 saeveaes docaaae ees Configuring horizontal slider animation Configuring vertical slider animation Configuring OLE verb animation 055 Attaching other types of animation to OLE objects 12 2 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 7 12 7 12 7 12 8 12 8 12 9 12 9 12 9 12 12 12 13 12 13 12 17 12 19 12 20 12 21 12 23 12 24 12 27 12 28 12 30 12 31 12 32 13 Contents 14 Configuring ActiveX control wich cerney aeeageenian 12 32 The object s properties versus RSView32 animation 12 32 Naming an ActiveX object iis tasted seats pies 12 34 Attaching ActiveX control properties 12 35 Attaching ActiveX control events 12 36 Viewing ActiveX control methods 12 38 Using the Invoke command to call an ActiveX method 12 39 Associating objects and displays with keys 12 40 Creating o ject keys caine c
241. ation Before running your project test ActiveX objects thoroughly to ensure they behave as desired To configure ActiveX control 1 Right click the object to open the context menu point to Animation ActiveX Control and then click the control you want You can also use the Animation menu on the Graphic Display editor s menu bar Click Animation point to ActiveX Control and then click the type of control you want CheckBox Object Arrange Attributes Animation b b b gt Visibility Convert to Wallpaper Tag Substitution Object Name T ooltip Activex Property Panel Cut Copy Delete Duplicate Properties Events Methods 2 Configure the control for properties and events as described on the following pages 12 33 Animating graphic objects 12 34 Naming an ActiveX object All objects have a default name You can change the default name of all objects including ActiveX objects The object s name is used when logging events for that object The object s name is also used for the Invoke command to use the Invoke command to call a method you must specify the name of the object in which the method is implemented For more information about ActiveX events see Attaching ActiveX control events on page 12 36 For more information about the Invoke command see Using the Invoke command to call an ActiveX method on page 12 39 To name an object 1 Sel
242. ation for the objects you create follow the steps in Chapter 12 Animating graphic objects The following table lists some expressions you can use when configuring animation When creating expressions remember to use the full tag name which includes the Control Tag folder name For example for a Control Tag folder called Trend the full tag name is Trend StartTime Trend OldestTime and so on For brevity the folder name is omitted from the tag names in the examples below To Use this expression Move all the way to the left view the oldest StartTime OldestTime TimeRange data ep Move all the way to the right view the tartTime NewestTime newest data Move one view to the left StartTime StartTime TimeRange Move two views to the left StartTime StartTime 2 x TimeRange Move one view to the right StartTime StartTime TimeRange Move two views to the right StartTime StartTime 2 x TimeRange Pause the trend Paused 1 Resume the trend Paused 0 Specify the newest data log file as the CurrentFile Current File NewestFile current file Move from the current file to one file CurrentFile CurrentFile 1 earlier Move from the current file to one file later CurrentFile CurrentFile 1 Specify the oldest data log file as the CurrentFile CurrentFile OldestFile current file Expressions using CurrentFile are applicable to trends using
243. ay s background color Creating graphic displays The following illustration shows the two types of highlight BE WALES Diky Rm This object is an interactive object but it is not the AA gt object with input C JI focus wh gt This object is the one with focus as indicated by the An cursor The highlight box is Ez a different color than the highlight box for the interactive object An object can have both types of highlight at one time Displaying the on screen keyboard Select this option to display a keyboard on the screen at runtime for numeric input string input and recipe fields in the graphic display The keyboard appears only when an operator selects one of these fields for input The on screen keyboard is typically used with systems that do not have a hardware keyboard such as systems that use touch screens only This field is selected for input 11 25 Creating graphic displays When the operator clicks or touches the selected field or presses Enter on a hardware keyboard the on screen keyboard appears The keyboard for string input and recipe fields allows alphanumeric entry Ef es cf fe J PE JAAA AA AAAA ENN ee Je Os Yd ee ee The keypad for numeric input fields allows numeric entry only 11 26 Creating graphic displays Displaying graphics more quickly Graphic displays appear more quickly if they have been stored in the display
244. background for your display 11 98 Objects that cannot be converted 00 11 99 Importing graphic files from third party applications 11 99 Converting imported objects to RSView32 patiye Objects aceite reriais x orate eee Rb Oe 11 100 Using bitmaps peere pean id eds n ohn eked saree 11 100 When could a bitmap help nas stectasd sactankias es 11 102 Contents Using graphic libraries 9 cchavas hye owersawisaien ates Location of library files ace aw hatin ds deena dos Printing displays at runtime yoo a0 2 coer eniiia ei eoewaines Chapter 12 Animating Graphic Objects Types of aniimanons iive sas Pe ee ave en eae hs Which objects can have animation Using the Animation dialog box 2005 About the Animation dialog box Using Object Smart Path to visually set animation Testing animation 24434 bhel tdaesd hon en pee Pe aea eh Using tag names and tag placeholders Tag SINGS perans ek Gok neha MER Re Sena EA oS Tap placeholders i os ance saws nce eas oat ka male Using commands and macros 4s 2a ids teas oes ae ee et Using expressions secre saw eee Nees Ow NS Setting minimum and maximum values Why specify minimum and maximum values Defining a range of motion 40 cesidenasaued sueieesae Objects that do not have a range of motion Using OSP Object Smart Path 4 Configuring visibility anim
245. between the Clear and Clear All buttons and then drag the mouse until the bar is where you want it You can place the activity bar anywhere on your screen or redock it to the bottom of the RSView32 main window by dragging it to the bottom To move the bar when it is not docked grab the title bar and drag Starting Data Log model whole grain Clear All To undock the activity bar place the pointer here and drag the mouse When the activity bar is undocked you can make it any size you like for example to view more than one message at a time To resize the bar grab an edge or corner and drag until the bar is the desired size Messages in the activity bar The types of messages that appear in the activity bar depend on what is set up in the Categories tab of the Activity Log Setup editor Activity messages are preceded by a blue yellow or red icon Blue indicates information yellow indicates a warning and red indicates an error The following illustration shows an error Auctwity Ber Cannel ERROR The cienmunicaion Greener gome CoM nee carr ee ond To clear a message use the Clear and Clear All buttons Clear removes the the top message Clear All removes all the messages Clearing a message in the activity bar does not delete the message from the activity log file 8 15 Configuring activity logging Using the Activity Log Viewer amp System M y Channel H 2 Node II Scan Class E E Tag Database
246. bject is touched event detection stops On the command line type EventOff lt file gt and then press Enter Adding security This chapter describes the RSView32 security system and outlines how to configure security codes secure RSView32 commands macros graphic displays OLE objects and tags configure user accounts secure the RSView32 Project Manager prevent users from going outside of the project About security Use security to prevent users from accessing certain parts of the system You can enter user names and passwords in the User Accounts editor or if you are using Windows NT you can use the Windows NT user list instead of creating a custom RSView32 list No matter which method you choose to create the user list you still have to assign security access to the individual users 10 1 Adding security 10 2 Security is based on a system of codes Each code allows users with security privileges for that code to access the RSView32 features allowed by that code Users can be assigned combinations of security codes allowing each user to access a different set of features Use the Security Monitor utility included with the RSView32 Resource Kit to customize user access to objects on graphic displays With this utility you can create a single set of graphic displays for all users but have some objects visible or operable for some users and not for others Example Assigning
247. bjects in the Trends graphic library or you can change the name of the folder and then apply the new name to all objects associated with this trend To change the trend s Control Tag folder name and replace the old folder name 1 Open the Trend dialog box by doing one of the following double click the trend select the trend place the cursor over it right click to display the context menu and then click Edit Trend select the trend open the Edit menu on the menu bar and then click Edit Trend 2 In the Control Tag field type a new name 13 35 Configuring trends 13 36 Click OK The Control Tag folder is created in the tag database It contains the control tags for the trend You now have to replace the old folder name with the new name for the buttons and touch control objects that the operator uses to control the trend at runtime Select all the remaining objects On the Edit menu click Tag Substitution In the Search for field specify the old Control Tag folder name In the Replace with field specify the new folder name Tag Substitution Search tor frend Tags Replace with now tend Tags F Confirm Replacements Close Halp Click Replace If the Confirm Replacements check box is not selected all occurrences of the old folder name are automatically replaced with the new name If the Confirm Replacements check box is selected the name that is about to be repla
248. box use Peek as described on page 12 58 Using the Animation menu and the Animation dialog box Use the Animation menu or the Animation dialog box to see what type of animation a graphic object or grouped object has To see what type of animation objects within a group have use the group edit feature For details see page 11 86 To view the animation on an object using the menu 1 Select an object 2 View the animation by doing one of the following onthe menu bar click Animation and see which items have a check mark place the cursor over the object and press the right mouse button to display the context menu Then click Animation from this menu and see which items have a check mark T Edit Start Arange gt Attributes gt The ob ject Animation la v Visibility has visibility Convert to Wallpaper Cao animation Tag Substitution Horizontal Position 5 z Vertical Position Object Name Tooltip Width Height Cut Copy Paste Horizontal Slider Delete Vertical Slider Duplicate Copy Animation Activex Control 12 57 Animating graphic objects Viewing this list is a good way to see which tags have been used in the graphic display Tags in commands are not included on the list 12 58 To view the animation on an object using the Animation dialog box 1 Select an object 2 On the View menu click Animation When the Animation dialo
249. card buttons When you enter information the Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard buttons Click Accept to save tag and alarm information Click Discard to cancel changes to a tag 4 5 Creating tags Using the form Use the form to create a tag In the upper part of the form define the basic characteristics of the tag such as tag name type security and specifics related to the tag type In the lower part of the form define the data source where the tag s values will come from Select the Alarm check box to define alarm conditions for an analog or digital tag To edit alarms once they have been defined click the Alarm button Using the query box D 4 6 Use the query box to select the tags you want displayed in the spreadsheet This allows you to edit tags in different folders without browsing the folder hierarchy You can select a single tag by typing the tag name select multiple tags by typing wildcards The wildcards are This character Does this Matches any single character Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Use this wildcard by itself to display all the tags in the tag database When you do searches remember that the backslash in a folder name counts as one character in the tag name Creating tags Using the folder hierarchy o Create Folder The hierarchy and spreadsheet work together The hierarchy shows the tag fol
250. cate with a wide range of local and remote devices OPC is OLE for Process Control used to connect RSView32 to communication devices via vendor specific OPC servers DDE is Dynamic Data Exchange used with external DDE servers such as the Rockwell Software RSServer products or other third party servers to connect RSView32 to communication devices RSView32 supports the OPC 1 0a specification If you will be connecting to communication devices using direct drivers see Chapter 2 Setting up direct driver communications OPC servers provide a way to connect an RSView32 station the OPC client to communication devices using RSLinx as an OPC server For details see the topics in this chapter third party communication devices using vendor specific OPC servers such as Siemens or Modicon For details see the topics in this chapter 3 1 m Setting up OPC and DDE communications another RSView32 station acting as a remote OPC server on a network By connecting an RSView32 station set up as an OPC client to another RSView32 station set up as an OPC server you achieve peer to peer communication of tag values across a network For information about setting up RSView32 OPC peer to peer communication on a network see Using OPC for peer to peer network communications on page 17 5 a third party application with OPC server support either on the same computer or on a network For details about connecting to
251. cate with the PLC 5 250 or ControlLogix 5550 device For instructions on using unsolicited messages see RSView32 Technical Notes on the RSView32 Tools menu 2 1 m Setting up direct driver communications Overview of direct driver communications Communication through direct drivers involves channels communication devices communication driver software RSLinx nodes control devices The following illustration shows an RSView32 station and its channel and nodes RSView32 Communication channel gt Network gl Nodes gt Programmable controller Programmable controller Communication channel The communication channel is the connection from the RSView32 station to the network the programmable controllers are attached to Communication device The communication device connects the communication channel to the computer You can use internal devices such as the 1784 KT KTX or you can use external devices connected through the serial port Setting up direct driver communications Communication driver The communication driver is the software that permits the computer to communicate with the communication device For communication with most Allen Bradley programmable controllers use RSLinx For communication with SoftLogix 5 programmable controllers you must use an RSLinx driver Node control device The node is a programmable controller attached to a data highway or network
252. ced is displayed along with its usage Configuring trends Choosing fonts colors and lines The following table summarizes where to choose fonts colors and lines for a trend Before doing any of the actions described below select the trend To choose Background fill color Choose a color from the Fill Color palette or from the Attributes menu Background fill pattern Choose a pattern from the Fill Style toolbar or fram the Attributes menu Choose Hollow to create a transparent trend Grid line color Choose a color from the Line Color palette or from the Attributes menu Grid line width Choose Line Properties from the Attributes menu and then specify a line width Pen line color In the Trend dialog box choose the Pen Configuration tab and then choose a color in the Color field You must configure each pen separately This color is also used for the vertical axis labels and for the pen values in the legend Pen line width Choose Line Properties from the Attributes menu and then specify a width If you use this method the width applies to all the pens in the trend Or in the Trend dialog box choose the Pen Configuration tab and then choose a width in the Custom Pen Width field If you use this method you must configure each pen separately If you do not specify a pen width the pen lines default to the width selected for the grid lines Pen line symbol In the Trend di
253. channel s network type to None Loaded first issue the ComStatusOff command Because setting a configured channel s network type to None Loaded deletes all the comstatus system tags from the tag database you cannot set a configured channel s network type to None Loaded if the ComStatusOn command has been issued MTT Of the four communication channels you can configure only one can be configured for TCP IP For example you cannot configure one channel for TCP IP and another for a TCP IP bridge To run a SoftLogix 5 controller with RSLinx and RSView32 configure the TCP IP channel and use the SOFT5 driver or the AB_ETH driver For the SOFT5 driver when configuring the SoftLogix 5 driver in RSLinx enter the IP address or UNC name of the SoftLogix 5 controller in the Internet Address Mapping table If the SoftLogix 5 controller is not running on the same computer as RSLinx the Windows NT user account that is running RSLinx must be a member of the SoftLogix Administrators group on the SoftLogix 5 computer For the AB_ETH driver when configuring the Ethernet driver in RSLinx enter the IP address of the SoftLogix 5 controller in the Internet Address Mapping table You must also enable the WinSock TCP IP driver in SoftLogix 5 Messages Type a number between 1 and 10 This is the number of messages RSView32 will send on a channel before requiring a reply These messages are stored in the buffers of the programmable controllers
254. chy 2 Press Enter The tags in the selected folders are displayed in the spreadsheet D 4 8 Creating tags o Create Folder Adding tags to a folder Once you have created a folder you can add tags to it 1 Select a folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name is displayed in the Name field of the form 2 After the backslash type the new tag name Nesting a folder 1 Select a folder in the folder hierarchy 2 Click New Folder on the Edit menu or click the Create Folder button on the toolbar 3 Type a backslash followed by the new folder name oa hie 4 Click OK a Hoppert LB 2a system When you nest folders remember that the backslash in a folder name counts as one character in the tag name 4 9 Creating tags Fay Duplicate Tag Folder 4 10 To view a series of nested folders resize the hierarchy box To resize it place the cursor over the right border of the box until it changes to a double arrow Drag the border to the required size E Hoppar L E Alarm es Duplicating a folder When you duplicate a folder all the tags in the folder are automatically given the new folder name If the folder contains folders those folders are also duplicated AV aaem Be sure to choose Duplicate Folder rather than Duplicate Duplicate only duplicates individual tags To duplicate a folder and its tags 1 Select the folder in the hierarchy
255. ck OK If you typed a number that is too high RSView32 automatically adjusts the index number to use the highest available number If you type a number that is already in use RSView32 renumbers the other objects in the display This will change the tab sequence Creating a tah sequence A tab sequence is the order in which users can move through a series of objects using the Tab key To create a tab sequence use index numbers To move through a tab sequence press Tab to move through the objects from lowest index number 1 to highest index number press Shift Tab to move through the objects from highest index number to lowest index number 1 12 45 Animating graphic objects Example Creating a selection order In the display below pressing the Tab key moves users through the objects in a left to right pattern Waka Displiry The valves are objects with object key animation The boxes are numeric input fields The buttons are button objects The numbers above the objects show each object s index number Using the Current Tag parameter The Current Tag parameter is a placeholder for a tag name or any character string Use this parameter to create a command that is object specific For example if you want F2 to set the value of a selected object s tag to 0 you would set up a display key for F2 using the tag parameter and then set up object keys for each object on the scre
256. computer set up RSView32 for communications For details see Chapter 2 Setting up direct driver communications or see Chapter 3 Setting up OPC and DDE communications 4 If your project includes VBA programs that reference object models ensure that object references are installed and enabled Setting the project path In the Project Paths dialog box you can change the application and database paths for a project A path consists of a drive letter directory and subdirectory and tells the system where a project s database and editor files are stored When you copy a project from one computer to another RSView32 automatically changes the default paths to the drive and directory the project has been copied to Therefore you need only change project paths when a project that has editors configured to store files on a network drive is moved to a computer with a different drive mapping a project that was copied from another machine uses files in directories other than the default directories that is the files were added using Create Shortcut to Existing Component you move the files for an editor from their original location to another location on the same computer 18 8 Running your project When you change the default path for an editor new files will be stored in the new location Existing files will remain in their original location unless you physically move them using the Windows Explorer or File Manager T
257. configuration has been simplified There is no distinction between scan classes for string tags and for other tag types one scan class can handle any tag type Also the number of tags that can be assigned to a scan class is not limited and a device type is no longer required RSView32 has 12 scan classes A through K SLC addressing syntax Tag database The I O address syntax for the fixed SLC SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 OS300 has changed If you import a ControlView project with tags referencing I Os from these SLC types you must modify the addresses for these tags For details see Appendix D Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers The I O address syntax for the SLC 5 03 OS301 and SLC 5 04 has not changed If you import a ControlView project that references I Os from these SLC types ensure the Type field of the Node editor is set to SLC 5 Enhanced In RSView32 group tags and structure tags are not supported Instead folders are used to organize tags In RSView32 a local tag is called a memory tag Tag names can be up to 40 characters long Separate the folder name from the rest of the tag name with a backslash RSView32 comes with a set of system tags These preconfigured tags are in the folder called System in the Tag Database editor For a complete list of system tags see Appendix B System tags C 7 m Differences between RSView32 and Control View Trends You cannot imp
258. constant set a tag to the value of an object property To call a method on an object On the command line or anywhere else that accepts a command type the following command Invoke file object method parameter1 parameter2 file The name of the graphic display that contains the ActiveX object me can be used instead of file At runtime it resolves to the graphic file that currently has focus object The name of the ActiveX object as specified in the Object Name dialog box 12 39 Animating graphic objects method The name of a function or sub routine in the ActiveX object The method is initiated by an external event such as the Invoke command parameter The tag name or constant that the method will use The easiest way to specify the file object method parameter1 parameter2 string for the Invoke command is to use the Command Wizard Associating objects and displays with keys You can associate RSView32 commands with graphic objects in a display and with the display itself using object keys and display keys A key is either a key on a keyboard or keypad or a button on a touch screen that is connected to the computer or monitor an operator uses to interact with your RSView32 project at runtime Operators can use these keys to perform actions such as moving between screens setting tag values and so on Object keys and display keys are different from global keys Object keys and display keys are act
259. contains string tag data This column Contains SQL Data Type Length DateAndTime The date and time the tag values SQL_TIMESTAMP Driver were logged dependent Millitm The millisecond time the tag SQL_SMALLINT 4 values were logged or SQL_INTEGER TagIndex or The index number for the tag The SQL_SMALLINT 2 or tag name that corresponds to this orSQL_INTEGER 4 number is listed in the tag name table TagName If the tag table isn t used the tag SQL_VARCHAR 40 name appears in this column or SQL_CHAR Val The analog or digital value of the SQL_DOUBLE or 8oar tag SQL_INTEGER or 4or SQL_SMALLINT 2 The string value of the tag SQL_VARCHAR 82 or SQL_CHAR 16 15 Sharing data with other Windows applications This column Contains SQL Data Type Length Status Blank if communications are working properly D if a node is disabled E if a communication error occurred while RSView32 was trying to acquire the tag value S if the tag value is stale that i if the value has been acquired before but has not been updated U if the tag is uninitialized S SQL_VARCHAR 1 or SQL_CHAR Marker B when the DataLogOn command was issued and logging began E when the DataLogOff command was issued and logging ended S when the DataLogSnapshot command was issued SQL_VARCHAR 1 or SQL_CHAR Tag name TagName Taglndex TagT e TagD ataT ype system Minute 0 2 0 systemi Second 1 2
260. ct 3 Under Disable select the check box for each item you want to disable To completely disable runtime access to other Windows 9x programs select all the check boxes On Windows 9x disabling the key combinations and the ability to switch to other Windows applications allows you to lock operators into an RSView32 runtime application On Windows NT you cannot disable Ctrl Alt Del through the Startup editor To lock users into an RSView32 runtime application on Windows NTT use the NT 4 0 Desktop Lock tool included in the RSView32 Tools program folder Ctrl Alt P This key combination shows or hides the Project Manager Once the Project Manager is open users can access all parts of an RSView32 project You can secure the Project Manager by securing the ProjectShow command For details about security see Chapter 10 Adding security For details about the ProjectShow command see Appendix A RS View32 commands or see Help Ctrl Alt Del This key combination reboots the system You can only disable this key combination for Windows 9x To disable rebooting in Windows NT 4 0 use the NT 4 0 Desktop Lock tool in the RSView32 Tools program folder Switch to other Apps When Switch to other Apps is disabled the following occurs at runtime Alt Tab Alt Shift Tab and Ctrl Alt Esc which switch to other applications are disabled a Alt F4 which closes RSView32 is disabled Ctrl Esc which brings up the Start menu is disable
261. ct Manager 3 To open a library either double click its icon or right click it and then click Edit To create a graphic library 1 In the Project Manager open the Graphics folder 2 Open the Graphics Library editor by doing one of the following double click the Library icon right click the Library icon and then click New 3 When you are finished creating the library click Save or Save As on the File menu and name the library The library name is added to the other names in the right pane of the Project Manager 11 103 Creating graphic displays To add a library to a project 1 In the Project Manager open the Graphics folder 2 Right click the Library icon and then click Create Shortcut to Existing Component 3 In the dialog box select the library file you want 4 Click OK The library is displayed in the right pane of the Project Manager Printing displays at runtime 11 104 Operators can print graphic displays at runtime using the PrintDisplay command You must provide the operator with a way to issue the command when you create the display For example create a button object display key or global key with the PrintDisplay command as the press action or provide a command line in the graphic display When you use the PrintDisplay command RSView32 prints the entire display even if parts are covered by other displays You can also use the ScreenPrint command to print an image of whatev
262. cted input field when the operator presses the Download or Update Field button on the on screen keyboard or when the operator presses Enter on a hardware keyboard This button Does this Update Field Closes the on screen keyboard and stores the new value on screen for later download Download For numeric and string input fields closes the on screen keyboard and downloads the value or text the operator typed For recipe fields closes the on screen keyboard opens the Recipe dialog box and inserts in the Recipe File field the text the operator typed Cancel Discards the operator s changes and closes the on screen keyboard For information about setting up displays to use the on screen keyboard see Displaying the on screen keyboard on page 11 25 _ 11 48 Creating graphic displays Creating numeric and string display fields Use the Numeric Display tool to create fields that operators can use to display the current value of an analog or digital tag or a value based on an expression Use the String Display tool to create fields that operators can use to display the current value of a string tag Numeric Display tool String Display tool To create a Numeric Display field 1 Click the Numeric Display tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw the field 3 Release the mouse button Humane Display Expires chon EJ t logo Pelson Asitrresic Biwiso Funcions Tegs Feld Lergh o Fome Decir Leadin
263. ctivity 8 1 8 9 8 16 alarm 6 8 6 29 data 7 1 7 2 obf 7 8 ODBC activity 8 10 alarm 6 30 project rsv 1 1 sound wav 6 33 A 21 A 45 File based trends 7 45 13 3 13 13 Fill animation 12 18 FlushCache command 11 27 A 36 and realtime trends 13 26 executing shutdown command with 11 22 using when processing stops 5 8 7 47 9 7 Folders 4 3 G 4 adding tags to 4 9 creating 4 7 Fonts in alarm summary 6 57 in graphic displays 11 34 resized to fit object 11 83 substitution at runtime 11 35 in trends 13 37 13 38 Foreground scan period 2 16 2 17 Forms in editors G 4 FoxPro 7 1 8 1 Freehand graphic object 11 32 Functions See Built in functions GE programmable controller 3 13 Global key commands Key 15 22 A 40 KeyEdit A 40 Global keys 15 5 G 4 creating 15 19 differences from ControlView C 5 precedence among key types 15 14 running a key file 15 21 on startup 18 7 Global Keys editor 15 19 Graphic display commands Abort 15 3 A 10 Display 15 3 A 30 and events 9 1 and key lists 12 56 and parameter files 11 38 11 40 caching 11 27 13 26 positioning 11 20 sizing 11 19 Download 11 47 11 64 A 33 DownloadAll 11 47 11 64 A 34 FlushCache 11 27 A 36 and realtime trends 13 26 executing shutdown command with 11 22 using when processing stops 5 8 7 47 9 7 Graphic A 36 NextPosition 12 43 A 42 NextWindow A 43 Parameter A 44 Position 12 43 A 45 PrevPosition 1
264. ctual tag values because each tag has its own vertical axis This is important if you have specified different minimum and maximum values for the pens Configuring trends Example Shading with three pens The upper pen Pen 2 has a constant value of 75 and the lower pen Pen 3 has a constant value of 25 Pen 1 represents the tag called VIN_LEVEL The trend will be shaded whenever Pen 1 goes above Pen 2 or below Pen 3 A plot for this trend looks like this Pen 1 Pene2 Peng 40064 To produce the shading shown above the following settings were used Pen Tag Name or Value Shading Upper Bound Lower Bound Pen 1 VIN_LEVEL Pen 2 Pen 3 Pen 2 75 Pen 3 25 13 23 Configuring trends Example Shading with two pens Whenever Pen 1 goes above Pen 2 the trend will be shaded like this Pen 1 Color 1 Pen 2 42603 To produce the shading shown above the following settings were used Pen Tag Name Shading Upper Bound Lower Bound Pen 1 VIN_LEVEL Pen 2 Pen 2 OIL_LEVEL 13 24 Configuring trends Example Shading between two pens Whenever Pen 1 goes above or below Pen 2 the trend will be shaded like this Pen 1 Color 1 Pen 2 40065 To produce the shading shown above the following settings were used Pen Tag Name Shading Upper Bound Lower Bound Pen 1 VIN_LEVEL Pen 2 Pen 2 Pen 2 OIL_LEVEL Creating a legend
265. cular event occurs 1 Click On Event 2 In the Expression field create the expression that will trigger creation of a new file For details about expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions You can use on event logging to create sets of data for use with file based trending For more information see Chapter 13 Configuring trends Example Creating a new file for a new shift You can set up your project so it creates a new log file at the end of a shift or batch process For example create a tag called NextShift In the Data Log Setup editor click On Event and type NextShift as the expression Expression Meatihull When the tag evaluates to true a new data log file is created to store the data from the new shift Never creating new files Click Never Logged data is added to a single file To manage disk space if a log file grows too large stop data logging move or delete the data log file and then restart data logging You cannot delete a log file while data is being logged to it For details about how to monitor disk space see Monitoring disk space on page 18 14 7 31 Configuring data logging Using the DataLogNewFile command to create files 7 32 You can also create new ODBC backup files and dbf log files with the DataLogNewFile lt file gt command or the DataLogNewFile command The DataLogNewFile lt file gt command creates a new file set for the specified data log mode
266. current value when the command is evaluated enclose the tag name in dollar signs to create a placeholder in the command If the placeholder is enclosed within double quotes or nested in the string value of another placeholder in the command RSView32 does not substitute the tag value The maximum number of characters for floating point tag values is 17 If the value uses more than 17 characters it will be represented in scientific format The maximum command length is 255 The command will be truncated if the substituted tag values cause the command to exceed this length Using dollar signs to create a placeholder in the command is an alternative to the Parse utility available in the RSView32 Resource Kit The dollar signs alternative offers better performance Example 1 A macro using placeholders in commands Display Screen Tag1 Display Tag3 Tag2 Valve23 Open When the macro runs Tag1 1 Tag2 2 and Tag3 Screen Note that these are all string tags RSView32 replaces the placeholders in the commands with the tags current string values The graphic display Screen1 appears then the graphic display Screen2 appears then the tag Valve23 is set to its open state You don t need to put braces around tag names when using placeholders in commands A 3 m RSView32 commands D A 4 Example 2 Changing the value of a tag and tag placeholders In this example Tag1 s initial value is zero The value
267. d address entries for a node connected to the same network as the RSView32 system Communication Channel Valid Entries DH 0 876 octal DH 0 77 octal DH 485 0 31 decimal TCP IP Host name as described below E 1 m Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices Host name When entering a host name use one of the following a direct IP Internet Protocol address in the form WWW XXX YVy ZZz where www xxx yyy and zzz are numbers from 000 to 255 an alias for the address An alias is an alphanumeric string from one to eight characters The first character must be a letter and the name is case sensitive Remote station addressing This section outlines valid address entries for a node connected to a remote network An RSView32 system can communicate with nodes on remote DH DH or DH 485 networks when connected to a DH network using a KT family card KT KT2 KTX KTXD PCMK a TCP IP network using an Ethernet card Remote DH or DH networks can be bridged by a 1785 KA interface module or by a Pyramid Integrator that has an RM or KA module Remote DH 485 networks can be bridged by a 1785 KAS5 DH and DH networks bridged by a 1785 KA The format of the station address for nodes on remote DH and DH networks is Remote Network Station Address Valid Entries DH ILsss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal SSS station address on remote DH 0 376 octal
268. d by RSView32 You can use these tags anywhere a tag name is required The system tags for alarms are This tag Type Displays this information system AlarmBanner String The most recent most severe alarm If an alarm of an equal or higher severity occurs it replaces the first alarm whether or not the previous alarm has been acknowledged system AlarmMostRecentDate String The date of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentLabel String The threshold label of the tag of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentSeverity Analog The severity of the most recent most severe alarm 1 to 8 system AlarmMostRecentTagDesc String The description of the tag of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecent Tagname String The name of the tag of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentTime String The time of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentUnits String The units of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmStatus String The number of unacknowledged and suppressed alarms system AlarmSummaryltems Analog The number of alarm transactions in an unfiltered alarm summary system AlarmSummaryltemsUnacked Analog The number of unacknowledged alarms in an unfiltered alarm summary system AlarmSuppressedCount Analog The number of tags with alarm suppression turned on 6 11 Configuring alarms 6 12 Alarm
269. d by another Windows application and inserted into a graphic display using OLE Created in the Graphic Display editor OPC OLE for Process Control OPC provides a way to transfer and share information among automation control applications as well as communication devices Parameter file A file that stores values for tag placeholders Created with the Parameter editor PLC Programmable Logic Controller an Allen Bradley programmable controller Poke Used with DDE A request from a DDE client to write a value Project A set of files created or configured using RSView32 s editors Property An ActiveX attribute the named characteristics and values of an object such as shape color position or number Realtime trend A trend displaying data that comes from the value table as the data is collected Created with the Trend drawing tool in the Graphic Display editor Recipe file A file storing the tag values that will replace the tag placeholders in a graphic display Created in the Graphic Display editor or in the Recipe editor Glossary Recipe management A description of the process where operators send or receive groups of process variables tag values The components of recipe management are numeric and or string input objects a recipe field and a recipe file Remote station A programmable controller or any other computer attached to a different network than RSView32 Remote trend A trend displaying data fr
270. d command 10 20 A 44 Passwords 10 14 10 20 Pause command A 45 Peer to peer network communications 17 5 PI See Pyramid Integrator PI PID mnemonics D 24 Pivot table 16 17 Placeholders 6 35 See also Tag placeholders in commands 15 8 A 3 PlayWave command A 45 PLC 2 3 G 6 address scanning 2 15 addressing syntax 4 19 D 1 setting up communication with 2 1 type selecting for device node 2 14 PLC 2 addressing syntax D 2 PLC 3 addressing syntax D 2 PLC 5 Enhanced addressing syntax D 6 PLC 5 addressing syntax D 4 Poke G 6 Poll rate for DDE nodes 3 15 Polygon graphic object 11 31 Polyline graphic object 11 31 Position command 12 43 A 45 Index Precedence among global object and display keys 15 14 and the F1 key 15 15 embedded ActiveX objects 15 15 embedded OLE objects 15 16 reserved keys 15 17 PrevPosition command 12 43 A 46 PrevWindow command A 46 Primary drivers 2 8 PrintDisplay command 11 104 A 46 Printers selecting 1 9 Programmable controllers E 6 See also PLC PLC addressing syntax D 2 SLC addressing syntax D 9 SoftLogix 5 addressing syntax D 20 Project moving 10 16 Project commands ProjectHide A 48 ProjectRun A 48 ProjectShow 10 18 18 5 A 48 ProjectStop 10 18 18 15 A 48 Quit A 49 Project files 1 1 1 2 1 7 moving and copying 18 8 Project Manager 1 3 preventing runtime access to 10 18 18 5 Projects 1 1 G 6 See also Components developing without a com
271. d in Windows 9x 4 Click OK 18 5 m Running your project Startup To specify the project components you want to run at startup 1 Click the Startup tab Enke ma F corres ramii Sika hho mor ore The order items appear in the Startup editor is not the order in which items will run If you have created a project that has components that must start in a particular order create a macro that will run when the project starts 2 Check the box for each item you want to run when the project starts Where required specify the file you want to run Alarming Starts alarm monitoring This is the same as using the AlarmOn command Communication Status Logs communication errors to the activity log file and or the activity bar if you set the project up to do this To set this up open the Activity Log Setup editor and ensure the Log File and Activity Bar check boxes are selected for the Communications category 18 6 Running your project OPC DDE Server Enables RSView32 as an OPC and DDE server This is the same as using the RTDataServerOn command Data Logging Starts running the specified data log model This is the same as using the DataLogOn command Up to 20 data log model files can run simultaneously but only one can be specified in the Startup editor To run more files list them in a startup macro Global Key File Runs the specified global key file This is the same as using th
272. ders and the spreadsheet shows the tags within the folders A folder icon known as root is always present in the hierarchy window at the top of the folder hierarchy This folder contains all the tag folders you and RSView32 create For example the system folder holds the system tags that come with RSView32 For a complete list of the system tags display the contents of the folder or see Appendix B System tags You can nest folders If a folder has a plus sign it contains one or more folders If a folder is blank it does not contain any other folders This folder contains one or more folders m This folder does not contain another folder Creating a folder 1 Click New Folder on the Edit menu or click the Create Folder button on the toolbar New Folder x Name Hoppert 2 Type the folder name 4 7 m Creating tags 3 Click OK The new folder appears in the hierarchy window Hopper E system Opening a folder When you open a folder its contents are displayed in the spreadsheet To open a folder do one of the following double click the folder select the folder and press Enter To open multiple folders 1 Select the folders by doing one of the following click a folder and then drag the mouse up or down click a folder and Shift click other folders immediately above or below the first selected folder click a folder and Ctrl click other folders anywhere in the hierar
273. dged Ack Page Marks all alarms on the screen as acknowledged If a bell is associated with an alarm acknowledging the alarm turns off the bell If a tag has gone out of alarm it is removed from the alarm summary when it is acknowledged Ack All Marks all alarms in the alarm summary as acknowledged If a bell is associated with an alarm acknowledging the alarm turns off the bell If a tag has gone out of alarm it is removed from the alarm summary when it is acknowledged Silence If the highlighted alarm is configured to set off the internal bell silences Current the computer s sound If the highlighted alarm is configured to set off the external bell resets the associated bit in the programmable controller Silence Page If any alarms on the screen are configured to set off the internal bell silences the computer s sound If any alarms on the screen are configured to set off the external bell resets the associated bits in the programmable controller Silence All If any alarms in the alarm summary are configured to set off the internal bell silences the computer s sound If any alarms in the alarm summary are configured to set off the external bell resets the associated bits in the programmable controller Execute Runs a command macro or VBA program if one was assigned to the Execute button You can pass parameters from the highlighted alarm for example the tag name to the command macro or VBA
274. diting and saving the tag and then redisplaying the tag monitor will fix the problem System com tags Use the system com tags to receive a more detailed error message If the tag monitor reports an error move to an empty cell in the tag monitor type system com and when the dialog box appears click Select All For a complete list of system com tags see Appendix B System tags Setting up direct driver communications Developing your project without a communication network You can develop your RSView32 project to use direct drivers without having an Allen Bradley network or programmable controller To do so use the None Loaded driver type 1 Open the Channel editor 2 Select a channel and in the Network Type field select a network for the channel 3 In the Primary Communication Driver field click None Loaded Using the None Loaded driver type allows you to add or change tags without causing communication errors To set a configured channel s network type to None Loaded first issue the ComStatusOff command Because setting a configured channel s network type to None Loaded deletes all the comstatus system tags from the tag database you cannot set a configured channel s network type to None Loaded if the ComStatusOn command has been issued 4 Disable the node by clicking the Enabled check box to deselect it 2 19 Setting up OPC and DDE communications OPC and DDE connections allow you to communi
275. ditor If a graphic display has focus and a press release or repeat action has been defined for the F1 key F1 acts as a display object or global key instead of launching Help Precedence and embedded ActiveX objects When a graphic display is active and an embedded ActiveX object has input focus a key that triggers an action in the embedded object will not trigger that action if the key has been defined as an object or display key as well When you press the key the action of the embedded ActiveX object will not be executed the action of the object key or display key will be triggered instead For example you might have an ActiveX slider object to control the speed of a motor with the F2 key defined to increase the motor s speed and the F3 key defined to decrease the motor s speed If you have defined F2 as an object key to jog the motor s position pressing F2 will never increase the motor s speed every time an operator presses F2 the motor s position will be jogged instead If a key that triggers an action in an embedded ActiveX object has been defined as a global key pressing that key will trigger both the action defined for the embedded object and the action defined for the global key 15 15 Setting up navigation 15 16 For example if the F2 key for an ActiveX gauge object increases a motor s speed and you have defined F2 as a global key to print the current graphic display each time the operato
276. double arrow indicates the tag and property update each other 3 Click in the Tag column to specify the tag to use for the property Type the tag name or click the button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag Attaching ActiveX control events The ActiveX Control Events dialog box shows the events associated with the selected ActiveX object and allows you to specify RSView32 commands or macros that will run when the event occurs at runtime Animating graphic objects ne th diab bow to aah Au vie ibr of ee tb on Aer ver nA hag la ance aria pantera To launch the Select awhetvel Event Command Altech career ad on races be he ened Wizard click this kk j button TAE Fi i E risia eae nerriet nerh avin Aach lag ho che een paar RETRE Eveni Faremi Finen ag eaii j E eh E T p Brit agla iraire Prepay Type Doubs For more ssrgh Zas information a mb Tore about the object irbis zl and its events Daxin Ho decureechsters raa aia click this button gt T Loprsri ta A Skea canting by kog Mik Dii Help To attach RSView32 commands or macros 1 Select the ActiveX object 2 Click the right mouse button to open the context menu point to Animation point to ActiveX Control and then click Events 3 Select the event you want to attach the command or macro to 4 Type the command or macro name or click the button to open the Command Wizard and then click a co
277. dow that has focus parameter One of the following me Closes the window from which the command is executed editor Closes the specified editor such as a graphic display or an alarm summary To name the editor use the RSView32 command that opens the editor See the examples below Closes all windows Ctrl F4 also closes the active window Examples The Abort command Abort Without a parameter closes the window that has focus Abort me Closes the window from which the command is executed Abort Display Closes all open graphic displays Abort Display Pumps or Abort Pumps Closes the graphic display called Pumps Abort Monitor Closes all open tag monitors Abort Closes all windows RSView32 commands Account Acknowledge Account Opens the User Accounts editor To prevent security from being changed at runtime restrict access to this command Acknowledge tag_name Acknowledges an alarm or a group of alarms This command gives no indication that it has run but will display a message if not executed properly If an acknowledge bit is associated with an alarm acknowledging the alarm sets the acknowledge bit tag name The name of the tag to be acknowledged This can be a tag name a name with wildcards or the tag literal string If no tag is specified this command acknowledges the the most severe most recent unacknowledged alarm tag Specifying the word tag inside square
278. driver to the channel If you do not have drivers loaded click None Loaded For details see Configuring channels on page 2 6 4 Inthe Node editor create nodes for each programmable controller you wish to communicate with For details see Creating a node on page 2 12 5 If you want to change the default rate at which nodes are scanned open the Scan Class editor and edit the scan classes For details see Scanning for new tag values on page 2 15 6 In the Tag Database editor create tags For each tag select Device as the data source and assign the nodes and scan classes that you have defined For details see Chapter 4 Creating tags 7 Monitor communications For details see Monitoring communications on page 2 18 Setting up direct driver communications Configuring RSLinx drivers RSLinx drivers provide a direct connection between RSView32 tags and Allen Bradley or SoftLogix 5 programmable controllers For details about configuring any of the RSLinx drivers see your driver documentation You can also use RSLinx with OPC and DDE communications as described in Chapter 3 Setting up OPC and DDE communications You must use an OPC or DDE connection to handle unsolicited messages and to communicate with the PLC 5 250 or ControlLogix 5550 device For instructions on using unsolicited messages see RSView32 Technical Notes on the RSView32 Tools menu Using the drivers To configure and use
279. dth of lines using Line Properties on the Attributes menu For details see page 11 95 Creating graphic displays Polyline tool NI Polygon tool Drawing a polyline or polygon A polyline is a series of connected line segments A polygon is a closed polyline shape Polyline Hollow Polygon Filled Polygon 1 Click the Polyline or Polygon tool 2 Drag the drawing tool to create the first segment of the object Release the mouse button To draw horizontal or vertical lines not diagonal lines hold down Ctrl while you drag the mouse as ow 3 Move the drawing tool to where you want the angle of the polyline or polygon to be and click Repeat this step until you have completed the object os ae 4 To finish drawing click the Select tool 11 31 Creating graphic displays Freehand tool Arc tool e Wedge tool _ 11 32 Drawing a freehand object Drawing freehand is similar to drawing with a pen on paper 1 Click the Freehand tool 2 Drag the drawing tool to create the shape you want Drawing an arc or wedge Arcs and wedges are drawn in two steps first you create a circle and then you reshape the circle To draw the arc or wedge in 45 degree increments hold down Ctrl while you draw a O M Arc Hollow Wedge Filled Wedge 1 Select the Arc or Wedge tool 2 Drag to draw a circle Release the mouse button When you release the mouse button a set of handles appears so you can
280. e Key lt file gt command Derived Tags Runs the specified derived tags file This is the same as using the DerivedOn lt file gt command Up to 20 derived tag files can run simultaneously but only one can be specified in the Startup editor To run more files list them in a startup macro Event Detector Runs the specified event file This is the same as using the EventOn lt file gt command Up to 20 event files can run simultaneously but only one file can be specified in the Startup editor To run more files list them in a startup macro Startup Macro Runs the specified macro A startup macro allows you to runa series of commands when the project starts Any macro can be used as a startup macro Shutdown Macro Runs the specified macro Any macro can be used as a shutdown macro Initial Graphic Displays the specified graphic display file 3 Click OK 18 7 Running your project Setting up a project in a new location It is important to test your project in the location from which it will run if you will run the project from a different directory or different computer than the one on which you configured the project 1 Use the Project Transport Utility provided with the RSView32 Resource Kit to copy the project directory to the target location 2 When the project is in the new location ensure the project paths are correct See Setting the project path next 3 If you moved the project to a new
281. e graphic display using OLE Object Linking and Embedding ActiveX objects embedded in the graphic display 11 1 Creating graphic displays The Graphic Display editor To open the Graphic Display editor Graphics 1 In the Project Manager open the Graphics folder rm Display Library 2 Open the Graphic Display editor by doing one of the following P t go pce ee double click the Display icon right click the Display icon and then click New The editor s main components The figure below shows the main components of the Graphic Display editor Each component is briefly described in the table on the following page Aine Works Ele or hci uals Salient aie indas Lae Toolbar 3 Liniile ispi Drawing area Status bar gt ForHa ki piece F D 11 2 Creating graphic displays The Graphic Display editor s main components are Toolbar Contains buttons for commonly used menu items The figure on the previous page shows only one toolbar but there are several including toolbars for drawing tools line and fill colors and fill patterns You can hide or show toolbars using the View menu and you can move the toolbars anywhere on the screen For more information about toolbars see page 11 4 Drawing area Is the area for creating graphic displays Change the background color of this area in the Display Settings dialog box For details see page 11 21
282. e 1 or both are O the resulting bit is 0 gt gt right shift Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the right Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand The bit on the right disappears Either a O or a 1 is shifted in on the left depending on whether the left most bit is a O or a 1 If the left most bit is O a O is shifted in If the left most bit is 1 a 1 is shifted in In other words the sign of the number is preserved lt lt left shift Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the left Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand The bit on the left disappears and O always shifts in on the right complement Returns one s complement that is it toggles the bits within an integer or tag Reverses every bit within the number so every 1 bit becomes a 0 and vice versa 14 12 Creating expressions Example Bitwise operators For these examples tag1 5 binary 0000 0000 0000 0101 tag2 2 binary 0000 0000 0000 0010 tagl amp tag2 Returns 0 binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 tag1 tag2 Returns 7 binary 0000 0000 0000 0111 tag tag2 Returns 7 binary 0000 0000 0000 0111 tag gt gt 1 Returns 2 binary 0000 0000 0000 0010 tag lt lt 1 Returns 10 binary 0000 0000 0000 1010 tagl Returns 6 binary 1111 1111 1111 1010 14 13 Creating expression
283. e The current graphic display the display from which the command is executed Wait tttt Specifies the amount of time to wait before starting to print where tttt is the time in milliseconds If you use the U parameter specify enough time to allow for the upload of tag values If you do not specify a time the default is 2000 milliseconds RS View32 commands Project U Initiates an update of tag values in all input fields before starting to print This parameter is not necessary with input fields that are updated continuously Pfile Specifies the name of a parameter file that contains tag names to be substituted for placeholders in the display Ttag_name Specifies one or more tag names to be substituted for placeholders in the display Separate multiple tag names with commas do not use spaces If the specified display is not currently visible RSView32 prints the display without making it visible If this command is issued without specifying a display and no display has focus RSView32 logs an error to the activity log PrintDisplay prints the entire runtime display even if parts are covered by other displays However PrintDisplay does not necessarily print ActiveX or OLE objects in their runtime state The ScreenPrint command prints an image of whatever shows on the monitor Use ScreenPrint to ensure that the display is printed showing all objects in their current runtime state provided they are not co
284. e X coordinate of the alarm summary window to nnn pixels from the left edge of the screen Valid range depends on screen resolution Ynnn Positions the Y coordinate of the alarm summary window to nnn pixels from the top edge of the screen Valid range depends on screen resolution A 57 RSView32 commands Suppressed SuppressOff SuppressOffAll SuppressOn A 58 Suppressed Opens the Suppressed List editor SuppressOff lt tag_name gt Restores alarm reporting for the specified suppressed alarm lt tag_name gt The name of a tag that no longer requires alarm suppression You can use wildcards SuppressOffAll Restores alarm reporting for all suppressed alarms This command is faster than the SuppressOff command SuppressOn lt tag_name gt Suppresses reporting of alarms for the specified tag lt tag_ name gt The name of a tag or a wildcard This command is useful when equipment repairs or maintenance would otherwise result in alarms being generated All alarms for each threshold of the monitored tag are suppressed Alarm suppression can take place before or after issuing the AlarmOn command RSView32 commands Toggle Undefine Toggle V lt tag_name gt Reads the tag s value and writes back a 1 or 0 as follows if the tag value is 0 Toggle changes it to 1 if the value is not 0 Toggle changes it to 0 V Performs a read immediately after the write to verify that the value
285. e account ID or add a password For a completely secure project clear all security codes for the default user account This ensures that the default user does not have any privileges Ensuring you always have access When setting up accounts first create a super user account for the system administrator filling in the fields as specified below Be sure to select all security codes A through P Creating user accounts You can create user accounts in the User Accounts editor or if the computer on which RSView32 is installed is running Windows NT you can create user accounts by adding users from the Windows NT domain user list You cannot use both Windows NT and RSView32 to maintain user accounts in the same project When you use the NT user list you can t enter or change user names or passwords in the User Accounts editor but you can specify login and logout macros All users you add from the Windows NT user list must be in the same Windows NT domain All NT users added to the RSView32 User Accounts will have the same security codes as DEFAULT in the User Accounts editor Once you have added users from the Windows NT user list you will have to specify security access for each user you added in the RSView32 User Accounts editor 10 13 Adding security 10 14 To create user accounts using the User Accounts editor 1 In the Account ID field type a user ID up to 20 characters long The ID can include
286. e button type always changes to beveled Only beveled buttons can be a polygon or non rectangle shape To reshape a button select the button and then click the Polygon tool Move or add vertices as you would with any polygon shape Creating a recipe field Use the Recipe tool to create a field that operators can use to specify the name of a recipe file containing tag values for all the numeric and string input fields in a graphic display With a recipe field operators can load all the values from a recipe file into the numeric and string input fields in one keystroke rather than having to enter values one by one Operators can then write all these values to the programmable controller with another keystroke Tyee A graphic display can have only one recipe field To create a recipe field 1 Click the Recipe tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw the field 3 Release the mouse button Default File Name Lox re Cancel Justification Help Field Lenath 30 Left C Center Right 11 59 Creating graphic displays _ 11 60 4 In the Default File Name field type the name of the recipe file to and from which values will be saved and restored Do not include a file extension 5 In the Field Length field type a value to specify the maximum number of characters that can be displayed in this field 6 In the Justification field select Left Center or Right to specify how the recipe file name will be aligned
287. e click the Alarm Setup icon right click the Alarm Setup icon and then click Show i Alarm Setup Ea IV Use Long File Names if supported Configuring alarms Specifying where to store alarm log files To specify where to store log files 1 In the Alarm Setup editor click the Setup tab i Alarm Setup Ea By default alarm log x files are stored in the Logging Paths ALMLOG subdirectory Primary Path ples ASView Samples ALMLOG Browse Cancel of your project Help I Generate alarms when approaching normal operating range IV Use RSView32 6 0 Log File Format IV Use Long File Names if supported 2 If you want to change where the log files are stored specify a new path When log files are created they will be stored in the directory specified here 3 If you want RSView32 to generate alarms when an analog tag value is moving back to normal operating range and recrosses the alarm trigger threshold check Generate alarms when approaching normal operating range For an example see page 6 3 This option applies to all analog alarm tags in the project 4 If you want to log activities in a format that is compatible with projects running in RSView32 version 6 0 or earlier click Use RSView32 6 0 Log File Format 6 23 Configuring alarms Creating log files 6 24 5 If you want your alarm log files to be named using the DOS eight character file name and three characte
288. e click the object and check the number in the Index field COOKIES Disphin Numeric Input Ea r oo Tag Name Liquids H Lad Cancel The selected object gt Index fi heed has index number 1 Help Liquids Default Data E _ E_T A n i an a Continuously Update Field Length fio Format Decimal Decimal Places jo Overtlow Epas r Justification r Leading Character Left C Center C Right Blanks Zeroes Changing index numbers Once you have created two or more objects with index numbers you can change the index numbers For example if you have created four input fields you can change the order of their index numbers You can change input field 4 to index number 1 However you cannot change input field 4 to index number 5 because you have not created five input fields When you change an index number other numbers are adjusted so two objects do not have the same number and there are no gaps in the numbering 12 44 Animating graphic objects To change an index number 1 Do one of the following fora numeric or string input object open the object s configuration dialog box by double clicking the object fora button object open the object s configuration dialog box by double clicking the object for an object with object key animation select the object and then open the Object Keys dialog box 2 In the Index field type a new number 3 Cli
289. e gt The name of a data log model without a file extension Moves data for all models that are currently running A 23 RSView32 commands DataLogNewFile DataLogOff A 24 You can use the DataLogMergeToPrimary lt file gt command whether or not the specified model is running If a model is running when you issue the DataLogMergeToPrimary command RSView32 switches back to the primary path or ODBC database If a model uses the dbf format RSView32 moves all files on the secondary path including the current file set to the primary path begins a new file set on the primary path and continues logging to the new file set If a model uses the ODBC format RSView32 merges the ODBC backup files into the ODBC database and continues logging to the ODBC database DataLogNewFile lt parameter gt Creates a new data log file for the specified model or for all models on the path RSView32 is currently logging to either the primary path or the backup path If RSView32 is logging to an ODBC database RSView32 logs an End snapshot and then a Begin snapshot when you issue this command lt file gt The name of the data log model without a file extension Creates new files for all models that are currently running DataLogOff lt parameter gt Stops data logging for a specified model or stops data logging for all models lt file gt The name of a data log model without a file extension Stops data logging for all models
290. e ly fear r Opec lt lt This field specifies the total width that can be stored i 7 ighHipecosei ia Saat eer Ferid Digits After Decimal Point Type the number of digits after the decimal point that are to be stored for floating point numbers Use this field and the Number of Digits field to achieve the precision you want For example if your process has very large numbers you can increase the total number of digits and reduce the number of digits after the decimal point Number of Characters in String Type the number of characters to be logged for all string tags in the model Log Milliseconds in Separate Field Specify whether to log the millisecond portion of the time in a separate field in the dbf file If you do not select this option the milliseconds are logged in the time field Configuring data logging When you have finished specifying options for the dBASE IV storage format go to Setting up logging paths on page 7 21 Fat bbe Long Files HM gees F pape oange Formal D diusi jones O aa fede E DEC ee ce Tay table lagi a Jakie Fiat atte ey Sing Table Egr sis Jahi 6 If you chose the ODBC storage format in step 4 specify the ODBC data source Type the path and file name of an existing ODBC data source or click to select an existing data source or create a new one 7 13 Configuring data logging If you click the Select Data Source dialog box app
291. e paths for The command opens the Data Log Path editor Use the editor to specify paths as described in Specifying logging paths on page 7 22 You can use the editor to change the primary and secondary paths for dBASE IV data log models and the backup path for ODBC data log models You cannot change the ODBC database using the Data Log Path editor You can use the DataLogPath command anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be entered 7 43 Configuring data logging Making runtime changes without editing the data log model 7 44 You can change certain data log parameters at runtime without editing the data log model These runtime changes take effect immediately but are not retentive changing the log rate for periodic logging changing the log file identifier string Use these commands anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be entered For example type the command directly on the command line Changing the log rate for periodic logging You can change the log rate for periodic logging at runtime using the DataLogChangeRate lt file gt lt value gt unit command lt file gt is the name of the data log model lt value gt is the numeric portion of the time interval for the log rate For example if you want to log data every 20 seconds the value is 20 unit is the time unit of the log rate hundredths tenths seconds minutes hours or days The default is seconds if you omit the unit
292. e sure Generate alarms when approaching normal operating range is deselected in the Setup tab of the Alarm Setup editor Variable thresholds Threshold values can be constant or variable The above example uses constant thresholds A variable threshold can change because its value is taken from another tag value not a constant number You define a variable threshold by naming a tag in the appropriate field in the editor That tag s value is the threshold for the alarm as the tag changes the threshold changes Variable thresholds require more system resources than constant thresholds This is due to the continuous scanning of threshold values and to the processing necessary to detect alarm faults Configuring alarms Alarm faults A variable threshold must not become higher than the threshold above it or lower than the threshold below it If this happens an alarm fault is generated for the monitored tag To correct an alarm fault you must reconfigure the variable threshold so it does not overlap either of its neighbors This can become complex when the neighboring thresholds are themselves variable because these boundaries are determined dynamically at runtime When an alarm fault is generated the following actions occur the tag s alarm status stays where it was before the alarm fault an alarm fault is reported to all configured alarm reporting devices such as the alarm log file and printer the alarm fault
293. e text in the Search for field are automatically replaced with the text in the Replace with field _ 11 66 Creating graphic displays If the Confirm Replacements check box is selected the Confirm Replacement dialog box opens showing where the text is used Curi Replacement Feplce Ned Pepes Cancel He Wenge Hopper Levan Memes Dia pie To replace the text click Replace or click Replace All To move to the next selected object that uses the text string click Next 5 When all replacements are done click Close Creating and editing OLE objects OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding OLE objects are objects created in other Windows applications and linked to or embedded in an RSView32 graphic display RSView32 is an OLE client application which means it cannot be embedded in other Windows applications The main difference between linking and embedding is where data is stored Linked objects are stored in the source file The graphic display stores only the location of the source file and displays a representation of the linked data Embedded objects become part of a graphic display This difference means that linking pastes the object into the graphic display and retains links to the source file in addition to allowing it to be edited If the source file is changed the object in the display is changed When you double click a linked object to edit it its application comes up in another window
294. e this command only for displays of type Overlay or Qn Top The Abort command closes the active display or a specified display PullForward Pulls forward the specified display If the specified graphic display is of the Replace or Overlay type PullForward gives the specified display focus and positions it behind any On Top display that is open PushBack Pushes the specified display behind other displays If the specified graphic display is of the On Top type PushBack positions the display behind any other open On Top displays and in front of any open displays of the Replace or Overlay type The PullForward and PushBack commands provide quick display changes because displays are already up and running However be aware that the more displays that are open the more memory is used The display type you choose gives you additional control over how the operator navigates between displays For example use the On Top option to keep a display on top at all times even when another display has focus Or use the Replace option if you want a display to replace all other open displays when it opens For details about assigning display type see Specifying the display type on page 11 13 15 3 Setting up navigation 15 4 Reducing display call up time You can reduce the time required to display a graphic by loading the graphic into the display cache You can load the graphic before it is displayed by using the Displa
295. ean Appl a Method Call Boolean ApplyT emplateCondition String TemplateN ame String ConditionDescription Method Call Boolean ASSetProperty String Property String Propv alue Method Call Boolean SaveT oT emplate String TemplateName String IgnoreList Method Call D ouble GetMarkHighValue Integer ilndex Method Call D ouble GetMarkLow alue Integer ilndex Method Call D ouble TIA Integer ilndex Method Lall Integer In whichZone Integer ilndex Method Call S tring GetNextPropertyN ame Integer ilndex Method Call String GetNextPropertyValue Integer ilrdex Method Call VOID AboutBos Method Call YOID D oPokef Method Call VOID D oRequest Method Call VOID LinkPokef Method Call VOID LinkRequest l Description No documentation available Animating graphic objects To view an object s method description 1 Select the ActiveX object 2 Right click to open the context menu point to Animation ActiveX Control and then click Methods 3 Select the method you want to view the description for Using the Invoke command to call an ActiveX method To call an ActiveX method the object must have a name You then use the RSView32 Invoke command to call the method for the named object For details about naming an object see page 12 34 With the Invoke command you can call an object s method assign the value returned by a method to a tag set an object s property to a tag value or a
296. ears File Ome Scare Mectara Dan Source E miec Hew i i inde eure thot deroan Hem dra thot you wnh fo cone K DJ Da LU Sy iio Hais SOUR Tat os DOE ero ARD H iniaded igu prar rmachra A ce ee a To use an existing file based ODBC data source select it from the Data Source Name list box or click to browse for the file folder that contains the data source To use an existing machine based ODBC data source click the Machine Data Source tab and select it from the list box To use anew ODBC data source click the File Data Source or Machine Data Source tab then click the New button The Windows 9x or Windows NT Create New Data Source wizard appears Follow the instructions on screen to create the new ODBC data source For an example of how to create a new ODBC data source see page 7 16 7 14 Configuring data logging 7 Specify one or more ODBC tables See The ODBC storage format on page 7 8 for a description of each table s purpose To choose a table from the existing tables at the data source click the button Select a table from the Select ODBC Table dialog box that appears To view the order type length and precision of the fields in the table highlight the table and click Details If you don t specify a table name for the tag table the tag name is used instead of a tag index in the float and string tables This uses more database space than using a separate tag table When you
297. eating graphic displays Using a recipe at runtime At runtime operators can restore values from a recipe file into input fields and send those values to the programmable controller or server Operators can also upload values from a programmable controller or server into input fields and then save those values to a recipe file If an upload fails because of a communication error question marks appear in the numeric input fields To move to a recipe field users can do any one of the following use the mouse Double click the recipe field to open the Recipe dialog box and save or restore the recipe file press Ctrl R to move to the field and then press Enter to restore the contents of the recipe file If the display has been set up to use the on screen keyboard selecting the recipe field and pressing Enter brings up the on screen keyboard Pressing the Download button on the on screen keyboard opens the Recipe dialog box where you can restore the contents of the recipe file press Ctrl W to move to the field and then press Enter to save the recipe file If the display has been set up to use the on screen keyboard pressing Enter brings up the on screen keyboard Pressing the Download button on the on screen keyboard opens the Recipe dialog box where you can save the recipe file 11 63 Creating graphic displays To download recipe values to a programmable controller or server 1 Restore the values from a rec
298. ecent Tagname String The name of the tag of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmMostRecentTime String The time of the most recent most severe alarm B 1 m System tags Communications Tag Name Type Displays information about system AlarmMostRecentUnits String The units of the most recent most severe alarm system AlarmStatus String The number of unacknowledged and suppressed alarms system AlarmSummaryltems Analog The number of alarm transactions in an unfiltered alarm summary system AlarmSummaryltemsUnacked Analog The number of unacknowledged alarms in an unfiltered alarm summary system AlarmSuppressedCount Analog The number of tags with alarm suppression turned on The following tags record device communication information These tags are added to the system folder when you configure a channel in the Channel editor Each channel you configure will have these four tags The number on the end identifies the tags for each channel For example system ComErrorString 1 is for channel 1 To report communication errors issue the ComStatusOn command Tag Name Type Displays information about system ComErrorString1 String Most recent device error message system ComErrorValue1 Analog Internal number of most recent device error system ComStatusString1 String Current status of device communications Will be the same as system ComErrorString1 if the error condition sti
299. ect Manager 0 0 e 0 ce ea ee es 1 3 COMPOMEDE sc sa kea aa OES hg VE RES HR ees 1 3 Viewing component locations 00485 1 4 Adding components to a project 0 eee eee eee eee 1 4 Renaming removing and deleting components 1 6 Renaming a component 4 04 ss ees San sack RS ee 1 6 Removing a component oe av ee Sv pada eet tae eA 1 7 Deleting a component and file Gac5 c0csonawnvae ban 1 7 Naming files nies cise erpaci a x hen inde aera pis 1 8 PADUNE ook pie aA way Pantin sr yeaah E E Aaa Se O EE septa 1 8 Selecting 4 Pinter accorsi caeiie rhe ssweniees 1 9 Selecting printer setup options 000 1 10 Selecting a network printer ids ack eees ian diess 1 10 Printing at Pupusa vse ah ahi eich eet an ae 1 10 Contents Chapter 2 Setting Up Direct Driver Communications Overview of direct driver communications 2 2 Communication channel 34500559 4 seeidad deen cees 2 2 Communication device 16 0 eiaie ooesaenemev ens 2 2 Communication driver axcia dpc faye aek ene 2 3 Node control device j ecr adios eaenaa eign oe 2 3 Setting up direct driver communication to programmable controllers i c cide ohare Sace eee ESR 2 3 Setting up communications without hardware or sofiware th laa pp A a aa aa ph le Mer et al or oie 2 3 Summary of steps 44 wha wnxes chose neS abacuaa odie 2 4 Configuring RSLinx drivers ain cieke cece eh aaa eles 2 5 Using the drivers cyanea ns cane ihe canes aos es
300. ect decease aoe bees aes How log files are named be ace aaa pea tee tae ed Exporting activity log files to ODBC format Specifying which activities to log eee eee eee Editing activity log setup is ccaciw aetna spawn nee 90 1005 90 GO NGO OO G0 100 lt 00 00 100 00 00 OO WON DA MN BWN NK Contents Using the activity Dates cave tee need oan saaen whaak 8 14 Hiding showing and moving the activity bar 8 14 Messages in the activity batiedaycatis sewn ewasiyars 8 15 Using the Activity Log Viewer saxi6vei sxss ong ccduo gees 8 16 Selecting BECO Meas inea 4503 racks eas eee eR 8 16 Understanding records 434 pant eaa ea aes 8 17 Tracking system usage ji scda nee vhopta ape uA ee hoe 8 17 Starting and stopping activity logging 8 18 Ways to start activity logging 6 ch Mase ud sel cte ba has 8 18 Ways to stop activity logging 008 8 18 Chapter 9 Configuring Events How to use multiple event files ics wicked bocce in eas 9 2 Summary Of steps ei aeaa yd na aa iia ERGa Rates 9 2 The Events editor sus sera tundan EAE EE A 9 2 Using the Accept and Discard buttons 9 3 Setting up the evaluation interval ices ein ee es 9 4 Creating EVENTS oyma b Eana O tes a A ete a esses 9 5 Editing events ai merme a R EER i 9 6 Starting and stopping event processing 006 9 7 Ways to start event processing 00e eee 9 7 Ways to stop event processin
301. ect the ActiveX object 2 Click the right mouse button to open the context menu and then click Object Name Tooltip 3 Type a name for the object or accept the default name Each object in a graphic display must have a unique name Object names are case sensitive The first character of the name must be a letter but subsequent characters can use numbers or the underscore character _ 4 Click OK To name an object using the ActiveX Property Panel 1 Right click the object then click ActiveX Property Panel on the context menu 2 Click the Properties tab if it is not already selected 3 In the column beside Name type the name for the object Animating graphic objects Attaching ActiveX control properties The ActiveX Property Panel shows the properties associated with the selected ActiveX object and allows you to attach an RSView32 tag to a property The property type is determined by the ActiveX object not by RSView32 Property Type A property type can be Bindable or Not Bindable The type determines how the property and the tag interact at runtime Bindable When the tag value changes the property value also changes and when the property value changes the tag value also changes For example a slider object has the bindable property Value which is attached to a tag called Tag1 When Tag1 changes the slider s knob changes position accordingly Likewise when the slider s knob changes position for example
302. ect the object When the object is first selected its width is 100 percent 2 Click the Width tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the object s width 4 Set the minimum width for the object by doing one of the following click a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it to resize the object type the width you want the object to be when the expression evaluates to its minimum value Select the At Minimum check box 5 Set the maximum width for the object by doing one of the following click a handle on the left or right side of the object and drag it to resize the object type the width you want the object to be when the expression evaluates to its maximum value Select the At Maximum check box 6 Click an anchor point This is the part of the object that does not move For example click Left if you do not want the left side of the object to move As the value of the expression changes the object will grow to or shrink from the right 7 To specify minimum and maximum values click the Specify check box and type the values 8 Click Apply Animating graphic objects Configuring height animation With height animation an object s height changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression The object s height is proportional to the value
303. ectangle tool to draw a rectangle with rounded corners 1 Click the Rounded Rectangle tool 2 Drag the drawing tool diagonally until the object is the size you want You can change a rounded rectangle into a right angle rectangle by using the small black box that appears inside the rounded rectangle Place the pointer on the box and drag the drawing tool until the rectangle is the desired shape a aon e Note that rounded rectangles can only be rotated in Windows NT not Windows 9x Drawing a rectangle or square Use the Rectangle tool to draw a rectangle or square 1 Click the Rectangle tool 2 To draw a rectangle drag the drawing tool diagonally until the object is the size you want To draw a square hold down Ctrl while you drag 11 29 Creating graphic displays J Ellipse tool Line tool _ 11 30 Drawing an ellipse or circle Use the Ellipse tool to draw an ellipse or circle 1 Click the Ellipse tool 2 To draw an ellipse drag the drawing tool diagonally until the object is the size you want To draw a circle hold down Ctrl while you drag Drawing a line Use the Line tool to draw straight lines in any direction 1 Click the Line tool 2 Drag from the beginning point to the end point To draw horizontal or vertical lines not diagonal lines hold down Ctrl while you drag the mouse You can also use the Snap to Grid option to draw straight lines You can change the style and wi
304. ected pen s tag For example if Tag1 has a minimum value of 10 and a maximum value of 100 the range on the vertical axis will be 10 to 100 when the Tag1 pen is selected If Tag2 has a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 50 the range on the vertical axis will change to 10 to 50 when the Tag2 pen is selected If you want all pens in the trend to use the same range on the vertical axis specify the same range in the Custom Min Max field Use Tag s Min Max Select this button to use the tag s minimum and maximum range as configured in the Minimum and Maximum fields of the Tag Database editor Custom Min Max Select this button to specify a range then type minimum and maximum values To always have the same range on the vertical axis specify the same minimum and maximum values for all pens 13 21 Configuring trends 13 22 Configuring shading Shading Upper Bound None d Lower Bound None X Use shading to compare the values of different pens To have shading at least two pens must be defined For the upper and lower boundaries select the pens with which to compare values When the pen you are defining plots above the value of an upper boundary pen or below the value of a lower boundary pen the area between the pen you are defining and the boundary pen will be shaded The shading color will be the color you select under Style Aaa Shading is determined by the position of lines on the screen not by the a
305. edged Configuring alarms Defining the content of the message When defining the content of a message use any combination of system default messages user default messages and custom messages System default messages The system default messages are a series of placeholders At runtime these placeholders are replaced with information about the alarm that has been triggered To use the default messages for all alarms and alarm events do not change anything The default messages will be used automatically Alarm events use system messages if you don t specify a log message string using the L parameter with the AlarmEvent command These are the placeholders This placeholder Is replaced with C Current value of tag in alarm D Date when message is sent L Alarm label specified in the Alarm Label field of the Analog Alarm and Digital Alarm editors N Tag name of tag in alarm S Tag description of tag in alarm T Time when message is sent U Units specified in the Units field of the Tag Database editor Threshold value that was crossed MITIA C U and V do not contain any information when used in alarm Acknowledged messages To specify the width of a column type a number between the backslash and letter see the following example This allows you to create columns of equal width 6 35 Configuring alarms Example Message placeholders An out of alarm message
306. eg fel to Aja hiie hon chiara Pa Aad bian ka cocked hora ki hes id ot teage im thes radiel Taghai f Taji pmi Daama Using the tag monitor Use the tag monitor to view information about tags such as changing tag values and tag status information To create a tag monitor you can create a tag monitor object in the Graphic Display editor create a tag monitor file through the Project Manager 4 27 Creating tags E Graphics brar a Parameters T Recipe 4 28 Creating a tag monitor object 1 Open the Graphic Display editor 2 Open the Tag Monitor editor by doing one of the following onthe Objects menu click Advanced Objects and then click Tag Monitor click on the Drawing Tools toolbox The cursor changes to the tag monitor drawing tool Re 3 Drag the mouse to create a box the size you want for the tag monitor When you release the mouse a tag monitor appears The Graphic Display editor s menu bar changes to the menu bar for the tag monitor Select the tags you want to use in the display as described in Selecting tags on page 4 29 4 Edit the tag monitor object as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it and so on You can also use this object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it into another For detailed information about graphic objects see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays 5 When
307. egs Show Dirinile 4 32 Creating tags fo rencl rhe bl In Alana Cirle Undetinad Carel To show or hide the form and spreadsheet On the View menu click Spreadsheet or Form A check mark means the form or spreadsheet is visible To change the spreadsheet font 1 On the View menu click Spreadsheet Font 2 Select the font style and size you want To change the color of the font click Spreadsheet Colors on the View menu as described next 3 Click OK To change the color of text in the tag monitor spreadsheet 1 On the View menu click Spreadsheet Colors 2 Select the item for which you want to specify a color The items are Normal for all tags in the spreadsheet In Alarm for tags that are in alarm Undefined for tags that have not been defined in the tag database 4 33 Creating tags 4 34 3 In the Color dialog box click the desired color 4 Click OK Viewing details To see more detailed information about a tag 1 Select a tag by clicking it in the spreadsheet or by clicking the Next and Prev buttons until the tag is displayed in the form section of the tag monitor 2 Click Show Details on the View menu or click the Details button in the form section of the tag monitor The Tag Details dialog box opens Tag Deas Hoppe Aloo Full Dg al Tag Indes eat Oat Some Deven Draca Tag Charr information Dim lier Dee Typer Addem BROABTE ode Siena
308. emarks entered using the Remark command Communications Communication errors for device DDE or OPC tags Important To log communication errors you must also select the Communication Status check box in the Startup editor or type the command ComStatusOn at the command line Tag Write Any tag write not write errors Tag writes are done by the Equal Ramp Set and Toggle commands as well as by downloading data from numeric input string input and recipe fields in a graphic display 8 12 Configuring activity logging This activity category Lo Tag Read Any tag read not read errors Tag reads can be done by uploading data into numeric and string input fields in a graphic display Normal scanning is not logged as a tag read Custom 1 through User defined messages for use with RSView32 VBA pro Custom 4 grams For more information about using custom activity categories see Help 3 The label appears in the log file to identify an activity category To create your own label type a new label up to 20 characters long 4 Check the appropriate boxes to specify where you want the activity logged You can log to the activity bar log file and printer For more informatio activity bar on page n about the activity bar see Using the 8 14 For more information about log files see Creating log files on page 8 4 5 Complete Steps 2 through 4 for each category you wa
309. en specifying which tag to use for each object 12 46 Animating graphic objects Summary of steps 1 Create a graphic object 2 In the Display Keys dialog box associate a key with an RSView32 command Use the tag placeholder as the command s parameter To open the Display Keys dialog box click the Animation menu and then click Display Keys Inthe Press Action field specify an RSView32 command with tag as the command parameter 3 Select the graphic object 4 In the Object Keys dialog box supply the tag name or character string that will replace the placeholder To open the Objects Keys dialog box click the Animation menu and then click Object Keys Inthe Current Tag field specify a tag name or a character string At runtime when the object is selected and the display key is pressed the contents of the Current Tag field replace tag in the RSView32 command Examples For ways to use the tag parameter see the examples starting on page 12 47 Example 1 Creating display wide keys to open and close valves Imagine you have a graphic display containing 20 valves and you want operators to be able to open and close all the valves with the same two keys Instead of specifying the tag name for each valve use the tag parameter with display keys 12 47 Animating graphic objects 1 In the Display Keys dialog box assign two display keys For the press action type Set tag
310. ends 7 45 13 13 G 4 See also Trends Horizontal position animation 12 19 Horizontal slider animation 12 28 Host name E 2 E 8 Identify command 6 14 A 38 configuring alarms with 6 44 6 49 If then else expressions 14 23 nesting 14 24 Index numbers 12 43 and buttons 11 56 and numeric input objects 11 44 and recipe files 11 60 and string input objects 11 45 Input field commands Display U parameter A 30 Download 11 47 11 64 A 33 DownloadAll 11 47 11 64 A 34 NextPosition 12 43 A 42 Position 12 43 A 45 PrevPosition 12 43 A 46 SendKeys A 54 Upload 11 47 11 65 A 60 UploadAll 11 47 11 65 A 60 Input fields creating numeric 11 42 recipe 11 59 string 11 42 downloading values from 11 42 11 46 highlight enabling or disabling 11 24 question marks in 11 43 11 46 11 63 specifying behavior for 11 24 specifying color for 11 23 updating tag values in A 30 uploading values to 11 42 11 46 using at runtime 11 46 11 63 using keys with Shift Tab A 46 special keys 11 46 Tab A 42 I 11 Index Input focus specifying behavior 11 24 Interactive objects 11 23 Internet address E 2 E 8 Internet technical support P 2 Invoke command 12 39 A 39 IP address See Internet address K KA modules E 2 E 6 E 9 Key command 15 22 A 40 Key definitions 15 14 G 5 precedence of 15 14 using to open displays 15 5 Key list 12 54 12 55 G 5 Keyboard on screen 11 25 11 48 A 30
311. ente maretia tke PIR Aida eo lea RES eS 15 7 CREAMS Macros lie Spain mit ee tae twit epee Pe eee 15 7 Using parameters ses srauni ete cage NAA en anes 15 10 IN Esti THACKOS sraon FS cage e Shag Pe Ra Rees 15 11 Creating a macro that starts when a project starts 15 11 Creating symbols 2 Vs icfe wow hiot sa beUN cls oot tire A esis ae 15 12 Important guidelines i 5 084 50h tucks dus teaks othe 15 13 Key definitions e creseron ieai na KA Ra EERE RER 15 14 General rules about precedence 42 5 5 veiw Goawesoas 15 14 Precedence and the Fl key ic i3 8 cecsasiaraeiaeus 15 15 Precedence and embedded ActiveX objects 15 15 Precedence and embedded OLE objects 15 16 Reserved Keys aordena aca is sea oai amas 15 17 Tips for using Keys adie asw tiie eee bbe seeeniees 15 19 Creating global keys usu dinate ew nctere wes nieepnnialcd 15 19 Running global key files io 54ise Cheick aeweiae dares 15 21 Chapter 16 Sharing Data with Other Windows Applications Methods for sharing data sa citi cqteny astiecesteciietiowtrest ote 16 1 Retrieving historical data so5 5 ev ctedy ck eee eaen reese 16 3 Retrieving tag names from data log files 16 4 Bringing logged dBASE IV data into Microsoft Excel 16 5 Understanding the content of the log files 16 7 Activity logfiles sneer p hiv anate pein Sone yes males 16 7 Activity log ODBG format a0 test nea tue 16 8 Alarm log tiles ito dc tih Scare hha eS weer ant
312. eplay Expne seion Logical Ralat ational Arties Ditiga Functions T Dimensions Juste eon Character E Lat dik 1U idih fio C Camer Ohsas 0 Height i Bight Conceal Help 4 Fill in the fields as follows In this field Do this Expression Create an expression At runtime the string result of this expression is displayed in the String Display field For details about expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Dimensions Type a value to specify the maximum number of characters that will be displayed in this field Be sure the field is long enough to accommodate the result of the expression Justification Select Left Center or Right to specify how the values will be aligned within the field Character Offset Select a number of characters This number determines the first characters to be displayed in the field starting at O You can display an entire string or part of a string You can also display parts of the same string in different string display fields For example assume you have a string 12 characters long The first eight characters contain the tag address The last four characters contain the tag status To display only the status specify a character offset of 8 The address part of the string will not be displayed To display the address in a separate field create another string display field specify the same tag name and specify a field width of 8 and an offset of
313. er 3 999 decimal For direct driver communication binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point eee Element number 0 999 decimal or eeee Element number 0 1999 decimal for PLC 5 80 Series E firmware bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for floating point and string file types Example B84 113 13 D 7 m Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers PLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax Fnnn bbbbb F File type B Binary nnn optional File number 3 999 decimal For direct driver communication the default file number 3 is used if the file number is absent bbbbb Bit offset from start of file O 15999 decimal Example B27 248 PLC 5 Enhanced timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files FFnnn eee MNE ss bb FF File type T Timer C Counter R Control SC SFC status MG Message PD PID control BT Block transfer TD Token data non File number 3 999 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control eee Element number 0 999 decimal MNE Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables star
314. er shows on the monitor For more information about these commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Animating graphic objects This chapter describes the various types of animation you can attach to graphic objects and outlines how to use tag names tag placeholders expressions and commands when attaching animation use Object Smart Path OSP to quickly define an object s range of motion attach object and display key animation attach animation to OLE objects attach control to ActiveX objects 12 1 Animating graphic objects Types of animation Once you have created graphic objects you can attach animation that links an object to a tag so the object s appearance changes to reflect changes in the tag s value attach key animation that links an object or display to a key or mouse button so operators can perform an action by pressing a key or mouse button attach OLE verb animation to an OLE object so when the expression evaluates to true it activates an OLE object by initiating one of the verbs for example edit or open associated with the object attach control to ActiveX objects so you can map tags to an ActiveX object s properties so changes to the object s properties change the tag s value and in some cases changes to the tag s value change the object s properties map commands to an ActiveX object s events so commands run based on the object s events
315. error ie hore eR ene ere ROR 12 40 Using index numbers his alk Pals age aie ae PRE A ae 12 43 How index numbers are used iis tsa cee Sean ena 12 43 Checking an object s index number 12 44 Changing index numbers sii cs0er veces itnnews 12 44 Creating a tab sequenceal Ae otis web a ayo rs 12 45 Using the Current Tag parameter 220005 12 46 Summary OF STEPS pen tuis aera cake sar EEE o poked 12 47 Examples ie ret ikea can a hee a iene hes 12 47 Creating display keys ints jy asnlaanophindes ba ewenlasee 12 52 Editing display and object keys i c 2 0c500s8ie sedans 12 54 Modifying a key lt ied t 2d coun bare ha bitceeied bie 12 54 Removing a key ado sade gy MANS pace Se Se PR a 12 55 Removing all keys inh udder a at Catenin poadtortaaiee en 12 55 Viewing the key list at runtime wash iiss o0e4 sek ome ees 12 55 Disabling the key list pyc ke wp eek ew ee Ges4a Beas 12 56 Applying animation to groups eeee eee eee eee 12 56 Checking the animation on objects 000 00 12 57 Using the Animation menu and the Animation dialog Hox isorine betceanne sate e EE tad Sins 12 57 Using Pekin mon eaen ea age Ee ia A a ears 12 58 Changing the animation on objects 00000 12 60 Copying or duplicating objects with animation 12 60 Copying animation without copying objects 12 61 Contents Chapter 13 Configuring Trends ADOUE TENS waste Para seca ae Mea
316. ession Result Specify how the object s appearance should change based on the result of the expression The fields in this area change for each type of animation For some types of animation you have to specify a change of state For example an object with visibility animation will switch between visible and invisible For other types of animation you have to specify a range of motion For example an object will move from a fixed starting point to a fixed end point The range of motion is related to the minimum and maximum values for the expression The object moves from the At Minimum position to the At Maximum position as the expression value changes to the maximum value Minimum and Maximum Values If you do not want to use the values set for the tag in the Tag Database editor specify minimum and maximum values If a value falls outside the specified range it will be evaluated as either the minimum or maximum value If you do not specify minimum and maximum values RSView32 uses the minimum and maximum values for the first tag in the expression For details see Setting minimum and maximum values on page 12 8 Apply Delete and Close Buttons These buttons do the following Apply Applies and validates the animation configured for the selected object or group of objects Choosing another tab is the same as choosing Apply the animation you have configured is applied to the object and validated Delete Deletes the a
317. est mode WEI ig lest mode is not the same as running the display It does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Using the toolbars The toolbars are a convenient way to quickly perform an action You can hide or show them using the items on the View menu If there is a check mark beside the toolbar name the toolbar is visible If there is no check mark the toolbar is hidden drag them anywhere on the screen dock them to an edge of the window except the ActiveX Toolbox Creating graphic displays A toolbar that is i pe eee docked Toolbars that are floating Selecting a drawing tool The Drawing Tools toolbox contains tools for creating selecting and rotating objects The tools are also available on the Objects menu Drawing Tools toolbox Objects menu Objects 11 5 Creating graphic displays 11 6 Before you can draw an object you must select the appropriate tool To select a drawing tool click the tool in the toolbox or on the Objects menu When you click a tool the pointer changes to show which tool is active 3 I Freehand tool Text tool To deselect a drawing tool do one of the following click the Select tool click another drawing tool Selecting colors The color palettes contain the colors you can assign to objects To show and hide the color palettes click them on the View menu Yo
318. ew INTERCHANGE Object Smart Path Packed DDE WINtelligent WINtelligent EMULATE 5 WINtelligent EMULATE 500 WINtelligent LOGIC 5 WINtelligent VIEW WINtelligent RECIPE WINtelligent VISION WINtelligent VISION2 and RSTools are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc PLC PLC 2 PLC 3 and PLC 5 are registered trademarks and Data Highway Plus DH DHII DTL Network DTL Pyramid Integrator PanelBuilder Panel View PLC 5 250 PLC 5 20E PLC 5 40E PLC 5 80E SLC SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 SLC 500 ControlLogix 5550 and SoftLogix are trademarks of the Allen Bradley Company Inc AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc dBASE IV is a registered trademark of Borland International Inc Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Intel and Xerox Corporation IBM is a registered trademark and AIX PowerPC Power Series and RISC System 6000 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft MS DOS Visual Basic and Windows are registered trademarks and ActiveX Microsoft Access Visual FoxPro and Windows NT are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation Modicon is a registered trademark of Groupe Schneider OPC is a trademark of the OPC Foundation Seagate Crystal Reports is a trademark of Seagate Technology Inc or one of its subsidiaries TrueType is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed
319. example as the press release or repeat action when you assign touch animation to an object in a graphic display or as the action for a button in a macro or symbol in a command line A 1 m RSView32 commands D A 2 How to use commands When entering commands keep the following guidelines in mind Parameters enclosed in angle brackets lt gt are required Parameters enclosed in square brackets are optional Commands and parameters are not case sensitive Parameters do not have to be entered in the order they are listed Start each new command on a new line or separate commands on the same line with a semicolon Separate multiple parameters with a space Enclose long file names containing spaces with double quotes when the file names are used as parameters For example Activity LogSendToODBC c mydsn activity db dsn Activity Tbl UDerek Ppasswd The exclamation mark indicates the start of a comment Everything after the exclamation mark is ignored unless the exclamation mark and what follows it are enclosed in double quotes Many commands accept wildcards The wildcards are matches any number of characters including the backslash and period characters matches any single character If a command accepts wildcards this fact is noted in the description of the command RSView32 commands Using placeholders in commands To replace a tag name with its
320. execution of the first and second command Play Wave lt file gt Plays the specified wave file lt file gt The complete path to the wave file including the wav extension Position lt n gt Moves focus to the object with the specified index number lt n gt The object s index number These are the objects that use index numbers numeric and string input objects buttons objects to which you have assigned object keys This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored See also PrevPosition and NextPosition A 45 RSView32 commands PrevPosition PrevWindow PrintDisplay A 46 PrevPosition Moves focus to the object with the previous index number This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored Shift Tab also moves focus to the object with the previous number See also Position and NextPosition PrevWindow Moves focus to another open graphic display Ctrl Shift Tab and Ctrl Shift F6 also move focus to another open graphic display See also Next Window PrintDisplay parameter Wait tttt U Pfile Ttag_name Prints the specified graphic display to the default printer If no display is specified prints the display that has focus parameter Specifies which graphic display to print as follows file The name of a graphic display file without a file extension m
321. ey are out of alarm and acknowledged When alarms are dropped they are removed from memory When the AlarmOff command is issued the contents of the alarm summary are erased AlarmOff is just one of the RSView32 commands used with alarms For details about this command and others see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help In the summary you can configure each alarm incident to be a different color For example you might choose to configure low severity alarms as blue medium severity as yellow and high severity as red When the alarm is displayed operators can tell an alarm s severity at a glance Create an alarm summary in the Graphic Display editor or create an alarm summary file through the Project Manager Graphic objects and displays You can customize graphic displays to show specific information about alarms RSView32 makes all alarm status information available to graphic displays through a set of system tags see below Use these tags with numeric and string display objects Attach visibility and color animation to affect the appearance of the objects The Alarm Information graphic library contains graphic objects you can drag and drop into your display For example to include an alarm banner in a display drag and drop the banner from the Alarm Information graphic library Use the graphic objects as they are or edit them to suit your needs Configuring alarms Alarm system System tags are created and update
322. f 9 7 A 35 EventOn 9 7 A 35 Event detector G 4 Event based alarms 6 18 Events G 4 creating 2 11 9 1 9 5 creating expressions for 9 6 14 2 differences from ControlView C 5 editing 9 6 evaluation interval for 9 4 for activity logging 8 7 for on demand logging 7 39 maximum files at runtime 9 2 maximum in a file 9 2 starting and stopping processing 9 7 18 7 Events editor 9 2 Excel See Microsoft Excel Execute button in alarm summaries 6 13 6 66 Execute command 6 13 Exporting activity log to ODBC 8 10 alarm log to ODBC 6 30 Expression G 4 Expressions 14 1 alarm events in 6 20 and animation 12 7 built in functions in 14 14 constants in 14 9 copying 14 4 creating 14 3 formatting 14 5 if then else logic in 14 23 in activity logging 8 7 in alarms 6 15 in data logging 7 39 in derived tags 5 6 in events 9 6 in the Equal command 14 6 A 8 operators in 14 9 evaluation order of 14 20 tags and placeholders in 4 4 12 4 14 8 using to report communication errors 14 14 using to retrieve alarm information 6 15 F F1 precedence 15 15 Failure of primary network at runtime 2 10 File names and P parameter 1 8 and spaces 1 8 in RSView32 1 2 long 1 8 6 24 for data logs 7 4 7 8 maximum length of 1 8 Index File names continued short 8 4 for activity logs 8 10 for alarm logs 6 29 File types graphics importing 11 99 using bitmaps 11 100 log dbf 16 3 a
323. f data starting on Jan 19 1998 at 1 30 pm type Start Tima dan 181 SS 1 Tima Pian ge fit ay Divisions Specify the number of major and minor divisions you want marked on the time axis Keep the number of divisions small so they will be visible Scale Check this box to have a time scale appear at the bottom of the trend Depending which check boxes you select the scale can contain any or all of the following the major and minor divisions the date and the time After you close the Trend dialog box you can change the font displayed in the scale by selecting Fonts on the Attributes menu Grid Check this box to have vertical grid lines extend from the major and minor divisions on the time axis Configuring trends Date Check this box to show the date in the scale The format of the date is determined by the Short date format specified in the Regional Settings option in the Windows Control Panel For more information about this option see Specifying time date and number formats on page 18 12 or see your Windows documentation Scroll Axis Check this box to have the grid for the time axis scroll across the trend When this box is not checked the grid for the time axis is fixed Time Check this box to show the time in the scale Time is displayed in the following format HH MM SS hour minute second Relative Time This check box is visible only when Historical is selected as the data source Chec
324. f the handles A double arrow appears 3 Drag the handle until the object is the desired size or shape For perfect circles and squares hold down Ctrl while you drag a corner handle Creating graphic displays To maintain the object s original proportions width to height hold down Shift while you drag a corner handle When advanced objects such as input fields are resized the font is resized to fit the new boundary To resize an object in small increments using the keyboard 1 Select the object 2 Place the pointer on one of the handles A double arrow appears 3 Hold down Shift and press an arrow key until the object is the desired size or shape Arranging objects You can arrange objects in a number of ways using the items on the Arrange menu or the buttons on the toolbar You can combine several objects into a group that behaves as a single object divide a grouped object into its component objects stack objects by moving them in front of or behind other objects align objects with each other space objects horizontally or vertically flip objects horizontally or vertically Grouping and ungrouping objects Grouping combines several objects into a single object so you can manipulate them as a single object You can attach animation to a group and any animation attached to individual objects in the group remains active 11 83 Creating graphic displays To group objects 1
325. f you change a 3D recessed or raised button to another shape or rotate it the button automatically changes to beveled The highlight and shadow colors on the beveled button use the current system settings To reshape a button select it click the Polygon tool and then move or add vertices as you would for any other polygonal shape To have the cursor captured when the button is pressed at runtime check the Capture cursor check box When the cursor is captured it will not move off the button until the button is released Use this feature when you need to ensure that a button s release action is carried out If the Capture cursor check box is not selected the button will behave like standard Windows buttons allowing the user to cancel the release action by holding the mouse and moving off the button If you want the button to be highlighted when the button has focus check the Highlight box The option Disable Highlight When Object has Focus on the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box overrides this Highlight setting In the Index field either leave the default value or type a new value Index numbers determine the tab sequence for interactive objects such as buttons and input fields and are also used in recipe files For details see Using index numbers on page 12 43 Creating graphic displays Browse Action In the action tab click an action Set Sets the specified tag to 1
326. f you define a press release or repeat action for a reserved key to use the key as an object or display key the object or display key function takes precedence and the default reserved function of that key is disabled For example you might want to evaluate the contents of an input field using a VBA program before you download the input field s value to a PLC To do this create an object key for the input object and assign the VBAExec command to the press action of the Enter key To do this for all input objects on the display create a display key for the PgDn key and assign the VBAExec command to the key s press action If you use a reserved key or key combination as a global key the key will perform both the actions of the global key you defined as well as the action of the reserved key Because the results can be unpredictable defining global key actions for reserved keys is not recommended Setting up navigation Tips for using keys Keys with repeat actions are ideal for such tasks as ramping a tag s value To define keys for running VBA programs or macros define press actions and release actions only Repeat actions could produce unexpected results or could flood the system with VBA programs or macros if the operator is unsure about whether pressing the key triggered the desired action and then presses the key repeatedly or holds it down Creating global keys Logic and Control ww Derived Tags
327. ff command To re enable printing of alarms use the RSView32 AlarmPrintOn command Alarms will print when the AlarmOn command is issued unless the AlarmPrintOff command was issued before the AlarmOn command was issued in the same session of RSView32 The AlarmPrintOff and AlarmPrintOn commands are not retained across RSView32 sessions The AlarmPrintOff and AlarmPrintOn commands have no arguments Suppressing alarm monitoring You can suppress alarm monitoring for tags This is useful for testing or performing repairs or maintenance on a piece of equipment To suppress alarm monitoring for tags use the RSView32 SuppressOn command To suppress all alarms for the specified tags issue the SuppressOn command before the AlarmOn command To view a list of the tags not being monitored use the Suppressed List You can also turn monitoring back on from this list The SuppressOn command is not retained after an AlarmOff command is issued The Suppressed List is therefore empty after the AlarmOff command is issued Configuring alarms Es Alaims Al Alarm Setup ra Alarm Log Viewer MA Alarm Summary 4 Suppressed List Suppressing alarm monitoring for tags 1 Open the command line 2 Type the following RSView32 command and press Enter SuppressOn lt tag name gt To suppress more than one tag use a wildcard The wildcards are This wildcard Does this Matches any number of characters including the back
328. file 1 On the menu bar click Setup and then click Derived Tag Setup File Edit View Window Help 2 In the Derived Tag Setup dialog box type a brief description of the derived tag file This description is for your information only it does not appear anywhere else Description Derived Tag file Evaluation C Continuous Periodic Evaluation Interval 1 0 seconds For example if you were creating a derived tag file for a certain area of your plant you might type West Wing Assembly Line to identify the area 3 Choose a type of evaluation to specify how often to evaluate expressions at runtime When the evaluation interval expires RSView32 evaluates the expressions that contain tags with values that have changed To have expressions evaluated as quickly as possible click Continuous To have expressions evaluated at a particular interval click Periodic and then type a number in the Evaluation Interval field You can use fractional seconds For example if you type 6 the expression will be evaluated every six tenths of a second Do not specify an evaluation interval faster than the scan class background period DDE server polling rate or OPC server update rate 4 Click OK Creating derived tags Creating derived tags Derived tags are created in the Derived Tags editor The following illustration shows a derived tag file Pe AKER 0 ma Froese a O B CE Egpmimor
329. file to replace tag placeholders A parameter file contains one entry for each unique placeholder in a display When you run a display you specify the filename along with the P parameter For details about the Display command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help _ 11 38 Creating graphic displays E Graphics re Display Library Ej Parameters Recipe To create a parameter file 1 Open the Parameters editor 2 Type one entry for each unique placeholder in the display associating the placeholder with a tag name For example 1 bean_weight 2 bean_level 3 bean_temp 3 Save the file with a meaningful name for example Beans For tag placeholders in alarm summary objects in graphic displays only you can use wildcards in the parameter file For example 1 bean_ is a valid parameter entry The alarm summary would display any alarms associated with tags beginning with bean_ Note that you cannot use wildcards in placeholders for any other type of graphic object To run a parameter file Type the following command in a macro or anywhere else you can use an RSView32 command Display lt file gt Pfile where lt file gt is the name of the graphic display file Pfile is the parameter file containing the tags to be substituted into the display 11 39 Creating graphic displays 11 40 Example Using a Parameter File to Replace Tag Placeholders To run the dis
330. fter the specified maximum has been reached The files currently being logged to are not included in this number For example if you specify 10 you will have a maximum of 11 activity log files at any time 10 old ones and the current one When a new file is started the oldest file set is deleted About activity log files Logged activities are stored in dBASE IV dbf format How log files are named When a log file is created it is named automatically The name is based on the date the file was created and the type of data it contains The format for the name is YY YYMMDDnz dbf where YYYY are the four digits of the year MM is the month DD is the day n is the sequence letter a b c and so on This letter indicates the sequence files were created in You can have up to 26 files a to z per day At midnight the sequence starts at a again z is the file type i is for activity Configuring activity logging If the path where the log files are stored does not support long file names the format for the name is YYMMDDnz dbf where YY are the last two digits of the year Example Log file name The activity log file named 971028bi dbf was created in the year 97 month 10 and day 28 The b indicates that this is the second file created that day The i indicates that this is an activity log file Exporting activity log files to ODBC format 8 10 Using the command Activity LogSendToODBC you can export
331. g 000 9 7 Chapter 10 Adding Security A bout Secunity e hacc dae vist cea patent tenes deen te 10 1 Summary ofsteps 1a cies oe n age epee were 10 3 Before you Deo s y9 99 0549 ba Poe Eee eRe Sane 10 3 Configuring security codes i a exit riv seb coxrensiah eo eeeasier 10 3 Sec rity odes snose hs twa atts Seek ea eee 10 4 Fhedefault lt 5 teases tong sycaccap tela oe oes ae tae we 10 5 Setting up security by inclusion 4 10 5 Setting up security by exclusion 10 6 Preventing access to the Security Codes and User Accounts editors A514 wie eae Dae utes sen Pali eA cee 10 6 Usitig Strict Security ocres sust ntase ied over vae nee ee 10 7 Turning off strict security ncn Vente ev en Levee baba 10 8 Assigning security to a eraphiosdisp lays Macs ane bees eS 10 9 Assigning security to an OLE Objects pads pets in neta 10 10 Assigning security to a tag was ae tev ea wy Sowtien o eS 10 11 Contents 10 Configuring user accounts yin s arse Ki merecun tami waked 10 12 About the default user i Gas nti ande veeauxs pas 10 13 Ensuring you always have access 000eeee 10 13 Creating user aCCOUntS 225 03 cce tte aks ede scene tac 10 13 Moving a project with Windows NT user accounts to a Windows 9x computer ace ssi dias US saa e we waa se 10 16 Login and logout macros 2 pes ceaapes een ieee Petaee eo 10 17 Securing the Project Manager ica nth ete s teks tans bodes 10 18 Preventi
332. g The ALM_ACK expression returns 1 if an alarm has been acknowledged If a tag goes out of alarm without being acknowledged the expression returns 0 When alarm monitoring starts and a tag has never been in alarm the ALM_ACK expression returns 1 by default To reverse this default behavior use the Registry Configuration tool in the RSView32 Resource Kit For a copy of the Resource Kit contact Rockwell Software Technical Support ALM_ALLACKED tag The ALM_ALLACKED tag expression returns 1 if all tags that match the pattern have been acknowledged If any of the tags have not been acknowledged the expression returns 0 6 15 Configuring alarms 6 16 Other functions are also used with expressions to monitor alarms For more information see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Using wildcards in alarm expressions For built in alarm functions you can use wildcards in the expression to retrieve information about multiple tags at once This wildcard Does this Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Matches any single character For example the following expression checks if any of a group of tags is in alarm ALM_IN_ALARM alarm where alarm represents all tags whose names begin with alarm If one or more of these tags are in alarm the expression result is 1 If all of the tags are out of alarm the expression result is 0 Note that using wildcards in
333. g Cherscter Jurhicatice ae ce ei ro n 6 Decimal Paces O edo ovesporen Seen ai spa as oe covet te 11 49 Creating graphic displays 4 Fill in the fields as follows In this field Do this Expression Create an expression At runtime the numeric result of this expression is displayed in the Numeric Display field For details about expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Field Length Type a value to specify the maximum number of characters that will be displayed in this field Be sure the field is long enough to accommodate the result of the expression Format Select a number base for the value Decimal Places Type the number of places you want after the decimal point This number must be at least one less than the field width Overflow This field is available only if Floating Point is selected in the Format field Use this field to specify how you want the floating point value displayed if it is too long for the field The value can be shown as an exponent rounded up to fit in the field or completely replaced by asterisks Leading Character Select Blanks or Zeroes Justification Select Left Center or Right to specify how the values will be aligned within the field 5 Click OK To create a String Display field 1 Click the String Display tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw the field 3 Release the mouse button _ 11 50 Creating graphic displays Shing Or
334. g Name Specify a tag name or a placeholder for a string tag For details about placeholders see Using tag placeholders on page 11 37 Index Either leave the default as it is or type a number other than the default Index numbers determine the tab sequence for interactive objects such as input objects and buttons and are also used in recipe files For details see Using index numbers on page 12 43 Default Data Type the text that will appear in the string input field when the graphic is initially displayed Continuously Update Check this box to have tag value changes appear in the field when the operator is not using the field to input data Dimensions Type a value to specify the maximum number of characters that will be displayed in this field Be sure the field is long enough to accommodate the string for the tag Justification Select Left Center or Right to specify how the values will be aligned within the field 5 Click OK 11 45 Creating graphic displays Using input fields This field is in display mode This field is in _____ gt pending write mode at runtime At runtime operators can use input fields to retrieve data from and send data to the value table so it can be accessed by the programmable controller external OPC server or DDE device or by RSView32 memory Continuously updating tag values B97 input mode 11 46 When a numeric or stri
335. g and stopping derived tag processing Ways to start derived tag processing Ways to stop derived tag processing Contents Chapter 6 Configuring Alarms Summary Of Teatires on scd een a wit E astea Key concepts serai aie ise dy es E Hae ee Alarms for analog tags c cvono tw adiopenasnentingas ets Alarms for digital tags pc 0i0 Poeecekevesrae dene Alarm severity e lant a Sn E ada as Alarmi messages sester os i ainia EEEN uE ETL Alem log ten cetaceans beste Oa Enne EAS Alarm displays a nt intt Obits d na iiie ane bk aces Alarm system tags tach Auta etal spite ate eles Alarm acknowledgment occacso8450x0 oeacuxee adie Alarm suppression 4 ated nays nos eee Tha as Running commands macros or VBA programs in response to alarms aj vited tae tate sated od aacee es AlareiCx pressions wo srsti oo eens avadan etia Acknowledge bit globally acknowledging alarms Handshake Dit st niesme ena weakest a A sn ag Alarm events se seston ie Ee a EE a S mmary OF StENS ietan eure Aan ok coma E ERTA The Alarm Setup editor 545 sedated s Hoek tee eee Specifying where to store alarm log files Creating log files isn ccideiaagacie E EE Monitoring disk spaces pcepowtwadtarendacutiegay ois Creating files periodically i epsilon sani Creating files at specified times 0000 eee ee Creating files when a particular event occurs Never creating new files wach hc i uite ok bine
336. g box opens click the tabs to see which types of animation have been set up Using Peek Use Peek to view the animation attached to a graphic object or group of objects In the Peek Settings dialog box you specify what type of animation you want to check When Peek is turned on any objects with the type of animation you have specified are surrounded by a red box For example if you click Color any objects with color animation will have a red box if you click Object Keys any objects that have keys associated with them will have a red box Peek Settings Ea I Obscured Objects I Button Objects T Input Objects I Recipe Object RA T Animated Objects Help MV Visibility I Vert Position I Touch I Object Keys I Color T Width I Horz Slider Tl Fill T Height I Vert Slider IT Horz Position M Rotation I OLE Verb Options I Activate Peek papertana S TATESWT String paperdemo blink1 paper demo blink2 paperdemo blink3 The Peek highlight is not visible in a graphic display with a red background Animating graphic objects To specify types of animation 1 On the View menu click Peek Settings 2 Click Animated Objects and then click any of the types of animation You can click as many types of animation as you want However Peek does not show the specific type of animation an object has For example if you choose color and visibility animation all objects with these types of animation w
337. g data with other Windows applications 16 4 Retrieving tag names from data log files For data log models RSView32 often uses an index file or table for tag names The file or table contains a list of all the tags used in the model together with an index number for each tag Other data log files or tables use the index number rather than the full tag name This storage Stores tag information in this file or table format dBASE IV with YYMMDDnt dbf where the t indicates this is the tag name file short file names This file is used for the wide dbf storage format only if tag names are greater than 10 characters long dBASE IV with YYYY MM DD NNNN lt Zog File Identifier String gt Tagname dbf long file names This file is used for the wide dbf storage format only if tag names are greater than 10 characters long ODBC TagTable This is the default name for the table You can change the name Use of this table is optional If this table isn t used RSView32 stores the full tag name in the FloatTable or StringTable When retrieving information from data log files you will likely want the tag names not the tag index Therefore you may have to retrieve data from more than one file or table To do this you have to join the tables For information about joining tables see Joining tables and selecting data on page 16 20 Sharing data with other Windows applications Bringing logged dBASE IV data into
338. g one of the following double click the Events icon right click the Events icon and then click New i Untitled Events doe Erbe e Deveriction pa oe Eireann Using the Accept and Discard buttons When you enter information in the editor the Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard Click Accept to save information Click Discard to discard information Configuring events Setting up the evaluation interval To set up the evaluation interval for the event file 1 On the menu bar click Setup and then click Event Setup File Edit View Window Help The Event Setup dialog box opens Description Event file Evaluation Continuous Periodic E valuation Interval fi 0 seconds 2 Type a brief description of the event file This description is for your information only it doesn t appear anywhere else For example if you were creating an event file for a certain area of your plant you might type something like East Wing Assembly Line to identify the area 3 Choose a type of evaluation to specify how often to evaluate expressions at runtime When the evaluation interval expires RSView32 evaluates the expressions that contain tags with values that have changed To have expressions evaluated as quickly as possible click Continuous To have expressions evaluated at a particular interval click Periodic and type a number in the Evaluation Interval field You ca
339. g receives its values externally or internally A tag with Device as its data source receives its data from a source external to RSView32 The data can come from a direct programmable controller driver or from an OPC or DDE server Tags with Device as the data source count toward the total tag limit you purchased 150 300 1 500 and so on Creating tags Organizing tags Memory A tag with Memory as its data source receives its data from the RSView32 internal value table A memory tag can be used to store values internally Tags with Memory as the data source do not count toward the total tag limit Organizing tags makes database creation faster and simpler To organize tags establish naming conventions Naming conventions enable you and operators to use the RSView32 wildcards most effectively when searching for and displaying tags during development and runtime use folders to group related tags Naming tags Tag names can be up to 40 characters long If you create a folder the folder name becomes part of the tag name The tag name can contain the following characters AtoZ Oto9 underscore _ and dash The tag name can be mixed case Tag names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case sensitive For example the tag name MixerValvel is the same as mixervalvel 4 3 Creating tags When a tag name starts with a number or contains a dash enclose the name in braces whe
340. ge may be absolute as illustrated or it may bea percentage of the minimum maximum range for a tag If the deadband in the illustration was two percent its range would be two percent of 5 000 rpm or 100 rpm If a buffer is not required the deadband must be configured to zero With a deadband of zero alarms will be triggered as soon as the tag value crosses any of its thresholds Configuring alarms Alarms for digital tags Digital tags are either on or off Therefore alarms for digital tags do not have thresholds They have alarm states The alarm states are On Triggers an alarm when a tag has a value of 1 Off Triggers an alarm when a tag has a value of O Any Change Triggers an alarm when a tag value changes from O to 1 or from 1 to 0 oe to Triggers an alarm only when a tag value changes from O to 1 n oe to Triggers an alarm only when a tag value changes from 1 to 0 Tyee The indicates change of state types These types are considered out of alarm immediately after the change of state Alarm severity Alarms can range in severity from one to eight to indicate different levels of importance One is most severe eight is least severe For example a level four alarm might warn that a vat is half full of liquid while a level one alarm indicates that the vat is about to overflow Both alarms monitor the same tag but have different severity levels When you configure alarm severity you specify w
341. ging When a project stops all data log models automatically stop as well To stop data logging without stopping the project use any of the methods below To stop a single data log model use the DataLogOff lt file gt command where lt file gt is the name of the data log model To stop all data log models use the DataLogOff command Inthe Graphic Display editor specify the DataLogOff lt file gt command or the DataLogOff command in the Shutdown field in the Display Settings dialog box Note that if the display is cached using the Always Updating option the DataLogOff command won t be executed until the display is removed from the cache for example by using the FlushCache command Inthe Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the DataLogOff lt file gt command or the DataLogOff command as the press action When the button is pressed the specified command runs Inthe Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the DataLogOff lt file gt command or the DataLogOff command as the action When the object is touched the specified command runs Inthe Events editor specify the DataLogOff lt file gt command or the DataLogOff command as the action for an event On the command line type DataLogOff lt file gt or type DataLogOff and then press Enter 7 41 Configuring activity logging Activity log records information about various types of sy
342. gles is supported in Windows NT only To rotate an object 1 Click the Rotate tool 2 Click the mouse button A small circle with a crosshair appears This is the anchor point that is used as the center of rotation To move the center of rotation drag the crosshair You can place the crosshair inside an object Or you can place it outside an object ray a 11 9 m Creating graphic displays Zoom In Zoom Out 11 10 3 Place the pointer on an edge of the object and drag the object to rotate it To rotate the object in five degree increments press Ctrl while you drag 4 When the object is in the desired position release the mouse button Zooming in and out To magnify or reduce your view of a graphic display use Zoom In and Zoom Out Zoom In magnifies objects Zoom Out reduces magnification To zoom in on objects 1 Select the objects you want to zoom in on 2 Click Zoom In on the View menu or click the Zoom In button on the toolbar To zoom out Click Zoom Out on the View menu or click the Zoom Out button on the toolbar You can also click Cancel Zoom on the View menu Correcting mistakes If you change your mind about something you did undo the action If you change your mind again redo the action To undo an operation Click Undo on the Edit menu or click the Undo button on the toolbar To redo an operation Click Redo on the Edit menu or click the Redo button on
343. gs dialog box to specify startup and shutdown commands and the appearance and behavior of input fields and other interactive objects Specifying a security code To restrict access to the graphic display select a security code For detailed information about security see Chapter 10 Adding security Specifying background color To select a background color click the Background Color box and then click a color on the palette Display Settings x Properties Behavior Commands Behavior of Interactive Objects Startup Beep on Press El M Highlight When Cursor Passes Over It feet Highlight Color E es Input Field Colors Behavior of Object with Input Focus When Field is Not Selected l Disable Highlight When Object has Focus tet Fre Highlight Color E When Field is selected Text Fill on C E l Display On screen Keyboard Cancel Set as Default Help 11 21 Creating graphic displays Specifying startup and shutdown commands Commands Type commands or macros in the Serp El Startup and Shutdown fields or click the buttons to open the Command Shutdowy E Wizard and select the commands or macros To run RSView32 commands or macros each time this graphic display starts or stops specify the commands or macros The startup command runs before the graphic opens so commands such as UploadAll or RecipeRestore will not work in a startup macro The shutdown command runs after the display closes
344. h relative time plotting always starts relative to the newest or oldest data in the log model or log file With absolute time plotting always starts at the specified date and time You can also specify a start time at runtime For details see cc M Specifying a start time on page 13 33 To specify relative time type one of the following the word NEWEST or NEWEST minus a time range the word OLDEST or OLDEST plus a time range Specify the time range as a whole number followed by a unit Valid units are Sec Min Hour Day Week 13 8 Configuring trends Example Relative Time To display data starting 90 minutes from the oldest data in the log model type Start Time OLDEST 90 Min To specify absolute time Absolute time is specified by the month day year hour minute and second For an absolute start time type MMM DD YYYY hh mm ss where MMM is month DD is day YYYY is year hh mm ss is hours minutes seconds Time Range The time range determines the time span on the time axis Together the start time and time range determine how many points are plotted on the time axis Specify the time range as a whole number followed by a unit Valid units are Sec Min Hour Day Week 13 9 m Configuring trends 13 10 Examples Start Time and Time Range To plot realtime data in a 60 second window specify Start Time NEWEST Time Range To display one day o
345. h as Microsoft Excel Seagate Crystal Reports and Visual FoxPro or store the data in any ODBC compliant database Differences between RSView32 and Control View Derived tags Events Global keys You can import ControlView derived tag files into RSView32 In RSView32 derived tags are processed on exception not sequentially Therefore do not create derived tags that depend on the results of other derived tags because they might not produce the desired results You can store the result of a derived tag calculation in any tag not just a memory local tag The number of derived tag files is limited only by memory and disk space Each derived tag file can contain up to 1 000 derived tags as compared to ControlView s limit of 300 derived tags You can run up to 20 derived tag files simultaneously You can import ControlView event files into RSView32 In RSView32 events are processed on exception not sequentially Therefore do not create events that depend on the results of other events because they might not produce the desired results The number of event files is limited only by memory and disk space Each event file can contain up to 1 000 events as compared to ControlView s limit of 600 events You can run up to 20 event files simultaneously You cannot import ControlView global key files into RSView32 In RSView32 you cannot run more than one global key file at a time If you try to run more than one file t
346. h for new components 1 In the Name field select an editor 2 In the Default Path field specify a new path 3 Click OK To change the default path for existing components 1 In Windows Explorer or File Manager move the file to its new location 2 In the RSView32 Project Paths dialog box click the Application Paths tab 3 In the Name field select an editor The components associated with the editor are displayed in the Components field 4 In the Default Path field click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog box and specify the new path 5 Click Apply Default Path The components are updated to the new path Running your project Specify the new path here 6 Click OK To change the path for a single component 1 In the Windows Explorer or File Manager move the file to its new location 2 In the RSView32 Project Paths dialog box click the Application Paths tab 3 In the Name field select an editor The components associated with the editor are displayed in the Components field 4 Select a component 5 In the New Path For Component field specify a new path New Path For Component ee 6 Click OK In the Database Paths tab you can change the database that will be the data source for the project 1 Click the Browse button beside the Path to Database field 2 Select the new data source and then click Open 3 Click OK 4 Close and re open the pr
347. hat includes the EventOn lt file gt command In the Graphic Display editor specify the EventOn lt file gt command in the Startup field of the Display Settings dialog box In the Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the EventOn lt file gt command as the press action When the button is pressed event detection starts In the Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the EventOn lt file gt command as the action When the object is touched event detection starts On the command line type EventOn lt file gt and then press Enter Ways to stop event processing When a project stops event processing stops as well To stop event processing without stopping the project use any of the methods below In the Graphic Display editor specify the EventOff lt file gt command in the Shutdown field of the Display Settings dialog box Note that if the display is cached using the Always Updating option the EventOff command won t be executed until the display is removed from the cache for example by using the FlushCache command 9 7 m Configuring events Inthe Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the EventOff lt file gt command as the action When the button is pressed event detection stops Inthe Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the EventOff lt file gt command as the action When the o
348. hat severity levels mean and what actions they will trigger Severity determines the destination of alarm messages It also determines the color of the text in the alarm summary and the order in which alarms are displayed in an alarm banner 6 7 m Configuring alarms Alarm messages Alarm messages report information about alarms There are three types of messages In Alarm message generated when a tag goes into alarm Out of Alarm message generated when a tag goes out of alarm Acknowledged message generated when an operator acknowledges an alarm For each message you can use the default message or create your own message and you can selectively route alarm messages to a log file and or printer Alarm log file The alarm log file records alarm incidents that occur You can configure how often if ever you want log files created and deleted The log file stores data in standard dBASE IV dbf format Optionally using the AlarmLogSendToODBC command you can export the alarm log file to an ODBC database while online For more information see page 6 30 In RSView32 you can view the alarm log file with the Alarm Log Viewer You can also use third party applications to view the log file The application must be able to read the dBASE IV file format or be ODBC compliant For example you can use Microsoft Excel Microsoft Access or Microsoft Visual Basic Configuring alarms Alarm displays Alarm informat
349. hat will appear in the numeric input field when the graphic is initially displayed Continuously Check this box to have tag value changes appear in the field Update when the operator is not using the field to input data Field Length Type a value to specify the maximum number of characters that will be displayed in this field Be sure the field is long enough to accommodate all the possible values for the tag Format Select a number base for the value Decimal Places Type the number of places you want after the decimal point This number must be at least one less than the field width Overflow You can select this field only if Floating Point is selected in the Format field Specify how you want the floating point value displayed if it is too long for the field The value can be shown as an exponent rounded up to fit in the field or completely replaced by asterisks Justification Select Left Center or Right to specify how the values will be aligned within the field Leading Character Select Blanks or Zeroes 5 Click OK Creating graphic displays To create a String Input field 1 Click the String Input tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw the field 3 Release the mouse button Trg Mare gad eee m Eoo Hale pote Daix mec F Cemiracunk Ledai Oimensions diinon Tg Haight 3 Fet Cope C Hg 4 Fill in the fields as follows In this field Do this Ta
350. he Data Source Time Axis Vertical Axis Start Time NEWEST ee Major 2 Minor v Scale E Time Range 60 seconds M Grid Digits 5 Divisions Major Minor Control Rate 2 __ Second M Scale Date M Time pds M Grid I ScrollAxisI Relative Time ContolTag Data Source C RealTime Historical Oldest File NewestFile Choose File C Local Remote Model io r Legend MV Show Legend OK Cancel Help Use the Browse button to browse to this file NetworkComputer RSVProj Datalog LogModel LogModel dlg The LogModel folder and the LogModel dlg file will not exist if data logging for LogModel has not been started yet In this case type this path in the Remote field NetworkComputer RSVProj Datalog LogModel LogModel dlg 17 4 Using networks 3 Start data logging for LogModel on Computer 1 and start the graphic display containing the trend object on Computer2 Computer2 will read the logged data from NetworkComputer and display it in the trend If the data log model on Computer is configured to use the ODBC storage format and data source Computer2 must have an ODBC data source configured with the same name in order for the remote historical trend to work Using OPC for peer to peer network communications RSView32 supports the OPC 1 0a specification This section describes how to set up OPC to share tag values over a network You can set up one RSView32 station as a
351. he file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary and 7 integer www Word address 0 255 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example N17 129 2 D 11 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers D 12 SLC 5 binary files optional syntax Fnnn bbbb F nnn optional bbbb Example B3 3999 File type B Binary File number 3 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication the default file number 3 is used if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0 4095 decimal SLC 5 timer counter and control files Fnnn eee MNE bb F nnn optional eee MNE bb optional File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables starting on page D 23 Bit number 0 15 decimal Applies to analog members only Example R67 123 EN Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers SLC 5 timer counter and control files bit member addressing optional syntax Fnnn eee MNE F nnn optional eee MNE File type T Timer C
352. he files are not merged Instead the second file overrides the first file C 5 m Differences between RSView32 and ControlView Graphics In RSView32 you can import the following types of files Control View mgx files ControlView Builder gfx and mgl files AutoCAD dxf files for AutoCAD 12 and earlier and any files in the following formats bmp clp gif pcx and wmf drag and drop objects between RSView32 graphic files and other Windows programs use OLE object linking and embedding to insert third party objects such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet a Word document or a Visio graphic use ActiveX to insert third party control objects use the button drawing tool to create button objects that behave as standard Windows buttons use the full Windows color palette and all installed fonts attach these new kinds of animation blinking color animation horizontal and vertical position horizontal and vertical size rotation horizontal and vertical fill horizontal and vertical slider OLE verb RSView32 does not contain a tool for drawing bar graphs To create a bar graph draw a rectangle and apply height width or fill animation If you import a bar graph from ControlView the bar graph will automatically be changed to a rectangle with the appropriate type of animation and will work as it worked in ControlView Differences between RSView32 and ControlView In RSView32 scan class
353. he foreground period and the background period The foreground period applies to graphic displays and the tag monitor The background period applies to any component that performs a continual background activity such as derived tags events alarms and data log If the same tag is used by both a foreground and background component the tag is scanned at the faster period If a value is not required by a foreground or background component its address is not scanned greatly reducing system overhead Guidelines for configuring scan classes Set foreground scan periods to be shorter than or equal to background scan periods A scan period of zero means scan as quickly as possible You can set foreground scan periods to zero but never set background scan periods to zero For foreground periods using zero is not recommended because this setting can result in so much traffic that overall system communication slows down Set scan periods for optimal efficiency Specify a frequent scan rate for tags representing fast moving devices and a less frequent scan rate for tags representing devices that change less often This approach optimizes system performance providing high speed scanning where required and using less frequent scanning which saves system resources where acceptable Set the scan period to match the expected rate of change for the tag s data For example if you scan every five seconds for a change of state that occur
354. he handshake bit s address When a tag goes into alarm the handshake bit is set to 1 To have the handshake bit automatically reset set back to 0 when the tag goes out of alarm check the Auto Reset box Otherwise the programmable controller must reset the bit The bit cannot be reset automatically for tags with a change of state alarm type Any Change Changes to On or Changes to Off For more information see Handshake bit on page 6 18 Configuring alarms Viewing the alarm log file The Alarm Log Viewer displays the description user and logging station fields from the alarm log file The contents of this file will depend on how you configured alarm severities in the Alarm Setup editor By default the alarm log file will have a record of all alarms that are generated For information about all the fields in the alarm log file see page 16 9 To view the alarm log file 1 In the Project Manager open the Alarms folder E Alarms 2 Open the Alarm Log Viewer by doing one of the following A Alarm Setup PE Alarm Log Viewer double click the Alarm Log Viewer icon EA Alarm Summary right click the Alarm Log Viewer icon and then click Show amp Suppressed List fom Lamy Fere DOPE Aidi Tag Pii h Tia F Janti Ting Picci bee F Ps Janti Tag Pe ire TP Pe 17 gil r Fig f ipii EGER HRS HHF Sagi T 2 Sapin Tagg Peer ir preh ide Ting Pe Ta siis Tag Perana Ti Ta Freie Pi Tag Peenise
355. he number of files in a set depends on the dbf file format you choose narrow or wide Each file in the set contains a particular type of data If you use the ODBC format tag values are logged to tables in an ODBC database This allows you to use third party ODBC compliant relational database software to retrieve and manipulate the data If the database becomes inaccessible RSView32 logs the data to backup files in binary format If you need to use data in multiple formats define multiple data log models for the same tags Configuring data logging The dbf file format Data logged in the dbf format can be stored in narrow or wide format The data file names vary depending on which format you choose Narrow dbf file format The narrow dbf format stores one date one time and one tag value per line The following figure shows how tag values are stored in the file For a detailed description of the file s contents see page 16 12 This is one snapshot of data Date1 Time Tag1 value Date1 Time Tag2 value Date1 Time Tag3 value Date2 Time2 Tag1 value Date2 Time2 Tag2 value Date2 Time2 Tag3 value Wide dhf file format The wide dbf format stores one date one time and multiple tag values per line The following figure shows how tag values are stored in the file For a detailed description of the file s contents see page 16 13 This is one snapshot of dat
356. he value in the Value field In the list box the value will be replaced with No Value Click Solid or Blink for the line and fill colors and then click the line and fill colors Line colors apply to the outline of the object and to text Fill colors apply to the inside of the object To select a color place the cursor over the box click to open the color palette and then click the desired color Specify the solid color here Specify the blinking colors here ine i Eni Bink M Lire C gi F k i Fl a Sg e Oi At C i F MA Solid colors have only one line and one fill color Blinking colors have two line and two fill colors which are the line and fill colors the object will alternate between when blinking If you select blink the two colors must be different Animating graphic objects 7 In the Blink Rate field specify how many seconds each blink cycle will be For example if you specify four seconds the object will be one color for two seconds and the other color for two seconds 8 Click Apply Example 1 Creating a text object that blinks This example describes how to create a text object that blinks between two colors In this example the expression is simply a constant value that matches the value for the selected threshold For details about creating text and other graphic objects see page 11 33 1 Using the Text tool type the text 2 Select the text 3 Open the Animation dialog box and then
357. hic library on page 13 35 Working in the Trend dialog box When you release the mouse button after drawing a trend object the Trend dialog box appears Click this tab to specify the appearance of the time and vertical axes and other features of the trend s appearance Click this tab to set up the pens that will plot the values of the trend 13 6 Configuring trends Trend configuration Major division Scale displaying time 14 04 47 14 05 17 14 05 47 To configure the time axis vertical axis and other aspects of the trend s appearance 1 In the Trend dialog box click the Trend Configuration tab 2 Fill in the fields See the topics on the following pages for information about the fields 3 Click OK Configuring the time axis The following illustration shows many of the components of the time axis Minor division 13 7 Configuring trends To configure the time axis fill in the following fields as outlined below Tine Ais Bme Ee Time Range fil ternis Diinan Mape E Mma F Sye F Caie F Time F Gid F Scroll Asie Start time for a realtime trend For a realtime trend NEWEST is shown Data will start plotting as soon as the trend starts with the newest data available You cannot modify the start time for a realtime trend Start time for a historical trend Start times for historical data can be relative or absolute Wit
358. i Sie j irie O iirc Mimin wa Osa Daia Typa Deir xl Oeste Souse Typa De S Hany te ina vihaa T JES 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security To restrict access to this tag select a security code If access is restricted operators cannot change a tag value without the proper security code For detailed information about security see Chapter 10 Adding security Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long 4 13 Creating tags 4 14 Minimum and Maximum Type the minimum and maximum values that can be written to the programmable controller or server These values do not affect what is read from the programmable controller or server For example if you specify a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 100 RSView32 would be able to read a value of 200 from a PLC and store it in the value table but would not be able to write this value to the PLC The range between the minimum and maximum values cannot exceed the maximum floating point value 3 402823E gt 8 Scale and Offset Type a number For the scale do not use 0 To disable the scale type 1 To disable the offset type 0 The scale and offset modify the raw data that comes from and goes to the programmable controller before it is saved in the value table The scale and offset also modify the value specified in RSView32 before it is written to the programmable controller The scale is a multiplication fac
359. ibility animation 6 10 12 12 Visual Basic 3 2 6 8 Visual FoxPro 7 1 8 1 1 19 m Index Wallpaper converting graphic objects to 11 98 Wedge graphic object 11 32 Wide dbf format data log files 16 13 Width animation 12 21 Wildcards 4 3 4 6 4 29 and commands A 2 using to select tags 6 63 1 20 using to suppress alarm monitoring 6 69 Windows applications A 20 preventing operator access to 18 5 using with RSView32 16 1 Windows NT security 10 1 10 12 10 20 WINtelligent LINX 2 3 WINtelligent LOGIC 5 A 27 WINtelligent RECIPE A 27 World Wide Web using for technical support P 2
360. ications Scanning for new tag values When your RSView32 project is running it must periodically update its tag values in the value table For projects using OPC values are updated by the OPC server at the rate specified in the server product The update rate you specify in the Node editor is the requested data rate The server uses this rate to determine the fastest rate at which to notify your RSView32 project the OPC client of tag value changes if there are any changes For more details about setting the poll rate see your server documentation For projects using DDE values are updated by the server at the rate specified in the server product When the server detects a change it provides the changed value to RSView32 For more details about setting the poll rate see your server documentation Scan class rates have no effect on DDE or OPC communications They affect only direct driver communications 3 15 Creating tags This chapter describes tags and the tag database the importance of organizing tags how to create analog digital and string tags Tags and the tag database In the tag database you define the data you want RSView32 to monitor Each entry in the database is called a tag A tag is a logical name for a variable in a device or in local memory RAM For example a tag can represent a process variable in a programmable controller The current value of a tag when required is updated from the
361. icult to copy or move projects because the files are not all located in the same place If you copy a component into a project using the Windows Explorer you cannot add the component to the project using the Copy Existing Component into Project option Instead use the Create Shortcut to Existing Component option to add the component to the Project Manager When you highlight the component in the right pane of the Project Manager the path to the file is displayed in the status bar Files that are located outside of the project have an arrow symbol on the component icon as shown above for the Detail component If you move or delete a file using Windows Explorer the file reference is broken and the component name is greyed out in the Project Manager until the file reference is updated To update the file reference use either the Copy Existing Component into Project option or the Create Shortcut to Existing Component option To add a component to a project or update its file reference 1 Select the editor that was used to create the desired component For example to add a graphic display component highlight the Graphic Display editor bare Spey Ensing Comeosenl ro Propet GIP Ghani to Ering pTi 2 Right click to display the context menu and then click Copy Existing Component into Project or click Create Shortcut to Existing Component 1 5 m Working with projects 3 In the dialog box locate the component you want t
362. ifies that topic open a list of related topics Ffile The name of a Windows help file The default help file is for RSView32 If no search word is specified the command opens the RSView32 help file and displays the Contents topic Example Opening Help for the RSGauge ActiveX object Help fc windows system RSGauge hlp Opens the RSTools help file for the RSGauge ActiveX object A 37 RSView32 commands Identify A 38 Identify tag_name Runs the command or macro associated with the named tag whether or not the tag is in alarm tag name The name of the tag in alarm The command or macro associated with this tag will run If no tag name is specified the Identify command runs the command or macro associated with the most recent most severe unacknowledged alarm tag Specifying the word tag inside square brackets runs the identify command for the tag associated with the highlighted object in the active graphic display Running the Identify command is not the same as acknowledging an alarm When many alarms are occurring rapidly do not use the Identify command without a tag name A new alarm could become the current alarm before the Identify command runs and the command or macro that runs might not be the one expected Examples The Identify command Identify Hopperl1 Divider Runs the Identify command or macro for the tag Hopper1 Divider whether or not the tag is in alarm Ide
363. igning to macros 10 5 assigning to OLE objects 10 10 assigning to tags 4 13 4 17 4 18 assigning to user accounts 10 12 default 10 5 Security Codes editor 10 4 preventing access to 10 6 Security command 10 6 A 53 SendKeys command A 54 Index Server G 7 See also DDE OPC Set command 4 20 9 1 A 54 SetFocus command 11 14 A 56 SFC status mnemonics D 26 Short file names for activity logs 8 10 for alarm logs 6 29 Siemens devices 3 1 3 2 Silence command A 57 SilenceAll command A 57 SLC 5 Enhanced addressing syntax C 7 D 15 SLC 5 addressing syntax C 7 D 9 SoftLogix 5 2 3 2 8 2 14 addressing syntax D 20 Special keys Alt F4 18 5 Alt Shift Tab 18 5 Alt Tab 18 5 arrows using with graphic objects 11 83 Ctrl copying objects with 11 79 drawing objects with 11 29 11 30 11 31 11 32 resizing objects with 11 82 rotating objects with 11 10 selecting objects with 11 7 Ctrl Alt Del 18 5 Ctrl Alt Esc 18 5 Ctrl Alt P 10 18 18 5 Ctrl F6 A 43 Ctrl PgDn 11 47 A 33 Ctrl PgUp 11 47 A 60 Ctrl R 11 63 Ctrl Shift F6 A 46 Ctrl Shift Tab A 46 Ctrl Tab 14 5 A 43 Ctrl W 11 63 Enter 11 47 11 65 A 33 disabling A 30 using with on screen keyboard 11 48 Minus using with graphic objects 11 79 PgDn 11 47 11 65 PgUp 11 47 11 65 Plus using with graphic objects 11 79 reserved keys 12 42 12 53 15 20 Shift Tab 12 45 A 46 Shift using with graphic objects 11 35 1
364. iguring alarms Taa Ups Inserting headings The Insert menu contains the items that can appear in the summary To add a heading for an item click the item on the Insert menu You can add as many items as you want and place them in any order you want When you click an item on the Insert menu two boxes appear in the alarm summary Drag the boxes to position them When you release the mouse button the item name appears FA niie A sa agname To reposition items click them and drag them with the mouse To resize items click them and then drag a handle with the mouse To change an item you only have to select one box when you move or resize one box the other box is also moved or resized Configuring alarms Header Font Colors Buttons Button Bar Position P The fonts listed here depend on which fonts you have installed in Windows To edit the the text in a box double click the box The Modify Text dialog box appears Type the new text in the To field and then click OK Choosing fonts The header and body fonts can be different For example you might choose a larger font for the header and a smaller font for the body To change a font click Font on the Format menu This fa aen keri The closed msichang piris fond wall tes aa ed for pring Choose the font style and size you want When you are finished click OK To increase the size of the header area s
365. ill be highlighted but you will not know which objects have which types of animation 3 If you want Peek to be active when you close the dialog box click Activate Peek Otherwise specify the settings and save them Later when you want to turn on Peek click Peek On on the View menu 4 To save your settings click OK To turn Peek on and off Do any of the following to turn Peek on click Peek On on the View menu click Activate Peek in the Peek dialog box When Peek is on the cursor looks like this Rs Ko Peek automatically turns off as soon you do any action in the Graphic Display editor For example if you are peeking at objects and then move an object Peek is turned off 12 59 Animating graphic objects Changing the animation on objects You can change the animation attached to a group of objects or to individual objects within the group To access objects within a group use the group edit feature For details see page 11 86 To change the animation on objects 1 Select the object 2 Open the Animation dialog box 3 Make the required changes 4 Click Apply Copying or duplicating objects with animation 12 60 You can copy or duplicate objects that have animation attached to them When you do the animation attached to the objects is also copied or duplicated If you copy or duplicate a group the copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original Fo
366. ime The number of milliseconds DstFlag The Daylight Savings Time DST flag where 1 means DST is in effect and O means DST is not in effect This number is for RSView32 internal use only Category The activity category For a description of these categories see page 8 12 Source The RSView32 component that generated the activity User The user that was logged on when the activity occurred Dscrptn The description of the activity UserStn For future use LoggingStn The name of the computer on which the logging server is running 16 7 Sharing data with other Windows applications Activity log ODBC format ODBC format activity log data uses one table The illustrations show ODBC tables that have been opened in Microsoft Query For more information about how the log files are named see The ODBC storage format on page 7 8 T Userld 2 0 1999 02 05 01 54 41 000 987 0 Commands Command Server DEFAULT display Demos PRODUCTION 2 0 1999 02 05 01 54 42 000 508 0 Commands Command Server DEFAULT suppresson paper PRODUCTION 2 0 1999 02 05 01 54 43 000 79 0 Commands Command Server DEFAULT suppresson processi PRODUCTION 2 0 1999 02 05 01 54 43 000 419 0 Commands Command Server DEFAULT alarmon PRODUCTION 2 8388910 1999 02 05 01 54 43 000 960 0 Applications Alarm Quarterback DEFAULT Alarm activation has completed PRODUCTION 2 0 1999 02 05 01 54 43 000 990 0 Commands Comm
367. incidents are logged as follows Alarm What is logged Severity 1 through 8 In Alarm messages are logged Out of Alarm Out of Alarm messages are logged for any severity that has been set up to log In Alarm messages Acknowledged Acknowledged messages are logged for any severity that has been set up to log In Alarm messages Fault All Fault messages are logged Suppression All Suppression messages are logged If you want alarms logged to a printer click the Printers button to display a list of available printers To select a printer it must already be set up on your system For information on installing a printer see your Windows documentation Tyee Page printers such as laser printers are not supported 4 For an alarm severity specify how you want the alarm to be annunciated Internal Bell The internal bell is a sound produced by the computer running RSView32 To use the internal bell select the Internal Bell check box The sound for the internal bell can come from your computer s speaker or from a sound card To set up the sound open the Windows Control Panel and then double click the Sounds icon to open the Sounds Properties dialog box In the Events field click Exclamation and then assign a wav file to the Exclamation event When an alarm occurs the assigned sound is repeated once per second When the alarm is acknowledged or silenced the sound is stopped Because the sound is played repeated
368. ine 2 and Line 3 buttons have touch animation attached to them 15 6 Example Mouse touch screen operation The following graphic display contains buttons that users can click with the mouse or press on a touch screen to call up detail displays This display presents information and acts as a menu Overview To create the buttons the designer used the Button drawing tool in the Graphic Display editor The buttons can be selected with a mouse or with a touch screen For details about how to create buttons see Creating buttons on page 11 55 Setting up navigation The tools Creating macros To build a complete operator interface use macros to replace a set of commands with a single command symbols to replace long commands or commands with parameters key definitions to assign commands symbols macros or a series of replacement keystrokes to keys or mouse buttons Precedence At runtime components are evaluated in the following order symbols commands macros object keys display keys global keys For details about the order of precedence among object display and global keys see page 15 14 A macro is a series of commands stored in a macro file The name of the macro file is then used like a command and can be used anywhere a command can be used When the file name is entered the macro runs executing all the commands in the file You can create macros to perform almost
369. ing 12 54 key list 12 42 12 55 precedence among key types 15 14 Object Smart Path 12 6 12 9 Objects See Graphic objects ODBC data logging See Data logging I 13 Index ODBC storage format 7 1 7 8 G 6 activity log files 16 8 alarm log files 16 10 contents of tables 16 3 16 15 Offlink address E 3 OLE objects 11 28 11 67 G 6 attaching verb animation to 12 31 securing 10 10 using to link to other Windows applications 16 2 On screen keyboard 11 25 11 48 A 30 Online help P 1 OPC 3 3 G 6 and Microsoft Excel 3 2 and peer to peer network communications 17 5 and RSLinx 3 1 3 9 and RSLinx Gateway 17 11 and Visual Basic 3 2 list of servers 17 5 RSView32 as client G 2 assigning server to RSView32 tags 4 19 requesting values from server 16 26 setting up 3 5 17 7 RSView32 as server 17 6 G 7 enabling 16 24 17 6 A 52 at startup 18 7 for tag writes 16 27 17 6 A 53 setting up local client 16 24 update rate 3 15 17 7 using with RSLinx Gateway 17 10 OPC commands NodeDisable 3 14 A 43 NodeEnable 3 14 A 43 NodeSwitch 3 14 A 43 RTDataServerOff A 51 RTDataServerOn 16 24 17 6 A 52 RTDataWriteDisable A 52 RTDataWriteEnable 16 27 17 6 A 53 1 14 OPC nodes assigning to tags 4 19 changing at runtime 3 14 A 43 creating 3 5 17 9 enabling and disabling 3 6 naming G 5 Parameter command A 44 Parameter files 11 39 A 31 G 6 Parameters editor 11 39 Passwor
370. inuously for the display even when the display is not visible This option also makes subsequent displays faster Tyee Always updating a cached display can cause added communications overhead because data will be retrieved for tags whose values would not otherwise be needed Choosing this option affects the behavior of the display s startup and shutdown commands See Specifying startup and shutdown commands on page 11 22 for more information 11 15 Creating graphic displays Specifying the title bar and other display attributes F THe Ber pee oo M Syetoan Manu i Miremigs Baian CV Meorize Baton Bret Main Wired oe ai Beene F Show Leal Acquired Yelue Title Bar To have a title bar appear on the graphic display at runtime select the Title Bar check box If the Title Bar check box is not selected the check boxes for the System Menu Minimize button and Maximize button are not available because these items all appear on the title bar You can also type a title for the graphic display which will appear in the title bar at runtime in place of the component name The title can be anything you want and can include spaces You cannot type a title if the Title Bar check box is not selected You must select Title Bar to be able to move the screen s position at runtime The following illustration shows the window style options available if you select the Title Bar check box To include an item select the a
371. ion RSView32 commands RecipeRestore Remark RTDataServerOff RecipeRestore lt file gt Reads the values from a recipe file into all input fields in the active graphic display This command is used with the Recipe field lt file gt The name of the file without a file extension tag values are read from This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored RecipeSave lt file gt Saves the values in all input fields of the active graphic display to a recipe file This command works with the Recipe field lt file gt The name of the file without a file extension to which the values will be saved If a file of this name does not exist it is created If a file of this name does exist this command prompts you to overwrite it This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored Remark lt comment gt Writes a text string to an activity log file which is useful for operators to store comments lt comment gt A string up to 132 characters long The string can contain any characters including spaces Enclose the exclamation mark and the semi colon in single or double quotes To log comments the Remarks category must be selected in the Activity Log Setup editor RTDataServerOff Stops running the RSView32 realtime data server A 51 RSView32 commands RTDataServerOn RTDataWrite Disable
372. ion and specify the name of a tag that will store the result of the expression Events You can define an expression and associate it with an action When the expression changes from false to true from zero to any non zero value the action a command or macro runs Activity Log Setup When configuring file management you can choose to have a log file created when a particular event occurs One way of doing this is to create an expression Data Log Setup When configuring file management you can choose to have a log file created when a particular event occurs One way of doing this is to create an expression Alarm Setup When configuring file management you can choose to have a log file created when a particular event occurs One way of doing this is to create an expression Using expressions in a command You can also use expressions in a command to set the value of a tag For details see Using the Equal command on page 14 6 Creating expressions Creating expressions All editors that use expressions include an Expression field In some editors you will also find expression buttons an expression column The following illustration shows the items for creating an expression in the Events editor inthe Eaerd Expression field Expression buttons Expression column Expression buttons These are the expression buttons This button Displays a list of This button Dis
373. ion can be displayed in alarm log viewer alarm summary graphic objects and displays tag monitor When alarms are generated they are recorded in two places the alarm log file and the computer s memory The alarm log viewer displays the records in the alarm log file The alarm summary displays the records in the computer s memory Alarm log viewer The alarm log viewer displays the contents of the alarm log file The contents of this file depend on how you configured severities in the Alarm Setup editor By default the log file will have a record for each of the following alarm incidents when a tag goes into alarm when a tag goes out of alarm when an alarm is acknowledged when a tag with an alarm is suppressed when an alarm fault is generated The viewer can display up to 32 767 records Set up your project so only essential alarm information is logged Alarm logging uses system resources and can slow overall system performance Configuring alarms 6 10 Alarm summary The alarm summary displays the alarm information recorded in the computer s memory The summary is configurable so you can determine what and how alarm information is viewed The summary can list up to 1 000 alarms As new alarms occur they appear at the top of the list When the alarm summary becomes full one alarm is dropped from the bottom of the list for each new alarm that appears at the top Alarms are also dropped when th
374. ipe file as follows a In the recipe field type the name of a recipe file and press Enter or click in the recipe field and press Enter The Recipe dialog box opens If the display has been set up to use the on screen keyboard selecting the recipe field and pressing Enter brings up the on screen keyboard Type the name of a recipe file using the on screen keyboard and press the Download button on the keyboard The Recipe dialog box opens L sme Recipe Pile ba Lostmoal p Butis b If you didn t type a name select a file from which to restore values c Click Restore 2 Download the values in the input fields by pressing PgDn or by using the RSView32 Download or DownloadAll command You can also restore the values from a recipe file using the RSView32 RecipeRestore command For details see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help _ 11 64 Creating graphic displays To save recipe values from a programmable controller or server 1 Upload the values to the input fields by pressing PgUp or by using the RSView32 Upload or UploadAll command Save the values to the recipe file as follows a In the recipe field type the name of a recipe file and press Enter or click in the recipe field and press Enter The Recipe dialog box opens If the display has been set up to use the on screen keyboard selecting the recipe field and pressing Enter brings up the on screen keyboard Type the name of a reci
375. isplays Aligning objects Objects can easily be aligned with each other and with the grid Align objects with each other when you want the tops bottoms or sides to line up 1 Select the objects you want to align 2 Click the appropriate button or menu item This button or menu item T Align Left Left most selected object i i 1 Align Center Horizontal center of all selected objects Pid Align Right Right most selected object Align To Top most selected object re gn lop p j Align Middle Vertical center of all selected objects Align Bottom Bottom most selected object Align Center Points Center of all selected objects Align to Grid Grid _ 11 88 Creating graphic displays Aligning objects left right and center a Select objects az Select objects a Select objects Align left a a a a Align right EE Align center 11 89 Creating graphic displays Aligning objects top middle and bottom Align top Align middle Align bottom _ 11 90 Creating graphic displays Spacing objects With Space Vertical and Space Horizontal objects are moved vertically or horizontally to have the same amount of space from the center point of each object 1 Select the objects you want to space 2 Click the appropriate button or menu item This button or menu item Does this Space Horizontal Places the centers of the selected objects an equal
376. its on label configured as open This command uses the on label for the tag to write the value 1 to the programmable controller or server Set Hopperl Level Preset Hopper1 Level is a tag and Preset is a tag with a value of 90 This command writes 90 to the programmable controller or server Set String stringl open String string1 is a string tag This command writes open to the programmable controller or server SetFocus lt file gt Sets the focus to a particular graphic display lt file gt The name of a graphic display file without a file extension RSView32 commands SilenceAll StartupConfig Summary Silence lt tag_name gt If the alarm for the specified tag is configured to use the internal bell this command silences the computer s sound If the alarm for the specified tag is configured to use the external bell this command resets the tag associated with the external bell and silences the associated audio device lt tag_name gt The name of a tag that is in alarm You can use wildcards SilenceAll Silences the internal and external bells for all tags in alarm Using this command is faster than using the Silence command with the asterisk wildcard StartupConfig Opens the Startup editor Summary lt file gt Xnnn Ynnn Runs the specified alarm summary file lt file gt The name of an alarm summary file without a file extension Xnnn Positions th
377. ive only while a particular object or display has input focus Global keys are active at all times Object and display keys are discussed on the following pages For details about global keys see page 15 19 For details about the order of precedence among object display and global keys see page 15 14 Creating object keys 12 40 Object keys associate graphic objects with keys When an object has input focus an operator can use keys to interact with the object For detailed information about how keys work at runtime see Specifying the behavior of interactive objects on page 11 23 Animating graphic objects Example Using object keys Imagine you have a display showing a tank with two valves The two valves control the flow in and out of the tank Both valves have been configured with object key animation as follows Valve 1 F2 Open F3 Close Valve 2 F2 Open F3 Close At runtime operators can select either valve ress F2 to open it and press F3 to close it To create an object key 1 Select an object 2 On the Animation menu click Object Keys TN we P Hhh E wen O C lt C sS CS A 3 Click Add 12 41 Animating graphic objects 12 42 Add Key Key OK m Modifiers I Control D Shift ok Cancel Help Specify a key If desired select one or both modifiers Some keys are normally reserved for use by Windows and RSView32
378. ja aran Dr hoppi a ry Hipper anior Garey tubia wib Dh app S l Baugh hoppu i jiw DH appia gi pid ir day ough hopper gate poailion ough hope high Dough hoppe Inval Disugh hoppi boa Dough hopp abn mide Dough hoppe berw mirHewal 4 31 Creating tags The following table describes the columns in the spreadsheet This field Displays Y if the tag name is valid N if the tag name is not valid in other words the tag has not been created in the tag database Tag Name The tag name whether valid or not as entered in the tag database Value The current value of the tag State Disabled if the node has been disabled in the Node editor or by using the NodeDisable command Error if RSView32 has tried to acquire a value but could not because of some kind of communication error such as a node not being available or a DDE server not running Stale if the tag value has been acquired before but does not have an updated value Uninitialized if the value has never been acquired Valid if RSView32 has a valid value for the tag None if there is a problem with the tag definition Description The description of the tag as entered in the tag database Changing what you see Use the commands on the View menu to change what you see in the tag monitor Window Help Spnondiahort Poona Ge fo Spreadshest citePgon Ge to Farm Ck Pyllp Sprondshoet Pom Spreadsheet Colore Poesia Deiauh icc r
379. ject appears in the graphic display To edit the object s properties right click the object then click ActiveX Property Panel on the context menu For details see Using the ActiveX Property Panel on page 11 73 To attach control to the object so it can interact with RSView32 use the ActiveX Property Panel and the ActiveX Control commands on the Animation context menu For details see Configuring ActiveX control on page 12 32 Creating graphic displays Naming graphic objects Once you have drawn a graphic object you can name it Naming a graphic object allows you to manipulate the object using commands for example when using the Invoke command with an ActiveX object You can also give the object a tooltip description Tooltips appear at runtime when you bring the cursor to rest over an object for a few seconds if the object is not inactive grayed out Tooltips only appear on buttons data entry fields recipe fields and objects with touch slider or object key animation Also see Naming an ActiveX object on page 12 34 To name an object and type a tooltip description 1 Select one object 2 Right click the object and then click Object Name Tooltip Object Name Tooltip Eg Current Button New Button_Start_ExhFant Tool Tip Drying Room Exhaust Fan Cancel Help 3 In the New field type a name for the object 4 If required type a tooltip description 5 Click OK to save
380. jects on page 11 23 Animating graphic objects To create a display key 1 On the Animation menu click Display Keys 1 Pav F17 H E pan sare kaks Hian birai i i F Diab ilar Serer mi 2 Click Add TE Cenal F s Cancel I Control Shift Help 3 Specify a key and if desired select one or both modifiers Some keys are reserved for use by Windows and RSView32 Reserved keys do not appear in the Key field in the Add Key dialog box 12 53 Animating graphic objects Click OK The key you added is displayed in the Key field If you specified a modifier the first letter of that modifier is also displayed If you create a label in the next step it is also listed in this field The information in the Key field is used in the key list which appears at runtime so operators know which keys are associated with an object and a display For details about the key list see Viewing the key list at runtime on page 12 55 In the label field if desired type a label for the key Inthe Press Action field and if desired in the Release Action and Repeat Action fields specify an RSView32 command or a macro Type the command or macro or click the button to open the Command Wizard The command or macro is the action that will occur when the key is pressed pressed and held or released Separate multiple commands or macros with a semi colon or place them on separate
381. k this box to show the time of the trend in relation to the oldest time The oldest time is one of the following fora historical trend it is the oldest logged data in the log model fora file based trend it is the oldest logged data in a log file Relative time is displayed in the following format DD HH MM SS day hour minute second 13 11 Configuring trends Configuring the vertical axis The following illustration shows the components of the vertical axis Major division Vertical axis scale Minor division To configure the vertical axis fill in the fields as outlined below Vertical Axis Divisions Major Minor e MV Scale Digits 5 M Grid Divisions Specify the number of major and minor divisions you want marked on the vertical axis Keep the number of divisions small so they will be visible Scale Check this box to display a scale with the range of values for a pen These values are determined by the minimum and maximum values for the pen scale which are configured in the Pen Configuration tab The font color and vertical axis scale are determined by the pen that is selected when the trend is running By default pen 1 is selected _ 13 12 Configuring trends Digits Select the number of characters you want to display in the pen scale including the decimal point The values that appear in the scale are selected in the Pen Configuration tab Specify enough digi
382. l The DataLogNewFile command creates a new file set for all data log models that are currently running Use these commands anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be entered If your data log model uses the ODBC format these commands create a new set of backup files if RSView32 is logging to the backup path when the command is issued If RSView32 is logging to the ODBC database RSView32 logs an End snapshot and then a Begin snapshot when you issue these commands If your data log model uses the dBASE IV format these commands start a new file set regardless of when new files have been configured to start in the Data Log Setup editor The new dbf file set is created on the same path that RSView32 is currently logging to These commands record two snapshots of data an End record in the old file and a Begin record in the new file If you use the DataLogNewFile lt file gt command or the DataLogNewFile command it is not necessary to also use the DataLogSnapshot command If you use short file names a maximum of 26 new file sets can be created for each data log model in a given 24 hour period If you attempt to create a 27th file RSView32 continues logging data to the 26th file At midnight the sequence starts over again with a new file set with the new date If you use long file names RSView32 can create up to 9 999 files per day You can give operators ways to issue the command at runtime For example you can create a button
383. l five sensors and store the result in the value table Then if this total is too high RSView32 can trigger an alarm How to use multiple derived tag files You can create multiple derived tag files At runtime up to 20 derived tag files containing a maximum of 1 000 tags can run simultaneously Use multiple derived tag files to group derived tags that need to be evaluated at different rates group derived tags that are active only when a particular graphic display is active Summary of steps D 5 2 The main steps for configuring derived tags are set up the evaluation interval for the the derived tag file in the Derived Tag Setup dialog box create the derived tags in the Derived Tags editor Creating derived tags The Derived Tags editor To open the Derived Tags editor 1 In the Project Manager open the Logic and Control folder B Logie and Control 2 Open the Derived Tags editor by doing one of the following e Derived Tags double click the Derived Tags icon amp Events right click the Derived Tags icon and then click New Untitled Ourived Tags Using the Accept and Discard buttons When you enter information in the editor the Prev and Next buttons change to Accept and Discard Click Accept to save information Click Discard to discard information 5 3 m Creating derived tags Setting up the evaluation interval To set up the evaluation interval for the derived tag
384. labeling categories in 8 13 logging destinations 8 13 maximum number of files 8 9 maximum number of records 8 17 naming 8 9 short file names 8 4 sharing at runtime 17 2 storage format ODBC 16 8 storing in version 6 0 format 8 4 Activity Log Setup editor 8 2 Activity Log Viewer 8 16 8 17 Activity logging 8 1 G 1 and events 8 7 creating expressions for 14 2 differences from ControlView C 1 editing 8 13 monitoring communications with 2 18 specifying activities to log 8 12 starting and stopping at runtime 8 18 tracking users 8 17 B 7 Activity LogSendToODBC command A 13 ActivityPrintOff command A 14 ActivityPrintOn command A 14 Addresses assigning 2 12 differences from ControlView C 7 specifying for tags 4 19 station E 1 G 7 Addressing syntax D 1 PLC 2 D 2 PLC 3 D 2 PLC 5 D 4 PLC 5 Enhanced D 6 SLC 5 D 9 SLC 5 Enhanced D 15 SoftLogix 5 D 20 Advanced objects 11 36 G 1 Alarm banner 6 7 6 10 C 2 alarm label in 6 42 6 47 Alarm bells configuring 6 33 Alarm buffer zone See Alarm deadband Alarm commands Acknowledge 6 12 A 11 AcknowledgeAll 6 12 A 12 Alarm A 14 AlarmEvent A 14 AlarmLogOff A 16 AlarmLogOn A 16 AlarmLogRemark A 17 AlarmLogSendToODBC A 18 AlarmOff 6 10 6 72 A 19 AlarmOn 6 18 6 71 A 19 AlarmPrintOff A 19 AlarmPrintOn A 19 AlarmViewer A 19 Execute 6 13 HandshakeOff A 36 HandshakeOn 6 18 A 37 Identify 6 14 A 38 configuring alarms with 6
385. larms with the current time or by specifying a date and time either in RSView32 or in your own alarm detection algorithms Alarm events are not processed until the AlarmOn command is issued and alarm events are no longer processed after the AlarmOff command is issued Differences between event based alarms and tag hased alarms You cannot specify thresholds for analog alarm events All analog alarm events have a value of zero You cannot specify alarm labels for event based alarms That is you cannot use the IntoAlarm and OutOfAlarm labels for digital tag based alarms or the threshold labels for analog tag based alarms Alarm events have no acknowledge and handshake bits The Identify feature is not available to event based alarms to run a command macro or VBA program Event based alarms are not retentive across project starts or stops 6 19 Configuring alarms Naming alarm events A name must be associated with each alarm event The event name can but need not be a tag defined in the tag database An alarm event name cannot be an alarm tag in the database Alarm event names can be up to 40 characters long The alarm event name can contain the following characters AtoZ 0to9 underscore _ and dash The alarm event name can be mixed case Alarm event names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case sensitive For example the alarm event name HopperOverflow is the same as hopper
386. lational operators are Symbol Operator Numeric Examplesx String Examples x For the numeric examples tag1 5 and tag2 7 x For the string examples serial_no ST009 EQ equal tagl tage serial_no S1011 false false NE lt gt not equal tag1 lt gt tage serial_no lt gt S1011 true true LT lt less than tag1 lt tage serial_no lt STO11 true true GT gt greater than tag1 gt tag2 serial_no gt STO11 false false LE lt less than or equalto tag lt tag2 serial_no lt S1011 true true GE gt greater than or equal tag gt tag2 serial_no gt STO11 to false false How string operands are evaluated String operands are evaluated by case and by alphabetical order Upper case letters are greater than lower case letters For example H is greater than h Letters later in the alphabet are greater than those earlier in the alphabet For example B is greater than A 14 10 Creating expressions Logical operators Logical operators determine the validity of one or more statements There are three logical operators AND OR and NOT The operators return a non zero value if the expression is true or a zero if the expression is false The logical operators are Symbols Operator Action Example For these examples tag1 5 and tage 7 AND amp amp and Returns a 1 if the tag1 lt tag 2 AND tag1 5 statemen
387. lay called Canning with the Beans parameter file type Display Canning PBeans For more information see Using a parameter file to replace tag placeholders on page 11 38 and Listing tag names to replace tag placeholders on page 11 40 Tag Type Only the tag types that are checked will appear in the alarm summary To include all alarms leave both Analog and Digital checked Alarm States If you want a message to appear in the alarm summary when an alarm is in fault or when a tag goes out of alarm leave both Faults and Out of Alarm checked If you leave the Out of Alarm state unchecked the alarm summary item changes color when the tag goes out of alarm Tags that are out of alarm remain in the alarm summary until they are acknowledged If you want to see only the tags that are in alarm in the summary click Only show tags currently In Alarm Digital change of state alarms and InAndOutOfAlarm events are not displayed in the alarm summary when you select this checkbox Configuring alarms Alarm Severities To include alarms of all severities leave all boxes checked To exclude an alarm severity clear its check box Out of alarm messages do not have severities so if you select the Out of Alarm option all out of alarm messages will be shown whether or not you show the InAlarm message for a given severity Sorting data To sort data click Sort on the Data menu You can specify three levels of sorting
388. le if the display was resized to one quarter its original size only one quarter of the display would be visible In this case scroll bars appear for viewing the rest of the display Scale resizes the display so objects in the display are magnified or reduced to retain their size in relation to the display size For example if the display was resized to one quarter its original size the entire display would be visible but it would all be one quarter its original size Specifying display position Po silicon E Uhe Current Posatian C Specky Posen ip Peek e To set the display position do one of the following select Use Current Position When you save the graphic display the position of the window at that time becomes the default position select Specify Position in Pixels and type values in the X and Y fields These fields specify the position of the window in relation to the top left corner of the RSView32 main window The X value positions the window from the left edge of the main window and the Y value positions the window from the top of the main window The window size and position you specify here can be overridden by the RSView32 Display command The Display command accepts size and position parameters which override the Display Settings options For more information about the Display command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Creating graphic displays Use the Behavior tab of the Display Settin
389. le if you typed Tag1 and it did not exist in the tag database the following message would appear lt gt No tag named T agl exists would you like to create it 4 21 Creating tags Using the Tag Browser When you click a Browse or Tags button the Tag Browser opens Folders Tags fF Hippa Tia 1 Hope Tua Ean Tag Pe 7 lela In the Tag Browser you can select a tag by double clicking it or by highlighting it and then clicking OK edit a tag by highlighting it and then clicking Edit Tag The Tag Editor dialog box opens so you can edit the tag s definition create a new tag by opening the desired folder and clicking New Tag The Tag Editor dialog box opens so you can define the tag create a new folder by clicking New Folder The New Folder dialog box opens so you can create the folder import tags from a PLC or SLC database and copy them into the RSView32 tag database by clicking Other DB The PLC Database Browser opens so you can specify the tags to import 4 22 Creating tags Importing tags from a PLC database Other DB To open the PLC Database Browser click the Other DB button in the Tag Browser or click the DB Browser button on the toolbar in Button in Tag Browser the Tag Database editor e Use the PLC Database Browser to selectively import tags from an DB Browser Allen Bradley PLC database into the RSView32 tag database Tags Button in Tag im
390. le bar and other display attributes 11 16 Preventing scroll bars on the RSView32 main window 11 18 Specifying display size cso vita soared ee ae ae 11 19 Specifying resize behavior ia45 35y acehieteiwasce es 11 19 Specifying display position 000 seas 11 20 Contents Setting up the display continued Specifying a security code e144 fhinands cee eax nes Specifying background Color Js 2 erase urea Specifying startup and shutdown commands Specifying colors for input fields5 0006 Specifying the behavior of interactive objects Specifying the behavior of objects with input focus Displaying the on screen keyboard Displaying graphics more quickly 0000 Removing displays from the cache 4 Types of graphic objects ons ctiets dk alt a nee Ae Creating simple OD 6ets cin tn reas cee wiad eee Asem Drawing a rounded rectangle 0000 Drawing a rectangle or square ayo Nea ue ey Drawing an ellipse or circle n esediensieekioes Drawing aline mee cene eiie ie a EA i otis Drawing a polyline or polygon 044 Drawing a freehand object di Sodas La etewasn As Drawing an arc or wedge oi c 45s sce einiaiseeaens Creating DERE ais RE eA RS PCR OR BH EER RE BME Font substitution at runtime snc eas cde ees Reshaping simple objects wt aAev as ete sa peed Raa es Creating advanced objects 945 048 oot ee Ae Objects described in
391. le names RSView32 gives you the option to use long file names When you choose this option at runtime RSView32 creates data log files with long file names unless either the primary or secondary path does not support long file names or unless either path is inaccessible when data logging starts The maximum data log file name including path is 200 characters This is the format for the name YYYY MM DD NNNN lt Log File Identifier String gt lt type gt dbf YYYY is the year MMis the month DD is the day NNNN is the sequential file identifier This number indicates the sequence files were created in You can have up to 9999 file sets per day At midnight the sequence starts at 0000 again D 7 4 Configuring data logging lt Log File Identifier String gt is a text string you can specify to help identify the log file The maximum string length is 20 characters lt type gt is the file type Note that the type is enclosed in parentheses Narrow format has three file types Tagname Float for analog and digital tag values and String Wide format has two file types Tagname and Wide The Wide type stores both floating point and string values Example Long file name The log file named 1997 10 28 0004 Oven Temperatures Wide dbf was created in the year 1997 month 10 and day 28 The 0004 indicates that this is the fourth file set created that day Oven Temperatures is the log file identifier string which
392. lect Obscured Objects all objects that are totally hidden by other objects will have a highlighted box around them if you select By Tag and then specify a tag name all objects associated with this tag will have a highlighted box around them The Peek highlight is not visible in a graphic display with a red background Creating graphic displays To specify which objects you want to peek at 1 On the View menu click Peek Settings Peek Settings x I Obscured Objects I Button Objects E 3 T Input Objects I Recipe Object e Animated Objects Help M Visibility I Vert Position T Touch I Object Keys I Color I width T Hore Slider Tl Fill T Height I Vert Slider I Horz Position M Rotation M OLE Verb E By Tag Options fl I Activate Peek 2 Select the check boxes for the objects you want to view To select animated objects check the Animated Objects check box and then select the individual types of animation When you check By Tag the field below it is active To list the tags associated with a graphic display either type a tag name or click the arrow beside the By Tag field and scroll through the list The list contains the names of all tags used in the display except tags in commands You can peek at as many types of objects as you want However Peek does not distinguish between the objects For example if you choose color and visibility animation all objects with these types of animation are highlighted a
393. led controls then click OK You can use up to 10 pages in the toolbox to group related tools although the number of tabs you can view at one time depends on the length of the tab names To add pages to the ActiveX Toolbox 1 Right click an existing tab in the toolbox 2 Click New Page on the context menu RSView32 creates a new page with the name New Page To give the page a new name rename it as described next Activex Toolbox Forms 2 0 RSTools 11 75 Creating graphic displays _ 11 16 To rename or remove pages in the ActiveX Toolbox 1 Select the page to rename or remove 2 Right click the tab label 3 Click Rename or Delete Page on the context menu 4 If renaming the page type a name in the Caption field You can also type descriptive text in the Control Tip Text field This text appears when the operator positions the cursor over the page tab at runtime Note that the page with focus is deleted when you choose Delete Page even though the tab for that page may not be visible When a tab has focus is selected a dotted line appears around the label text To remove tools from the ActiveX Toolbox 1 Select the tool to remove 2 Right click and click Delete Item on the context menu To add an object to a graphic display using the ActiveX Toolbox 1 In the ActiveX Toolbox click on the icon for the object to add 2 Draw a box about the size you want for the object The ob
394. letters and numbers but cannot include spaces or the characters l lt gt The ID also cannot be NULL The account ID can be the name of a user a name for a group of users or an ID number If you like type the name of a macro in the Login Macro and Logout Macro fields These macros run each time this user logs in and out For more information about macros see Login and logout macros on page 10 17 In the Password field type a password up to eight characters long The password can include letters and numbers and is not case sensitive A blank or null password is acceptable Users can change the password at runtime For details see Changing passwords at runtime on page 10 20 In the Security Codes area select the check box for each security code you want this user to have access to Click Accept Repeats steps 1 through 5 for each user To save the user account configuration click Close Adding security To create users from the Windows NT domain user list 1 On the Setup menu click NT Security Options In the NT Security Options dialog you select which NT users you want to make up the RSView32 user accounts list All users must be in the same NT domain All NT users added to the RSView32 User Accounts will have the same security codes as DEFAULT in the User Accounts editor You will have to specify individual users security access in the User Accounts editor s m
395. levant to RSView32 only 16 12 Sharing data with other Windows applications Tag name BS 1999 02 05 0001 Paper T agname DBF Iof Xx Tagname TTaglndex TagType TagDataTyp PAPERANADRIVE DM7_TORQ 0 2 0 PAPERVANA DRIVE DM 7_FPM 1 2 Ole gt bi 1999 02 05 0001 Paper Tagname dal gt ir This column Contains TagName The tag name TTaglndex The index number assigned to the tag name Taglype The tag type 2 analog tag 38 digital tag 4 string tag TagDataTyp The tag data type O long 1 float 2 string Data log files wide dbf format Wide dbf format data log files are created in sets of two For more information about dbf data log files see The dbf file format on page 7 3 Floating point and string data Tagname Status Tag values or index Dale Timia taher AMA 1604 59 830 E BO 00000000 rr 00000000 SL DO00no 9 OONOD000 SG Ea eo i bai FF Go Se 56 Gono SMe 1601100 45 DO000000 ff ODDO S000 A AS 16 05 29 950 46 00000000 FF OO000000 SO 0000n0 45 00000000 Sue 16539 90 23 Ooo fr COO 400i 20 00000000 16 13 Sharing data with other Windows applications This column Contains Date The date the tag values were logged Time The time the tag values were logged Marker B when the DataLogOn command was issued and logging began E when the DataLogOff command was issued and logging ended S when the DataLogSnapshot command was issued
396. liey Tag Monitor E User Accounts E Security Codes E amp Activity Log Setup 8 Activity Log Viewer 8 16 With the Activity Log Viewer you can view records in the activity log file Files can be viewed in both edit and run modes The Activity Log Viewer does not display all the information in the log file To see the complete log file use an application that reads dBASE IV dbf files such as Microsoft Excel or export the data to an ODBC database and view it using a viewer such as Microsoft Query For more information see Tracking system usage on page 8 17 and Activity log files on page 16 7 To open the Activity Log Viewer 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Activity Log Viewer by doing one of the following double click the Activity Log Viewer icon right click the Activity Log Viewer icon and then click Show Selecting a record When the Activity Log Viewer opens it displays the contents of the most recent log file To select another file 1 On the Records menu click Select Log File aireiy Loy Vioo lt so a SEDE dedi a SBDEt Abed be a 96 DE Gedei W abbii Sbedbe all SEDER be P9608 Ghat File same SET ct Fle of bape gt a Cac Configuring activity logging Record 2 Click the file you want to view The contents of the file are displayed in the viewer Understanding records The Activity Log Viewer displays up to 32
397. ll exists system ComStatusValue1 Analog Internal number indicating current status of device communications Will be the same as system ComErrorValue if the error condition still exists System tags The following tags record OPC client communication information These tags are added to the system folder when you configure an OPC node in the Node editor Tag Name Type Displays information about system ComErrorStringOPC String Most recent OPC error message system ComErrorValueOPC Analog Internal number of most recent OPC error system ComStatusStringOPC String Current status of OPC communications Will be the same as system ComErrorStringOPC if the error condition still exists system ComStatusValueQPC Analog Internal number indicating current status of OPC communications Will be the same as system ComErrorValueOPC if the error condition still exists The following tags record DDE client communication information These tags are added to the system folder when you configure a DDE node in the Node editor Tag Name Type Displays information about system ComErrorStringDDE String Most recent DDE client error message system ComErrorValueDDE Analog Internal number of most recent DDE client error system ComStatusStringDDE String Current status of DDE client communications Will be the same as system ComErrorStringDDE if the error condition still exists system ComStatusValueDDE Analog Intern
398. lter to display only the alarms for the machine For more information about creating an alarm summary see page 6 52 2 In the Display Keys dialog box assign a display key In the Press Action field type Display AlmSumm t tag Animating graphic objects ee f ole ha ar y Pre ihan j EE a a 3 In the Object Keys dialog box type the name of the alarm summary file in the Current Tag field for each machine object hms i ess E Emei is E eee zj Hoa Aeris asl Type the name of the laja m 3 alarm summary object 2 e T At runtime when the operator selects an equipment object and presses F5 the alarm summary for that piece of equipment appears 12 51 Animating graphic objects Creating display keys 12 52 Display keys associate graphic displays with keys Using the keys operators can interact with the graphic displays at runtime Example Using a display key Suppose you want the Home key to display a main menu display To do this create a display key as follows In the Press Action field type Display Main Menu Whenever an operator presses Home the active graphic display closes and the Main Menu display opens If the Main Menu display is of the Overlay display type you must use the Abort command to close the active display For details about how keys and other interactive objects work at runtime see Specifying the behavior of interactive ob
399. ludes an example of setting up RSView32 as a DDE server that provides data to a Microsoft Excel worksheet See Chapter 17 Using networks for information about setting up RSView32 as a server or client on a network use other Windows tools to manage tag databases RSView32 stores tag and alarm information in a format that is ODBC compatible This means you can use another Windows application such as Microsoft Access to create a front end for managing your tag database visually integrate with other Windows products RSView32 supports object linking and embedding OLE 2 0 so you can link to other applications as well as files created in other applications With this feature you can provide management information from a remote database by embedding a Microsoft Excel chart allow operators to enter shift data into an external database by activating an embedded database form embed any OLE 2 0 server application that meets your specific needs You can link or embed OLE objects in the Graphic Display editor For details see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays insert an ActiveX object into a graphic display and link the object to an RSView32 tag For details see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays and Chapter 12 Animating graphic objects Sharing data with other Windows applications Retrieving historical data All logged data is stored in files in dBASE IV or ODBC table format so you can retrieve data from
400. ly assign only short sounds to the Exclamation event Configuring alarms You can choose from the sounds that come with Windows or you can install additional sound files For information on installing drivers and assigning sounds see your Windows documentation External Bell The external bell is a sound produced by a horn or some other audio device To set up the external bell select the check box and specify the name of a tag that is linked to an audio device The specified tag must refer to a bit in the programmable controller When an alarm occurs this bit is set and the logic in the programmable controller turns on the audio device When the alarm is acknowledged or silenced the bit in the programmable controller is reset and the logic in the programmable controller turns off the audio device 5 Click OK Configuring alarm messages 6 34 Alarm messages report information about alarms There are several types of messages You can define the content of each message or you can use the system defaults Alarm messages appear in the description field of the alarm log file only You cannot display them in alarm summaries Types of messages The types of messages are In alarm message generated when an analog tag s alarm threshold has been crossed or when a digital tag has changed state Out of alarm message generated when a tag is no longer in alarm Acknowledged message generated when an alarm has been acknowl
401. mal Integer 7 9 255 decimal Floating Point 8 9 255 decimal ASCII 9 255 decimal String 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication binary integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Word address 0 255 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for floating point and string file types Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers SLC 5 Enhanced binary files optional syntax Fnnn bbbb F nnn optional bbbb Example B3 3999 File type B Binary File number 3 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication the default file number 3 is used if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0 4095 decimal SLC 5 Enhanced timer counter and control files Fnnn eee MNE bb F nnn optional eee MNE bb optional File type T Timer C Counter R Control File number Timer 4 9 255 decimal Counter 5 9 255 decimal Control 6 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 255 decimal Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables starting on page D 23 Bit number
402. mmand entries RSView32 Resource Kit RegConfig tool 6 15 RSView32 tools ControlView Project Import Wizard C 1 NT 4 0 Desktop Lock 10 18 18 5 RTDataServerOff command A 51 RTDataServerOn command 16 24 17 6 A 52 RTDataWriteDisable command A 52 RTDataWriteEnable command 16 27 17 6 A 53 Run mode See Getting Results with RSView32 Runtime changing logging paths 7 26 7 42 7 43 A 25 changing logging rate 7 44 A 23 changing nodes 2 15 3 14 changing passwords 10 20 failure of primary network 2 10 font substitution 11 35 logging in 10 19 project window appearance 18 3 switching drivers 2 10 time date and number formats 18 12 using recipes 11 61 11 63 using trends 13 38 1 16 Scan Class editor 2 17 A 21 Scan classes differences from ControlView C 7 Scan rate G 7 assigning to tags 4 19 for DDE nodes 3 15 for device nodes 2 15 for OPC nodes update rate 3 15 ScreenPrint command 11 104 A 53 Scroll bars preventing on graphic displays 11 18 Seagate Crystal Reports 7 1 8 1 Secondary drivers 2 8 Security 10 1 10 3 10 7 See also Passwords disabling access to key combinations 10 18 18 5 locking users into RSView32 10 18 18 5 preventing access to the Project Manager 10 18 using NT 4 0 Desktop Lock 10 18 Windows NT user list 10 1 10 12 at runtime 10 19 changing passwords 10 20 Security codes 10 4 assigning to commands 10 5 assigning to graphic displays 10 9 11 21 ass
403. mmand or macro Separate multiple commands or macros with a semi colon or place them on separate lines Multiple commands are executed in the order they are listed 5 To attach a tag to an event parameter select an event parameter 6 Type the tag name or click the button to open the Tag Browser and select a tag The tag s value is determined when the ActiveX event occurs 12 37 Animating graphic objects For more information about the object and its methods click this button 12 38 7 To log the event click the Log event to RSView activity log file check box and set up logging in the Activity Log Setup editor ActiveX events are logged under the Applications category and will be logged to whatever destination you specify activity bar log file printer For information about setting up activity categories see Specifying which activities to log on page 8 12 When an event is logged the name of the ActiveX object is the message that is logged For details about naming an object see Naming an ActiveX object on page 12 34 Viewing ActiveX control methods The ActiveX Control Methods dialog box shows the methods implemented for the selected object A method is a function that is part of the ActiveX object ActiveX Methods xi Use this dialog box to view the methods for the selected ActiveX control Select a method and click for more details on the method and its parameters Bool
404. mmands are executed in the order they are listed If you want repeat and release actions type commands or macros in these fields as well Press and release actions occur when the object is pressed or released Repeat actions occur at the rate specified in the Repeat Rate field and do not wait for the press command to be completed 4 If you specified a repeat action specify a repeat rate This is how often the action will be repeated while the object is pressed 5 Click Apply Configuring horizontal slider animation 12 28 With horizontal slider animation you can create a graphic object that sets the value of a tag To do this define a path for the object and then use the mouse to move the object horizontally The pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag An object can have both vertical and horizontal slider animation Animating graphic objects Homontel frei ifie At binini F a At Meninure E aa ES raay n o f Eeey ewe cove ie To configure horizontal slider animation 1 2 Select the object Click the Horizontal Slider tab in the Animation dialog box Type the name of the tag whose value will be determined by the slider Set the starting point for the slider object by dragging the object or by typing a value Select the At Minimum check box Set the ending point for the slider object by dragging the object or by typing a value Select the A
405. mnemonic tables starting on page D 23 Submember Only applies to ADDR and DATA members of PID structure and DATA member of MSG structure Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example MG4095 3000 DATA 0 15 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers Mnemonic tables Timer mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type ACC Accumulator Value Analog DN Done Digital EN Enable Digital PRE Preset Value Analog TT Timing Digital Counter mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type ACC Accumulated Value Analog CD Count Down Enable Digita CU Count Up Enable Digita DN Done Digita OV Overflow Digita PRE Preset Value Analog UN Underflow Digita For fixed 1 0 SLC only UA Update Accumulator Value Digita Control mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction Type DN Done Digital EN Enable Digital ER Error Digital FD Found Digital IN Inhibit Digital LEN Length Analog POS Position Analog UL Unload Digital For all programmable controllers except the fixed I O SLC and the SLC 5 01 EM Empty Digital EU Enable Unloading Digital D 23 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers D 24 Mnemonic Instruction Type Submember Range ADDRI Address of Master Loop Analog 0 3 BIAS Output Bias
406. mote DDE clients If the realtime data server is already running this parameter is ignored RSView32 commands RTDataWrite Enable ScreenPrint Security By default writes are disabled Therefore the RI DataWriteDisable command is required only after the RITDataWriteEnable command has been used RTDataWriteEnable Quiet NetDDE Enables writes by external Windows applications using OPC or DDE so these applications can change tag values in RSView32 The RSView32 OPC or DDE server is also known as the realtime data server If the RSView32 realtime data server is not running that is if the RT DataServerOn command has not been run RTDataWriteEnable also starts the RSView32 realtime data server Quiet Makes RSView32 use the current Remote Users accessibility setting in the Windows Registry Without this parameter or if the setting is not configured correctly RSView32 displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the setting when you issue the command NetDDE Enables RSView32 as a NetDDE server to remote DDE clients If the realtime data server is already running this parameter is ignored By default writes are disabled ScreenPrint Generates a screen print on the default printer specified in Windows See also PrintDisplay Security Opens the Security Codes editor To prevent users from changing security at runtime restrict access to this command A 53 RSView32 commands SendKeys
407. mp To run the display called Canning with the folder containing corn tags type Display Canning TCorn To run the display called Canning with the folder containing bean tags type Display Canning TBean 11 41 Creating graphic displays Numeric Input tool String Input tool 11 42 Creating numeric and string input fields Use the Numeric Input tool to create fields that operators can use to enter data for analog and digital tags Use the String Input tool to create fields that operators can use to enter data for string tags When the display runs operators can use these fields to write values to the value table The values can then be accessed by the programmable controller external OPC or DDE device or RSView32 memory A display can contain up to 500 input fields 12345 Programmable Controller To download data the operator types a number into the input field and presses PgDn Numeric and string input fields can also be used to upload values and display them in a graphic display 12345 Programmable Controller To upload data and display it in the input field the operator presses PgUp Operators can select any one of the input fields in the display and read or write the values associated with that field or they can read or write all the values at once You also have the option of setting input fields so that tag values update continuously when the operator is not using the field t
408. mum Files 3 IF you select both checkboxes files are deleted after the maximum time or after the maximum number of files is reached whichever happens first 2 Under Start New Files click a button to specify when you want to have new files created See the topics below for information on the various times Creating files periodically Click Periodic and then click a time period A new file is created after the specified interval has elapsed For this period The new file is created Hourly Approximately on the hour Daily Each day approximately at midnight Weekly Each Sunday approximately at midnight Monthly On the first day of each month approximately at midnight 6 25 Configuring alarms Creating files at specified times Click At Specified Times and then type a time or list of times when you want data to be logged to a new file Start a new line for each new time and allow at least five minutes between start times Use any of the following to specify time Time Format Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Sat Date 1 31 Specifying 31 means that months that do not have 31 days will not have new log files Hour OO to 23 Minute 00 to 59 You can combine hours and minutes with a day or date Example Creating a new file To start a new file every Wednesday at 2 00 am and every Friday at 2 00 pm type the following start times Stet Times one pee jina Wod 7 00 Fai 1
409. munications network 2 19 importing from ControlView C 1 running 18 1 18 13 setting up in new location 18 8 startup settings for 18 2 stopping 18 15 testing 18 8 Property ActiveX 12 32 12 35 A 39 Property Panel ActiveX 11 73 12 34 12 35 PullForward command 15 3 A 48 PushBack command 15 3 A 49 Pyramid Integrator PI E 2 E 6 E 8 Question marks in input fields 11 43 11 46 11 63 Quit command A 49 Ramp command A 49 ReadMe file P 2 Realtime data accessing and updating 16 24 Realtime trends 13 3 13 13 13 26 See also Trends Recipe commands Download 11 47 11 64 A 33 DownloadAll 11 47 11 64 A 34 RecipeEdit A 50 RecipeRestore 11 64 A 51 RecipeSave 11 65 A 51 Upload 11 47 11 65 A 60 UploadAll 11 47 11 65 A 60 Recipe editor 11 61 Recipes 11 59 and on screen keyboard 11 25 11 48 managing G 7 using at runtime 11 61 11 63 using index numbers for 11 60 12 43 Rectangle graphic object 11 29 Relational operators 14 10 Remark command 8 12 A 51 Remarks adding to alarm log file 6 38 Remote station E 2 G 7 Remote trends 13 3 13 14 G 7 Reserved keys 15 17 RM modules E 2 E 6 E 9 Rockwell Software contacting P 2 I 15 Index Rotation animation 12 24 Rounded rectangle graphic object 11 29 RSLinx 2 3 2 5 and DDE 16 28 A 27 and OPC 3 1 3 9 RSLinx Gateway and OPC 17 10 17 11 RSServer 3 1 3 13 RSView32 commands A 1 See also Commands Individual co
410. must be unique Use the 6200 Series Programming Software to configure link numbers A PI chassis contains one RM module with two network channels It can also contain up to four KA modules each with two network channels Using the RM and four KA modules an RSView32 system can communicate with programmable controllers on any or all of 10 DH networks Example The figure on the following page shows an RSView32 system connected to a DH network with a KT family card The PI routes requests among four DH networks The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are Station Address Valid Entries 12 12 3 6 2 3 23 6 3 23 10 6 4 10 Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices Bridge Address PI Chassis ae Be PLC 5 B PI Link 3 DH m N PLC 5 Ba PI Link 2 DH E PLC 5 PI Link 1 DH 12 PLC 5 RSViewSe with KT family card E 7 m Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices DH and DH connected to a TCP IP network by a Pyramid Integrator You can use a Pyramid Integrator PI with an Ethernet interface to route requests from a TCP IP network to either DH or DH networks The PI chassis will contain one RM module with two network channels and up to four KA modules each with two network channels Using the RM and four KA modules an RSView32 system can communicate with pr
411. n pakar ia Supenaier than 1 acol Espmanwi Trua Bisio C iigb m visible To configure visibility animation 1 Select the object 2 Click the Visibility tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines visibility A value other than 0 evaluates to true 4 If you want the object to be invisible when the tag or expression value is true that is when it does not equal zero click invisible If you want the object to be visible when the tag or expression value is true that is when it does not equal zero click visible 5 Click Apply 12 12 Animating graphic objects Configuring color animation With color animation an object changes color based on a tag value or the result of a logical expression Specify up to 16 color changes A to P for any object Colors can be solid or blinking For each color change specify the value or threshold at which the color is to change and specify the colors to change to At runtime when the value reaches or crosses the threshold the color changes Color animation does not affect string input numeric input or recipe fields Color for these fields is defined in the Display Settings dialog box fe Ear Honoris Fuskos 1 Yoel Poston Herportel Sieber Wertom Sider gi T To J Chine I OLE ver Tage aj Emen ine
412. n OPC client and another as an OPC server to achieve peer to peer networking Using OPC you can both read from and write to tags on another RSView32 station on the network Follow the steps below to set up OPC in Windows 9x or Windows NT If you are using Windows NT Service Pack 3 or Service Pack 4 must be installed as well To use OPC you need a Windows NT network with a Primary Domain Controller to authenticate all computers on the network All computers on the Windows NT network must be in the same domain Microsoft Distributed COM DCOM must be installed and configured both on the client and the server computers the OPC server must be registered on the OPC client machine The Node editor lists OPC servers that are registered on the client machine click the Browse button next to the Server Name field For more information about the requirements for using OPC ona client server network see the RSView32 Release Notes 17 5 m Using networks 17 6 Identifying the RSView32 server computer To uniquely identify an RSView32 server for OPC communications the computer must have a name or address To assign a name using the Universal Naming Convention open the Windows Control Panel open the Network dialog box click the Identification tab and type a name for the computer To assign a name using the Domain Name System See your Microsoft NT Server documentation To set up a TCP IP address
413. n from this list Configuring alarms Running commands macros or VBA programs in response to alarms Using the Execute and Identify buttons in an alarm summary you can run a command macro or VBA program to respond to tags alarm conditions Use the Execute button to run a command macro or VBA program that applies to all alarms in the summary for example to create a custom alarm report for analyzing plant maintenance efficiency Use the Identify button to run a command macro or VBA program that applies only to the highlighted alarm The Identify button can run a different command macro or VBA program for each tag for example to run a different help file for each tag s alarm conditions About the Execute button With the Execute button you can specify a command or macro that operators can run with reference to the highlighted alarm in an alarm summary The Execute command can be appended with data items derived from the highlighted alarm for example the tag name alarm type severity value date and time and the tag type Use the execute feature to apply a common command macro or VBA program to alarms in the alarm summary For example you can run a VBA program to add entries to a custom alarm report for selected alarms in an alarm summary and you can pass arguments from the highlighted alarm to the VBA program To set up the Execute button double click the alarm summary to edit it and then open the Execute
414. n state Note that you don t need to put braces around tag names when using placeholders in commands 15 9 m Setting up navigation 15 10 Using parameters Macros can accept parameters To specify a parameter in a macro type a percent sign followed by a number Up to nine parameters are allowed To run the macro and parameters specify the macro name followed by the parameters Separate multiple parameters with spaces For example here is the same Factory macro with two parameters Example Factory macro with two parameters Display Overview Display 1 valve23 2 To run the macro type Factory Detail Open The macro performs the same actions as in the original Factory example because it substitutes detail wherever 1 appears in the macro and substitutes open wherever 2 appears in the macro Setting up navigation Nesting macros You can insert a macro within another macro this is called nesting You can have eight nesting levels in macros For example a macro called Draw contains Display Overview Display Detail and a macro called Factory contains Draw Valve23 Open Typing Factory performs the same actions as the original Factory macro in the previous example Creating a macro that starts when a project starts If you have created a project with components that must start in a particular order create a startup macro You can then configure the
415. n these commands run RSView32 displays the trend graphic called Process Trend and sets the start time for the trend to the current time minus 3600 seconds 1 hour You can specify the start time from a graphic object or from a macro For example create a button object and use the above commands as the press action for the button Do not set control tags from a macro that is launched from the Startup field in the Display Settings dialog box of the Graphic Display editor All commands and macros launched from the Startup field are executed before the graphic display is initialized Configuring trends Using the Trends graphic library E Graphics g Displa Library y The Trends graphic library contains a realtime trend and objects for controlling the trend You can use the trend and objects as they are or you can edit them to suit your needs To use the objects drag and drop them into your graphic display and then type a folder name in the trend s Control Tag field To use the Trends graphic library 1 In the Project Manager open the Graphics folder 2 Open the Graphics Library folder The graphic library files are displayed in the right pane of the Project Manager 3 Double click Trends 4 Drag and drop one or more trend objects into your display Setting the name of the Control Tag folder You can use the Control Tag folder name trend that has already been configured for the trend o
416. n use fractional seconds For example if you type 6 the expression will be evaluated every six tenths of a second If you re using tags don t specify an evaluation interval faster than the scan class background period DDE server polling rate or OPC server update rate 4 Click OK Configuring events Creating events An event is made up of an expression and an action When the expression changes from false on the previous evaluation to true on the current evaluation the action is triggered The following illustration shows an event file Eskapi Erini Bo igra ha agh F tenet oe Bampira lea rh egi pmo 4 iti ganapahe deagh Makeupilecard Log dig h weight Dateleqshapshe Leet ComerAecod Log load tempernivre kieser linl 14 Oen ke Time 75 6 Indexer inele 14 Get maximum Gas per shew to 14 Dutelogon Variety YarketyChemge Log variety change Datsagon DayEnd Lage Log end odday reperi ft a To create an event 1 In the Action field type an RSView32 command a macro or a symbol that will run when the expression goes from false to true but not from true to false Tyee Do not create events that depend on other events Events are not processed sequentially For a complete list of RSView32 commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help For more information about macros and symbols see Chapter 15 Setting up navigation 9 5 m Configuring events Editing events
417. n you use it in an expression for example N33 0 Also use braces when using wildcards to represent multiple tags in an expression for example alarm For more information about using tags in expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Using folders to group tags To organize tags create a folder and include tags that are related to one another To separate the folder name from the rest of the tag name use a backslash For example tags in the folder called Pump would start with Pump For greater organization you can nest folders For example you can organize the tag database first by area then by machines in the area and finally by devices in each machine The result might be Areal Machine1 Pump The tag database editor E System Channel age Node WM Scan Class Tag Database iA Tag Monitor D 4 4 To open the Tag Database editor 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Tag Database editor by doing one of the following double click the Tag Database icon right click the Tag Database icon and then click Show Creating tags The Tag Database editor has the following parts form query box folder hierarchy and spreadsheet Each part is described on the following pages Form Query Box A Baltichlescription Sani butia D giia Folder i tere Chacolate Ghips Analog Hierarchy Dry ciiis Analig Liquids Analog Spreadsheet Using the Accept and Dis
418. name of an analog tag A 49 RSView32 commands RecipeEdit A 50 lt value gt The amount to add or subtract from the current programmable controller value as follows plus or minus a numeric value plus or minus a percentage of a numeric value in the form value plus or minus a tag If Ramp calculates a value that is outside of the tag s minimum and maximum range it will write the highest or lowest allowable value to the programmable controller or server Tyee if you use the Ramp command in a macro you must use two percent signs instead of one A single percent sign is used in a macro to indicate a parameter For example to create a macro that increases the value of tag1 by 75 you would type Ramp tag1 75 Examples The Ramp command Ramp Hopperl1 Level 50 If the value of Hopper1 Level is 100 Min 100 and Max 900 the command writes the value 600 to the programmable controller Ramp Hopperl1 Level 75 If Hopper1 Level is 900 Min 0 and Max 1000 the command writes 1000 to the programmable controller because this is the highest allowable value Ramp Hopperl Level delta If Hopper1 Level is 1000 and delta is 200 the command writes 800 to the programmable controller RecipeEdit file Without the parameter opens the Recipe editor With the parameter opens the specified recipe file file The name of a recipe file without a file extens
419. narrow format dBASE IV models and ODBC models adding or deleting a tag in the model does not cause a new file set to be created the next time the DataLogOn lt file gt command runs For wide format dBASE IV models adding or deleting a tag in the model causes a new log file set to be created the next time the DataLogOn lt file gt command runs To edit the data log model 1 In the Project Manager open the data log model you want to change 2 Make the required changes 3 Save the changes Mee Ifyou delete a tag from a data log model and the tag is also used in a trend object be sure to remove all references to the deleted tag from the trend object Changing logging paths using RSView32 Runtime You can change the logging paths at runtime using RSView32 Runtime you don t need to use RSView32 Works You can change the primary and secondary paths for dBASE IV data log models and the backup path for ODBC data log models You cannot change the ODBC database using RSView32 Runtime Configuring data logging To edit the logging paths 1 In the Project Manager open the Data Log folder 2 Open the Data Log Path editor 3 Specify paths as described in Specifying logging paths on page 7 22 Changing logging paths using the DataLogPath command The operator can also change logging paths at runtime using the DataLogPath lt file gt command where lt file gt refers to the data log model you want to chang
420. nd DDE communications Changing node information at runtime 3 14 To change an OPC node s server name and access path or a DDE node s application and topic at runtime use the NodeSwitch command This command allows you to set up node level redundancy That is if the server that a node is pointing to fails you can immediately switch to another server NodeSwitch lt node name gt lt parameter gt lt node name gt The name of the node that you want to change to another server lt parameter gt One of the following lt computer For OPC servers the computer name server name name server and access path if in use for the OPC server you name laccess want to switch to Separate the access path from the path gt server name with the character lt application For DDE servers the application and topic separated ltopic gt by the character for the DDE server you want to switch to When you use the NodeSwitch command to change a node s server information the change appears in the Node editor s spreadsheet If the Node editor is open when you use the command the change will not appear until you close and re open the editor For more information about the NodeSwitch command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help You can also enable and disable nodes at runtime using the NodeEnable and NodeDisable commands For more information see Appendix A RSView32 commands Setting up OPC and DDE commun
421. nd Peek does not indicate which objects have which types of animation 3 If you want Peek to be active when you close the dialog box click Activate Peek Otherwise you can turn on Peek by clicking Peek On on the View menu 4 To save your settings click OK 11 97 Creating graphic displays To turn Peek on and off a click Peek On on the View menu click Activate Peek in the Peek dialog box When Peek is on the cursor looks like this Rs Ke Peek is automatically turned off as soon you do any action in the Graphic Display editor For example if you are peeking at objects and then move an object Peek is turned off Creating a background for your display 11 98 You can create a background for your graphic display by converting objects to wallpaper When objects are converted to wallpaper they are locked into position and become an unchanging background for the other objects in the display This is useful for importing photographs of your machine or process and overlaying them with animated objects Converting objects that do not need to be selected or animated speeds up animated displays Converting bitmaps to wallpaper can significantly improve the performance of a graphic display Objects that have been converted to wallpaper cannot be selected or edited until you unlock the wallpaper Also any animation attached to the objects is not in effect However animation is restored when you unlock the wallp
422. nd then click a location In the following illustration Left was chosen as the button bar position Ue a Deploy Mrt rer Eiio e Gate Mam Time Tegseme Tag Yaun Tag Description dat aio Blairm Maie Alarm Time Tag Description penne i l ie ie ir poet 6 61 Configuring alarms Filter Sort Execute Use the Filter and Sort items in the Data menu to specify which alarm information is displayed Use Filter to filter out information that is to specify information you do not want displayed in the alarm summary Use Sort to specify the order in which alarm information is displayed Alarm information can be filtered and sorted at runtime but changes are not saved Filtering data To filter data click Filter on the Data menu The Filter dialog box opens If a check box is selected the information is included in the alarm summary Clear the check boxes for information you want excluded from the alarm summary Filter Tag Names Tag Types MV Analog M Digital Alarm States M Faults V Out of Alarm I Only show tags currently In Alarm Severities Viv M i vv al va ey th ky Te ef Cancel Help You can use wildcards or tag placeholders in the alarm summary filter Tag Names 1 Tag Types a M Analog M Digital Alarm States M Faults V Qut of Alarm T Only show tags currently In Alarm r Severities VV VM Vi i eb 2b
423. ndary file paths and ODBC backup file path 1 In the Data Log Setup editor click the Paths tab If you are using the ODBC storage format go to step 3 Untied Duta Leg Setup Pirsa Path r Se coat Logging Pathe 7 Fiais To Pema bathe Pig Seconda Pats Sa T Egatis Gasiichevves is fesnoredany Faih mams r F aE Configuring data logging 2 If you are using dBASE IV storage format specify the primary path where you want to store the dbf data log files Relative To Project Click this to store the log files in the project directory RSView32 creates a directory called Dlglog and a subdirectory with the same name as the model name and stores the files there Absolute Path Click this to specify a particular path If the path you type does not exist RSView32 will create it The first time data logging runs RSView32 creates a subdirectory with the same name as the model name and stores the files there Logging Pay 0 Fies To Prope _tehorend Ths DOIG Dacia Pih ia sehr cling i l Ee hosp by arte ape thot yon DDB dob i aii dry cola thot ooo in ee bakupi pah can ibp maara nag the OUTTA dah ac e a ry ra gy ming Tra Dace ee ee ey a rri eed 7 23 Configuring data logging 3 Specify whether to enable RSView32 to switch to a secondary dbf 7 24 file path or a backup path if the primary path or ODBC database becomes unavailable See Switching logging paths on page 7 21 for m
424. ndicate breakdown wear or a process malfunction Set up a system of alarms in the Tag Database editor by linking alarms to tags you want monitored When the tag values are updated in the value table they are compared to the limits you assigned when you configured the alarm If a tag value exceeds the configured limits an alarm of a preset severity is triggered Alarms for analog tags An analog tag can trigger a number of alarms when it crosses various predefined threshold levels unlike a digital tag which is either on or off Thresholds When defining an analog tag you can assign up to eight alarm thresholds with different levels of alarm severity to indicate the alarm s importance The lowest threshold is one and the highest is eight You do not have to use all eight thresholds for a tag but the ones you use must be configured in ascending order For example you can assign thresholds one two and eight as long as you assign them in that order Thresholds can be increasing monitoring for a rising value that crosses the threshold or decreasing monitoring for a falling value that crosses the threshold The following illustration shows a tag with both increasing and decreasing thresholds In this example the deadband setting is zero Configuring alarms Increasing Decreasing Example Alarm thresholds Alarm Threshold severity values Thresholds level 5 000 6 A 4 000 5 A 3 000 4 A y_2
425. nding and is useful if you want to display data from a particular shift or batch process For historical trends you can display data from a data log model in the project you are running or you can display data from a different project either on the same computer or on another computer on the network Displaying data from a different project is called remote trending Pens are the lines and or symbols used to represent values The values can be tags you are monitoring or they can be constant values To show a tag value specify a tag name To show a constant value such as a tag s alarm levels specify a value instead of a tag name To define the pen s tag at runtime use a tag placeholder For details see Configuring pen style on page 13 19 13 3 Configuring trends Shading between Use shading to show relationships between tags and to compare tag values to constants The figure below calls attention to tag values in alarm The difference between the tag s value and the alarm s level is shaded pen values Legend 13 4 14 19 13 14 19 39 High temp 90 Low Temp 14 19 39 Aug 20 1996 Legend Include a legend at the bottom of the trend to identify the data that is being drawn by each pen You can include some or all of the pens in the legend and can label each pen Control tags Control tags are a type of memory tag that is they are tags that are created and updated
426. nds 13 28 If you copy a trend the new trend uses the same Control Tag folder name Therefore if you plan to display both trends simultaneously rename the copied trend s Control Tag folder name Trend control tags The trend control tags are Tag name Function Read or Write CurrentFile Number of the current data log file Each data log file is numbered in sequence Read and write see Function column CurrentPen Number of the current pen 1 16 highlighted Read and write in the legend NewestFile Offset from current data log file to newest data Read only log file NewestTime Time of the newest data sample available for Read only plotting OldestFile Offset from current data log file to oldest data Read only log file OldestTime Time of the oldest data sample available for Read only plotting Paused A tag value of 1 pauses the trend Read and write A tag value of O resumes movement of the trend For realtime trends RSView32 reads the value of this tag when the trend is first displayed to determine whether to start the trend in paused or resumed mode If this tag doesn t exist the trend is started in resumed mode For historical trends RSView32 reads the value of this tag when the trend is first displayed to determine whether to start the trend in paused or resumed mode If this tag doesn t exist the trend is started in paused mode File based trends are always st
427. nformation on macros see Creating macros on page 15 7 10 17 Adding security Securing the Project Manager There is no security from within the Project Manager Therefore to prevent unrestricted access to project components ensure users cannot access the Project Manager To do this you can assign security to the ProjectStop and ProjectShow commands in the Security Codes editor For details about these commands and how to hide the Project Manager see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help disable the Windows shortcut keys for accessing the Project Manager Ctrl Alt P by selecting the appropriate check box in the Startup editor For details see page 18 5 Preventing users from going out of the RSView32 project 10 18 To prevent users from going outside of the RSView32 project do one or more of the following do not include title bars or minimize and maximize buttons on graphic displays by deselecting the appropriate options in the Graphic Display editor s Display Settings dialog box For details see page 11 16 disable access to the operating system as follows for Windows 9x and Windows NT prevent users from switching to other applications by disabling Switch to other Apps in the Startup editor for Windows 9x prevent users from restarting the computer by disabling Ctrl Alt Del in the Startup editor for Windows NT prevent users from accessing the desktop by using the NT 4 0 Desk
428. ng a tag 1 Select the tag you want to duplicate 2 Click Duplicate on the Edit menu or click the Duplicate button on the toolbar A new row is inserted below the highlighted row The new row contains all the same information except the tag name 3 In the Tag Name field type the name for the new tag 4 Click Accept Editing a tag You can edit all parts of a tag except the tag name and tag type 1 Select the tag you want to edit The details of the tag appear in the form area 2 Edit any details except the tag name or type Delete tags carefully Once you click the Delete button the tag is deleted There is no confirmation message and you cannot undo the deletion 1 Select the tag you want to delete 2 Click Delete on the the Edit menu or click the Delete button on the toolbar Creating tags Configuring tag type The topics below describe how to complete the fields for analog digital and string tag types For a description of how to complete the Data Source fields see Specifying a data source on page 4 18 Configuring an analog tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select that folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash 3 For Type select Analog pues Home Heper Alaina Taripatsnre Bre Asang Soom Come a belinda urre
429. ng input field is set to update continuously and display tag values its appearance changes to reflect which mode the field is in When the field is displaying a value from the programmable controller or server display mode the border around the field is dotted When a value has been entered in the field but not downloaded yet pending write mode the border around the field becomes solid When a field is ready to receive input input mode the border is solid and the field is surrounded by a highlight box The operator can put the field into input mode by setting focus on the field uploading to the field or restoring a recipe to the field The operator can set the field back to display mode by pressing the Escape key When you first open a display containing fields set to update continuously default focus is given to the first non updating field in the index sequence If all fields in the display are set to update continuously no field is given focus until the operator sets focus on a field If an upload fails because of a communication error question marks appear in the numeric input fields Creating graphic displays Keys Operators can use the following keys to retrieve data from and send data to the value table You can re assign these actions to other keys or assign them to button objects PgDn downloads the contents of all input fields in the active graphic display to the value table Ctrl PgDn downloads the conte
430. ng methods to monitor communications lt Activities In the Activity Log Setup editor ensure communication errors warnings and remarks are enabled and are set up to log to the log file and activity bar At runtime information appears in the log file and activity bar indicating any problems Communication status Ensure communication status is turned on otherwise communication errors will not be logged to the activity log file or activity bar even if they have been configured to do so in the Activity Log Setup editor By default communication status is turned off until you run the project To turn communication status on use the ComStatusOn command Tag monitor Use the tag monitor to check the communication status for a device tag The states are Disabled if the node has been disabled in the Node editor or disabled using the NodeDisable command Error if RSView32 has tried to acquire a value but could not because of some kind of communication error such as a node not being available or a DDE server not running Stale if the tag value has been acquired before but does not have an updated value Uninitialized if the value has never been acquired Valid if RSView32 has a valid value for the tag None if there is a problem with the tag definition such as it is not a valid tag type or if the tag database has been accessed with a third party tool such as Microsoft Access If the underlying tag type is valid e
431. ng users from going out of the RSView32 project 10 18 Logging in at runtime sis ick S Wee ack Saw Bee OSS RRS 10 19 Changing passwords at runtime eee eee eee 10 20 Chapter 11 Creating Graphic Displays About graphic displays and graphic objects 11 1 The Graphic Display a SL seers neta eran CRS erate an 11 2 The editor s main components 0000 11 2 Mastering basic techniques 22 2 gohe maaan See cen weit 11 3 Using the context menu ia Mpc nap dates Boren mee ners 11 3 Switching between normal and test modes 11 4 Using the toolbars oy Sikes itun naceey wal nore eee 11 4 Selecting a drawing tool iics0t hes ne bie cin PEE ES 11 5 Selecting COLORS wun nia pl ey aGhineas wh etewadn as 11 6 Selecting and deselecting objects 04 11 7 Usine the grid sa tachesint acai stean ena woe eatery 11 8 Using the Rotate tool ysknca ge taint nunnan 11 9 Zooming in and out xa ies Weal aro EN ale peed a are 11 10 Correcting mistakes sna ccca hohe cdaS SUG Sees 11 10 Setting up the display 2h elitusie teneie ae ian tana 11 11 Saving the display settings cs iacw Salcedo au eee 11 11 Creating a default ta s c cuetea ee oda ane ieee acti 11 12 Using the Display Settings dialog box 11 12 Specifying the display type 6 6 sees sees 11 13 Allowing multiple running copies 11 14 Specifying caching yank Cute eee Nid ach tate ins 11 15 Specifying the tit
432. nimation for the selected object Close Prompts to apply changes and closes the dialog box 12 5 m Animating graphic objects Using Object Smart Path to visually set animation Because the Animation dialog box stays open you can go back and forth between the dialog box and the graphic display This makes it easy to set the range of motion for an object because you do not have to know how many pixels you want an object to move Instead use the RSView32 Object Smart Path OSP feature For details see Defining a range of motion on page 12 9 Testing animation e Test mode Normal mode Quickly test the animation you have set up in a graphic display by switching to test mode When you are finished testing switch back to normal mode to continue editing To switch between test and normal modes use the buttons on the toolbar or the items on the View menu If your graphic displays contain objects associated with device tags your system must be set up to communicate with programmable controllers or servers in order for you to test animation Wem Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Using tag names and tag placeholders 12 6 When configuring animation for objects you are linking objects to tags so you have to specify a tag name or tag placeholder Following is a brief
433. ns CF_Text or XLTable Third party application such as Microsoft Excel RSView32 DDE module AdvanceDDE A Modicon GE Siemens or other programmable controller CF_Text or AdvanceDDE Third party DDE server A Network or communication link Other non Allen Bradley device The third party server can use AdvanceDDE format if the server uses the Rockwell Software server toolkit Setting up OPC and DDE communications Summary of steps The instructions below summarize the steps for setting up RSView32 as an OPC or DDE client 1 Start the OPC or DDE server 2 Start RSView32 and create or open a project the client 3 In the Node editor create nodes for each OPC or DDE server and or topic you wish to communicate with In the node s Data Source field select OPC Server or DDE Server For details see Creating an OPC node below or Creating a DDE node on page 3 11 4 In the Tag Database editor create tags and select Device as the data source and assign the nodes that you have created For details see Chapter 4 Creating tags Creating an OPC node E System Channel IN Scan Class Tag Database An OPC node allows you to assign a logical name server name and update rate for each OPC server you want to communicate with The OPC node name can then be used throughout RSView32 To create an OPC node 1 In the Project Manager open the
434. ns ARCTAN expression The arc tangent of the expression in radians SIND expression The sine of the expression in degrees COSD expression The cosine of the expression in degrees TAND expression The tangent of the expression in degrees ARCSIND expression The arc sine of the expression in degrees ARCCOSD expression The arc cosine of the expression in degrees ARCTAND expression The arc tangent of the expression in degrees Evaluation order of operators Expressions with more than one operator are evaluated as follows Operators in parentheses are evaluated first Therefore to change the order of precedence use parentheses The operator with the highest precedence is evaluated next When two operators have equal precedence they are evaluated from left to right 14 20 Creating expressions Operators are evaluated in the following order Evaluation order Symbols 1 highest 2 NOT MOD AND amp amp amp gt gt lt lt 4 OR II N 5 lowest EQ NE lt gt LT lt GT gt LE lt GE gt Example Evaluation order For these examples tag 5 tag2 7 and tag3 10 tag1 gt tag2 AND tag1 lt tag3 is evaluated in this sequence 1 tag gt tag2 0 2 tag 1 lt tag3 1 3 OAND1 0 The expression evaluates to 0 false 14 21 Creating expressions 14 22 tag1 gt tag2 AND tag3 is evaluated in this sequence
435. nt to log You can also use the EchoOff and EchoOn commands to control activity logging For more information see Appendix A RSView32 commands Editing activity log setup You can edit the activity log setup during development or runtime If you change the activity log setup at runtime the changes will not take effect until you stop activity logging and then restart it To edit the activity log setup 1 Open the Activity Log Setup editor 2 Make the required changes 3 Save the changes 8 13 Configuring activity logging Using the activity bar Activity bar Status bar Cea Lag Font v Activity Bar m 8 14 Use the activity bar to keep track of what is happening when a project is running To log activities to the activity bar the Activity Bar check boxes must be selected in the Categories tab of the Activity Log Setup editor Hiding showing and moving the activity bar When RSView32 first starts the activity bar is visible and is docked above the status bar in the RSView32 main window E Logie ea Coming To show and hide the activity bar click Activity Bar on the View menu for the Project Manager When Activity Bar has a check mark beside it the activity bar is visible You can also use the ActivityBarOn and ActivityBarOff commands to show and hide the activity bar Configuring activity logging To undock the activity bar place the pointer over the grey area
436. ntify tag Runs the Identify command or macro for the selected tag in the active graphic display Identify Runs the Identify command or macro for the most recent most severe unacknowledged alarm RSView32 commands Invoke Invoke lt parameter gt Use this command with ActiveX objects Use the command to call an object s method assign the value returned by a method to a tag set an object s property to a tag value or a constant set a tag to the value of an object s property The easiest way to specify the lt parameter gt string for the Invoke command is to use the Command Wizard The syntax for this command has four variations file object method parameter1 parameter2 calls an object s method file The name of the graphic display that contains the ActiveX object me An alternative to using file At runtime it resolves to the graphic file that has focus object The name of the ActiveX object as specified in the Object Name dialog box in the Graphic Display editor method The name of a function or sub routine in the ActiveX object The method is initiated by an external event such as the Invoke command parameter The tag name or constant that the method will use You must specify all of the parameters even those that are optional tag _name file object method parameter1 parameter 2 assigns the value returned by a method to the specified tag tag_name The name of the tag to
437. nts during development and runtime You can set up RSView32 to share project components during development and runtime by storing common components on a file server or shared drive Components can run from multiple stations concurrently but only one component file can be edited by a station at a time Any change in a component file is reflected in runtime stations the next time the project runs Sharing components during development If you set up RSView32 to share project components during development a group of engineers can develop a project simultaneously For example one engineer can work on a graphic display another on derived tags and so on 17 1 Using networks Sharing components at runtime Sharing components at runtime allows you to centrally maintain a ring comp y ntrally project For example you could store the following components on a central file server security graphic displays activity alarm and data logs Am You cannot share a tag database When setting up a project to share components ensure you have read and write access to the shared drive The following illustration shows two workstations with RSView32 installed Both workstations have local tag databases but are configured to point to the file server for project components such as graphic displays and macros Network compatible with Windows File Server Workstation 1 Workstation 2 17 2 Using networks
438. nts of a selected input field to the value table Enter downloads the contents of a selected input field to the value table unless the display was invoked using the E parameter which disables the Enter key If the display has been set up to use the on screen keyboard pressing Enter brings up the on screen keyboard PgUp uploads all values from the value table and displays them in the input fields Ctrl PgUp uploads a value from the value table for the selected input field Tab moves between input fields RSView32 commands Operators can use these commands to retrieve data from and send data to the value table Download downloads the contents of the selected input field to the value table DownloadAll downloads the contents of all input fields to the value table Upload uploads a value from the value table and displays it in the selected input field UploadAll uploads all the values from the value table and displays them in the input fields For detailed information about commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help 11 47 Creating graphic displays Using the on screen keyboard tates oae alse a JAAA AAA AAAA EEN PN ees Pe Os Yd Nes ee e Tee Displays can be set up so that an operator can use an on screen keyboard for input entry in numeric string and recipe input fields The characters the operator types using the on screen keyboard appear in the sele
439. o a large font is more easily displayed drag the divider down 6 57 Configuring alarms Body Font Header Font Buttons Button Bar Position Blink colors appear to the right of the solid colors when you select Blink Choosing colors and blink styles You can configure the color of Severity 1 through 8 messages Out of Alarm and Fault State messages Header body and button areas You can configure the blink style of Severity 1 through 8 messages Out of Alarm and Fault State messages To configure colors and blink styles click Colors on the Format menu BT Mime E a Tie a m Lre e raid Fok Doimi aii iniia Hapiy Rep yarn Babel E Birk i ees Teal Vika at AA Di madd TEk Faghiqgel Tet Sot ot er obit itgi Dec gaand T aki r Dik iri Tm Anoak Diipa S bj r Bi O aiaa 1 a la ald te a ek Genk Gare n Ji 1 Lo __ te Click an item and then select the colors you want To select a color place the cursor over the color box click to open the color palette and then click a color in the palette To configure the blink style for an item s state click Blink and select the blink colors If you use the blink option for any item s state specify a blink rate in the Blink Rate field The blink rate applies to all items that use the blink option in this alarm summary Configuring alarms Font O O O Body Font Header Font Colors
440. o a tag in the Tag editor For more information about creating the node see Creating an OPC node on page 3 5 Once you set up the node assign it to tags that will read from or write to the server Create tags select Device as the data source and assign the node that you have created For details see Chapter 4 Creating tags 11 7 Using networks Example Sharing tag values between two RSView32 stations An RSView32 computer on the plant floor contains a tag called RejectCount You are the supervisor and want to include this tag s value in a graphic display on your computer For this example assume that the client computer is your computer and the computer is named Supervisor the server computer is the plant floor computer and the computer is named Plant the project on the Plant computer is called Bottling and it contains a tag called RejectCount RSView32 OPC client Computer name Supervisor OPC Tag Values RSView32 OPC server on plant floor Computer name Plant Project name Bottling DH PLC Values E Area MEZA 17 8 Using networks How the Supervisor Gets Values In the Node editor you create an OPC node called Plant_Computer that has the following information Server RSI RSView32OPCTagServer Type Remote Server Plant Computer Name or Address Access Path Bottling optional Update Rate 5 000 seconds You create a
441. o add or update and click it Click and Shift click to select a group of components or Ctrl click to select multiple individual components 4 Click Open The components appear in the right pane of the Project Manager Renaming removing and deleting components D 1 6 Use the items on the context menu to rename remove and delete components The Remove item removes a component from the Project Manager The Delete item deletes a component and its associated file from disk h BAKERY1 RS Y Project Edit Mode System L Cooling_shelves E Graphics D Main_menu A Display h Oveng Edit re Library OD Rising Remove Parameters i T Recipe Delete Alarms Data Log Lagic and Control Renaming a component changes the physical file name If you change the name of a file that is referenced by another project the component file reference will be greyed out in the other project To update the file reference select the component in the Project Manager click Rename and then type the new file name Working with projects To rename a component 1 Select the component in the right pane of the Project Manager 2 Right click and then click Rename MOEG E Fow BAGAH 3 In the To field type the new name 4 Click OK If you no longer want to use a particular file in a project you can remove the component file reference from the project using the Remove item on the context menu Removing a component
442. o add the files to the project use Copy Existing Component into Project or Create Shortcut to Existing Component on the context menu If you apply a new default path to files that are in their original location the files will be inaccessible grayed out in the Project Manager To use the Project Paths dialog box 1 With the Project Manager active click Project on the menu bar and then click Project Paths fo SEE Window Hip Project Pathe The Project Paths dialog box opens Application Paths Database Paths m Editors Name Graphics Displays z Default Path C NORM S BAKERY GFX Browse Components Appi Wetault ath C Bakery2 Gfs Bakery main menu gf C Bakery2 Gfx Cooling shelves gfx C Bakery2 Gfs Mixers gfx C Bakery2 Gfx 0 vens atx C Bakery2 Gfx Rising area gfx New Path For Component ETOWE 18 9 Running your project 18 10 2 Change the application or database paths as described below 3 Click OK Changing application paths The Application Paths tab lists RSView32 editors and shows the current default path for all components associated with the editors When you change the default path for an editor any new components you create for it will automatically be stored in the new path To move existing components to the new path move the files using a tool such as Windows Explorer and then reference the new path To change the default pat
443. o aww u ei 6 57 Choosing colors and blink styles 0 6 58 Formatting buttons 3650 44 ena es ies Pe 6 59 Choosing dataene ionaGkiteas a as 6 62 Filtering d ta ees 14 6330 croia eiat iein ne 6 62 Sorting d ta ia nss he aaea E cates E SERERE REAS 6 65 Using alarm data with commands 6 66 Suppressing alarm printing a as cts est eaaa EAE eta 6 68 Suppressing alarm monitoring PERT Daaa ESE tone 6 68 Suppressing alarm monitoring for tags 6 69 Viewing suppressed tags ese eee eee eee eee 6 69 Using the Suppressed List e 5ses seen ye so yes eee ed 6 70 More RSView32 commands 00 eee aee 6 70 Starting and stopping alarm monitoring 6 71 Ways to start alarm monitoring 0 6 71 Ways to stop alarm monitoring 045 6 72 Contents Chapter 7 Configuring Data Logging Whatisa m del spree siarite ein ta rea or E aw ape How to use multiple data log models Summary of Steps Aincoetanachiceag hee EEEE About data log storage formats wi opesncbd yess ed eyes Th dbf file format cit stesa teagan ios a sna Narrow dbf file forndt 34301455 sae tianadawesews Wide dbf file format cs sunward echoing ae yeep 4 ees Choosing between narrow and wide dbf file formats How dbf log files are named 2 0000 eee Fong file names isseire eie a a Nn Short file names asthe eiun ete aerate E RE aeii Example of short file n
444. o input data Creating graphic displays An operator can also retrieve a series of values from a recipe file change them write the changed values back to the programmable controller and or save them to a recipe file For more information on recipe files see Creating a recipe field on page 11 59 If an upload fails because of a communication error question marks appear in the numeric input fields Colors for input fields are set in the Display Settings dialog box For details see Specifying colors for input fields on page 11 23 To create a Numeric Input field 1 Click the Numeric Input tool 2 Drag the mouse to draw the field 3 Release the mouse button r n B Centraj Dei Dea F Gontnugusty Updos Beidtengh fiy Fomet oes Ceomal Pines amp fr Darii FEhewsporane Justicaios Lescing Character 7 Leh r Caper C Bight i fisis C Jemes 11 43 Creating graphic displays 4 Fill in the fields as follows In this field Do this Tag Name Type a tag name or a placeholder for an analog or digital tag For details about placeholders see Using tag placeholders on page 11 37 Index Either leave the default as it is or type a number other than the default Index numbers determine the Tab sequence for interactive objects such as input objects and buttons and are also used in recipe files For details see Using index numbers on page 12 43 Default Data Type a value t
445. o values exceeding the limits Configured in the Analog Alarm or Digital Alarm editors of the Tag Database editor Alarm severity A range of eight severity levels you configure by specifying what each level means and what actions each severity will trigger Configured in the Alarm Setup editor Alarm summary A display of all alarms including current and past alarms The display indicates whether or not alarms have been acknowledged Configured in the Alarm Summary editor Alarm threshold A process value that sets operating limits thresholds for an analog tag If an analog tag value goes above or below its thresholds an alarm is triggered Configured in the Analog Alarm editor of the Tag Database editor Analog tag A tag that has a range of values and can represent complex states such as the position of rotary controls or a temperature Can be linked to an alarm Configured in the Tag Database editor Animated object A graphic object that is linked to a tag and has a type of animation attached to it so the object s appearance changes to reflect changes in the tag s value Client A program that requests data from a DDE or OPC server Communication channel A connection from an RSView32 station to the network to which the programmable controllers are attached Configured in the Channel editor ControlNet An Allen Bradley token passing baseband link for a local area network Data log An RSView32 component that records
446. object and use the command as the press action When an operator presses the button the command is issued a new file is created and data is logged to that file Configuring data logging Deleting ODBC database records and dhf log files If your data log model uses the ODBC database format you can purge old records from the database using standard relational database tools or SQL queries You can also configure RSView32 to delete purge records in the ODBC database after a specified time If your data log model uses the dBASE IV format you can delete dbf log file sets after a specified period or once a specified number of file sets has been created If you never want dbf files deleted leave the check boxes under Delete Oldest Files blank Data log file sets are deleted only when a new file set is created So if your project creates a new file set each day and deletes the oldest file set every third day your project will have file sets for the three previous days data as well as a file set for the current day To specify when to delete dbf files or ODBC database data 1 In the Data Log Setup editor click the File Management tab If you are using the ODBC storage format go to step 3 Seer iha Filer G Pesii ai Spegied Tess O aE Regs f Hou FO ha Carga af Medinah teak Chenega ot Haigh Sada D hiath Oeae int hijap ae Ba Lined Dap a the Ad peed Chakana O kiesi Fikes l Aha Pog Tis fir E E r Alte biega Fie m
447. objects or line objects even if those objects are grouped into a single object 12 117 Animating graphic objects 12 18 Hopper FlourLove xj Erein Fil Porceny Fl Cimcon deinen D dan p Mt BM ete O es 5 hy rip Fo rapes fm PO Eh Cewe core ime To configure fill animation 1 Select the object Click the Fill tab in the Animation dialog box Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the fill levels Specify At Minimum and At Maximum values for the fill percentage levels Click a fill direction Select the Inside Only check box if you want the object s outline to remain constant so only the inside fill level varies To specify minimum and maximum values select the Specify check box and type the values Click Apply Animating graphic objects Configuring horizontal position animation With horizontal position animation an object moves horizontally based on the result of an expression in relation to its minimum and maximum values The object s horizontal position is proportional to the value of the expression For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum pixel offset ral Touch aniar OLE arb dta ibilh Finhshon Wd aig hi Morizonial
448. of objects Simple objects geometric and freehand objects and text These objects are created in the RSView32 Graphic Display editor Advanced objects complex objects that typically require data configuration OLE objects objects such as spreadsheets charts or text produced by other Windows applications The types of OLE objects that are available depend on the software installed on your system ActiveX objects formerly called OLE custom controls or OCXs control objects such as gauges sliders and buttons and objects you create yourself using a tool like Visual Basic These objects allow an external action such as a mouse click to initiate an action within RSView32 The ActiveX objects that are available depend on the software installed on your system Most objects including OLE objects can have animation attached to them For more information see Chapter 12 Animating graphic objects Creating simple objects _ 11 28 Use the drawing tools in the Drawing Tools toolbox or on the Objects menu to draw simple objects Once you have selected a drawing tool there are two ways to draw objects dragging or clicking end points Some objects such as rectangles ellipses and arcs can be drawn only by dragging Others such as polylines and polygons can be drawn only by clicking end points Creating graphic displays fe Rounded Rectangle tool mj Rectangle tool Drawing a rounded rectangle Use the Rounded R
449. oft Excel Seagate Crystal Reports and Visual FoxPro Alarm summary The alarm summary is not preconfigured in RSView32 To include an alarm summary in your project either use the alarm summary object in the graphic library called Alarms or create an alarm summary in the Alarm Summary editor A project can contain multiple alarm summaries You can format an alarm summary in any way The Alarm Summary editor has tools for formatting headings fonts colors and buttons You can also filter and sort data so only particular alarm information is displayed Differences between RSView32 and Control View Commands Obsolete commands The following table lists commands not supported in RSView32 If you import ControlView macros event files global key files graphic displays or alarm definitions that use these commands you will have to revise them ABDiag Documentor ModemStatus Print AccountRpt EventRpt ModemString PrinterConfig ActivityRpt GrafixRpt MouseConfig Printlnit AlarmRpt HangUp NetConfig Push Archive ICCBootOff NetDiag RemCopy BeepOff ICCBootOn NetLogOff Report BeepOn ICCConfig NetLogOn ReportOff Capture ICClnfo NetStatus ReportOn Chain ICCSessionOff NodeRpt Restore ChainClr ICCSessionOn Novell Revision ClassRpt KTConfig NovRpt RevisionRpt Clock List OptConfig S85Config CmdLineOff ListConfig Optimize SecurityRpt CmdLineOn Load PanelOff StartUp
450. ogrammable controllers on any or all of 10 DH or DH networks The RSView32 system can also bridge from a DH channel to a DH network and back to a DH network using 1785 KA modules Tyee To communicate with programmable controllers connected through an Ethernet interface be sure to choose TCP IP Bridge as the network type in the Channel editor The format of the station address for nodes on remote DH or DH networks is host_name PI_port_ID station_address host_name is either a direct IP Internet Protocol address in the form WWW XXX YVy ZZzZ where www xxx yyy and zzz are numbers from 000 to 255 an alias for the address An alias is an alphanumeric string from one to eight characters The first character must be a letter and the name is case sensitive Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices PI_port_ID is the remote network connected to a channel as follows if connected on the RM type ORM n where 0 is the PI slot number of the RM and is the RM channel number 2 or 3 The RM slot number is always zero so you can omit the ORM and just use the channel number if you wish if connected ona KA type mK A n where m is the pushwheel number 1 to 4 on the KA and 7 is the KA channel number 2 or 3 station_address is one of the following Remote Network Station Address Valid Entries DH Ill local station address 0 376 octal DH II local station addre
451. oject to complete the operation 18 11 Running your project Specifying time date and number formats If the target computer is configured for a different locale than the development computer and the new locale uses different time date or number formats follow these steps Once the project is loaded on the computer on which it will run use the Windows Control Panel to specify time date and number formats These formats apply to the runtime components of the project only You can also change these formats after the project is running but you must close and restart the project for the changes to take effect 1 Click the Start button on the Windows task bar point to Settings and then click Control Panel The Control Panel window opens 2 Double click Regional Settings The Regional Settings Properties dialog box opens 3 On the Regional Settings tab select the language whose settings you wish to use If you use Windows NT click the Set as system default locale check box 4 Verify and or customize the settings on the Number Time and Date tabs 5 Click OK For more information see your Windows documentation 18 12 Running your project Running a project Click this button to run a project When you are developing a project you can test it by clicking the Run Mode tab in the Project Manager and then clicking the Run Project button If you configured the Startup editor the RSView32 pr
452. oject window will appear as configured and the selected components will start when you click Run Project Running a project automatically You can set up a project to run automatically when Windows starts 1 Click the Start button on the Windows task bar point to Settings and then click Taskbar The Taskbar Properties dialog box opens 2 Click the Start Menu Programs tab 3 Click Add The Create Shortcut dialog box opens 18 13 Running your project 4 In the Command Line field type the path to RSView32 or click Browse and locate RSView32 Add the project name and the r parameter to the command line For example for a project called Norm s Bakery you would type the following on the command line C Program Files Rockwell Software RSView RS View32 exe C Norm s Bakery Norm s Bakery rsv r If the path contains spaces you must enclose it in double quotes The r parameter must be outside the quotes 5 Click Next 6 In the Select Program Folder dialog box select the StartUp folder 7 Specify a name for the shortcut 8 Click Finish For more information see your Windows documentation Monitoring disk space 18 14 When you run an RSView32 project be sure that the computer s disk space does not fall below 10 MB To monitor disk space do one of the following use the System Agent utility available with the Windows 95 Plus Pack or Microsoft Plus 98 inthe RSView32 Even
453. om another computer as the data is collected Created with the Trend drawing tool in the Graphic Display editor Scan To periodically read the value found at a programmable controller address The scan rate determines how often the address is read Configured in the Scan Class editor Server A program such as RSView32 that provides data to a DDE or OPC client Simple object A geometric shape freehand shape or text object that is created using the drawing tools in the Graphic Display editor Spreadsheet A data entry area in some RSView32 editors A spreadsheet is a grid of columns and rows One row in the spreadsheet is called a record Station Also referred to as station address the address of a programmable controller String tag A tag that represents ASCII strings that is a series of characters or whole words Cannot be monitored for alarms Configured in the Tag Database editor Symbol A short simple name representing a longer command Defined in a macro or on the command line G 7 m Glossary System tag An analog digital or string tag with the system as its data source The value for a system tag comes from the value table System tags are created by RSView32 and stored in the System folder in the Tag Database editor Tag A logical name for a data location in a programmable controller Tag database The place where tags are stored Use the Tag Database editor to create tags and alarms Use the Tag Br
454. on address for nodes on the remote DH 485 network is Station Address Valid Entries ILss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal ss station address on remote DH 485 0 37 octal Note The 1785 KA5 link ID is not required for addressing ae Only Enhanced SLC 5 03 OS 301 nodes are supported D E 4 Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices Example The following figure shows an RSView32 system connected to a DH network with a KT family card The local DH network is bridged to a remote DH 485 network using the 1785 KA5 communication adapter The valid station entries for the various nodes in the figure are Station Address Valid Entries 7 octal 7 4 octal 4 10 decimal 17 12 11 decimal 17 13 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 03 OS 301 OS 301 DH 485 10 decimal 11 decimal 14 decimal Link 1 1785 KA5 DH 17 octal Link 2 RSView32 with KT family card PLC 5 60 PLC 5 40 7 octal 4 octal E 5 m Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices Multiple DH networks connected by a Pyramid Integrator The format of the station address for nodes on a remote DH network is Station Address Valid Entries I rrrrr ss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal rrrrr PI Link number 0 65535 decimal ss station address on remote DH 0 77 octal The Pyramid Integrator PI link number for each DH network
455. on the toolbar press Ctrl V Creating expressions To cut or copy expressions in a dialog box 1 Select the expression in the Expression field 2 Press Ctrl X or Ctrl C To paste expressions in a dialog box 1 Click in the Expression field where you want to paste the expression 2 Press Ctrl V Formatting expressions You can format expressions so they are easier to read However do not let tag names key words function names or function arguments span more than one line When formatting expressions you can use tabs line returns and multiple spaces When you re working in the Animation dialog box in the Graphic Display editor type Ctrl Tab to insert a tab in the expression Example Formatting an expression To format this if then else statement you can align the else with y 8 the appropriate if so the logic is easy to understand If tag1 gt tag2 Then 0 Else If tag1 gt tag3 Then 2 Else 4 Or you can condense it to the following If tag1 gt tag2 Then O Else If tag1 gt tag3 Then 2 Else 4 14 5 m Creating expressions Using the Equal command 14 6 You can type an expression as a command using the following syntax amp lt tag_name gt lt expression gt where amp lt tag_name gt lt expression gt Forces the command to be executed asynchronously which makes the command faster The name of an analog digital or
456. ons are RSView32 commands symbols or macros An action could for example initiate a snapshot of tag values using the DataLogSnapshot command display an error screen using the Display command change a tag value using the Set command execute a VBA program using the VBAExec command This chapter describes how to use the Events editor to create events It does not describe the expressions used to produce the event s actual function or the events associated with VBA programs If you do not know how to use expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions For information about events in VBA programs see the Help topics that relate to the RSView32 Object Model 9 1 m Configuring events How to use multiple event files You can create multiple event files At runtime up to 20 event files containing a maximum of 1 000 events each can run simultaneously Use multiple event files to group events that need to be evaluated at different rates group events that are active only when a particular graphic display is active Summary of steps The main steps for configuring events are set up the evaluation interval for the event file in the Event Setup dialog box create the events in the Events editor The Events editor To open the Events editor E gt Logic and Control 1 In the Project Manager open the Logic and Control folder i w Derived Tags Configuring events 2 Open the Events editor by doin
457. ons use the time or interval parameters These are the functions This function Returns TIMEC time true if the time specified is the current time BEFORE_TIME time true if the expression is evaluated before the specified time AFTER_TIMEC time true if the expression is evaluated after the specified time INTERVAL interval true if the specified time interval has elapsed the interval timer starts running when an event file starts running WULE The time and interval parameters must be enclosed in quotes The time functions are described on the following pages The time parameter can include the following options day of week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Sat month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Noy or Dec date 1 31 year 1997 2100 hour ofday 00 23 minute 00 59 seconds 00 59 It does not matter in what order options are listed You can include any or all of these options the more you include the more specific the time becomes Creating expressions Example Specific time parameters The following all represent the same date and time and are valid time parameters mon aug 18 1997 17 00 mon aug 18 1997 17 00 00 aug 18 mon 1997 17 yee The validity of the date is not checked In the above example if Aug 18 1997 is not a Monday this error is not detected
458. ontrol Panel 9 If at runtime you want a highlight box to appear around the object when it has input focus select the Highlight check box For details see Specifying the behavior of interactive objects on page 11 23 10 Click OK For details about the Index field see Using index numbers on page 12 43 For details about the Current Tag field see Using the Current Tag parameter on page 12 46 Using index numbers RSView32 assigns index numbers to the following objects numeric and string input objects button objects objects with object key animation As you create these objects they automatically receive an index number The number increases by one for each object you create For example if you create a numeric input object then a button object and then a string input object the objects will have the index numbers 1 2 and 3 How index numbers are used Index numbers are used to determine a tab sequence for interactive objects move among objects using the Position NextPosition and PrevPosition commands at runtime For details about these commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help specify which tag value goes into which numeric or string input field in a recipe file For details about recipe files see Creating a recipe file on page 11 60 12 43 Animating graphic objects Checking an object s index number To check an object s index number doubl
459. open the Windows Control Panel open the Network dialog box in Windows 9x click TCP IP click the Properties button and enter an IP address in Windows NT click the Protocols tab click TCP IP Protocol click the Properties button and specify an IP address Enabling an RSView32 OPC server for reading and writing 1 Enable RSView32 as an OPC server by doing one of the following select the OPC DDE Server check box in the Startup editor and run the project issue the RTDataServerOn command from the RSView32 command line or another RSView32 component 2 Enable RSView32 for writes by issuing the RTDataWriteEnable command from the RSView32 command line or another RSView32 component Using networks Configuring the RSView32 OPC client application To request data from an RSView32 OPC server you must set up a node that references the server You set up the node in the RSView32 project on the OPC client computer using this information Server RSI RSView32OPCTagServer Type Remote Server The name or address of the server computer See Computer Server Computer Name or Address on page 3 8 for Name or information about the format to use Address Access Path Project name You can leave this blank RSView32 automatically uses the open project on the server computer Update Rate A rate in seconds Address Name or address of the tag in the server You specify the address when you assign the OPC node t
460. open the command line in the Project Manager by double clicking the Command Line icon or right clicking the icon and then choosing Show create a global key with the CommandLine command as the press action Using the Command Wizard Use the Command Wizard to build command strings The Command Wizard lists all RSView32 commands and where applicable lists the command s parameters The Wizard also lists any macros that you have created To open the Command Wizard do one of the following double click in an action field or in the Macro editor double click anywhere in the editor click the button beside an action field or any field requiring an RSView32 command This button opens the Command Wizard inthe Command Line editor Security Codes editor Events editor and Macro editor click Commands on the Edit menu A 5 m RSView32 commands When you click a category here the commands for Building a command string 1 Open the Command Wizard Commend Wizad Step 1 of F Choose a command and cleck Mex torfill in Rs paramaiae Command Cale gore Cinane Moy Faca Lima that category are listed here To resize the list 9 All Corenasds and Waona er ieg the vale re ahir Te F Saam Abor Cose the ecties tem BI Graphics Accourt Opecs the User Accounts m oe ckhnowedge Acknostedges an slam ort p Daa Log Aok raced chy el Acknowted ges ell cudtsten ol i Opens the Acri Log Baty
461. or backup path to the primary path or ODBC database using the DataLogMergeToPrimary lt file gt command or DataLogMergeToPrimary command The DataLogMergeToPrimary lt file gt command moves data for the specified data log model whether or not the model is running The DataLogMergeToPrimary command moves data for all data log models that are currently running Use these commands anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be entered If a model is running when you issue these commands RSView32 also performs a switchback to the primary path or ODBC database for the specified model or all running models If a model uses the dbf format RSView32 moves all files on the secondary path including the current file set to the primary path begins a new file set on the primary path and continues logging to the new file set If a model uses the ODBC format RSView32 merges the data in the ODBC backup files into the ODBC database and continues logging to the ODBC database To restore the secondary or backup data give operators a way to issue the DataLogMergeToPrimary lt file gt command or the DataLogMergeToPrimary command at runtime For example you can create a button object and use the command as the press action 71 27 Configuring data logging Creating dbf log files 7 28 If your data log model uses the ODBC format data is added continually to the same database and this section does not apply If your data log model use
462. or information on installing a printer see your Windows documentation Configuring activity logging Creating log files D 8 4 MITIA Page printers such as laser printers are not supported 4 If you want to log activities in a format that is compatible with projects running in RSView32 version 6 0 or earlier click Use RSView32 6 0 Log File Format If you want your activity log files to be named using the DOS eight character file name and three character extension format click to deselect Use Long File Names If the path where the log files are stored supports long file names the date stamp part of the log file name includes a four digit year 6 Click OK You can set up your project to create new log files periodically at specified times when a particular event occurs never Up to 26 new files can be created in each 24 hour period If you attempt to create a 27th file RSView32 continues logging data to the 26th file For log files with both long and short file names the sequence starts again at midnight with the first new file for the new day Log files are saved in the directory you specified under the Setup tab For more information about activity log files see About activity log files on page 8 9 Bringing logged dBASE IV data into Microsoft Excel on page 16 5 and Activity log files on page 16 7 Configuring activity logging Monitoring disk space If your computer s
463. ore information Relative To Project Click this to store the secondary path or backup log files in the project directory RSView32 creates a directory called Dlglog and a subdirectory with the same name as the model name and stores the files there For dbf data log files if you used this default path as your primary path specify a different path for the secondary path Absolute Path Click this to specify a particular path If the path you type does not exist RSView32 will create it The first time data logging runs RSView32 creates a subdirectory with the same name as the model name and stores the files there If you choose to use a secondary or backup path click Advanced Specify the parameters to use when switching between the primary path or ODBC database and the secondary or backup path Maximum time to buffer data before attempting switchover minutes If you specify 0 RSView32 switches over immediately and no data is buffered The buffer can hold up to 64 Kb of data If the buffer fills before the specified time and the primary path is still unavailable RSView32 switches to the secondary path If the primary path becomes available before the maximum time RSView32 logs the data in the buffer to the primary path and continues to use the primary path Configuring data logging Note that the amount of time RSView32 buffers the data may vary slightly from the time you specify depending on the log rate for
464. ort a ControlView trend into RSView32 In RSView32 trends are configured as part of a graphic display Realtime and historical trends are supported x y trends are not You can configure trends to be transparent so one graph can be placed over another This lets you show a realtime trend over top of a historical ideal trend to see when a variable deviates from normal ControlView features integrated into RSView32 The Windows environment means that the following ControlView options and tools are not required as separate features in RSView32 Reporting option for historical data use any third party program that reads dbf such as Microsoft Excel to access data in log files For realtime data use RSView32 s OPC or DDE server capabilities Modem option use Windows and third party products to support a modem C Toolkit tasks use a tool such as scripting in RSView32 or Visual Basic to create custom Windows applications that access realtime data through the RSView32 Object Model or DDE and access historical data through ODBC dbf Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers This appendix contains addressing syntax for Allen Bradley PLCs addressing syntax for Allen Bradley SLCs addressing syntax for SoftLogix 5 controllers mnemonic tables The information here is applicable only for tags that have device as their data source For detailed information about creating tags see Chapte
465. ou can set up OLE objects to perform certain actions When the expression evaluates to true that is when the expression does not equal zero the specified OLE verb is activated The verbs available depend on the OLE object Typical verbs include open edit and run Ara min ion inital Botan ith Hoag oriole Pcedion ical Position f Piemonte Side Hoa Sida Hamin alkmHopper VA gs ter 1 a Tage Aled Hopperi Yro 1 then 1 akai Ej sn OLE Yai Secuny hAcht ortots g To configure OLE verb animation 1 Select the OLE object 2 Click the OLE Verb tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines when the OLE verb is activated A value other than 0 evaluates to true 4 In the OLE Verb field click the down arrow to display the OLE verbs available for the selected OLE object Click a verb in the list 12 31 Animating graphic objects 5 Click a security code To restrict access to this object assign the appropriate security code For example you might want to restrict access so only a senior operator can edit an embedded spreadsheet For more information about security see Chapter 10 Adding security 6 Click Apply Attaching other types of animation to OLE objects You can attach many types of animation to OLE objects just as you can with other object
466. our project will have files for the three previous days data as well as a file for the current day To specify when to delete files 1 In the Alarm Setup editor click the File Management tab i Alarm Setup x ERR Start New Files OK ic AtSpecitied Times OnEvent Never Cancel Hourly Daily Change at Midnight C Weekly Change at Midnight Saturday Monthly Change at Midnight on the last Day of the Month Delete Oldest Files I After Maximum Time l Cc IV After Maximum Files 3 IF you select both checkboxes files are deleted after the maximum time or after the maximum number of files is reached whichever happens first 2 Under Delete Oldest Files select one or both check boxes and type a number to specify when to delete the log files If you select both check boxes files are deleted after the maximum time or after the maximum number of files is reached whichever happens first If you do not want files deleted leave the check boxes under Delete Oldest Files blank Configuring alarms After Maximum Time Files are deleted after the maximum time has expired For example if two days is the specified time files are deleted at midnight of the third day so you always have data for the current day and the two previous days After Maximum Files The oldest log file is deleted after the specified maximum has been reached The files currently being logged to are not included in this number
467. ource that connects to an SQL Server database called Bakery The SQL Server is called Athena The new data source will be called Bakery_Stats The data source will be used on the current computer only but will be used by multiple users at the computer In this example you will set up the ODBC data log tables manually using Microsoft Query First create the ODBC data source Then set up the ODBC tables To create the ODBC data source 1 In the Setup page of the Data Log Setup editor choose the ODBC storage format and click beside the ODBC Data Source field 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box click the Machine Data Source tab and click New Selects hele ol daia source Fie Gets Sounce Machine independent User Dai Fose Apples to thes machine ony m Epeen Date Source Applet ithe machine on Sele chng Syriam Ceis Songs meser p imiy urare hch speciei tie mahire and uzabja by any uier who loge omo thin rachis Hei gt Cancel Configuring data logging 3 In the Create New Data Source dialog box select System Data Source then click Next Select adver for which you wart io setup adeta gource Moot Actes Dre mdb 200m Hems ki p bionyi Exon Drar Piel 150 3M Micmsot Comp SSO Se i 2550713 Micnasot Com Asirom Sol 40 400006 Motmeked 4 Select SQL Server from the list of ODBC drivers installed on the computer and click Next Click Finish Deserigion SSeS Cancel server
468. out the log file Primary Path E Program Files Rockwell Softw Browse C Logging To Printer Current Printer NRD_2 GUMBY on Nell Printer Specify when you want log files created and deleted Specify which activities to log IV Use RSView32 6 0 Log File Format IV Use Long File Names if supported Configuring activity logging RSView32 versions 6 2 and later contain extra fields in the dBASE IV file format for storing activity log data The newer dbf file format logs details about the computer on which the logging server is running Specifying where to store activity log files By default activity log files are stored in the ACTLOG subdirectory of your project To specify where to store log files 1 In the Activity Log Setup editor click the Setup tab i Activity Log Setup Ea Logging Paths OK Primary Path E SProgram Files Rockwell Softw Browse Bronce Cancel Logging To Printer Help Current Printer SRD_2 GUMBY on Nell Printer M Use RSView32 6 0 Log File Format MV Use Long File Names if supported If you want to change where the log files are stored type a new path When log files are created they will be stored in the directory specified here If you want activities logged to a printer click the Printer button to display a list of available printers Only printers already set up on your system are available for printing F
469. overflow When an alarm event name starts with a number or contains a dash enclose the name in braces when you use it in an expression for example N33 0 Also use braces when using wildcards to represent multiple alarm events in an expression for example alarm Using event types Use the AlarmEvent command to create into alarm and out of alarm events Multiple into alarm events can be processed for the same event name before an out of alarm event is received Use the InAndOutOfAlarm event type for change of state alarms An out of alarm event is ignored if no into alarm events preceded it How event based alarms are logged Event based alarms appear in the alarm log file in the order in which the alarm transactions were logged If you specify a time stamp for alarm events alarm transactions could appear out of order in the alarm log For detailed information about the AlarmEvent command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Configuring alarms Summary of steps The main steps involved in setting up alarms are described below You do not have to complete the steps in this order 1 Set up the general features of all alarms in the Alarm Setup editor To do this configure the alarm log file The alarm log file is a record of alarm incidents You can specify where you want the alarm log file stored and when if ever you want log files created and deleted You can also specify whether to generate alarm
470. owing IntoAlarm Indicates that the tag has gone into or In alarm OutOfAlarm Indicates that the tag has gone out of or Out alarm InAndOut Indicates that an alarm has occurred OfAlarm but the tag is again immediately out of or alarm such as a digital change of state InAndOut alarm The type of tag which must be one of A Analog D Digital If you don t specify either A or D the alarm is assumed to be analog A floating point value associated with the alarm event If the floating point value is not specified the tag value is 0 0 If the name of an alarm event is the name of a tag in the tag database the value specified by this parameter will not update the tag s value in the value table The alarm severity The severity is an integer from 1 to 8 Alarm severity can be specified only for alarm events of type IntoAlarm or InAndOutOfAlarm If a value is not specified the alarm severity is 1 A 15 RSView32 commands AlarmLogOff AlarmLogOn A 16 HTime stamp LLog Message AlarmLogOff The time stamp associated with the alarm transaction in the format lt HH MM SS gt Date lt HH MM SS gt The 24 hour military format for time You must use this format for indicating the time Date A date that can be specified in the same format as the Windows date style configured for your computer If you want to use a VBA program to set the date you can use any date fo
471. owser to create tags Tag placeholder A string that is replaced by a tag name at runtime A placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol a communication network Threshold See Alarm threshold Trend A graphical depiction of tag values Created in the Graphic Display editor See also Historical trend Realtime trend and Remote trend Value table The place in memory where RSView32 stores tag values These values are then accessible to all parts of RSView32 WBA Visual Basic for Applications a programming language used to create VBA sub routines programs that run from within RSView32 and interact with RSView32 objects You can create programs to do conditional branching issue RSView32 commands or link RSView32 data to other applications such as Microsoft Access You can run a VBA program from anywhere you can run an RSView32 command Wildcard A character that can be used to represent one or many characters Used to search for groups of tags The wildcards are This wildcard Does this Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Matches any single character Index Symbols bmp files 11 99 11 100 clp files 11 99 dbf files activity log 8 1 8 9 8 16 alarm log 6 8 6 29 data log 7 1 7 2 retrieving data from 16 3 dxf files 11 99 gif files 11 99 jpg files 11 99 mgl
472. part of a folder type the name after the backslash 3 For Type select Digital mg linin beer ee A Tas Home Hoppar alairas Low Type Tipis Seanj Char _ Of Lahet iri Un Lab elt W aps Keat Deia Soue Type C Deam F Hane Help inal value A 4 16 Creating tags 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security To restrict access to this tag select a security code If access is restricted operators cannot change a tag value without the proper security code For detailed information about security see Chapter 10 Adding security Description Type a description of this tag up to 128 characters long Off Label and On Label Type text up to 20 characters long that describes the off state value 0 and on state value 1 of the tag The off and on labels must be different One or the other but not both can be blank Configuring a string tag 1 If the tag is part of a folder select the folder in the folder hierarchy The folder name appears in the Name field and is the first part of the tag name 2 Type a tag name If the tag is part of a folder type the name after the backslash 3 For Type select String ang Lavish Pe ril iarra giin rinti Typa E Vey Bacut Creating tags 4 Fill in the fields as outlined below Security To restrict access to this tag select a security code If access is restricted operators cannot
473. password that is valid on the data source ActivityOff Stops activity logging ActivityOn Starts activity logging Activity logging is on by default A 13 RSView32 commands ActivityPrintOff ActivityPrintOn ActivityViewer Alarm AlarmEvent A 14 ActivityPrintOff Turns off the printing of activity logging By default activity log printing is turned on when you start an RSView32 project ActivityPrintOn Turns on the printing of activity logging if it has been turned off by the ActivityPrintOff command By default activity log printing is turned on when you start an RSView32 project Activity Viewer Opens the Activity Log Viewer Alarm Opens the Alarm Setup editor AlarmEvent lt EventName gt lt EventType gt TagType V Tag Value SSeverity H Timestamp L LogMessage Creates an alarm event Alarm events are not processed unless the AlarmOn command is issued and alarm events stop being processed when the AlarmOff command is issued You cannot specify the threshold for an alarm lt EventName gt The name of the alarm event up to 40 characters long The event name must follow the syntax of a tag name and can but need not be a tag name in the tag database The alarm event name cannot be the name of an alarm tag RSView32 commands lt EventIype gt TagType V Tag Value SSeverity The type of alarm transaction which must be one of the foll
474. pe file using the on screen keyboard and press the Download button on the keyboard The Recipe dialog box opens Recipe File oatmoal _hut sr If you didn t type a name select a file to which values will be saved c Click Save You can also save the values from a recipe file using the RSView32 RecipeSave command For details see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help 11 65 Creating graphic displays Replacing text associated with objects You can replace any text string used to configure the graphic objects in your display by using tag substitution For example tag names RSView32 commands and expressions used to animate a graphic object are all text strings that you can replace using tag substitution Tag substitution does not work for text objects you create using the Text tool To replace text 1 Select an object or group of objects To select all the objects in the display click Select All on the Edit menu 2 On the Edit menu click Tag Substitution 3 Click the down arrows to display a list of the possible text items you can search for and replace or type text in the Search for and Replace with fields The string can be part or all of a tag name without wildcards a folder name without wildcards the text in an expression an RSView32 command Tag Substitution 4 Click Replace If the Confirm Replacements check box is not selected all occurrences of th
475. pecified display is of the Replace or Overlay types and if no other Replace or Overlay displays are open nothing happens when you issue this command RSView32 commands PushBack Quit PushBack lt file gt Moves the specified graphic display behind all other windows If the specified graphic display is of the On Top type PushBack positions the display behind any other open On Top displays and in front of any open displays of the Replace or Overlay type lt file gt The name of an open graphic display file without a file extension If the specified display is of the On Top type and if no other On Top displays are open nothing happens when you issue this command Quit R Quits RSView32 stopping all project components and returns to Windows R Restarts the computer Ramp V lt tag_name gt lt value gt Increases or decreases a tag value by a particular value or by another tag s value Use this command only with analog tags V Performs a read immediately after the write to verify that the value was altered in the programmable controller or server This parameter is useful if the network is in poor condition or susceptible to noise interference If the verification fails the error message is logged to the activity log activity bar or printer using the Tag Write category Specify where to send Tag Write errors using the Categories tab of the Activity Log Setup editor lt tag_name gt The
476. pee bs bac Delete log fil s enri sne Sie Osi haces wins bas bE ae About alarm log files gad s sewer ia ets tds ne Mir tele How log files are named s ia axatescx 85 oh eauaengaen Exporting alarm log files to ODBC format Configuring alarm severity 75564 jan kaie Skee Gees Configuring alarm messages 4 sdss5 s honeyed eyes eres Types of messages kaa poate halen eal xetigte weer Defining the content of the message Adding remarks to the alarm log file at runtime Specifying alarm conditions for analog and digital tags When can I configure an alarm for a tag 6 1 6 2 Contents Configuring alarms for analog tags 0 00000 6 40 Alarm thresholds 4 2 cpincvda ebat ene veeune epa3 6 41 Alarm TES SACS an a pipe eR ee ae RC 6 43 Advanced xs galen a icin bier atcha ne Ree EARS alec Ree ee 6 44 Configuring alarms for digital tags 00000 6 46 Alarm STATES ng OM ce gE a a ARO RS 6 46 Alarm messages dod san ph ud Pesan Chane te Pen eS 6 48 Adyanced abore y Ries SHG wR SRT RRS SRR te wo 6 49 Viewing the alarm log file since caeeenceese ena cig eares 6 51 Creating an alarm summary 4 62 ssdeak hinds ale Res es 6 52 Creating an alarm summary file ty ease eee 6 53 Creating an alarm summary object 6 54 The parts of an alarm summary 0000 6 55 Inserting headings sraide var etic eu a 6 56 Choosing fonts nisicucsawei
477. periodic models or the frequency with which tag values change for on event models How often to retry primary for automatic switchback minutes If you specify 0 RSView32 will not switch back automatically The operator must issue the DataLogSwitchBack or DataLogMergeToPrimary command to switch logging back to the primary path In all other cases RSView32 checks whether the primary path has become available after the specified time has elapsed Minimum free disk space required for auto switchback MB For data log models that use dBASE IV storage format specify an amount that is high enough to prevent RSView32 from frequently switching between paths due to low disk space on the primary path The needs of your project may vary considerably from the default value of 10 MB depending on the frequency and amount of data you expect to log This option is not available if you use the ODBC storage format Note that RSView32 does not use this amount to trigger a switch to the secondary path The amount is used only to determine whether to switch back automatically to the primary path after the time to retry has elapsed 7 25 Configuring data logging Using the DataLogSwitchBack command to switch logging paths 7 26 You can switch back to the primary path manually by using the DataLogSwitchBack lt file gt command or DataLogSwitchBack command The DataLogSwitchBack lt file gt command switches logging for the specified da
478. play called Canning with the parameter file called Beans type Display Canning PBeans Listing tag names to replace tag placeholders When you run a graphic display you can specify the tag names using the RSView32 Display command with the T parameter To replace tag placeholders Type the following command in a macro or anywhere else you can use an RSView32 command Display lt file gt T tag_name where lt file gt is the name of the graphic display file T tag_name is one or more tags to be substituted into the display The tag name can also be a folder name If multiple tag names are used separate them with commas Do not use spaces For tag placeholders in alarm summary objects in graphic displays only you can use wildcards when you specify tag names on the command line Creating graphic displays Example 1 Replacing tag placeholders by listing tag names To run the display called Canning with the tags Pea_Weight Pea_Level Pea_Temp Type Display Canning TPea_Weight Pea_Level Pea_Temp Example 2 Replacing tag placeholders by using a folder name In the following example the tag database contains these tags Corn Weight Bean Weight Corn Level Bean Level Corn Temp Bean Temp Anywhere a tag name is required the placeholder 1 is used for the folder name That is all objects that use these tags would be set up using the folder placeholder and the tag name 1 Weight 1 Level or 1 Te
479. plays a list of ow lf then else operators Be Bitwise operators Logical Logical operators Built in functions Fietetional Relational operators Tags in the tag database Arthimetic Arithmetic operators 14 3 Creating expressions Cutting copying and pasting expressions Cut Copy Paste 14 4 You can cut copy or paste an expression or parts of an expression The method for performing these actions depends on whether the expression is in a window or in a dialog box When you are working in a window you can use the commands on the Edit menu the toolbar or the keyboard When you are working in a dialog box you can use only the keyboard because you cannot access the menu bar or toolbar When you cut or copy an expression a copy of it is placed on the clipboard Once it is on the clipboard you can paste it into any other Expression field or Expression column You can also paste it into a command line To cut or copy expressions in a window 1 Select the expression in the form or in the spreadsheet 2 Do one of the following click Cut or Copy on the Edit menu click the Cut or Copy button on the toolbar press Ctrl X or Ctrl C To paste expressions in a window 1 Click where you want to paste the expression You can paste into the Expression field in the form or into the Expression column in the spreadsheet 2 Do one of the following a click Paste on the Edit menu click the Paste button
480. ported in this way are copied into the database they are not Database editor shared with the source database This means changes to tags in RSView32 do not affect the database from which they have been imported and vice versa You can import tags from any of these databases legacy PLC databases created using WINtelligent LOGIC 5 or A I 5 with file extension dsc RSLogix 5 500 saved as an external database with file extension ctd RSLogix 5 internal database with file extension rsp RSLogix 500 internal database with file extension rss RSLogix Frameworks database with file extension fma or fmb 4 23 Creating tags 4 24 PLC Database Browser Ea Data Source Node Name Soft Device Type SoftLogix 5 Scan Class a Cancel Help ddi PLC Symbols and Addresses PLC Database L RSLogix5_Project RSLogix5_Project Browse Click on Filter NI Search Search to initiate N7 0 INT_N7_0 WORD PLC N 0 0 INT_N _O BITO database N7 0 1 INT_N7_O BIT1 N 0 2 N7 1 N7 1 15 Addresses and Symbols C Symbols Put Tags into Folder Boiler For PLC and SLC addresses the PLC Database Browser shows only addresses that are used in the symbol or address list of the PLC programming software For RSLogix Frameworks symbols you can import Frameworks global symbols for use with DDE nodes To import tags from a PLC database 1 Specify the data source for the tag by typing
481. ppropriate check box Otherwise leave the check box blank Maximize button Title onde Minimize ie Title br gt EOIN sel ctaty ME System menu box Close button comes with System menu box 1 16 Creating graphic displays Size to Main Window at Runtime If you select this check box the graphic display will be the size of the RSView32 main window when the display starts running The graphic display is panned or scaled depending on which option is selected under Resize See page 11 19 for more information RSView32 has resolution independent graphics This means that no matter what resolution you use to create your graphic displays they will automatically resize to fit the monitor on which they are displayed Show Last Acquired Value Select this check box to have a graphic displayed with the last known value for each tag in the display until current values arrive from the programmable controller In many projects selecting this option will result in graphics displaying more quickly If you do not select this option objects with values that have not yet been updated will appear in outline form The outline indicates that data is not current or is in error Selecting Show Last Acquired Value might not affect a graphic display the first time the display starts because the tags used in the display might not be initialized and so might not have any values To indicate that there are no tag values the objects appear in o
482. precedence You can assign a single key to one or more of the three types of key definitions object display or global For example the F2 key can open a valve when the valve object has input focus or it can close a popup display that has focus or the F2 key can be a global key that opens a graphic display containing an overview of your process When a graphic display is active and an object has input focus object keys have precedence over display keys and global keys When a graphic display is active display keys have precedence over global keys This means that if you assigned the F2 key as a display key in some graphic displays in your project and you assigned F2 as a global key in the same project F2 will only work as a global key if the current display does not have F2 assigned as a display key as well Setting up navigation When you design your system pay particular attention to the keys used by embedded objects Object keys and display keys have precedence over keys used by embedded objects for example ActiveX or OLE objects except for OLE objects that are not part of RSView32 for example an Excel worksheet whose keys have precedence over object or display keys For details see the pages that follow Precedence and the F1 key When you are editing an RSView32 project the F1 key always launches context sensitive Help At runtime if a runtime editor has focus F1 launches context sensitive Help for that e
483. program Identify Runs a macro for the alarm if one was created and entered in the Alarm Identification field of the Advanced tab in the Analog Alarm or Digital Alarm editor Filter Opens the Filter dialog box so alarm information can be temporarily filtered out of the alarm summary Sort Opens the Sort dialog box so alarm information can be temporarily sorted In addition to providing Filter and Sort buttons that the operator can use at runtime you can permanently filter or sort alarms at design time The result of the design time filter or sort operation will be retained each time the summary is activated at runtime For more information see Choosing data on page 6 62 Configuring alarms Changing the button text To change the text that is displayed on any of the buttons in an alarm summary double click the button then type the new button text in the Text box Modify Button Text x Function Execute Configured Command Cancel Text Etxecute Set To Default Help ees Bee To change the keyboard accelerator key that is used to activate the button from the keyboard at runtime type an ampersand character amp in front of the character you want to use as the accelerator key For example to use Alt X to activate the Execute button type E amp xecute in the text box Positioning the button bar To specify the location of the button bar click Button Bar Position on the Format menu a
484. quires security 3 Select a security code 4 Click Accept 10 11 Adding security Configuring user accounts E System a Y Charnel E ope Node IN Scan Class e E Tag Database k iw Tag Monitor mo User Accounts 10 12 Once you have assigned security codes to RSView32 components assign these codes to users You can configure user accounts in the User Accounts editor or if you are using Windows NT you can use the Windows NT user list instead of configuring a custom RSView32 list To open the User Accounts editor 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the User Accounts editor by doing one of the following double click the User Accounts icon right click the User Accounts icon and then click Show i User Accounts x Account ID DEFAULT Se Coes Close VaMe MCH HD Login Macro j lel qae ao ae ui Logout Macro El VMI MJ wMK ML Next Password aoao ao do Help Efan SE CREE eleo RSE tonin togaa 1 forraAuT CUV YY YY YY YYYYYYYYYY A NYNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NYYYYYYYYYYYYY Y Y LOGIN LOGOUT NYYYNNNNNNNNNNN N LOGIN LOGOUT NYNNNNNNNNNNNNNN LOGIN LOGOUT NYNNNNNNNNNNNNNN LOGIN LOGOUT Adding security About the default user The default user account is active when no user is logged into the system When setting up security keep the following in mind You can change the security codes for the default user account but you cannot change th
485. r Displays information on the first 100 tags called Divider from all folders beginning with Hopper Monitor Bread Displays the tag monitor file called Bread NextPosition Moves focus to the object with the next highest index number This command operates on the active graphic display If no display is active this command is ignored Tab also moves focus to the object with the next highest index number See also Position and PrevPosition RSView32 commands NextWindow NodeSwitch Next Window Moves focus to another open graphic display Ctrl Tab and Ctrl F6 also move focus to another open graphic display See also PrevWindow Node Opens the Node editor NodeDisable lt node name gt Disables the specified node lt node name gt The name of the node you want to disable NodeEnable lt node name gt Enables the specified node lt node name gt The name of the node you want to enable NodeSwitch lt node name gt lt parameter gt Permanently changes a device node s address an OPC node s computer name server name and access path or a DDE node s application and topic lt node name gt The name of the node that you want to switch to another programmable controller address server or application A 43 RSView32 commands Parameter Password A 44 lt parameter gt One of the following station For device nodes the physical address for the programmable controller you
486. r and in the activity log file 7 Click OK The contents of the log file appear in the spreadsheet MaE 17 51 20 076 8 1 zt 0 _ SQ 00000000 Cee 1751 30 170 imama z i aoon Erea E 1 Lan T SO incase 17 52 Miisa w lmla BL VD re 1 UU etal WM oD OU BS 1 Sal Oe 1 TOL std LE A LE oO nTn naani EEO 0N aoon BAG r u en TT eat a K ri 40 E BOGE aE a 40 00000000 SUL S 00000000 BPS W524 20 g Zo K i Pe a JT Mee E This is a wide format data log file This format has multiple tag values per time stamp Sharing data with other Windows applications Understanding the content of the log files A Sa Boe Following is a description of the contents of the activity alarm and data log files Unless otherwise indicated the illustrations show log files that have been opened in Microsoft Excel Activity log files mE USTA 1H 4 ELSE D44 a EATE id DAT 1d 5 es 1 d FALL ES ified Pee 10a ae This column Contains Type The number of the activity type The numbers are O for error 1 for warning and 2 for information Id The number of the RSView32 component that sent the log message This number is for RSView32 internal use only Date The date the activity occurred The date format is specified by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel Time The time the activity occurred The time format is specified by the Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel Milit
487. r 4 Creating tags D 1 m Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers PLC addressing syntax The following section provides addressing syntax for these types of programmable controllers PLC 2 PLC 3 a PLC 5 which includes the PLC 5 10 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 15 and PLC 5 25 PLC 5 Enhanced which includes the PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 60 and PLC 5 80 PLC 2 aaaa bb aaaa Address 0 7777 octal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 17 octal Example of digital address 11 17 Example of analog and string address 1264 PLC 3 data table sections Fnnon wwww bb F File type A ASCII B Binary N Integer D Decimal BCD O Output I Input F Floating point S Status H High order integer nnn File number 0 999 decimal Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers Wwwww Word address For I O section 0 7777 octal For all others 0 9999 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 17 octal Bit offset not permitted in the F and H sections Example of digital address B5 173 15 Example of analog address N3 173 Example of string address A1 126 PLC 3 timers and counters FWWW nnnn bb F File type C Counter T Timer WWW Structured word CTL Control word PRE Preset value ACC Accumulated value nnnn Counter Timer number 0 9999 decimal bb Bit offset within word 15 octal done bit
488. r I O files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 64 17 PLC 5 timers counters and control files Fnnn eee MNE bb F File type C Counter T Timer R Control nnn File number 3 999 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control eee Element number 0 999 decimal MNE Member mnemonic see mnemonic tables starting on page D 23 D 5 m Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers bb optional Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example T57 38 ACC PLC 5 Enhanced 1 0 and status files F eee bb F eee bb optional File type I Input O Output S Status Element number For I O files PLC 5 11 0 037 octal PLC 5 20 0 037 octal PLC 5 30 0 077 octal PLC 5 40 0 177 octal PLC 5 60 0 277 octal PLC 5 80 0 277 octal For status files 0 127 decimal Bit offset within word For I O files 0 17 octal For status files 0 15 decimal Example O 167 11 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers PLC 5 Enhanced binary BCD integer ASCII float and string files Fnnn eee bb or Fnnn eeee bb F File type B Binary D Decimal BCD N Integer F Floating point A ASCII ST String nnn File numb
489. r click the Selection button to open the Command Wizard Selection button This command or macro runs in RSView32 when you highlight the alarm in the alarm summary and click Alarm Identify on the menu The command or macro also runs when you use the Identify command whether or not the tag is in alarm 6 49 Configuring alarms 6 50 Out of Alarm Label Type a message up to 21 characters long that will be displayed in the alarm summary when the tag is no longer in alarm This message can also appear in the alarm banner if the banner is configured to display it Alarm Acknowledge In the Acknowledge Bit field type the name of the tag that refers to the acknowledge bit s address When the operator acknowledges the alarm the acknowledge bit is set to 1 and RSView32 logs an alarm acknowledgment When another RSView32 station detects the acknowledge bit changing from 0 to 1 the RSView32 station acknowledges all tags associated with this acknowledge bit and RSView32 logs a remote acknowledgment to the alarm log file The bit is set only once per acknowledgment To have the acknowledge bit automatically reset set back to 0 when the tag goes back into alarm check the Auto Reset box Otherwise the programmable controller must reset the bit For more information see Acknowledge bit globally acknowledging alarms on page 6 16 Alarm Handshake In the Handshake Bit field type the name of the tag that refers to t
490. r extension format click to deselect Use Long File Names If the path where the log files are stored supports long file names the date stamp part of the log file name includes a four digit year 6 Click OK You can set up your project to create new log files periodically at specified times when a particular event occurs never In each 24 hour period up to 26 new files can be created If you attempt to create a 27th file RSView32 continues logging data to the 26th file At midnight the sequence starts again with the first new file for the new day Log files are saved in the directory you specified in the Setup tab For more information about log files also see About alarm log files on page 6 29 Viewing the alarm log file on page 6 51 Bringing logged dBASE IV data into Microsoft Excel on page 16 5 and Alarm log files on page 16 9 Monitoring disk space If your computer s hard disk is full alarm logging stops and no more log files are created To monitor disk space see page 18 14 Configuring alarms To specify when to start new files 1 In the Alarm Setup editor click the File Management tab i Alarm Setup x Start New Files C At Specified Times OnEvent C Never Hourly Daily Change at Midnight C Weekly Change at Midnight Saturday Monthly Change at Midnight on the last Day of the Month Delete Oldest Files I After Maximum Time Cc M After Maxi
491. r information about copying and duplicating objects see pages 11 79 and 11 81 To copy objects with animation 1 Select the objects 2 Do one of the following use the copy and paste commands on the Edit menu or toolbar or use Ctrl C to copy and Ctrl V to paste in the same display drag the object and then press Ctrl and drop the object between displays drag and drop objects Animating graphic objects To duplicate objects with animation 1 Select the objects 2 On the Edit menu click Duplicate Copying animation without copying objects If you have attached animation to an object you can copy the animation and paste it onto another object If the object has more than one type of animation all animation is copied and pasted Note that you can t use RSView32 animation on ActiveX controls To copy and paste animation 1 Select the object that has the animation you want to copy 2 On the Edit menu click Copy Animation 3 Select the object s that you want to copy the animation to 4 On the Edit menu click Paste Animation 12 61 About trends Configuring trends This chapter describes trends and outlines how to create and configure a trend object layer trends to compare realtime and historical tag values use objects from the Trends graphic library provide buttons and sliders for controlling a trend at runtime A trend is a visual representation of realtime or historical tag
492. r presses F2 the motor s speed will be increased and the graphic display will be printed Precedence and embedded OLE objects The order of precedence for embedded OLE objects differs depending on whether the OLE object is an RSView32 OLE object for example an embedded command line alarm summary or tag monitor object or whether the object is a non RSView32 OLE object for example an Excel worksheet Precedence and embedded RSView32 OLE objects When a graphic display is active and an embedded RSView32 OLE object has input focus a key that triggers an action in the embedded object will not trigger that action if the key has been defined as an object or display key as well When you press the key the action of the object or display key will be triggered instead If a key that triggers an action in an embedded RSView32 OLE object has been defined as a global key pressing that key will trigger both the action defined for the embedded object and the action defined for the global key Precedence and embedded non RSView32 OLE objects For non RSView32 embedded OLE objects for example an Excel worksheet a key that triggers an action in the embedded object will trigger only that action even if it has also been defined as an object or display key In this case the action defined for the object or display will not be triggered at all If a key that triggers an action in an embedded non RSView32 OLE object has been defined as a glob
493. rameters see Using parameters on page 15 10 For more information about command syntax see H ow to use commands on page A 2 For assistance while typing macro commands double click anywhere in the Macro editor to open the Command Wizard For more information about using the Command Wizard see page A 5 4 On the File menu click Save As 5 Type a file name Remember the file name is the macro name so ensure the name does not conflict with symbols or commands If names conflict only the symbol or command will run Setting up navigation At runtime operators can type the macro name anywhere they can type an RSView32 command For example if you include a command line in your project operators can run a macro by typing its name on the command line Example A macro called factory Display Overview Display Detail Valve23 Open When the macro called Factory runs the graphic display Overview appears then the graphic display Detail appears then the tag Valve23 is set to its open state Example A macro using placeholders in commands Display Screen Tag1 Display Tag3 Tag2 Valve23 Open Tag1 1 Tag2 2 and Tag3 Screen Note that these are all string tags When the macro runs RSView32 replaces the placeholders in the commands with the tags current string values The graphic display Screen1 appears then the graphic display Screen2 appears then the tag Valve23 is set to its ope
494. rd to create the type of chart you want When you finish the chart will be displayed in the worksheet 16 23 Sharing data with other Windows applications Sharing tag values locally RSView32 works as both an OPC or DDE server and an OPC or DDE client This means you can share tag values with a wide range of devices and other Windows applications The rest of this chapter explains how to use OPC and DDE to exchange values between different applications on the same computer that is locally For exchanging tag values between multiple RSView32 computers over a network OPC is the recommended method For details on exchanging values over a network see Using OPC for peer to peer network communications on page 17 5 Providing tag values to local OPC or DDE clients 16 24 When Windows applications request tag values from RSView32 the requesting applications are OPC or DDE clients and the RSView32 project providing the tag values is an OPC or DDE server Enabling RSView32 as a server To enable RSView32 as a server do one of the following select the OPC DDE Server check box on the Startup page of the Startup editor and run the project issue the RTDataServerOn command from the command line or another RSView32 component Setting up a local OPC client application To use OPC the OPC server must be registered on the computer The Node editor lists OPC servers that are registered on the computer click the Bro
495. removes the component from the Project Manager It does not affect the physical file To remove a component 1 Select the component in the right pane of the Project Manager 2 Right click and then click Remove Deleting a component and file If you no longer want to use a particular file in any project you can delete the component and its associated file using the Delete item on the context menu Deleting a component deletes both the file reference and the physical file from disk 1 1 m Working with projects Naming files Printing D 1 8 To delete a component and file 1 Select the component in the right pane of the Project Manager 2 Right click and then click Delete RSView32 supports long file names File names including the path can be up to 200 characters long For example the following path and file name contains 30 characters C Bakery1 Gfx Bakery Overview Some file servers do not support file names longer than eight characters If your server does not accept long file names and you type a name longer than eight characters you will receive a message To avoid problems when issuing commands do not use command names to name component files For example suppose you want to call an alarm summary file Summary 5 To avoid confusion with the Summary command call the file Summary5 File names can contain spaces When using file names with spaces in commands you do not need to enclose the file names in
496. res a ae EW a airs 13 1 Key CONCEDIS wie ite eat Spe iy es be sores Hae es 13 2 Trend Object teat T AE EEr N a 13 2 Trend dialog box adenoid theese tear ae eens 13 2 Data SOUL CE sr cary sissies Sova Rpt a se a pone IONE a 13 3 Pens ortodont e E E eh eta taeda 13 3 Shading eed rnan gets hare an Sitio eae poe 13 4 ESCH bass iain a tint Shuts Ohi Apacs hints caus te aes 13 4 Control tags 2s tay det aa eal a oe Aue at Stes 13 4 Summary OF StEpS et 55084 cteni ae aea a were REENE 13 5 Creating a trend object eirinusse rie net enw sane eats 13 5 Working in the Trend dialog box 02 ecsanae ieee es 13 6 Trend configuration ea ws beds arog Chor ain ae eh Pla ecois h 13 7 Configuring the time axis s 4 06 3n85 ote teaks othe 13 7 Configuring the vertical axis onc rence cud ccee cpu 13 12 Choosing a datasource hrvda siege deers Oradea 13 13 Configuring control i3i2csc0tseasesinaia rates 13 15 Creating a legend pessian cesas ao crane woe geia 13 17 Pen configuration 02 0026548 wnat ett s eee eps 13 18 Configuring the tag or value esc anew cecteetninpans 13 19 Configuring pen style 4 056i iota hints eeeniees 13 19 Configuring pen scale castor addepencscrigres aiid 13 21 Configuring shading 3 isis Pine heres ae eres 13 22 Creating alesend sioe at etam nae ules ace 13 25 Ensuring realtime trends have data 200s eeeee 13 26 Comparing realtime and historical data 006 13 27 Creating control for a trend 44s ny Saale bids ae yee ees 1
497. reshape the circle Creating graphic displays Text tool 3 Click a handle and drag the mouse to cut out part of the circle You can also use the Arc and Wedge tools to reshape any arc ellipse or wedge Creating text 1 Click the Text tool The pointer becomes an I beam 1 2 Type the text Once the Text tool is selected you can create more than one text object To do so move to an empty spot in the drawing area click and then type the text To edit text select the text object and double click The I beam appears To delete text characters use the Backspace and Delete keys You cannot rotate text 11 33 Creating graphic displays Choosing a font You can choose a font before or after you create text Fonts apply to all objects including display and input objects 1 Select the text object or objects you want to format or position the I beam where you want to begin typing text 2 On the Attributes menu click Font 3 Select the font style size and effects you want TITE You can select any font you have installed but TrueType fonts are recommended These fonts can be resized with graphic scaling The fonts listed here er depend on the fonts Th Coeriar New you have installed in Te Dionne Sundsile Condensed Furcetde ExtandedTan Freedsys COMcam Evaicts Savi keout l Underline Color E Jee Thesis a Tewe Type lin The deme don ted be weed dn be
498. rm subsystem to respond to your alarm detection algorithms for annunciation logging printing and for display in alarm summaries By using a tag name for an alarm event you can customize the alarm features of the tag For example you can use alarm events to specify an alarm s time stamp Because alarms are scanned in the background alarms that are generated rapidly may appear out of sequence in RSView32 because they may all be scanned at the same time and therefore given the same time stamp If the sequence in which alarms are generated is important you may want to record accurate time stamps for the alarms by buffering the alarms in the PLC and then using alarm events to record them with accurate time stamps in RSView32 You can also use alarm events to provide a tag with more than 8 thresholds To create an alarm event use the AlarmEvent command Configuring alarms How event based alarms work Alarm events let you create alarms even without setting up tags in the tag database Event based alarms work just like tag based alarms They appear in alarm summaries they can be used with alarm system tags and they can be logged to disk or printer You can filter event based alarms the same way you filter tag based alarms in alarm summaries You can acknowledge event based alarms either individually or with wildcards using the Acknowledge command You cannot suppress event based alarms You can time stamp event based a
499. rmat that conforms to the MFC class COleDateTime If you do not specify a date the current date is used If you specify a time stamp for an alarm the alarm may not appear as the most recent alarm in the system AlarmBanner tag even if it was logged after an alarm with a more recent time stamp The alarm message up to 132 characters long to be logged to disk and or printer The log message can contain any of the placeholders available to alarm messages If you do not specify a log message the user default message is used Stops alarm logging AlarmLogOn Starts alarm logging Alarm logging is on by default RS View32 commands AlarmLogRemark AlarmLogRemark Text P Sn R Ttagname Adds the specified text string as a transaction in the alarm log file lt S Tex t al P Sn A text string up to 132 characters long The text can contain the following placeholders A D the current date T the current time ANJ the tag name If the tag is in a local tag database you can also use the placeholders S tag description and U tag units Prompts the operator for a remark at runtime by displaying a dialog box containing a text box The operator can type a remark up to 132 characters long The remark can also include the placeholders shown above If both the Text parameter and the P parameter are specified the contents of the Text parameter will appear in the text field at runtime
500. rn scroll bars on and off using the Windows registry keys To change the registry key settings for scroll bars use the Registry Configuration tool in the RSView32 Resource Kit For details about the Resource Kit see the RSView32 Resource Kit Help Creating graphic displays Specifying display size Size Use Current Size C Specify Size in Pixels 76 Height 232 To set the display size do one of the following select Use Current Size When you save the graphic display the size of the window at that time becomes the default size select Specify Size in Pixels and type values in the Width and Height fields The window size and position you specify here can be overridden by the RSView32 Display command The Display command accepts size and position parameters which override the Display Settings options For more information about the Display command see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Specifying resize behavior Pesce F alos Oe play to ba Rasmad When Rasa dl C Ean E Daj Allow Display to be Resized If you want a window that can be resized with the mouse select this check box This option works with the pan and scale options If you do not select the check box the graphic display cannot be resized at runtime 11 19 Creating graphic displays _ 11 20 When Resized Select Pan or Scale Pan resizes the display so objects retain their original size when the display size changes For examp
501. rokdit Monitor Logout Logs the current user off the system MacroEdit file Without the parameter opens the Macro editor With the parameter opens the specified macro file file The name of a macro file without a file extension Monitor file Xnnn Ynnn Ttag_name In edit mode without the file parameter opens the Tag Monitor editor with the file parameter opens the specified tag monitor file In run mode with the file parameter opens the specified tag monitor file With the Ttag_name parameter opens a tag monitor containing the specified tags file The name of a tag monitor file without a file extension Xnnn Positions the tag monitor nnn pixels from the left edge of the screen The width depends on screen resolution Ynnn Positions the tag monitor nnn pixels from the top edge of the screen The height depends on screen resolution Ttag_name The name of a tag You can use wildcards and can name more than one tag Precede each tag name with a space and T You can monitor up to 100 tags in one file A 41 RSView32 commands NextPosition A 42 Examples The Monitor command Monitor THopper1 Flow Opens a tag monitor displaying the tag Hopper1 Flow Monitor THopperl Flow THopper Temp Opens a tag monitor displaying the tags Hopper1 Flow and Hopper Temp Monitor T Displays information on the first 100 tags in the tag database Monitor THopper Divide
502. rom the current driver to the one not being used on the specified channel lt channel gt The number of the channel 1 through 4 that is being switched from one driver to another RSView32 commands EchoO ff EventOff EchoOff Stops logging commands to the activity log file Other activities such as errors and tag values are still logged This command is normally used in macros to prevent the contents of the macro from being logged EchoOn Restores logging to normal after an EchoOff command Event file In edit mode without the parameter opens the Events editor with the parameter opens the specified event file file The name of an event file without a file extension EventOff lt file gt Stops running the specified event file lt file gt The name of an event file without a file extension EventOn lt file gt Starts running the specified event file lt file gt The name of an event file without a file extension To have an event file automatically start when a project starts open the Startup editor click the Event Detector check box and specify a file name A 35 RSView32 commands FlushCache Graphic HandshakeD ff A 36 FlushCache file Without the parameter unloads all graphic displays from the display cache With the parameter unloads the specified graphic display from the display cache file The name of a graphic display file without a file extension
503. rting alarm log files to ODBC format Using the command AlarmLogSendToODBC you can export logged alarms from their native dBASE IV dbf format to an ODBC database If the table in the database to which you are attempting to export data is not ODBC compliant the export will fail If an ODBC compliant table does not exist RSView32 will try to create it RSView32 supports the following ODBC compliant databases Microsoft Access Sybase SQL Server Oracle and Microsoft SQL Server When you export data to an ODBC table RSView32 keeps track of the data that was exported in a control file Alarm exp This is located in the log path where the dbf files are stored The next time you export data only the newest data will be exported If the control file is deleted all the alarm log data in the dbf file will be exported when you issue the export command If you have set up file management to delete the oldest files when a new set is started and you are exporting data to an ODBC database make sure you export the data before the oldest files are deleted Configuring alarms Example Exporting alarm log files to ODBC once a day To export the contents of the alarm log files to an ODBC database once every day create an event file that specifies when and where to export the data AlarmLogSendToODBC exports only the records added to the alarm log files since the last export 1 If required using the ODBC Administrator set up
504. s Built in functions 14 14 The types of built in functions are tag time file math Many functions check for specific true and false conditions They return 1 if the condition is true and 0 if the condition is false Tag functions The following built in functions examine the status of a tag tag or multiple tags tag This function Returns ALM_IN_ALARM tag 1 true if the tag or alarm event is in alarm or ALM_IN_ALARMI tag If examining multiple tags 1 true if one or more of the tags or alarm events are in alarm ALM_ACKitag 1 true if the tag or alarm event s alarm has been or acknowledged ALM_ACK tag If examining multiple tags or alarm events 1 true if one or more of the tags or alarm events alarms have been acknowledged ALM_ALLACKEDItag 1 true if the tag s alarm has been acknowledged or ALM_ALLACKEDItag If examining multiple tags 1 true if all of the tags alarms have been acknowledged ALM_SEVERITY tag The severity of the alarm a value between 1 and 8 or O if or the tag or alarm event is not in alarm ALM_SEVERITY tag If examining multiple tags or alarm events the highest severity of the tags or alarm events that are in alarm For example if the current alarms have severities of 1 3 and 6 this function returns the value 1 ALM_LEVELI tag The alarm level or threshold for an analog tag a value or between 1 and 8 or O
505. s And like other objects the type of animation you attach depends on the object For example you could attach visibility animation to a spreadsheet and then create a button that when selected would display or hide the spreadsheet This could be used to show or hide various shift reports or management summaries contained in embedded spreadsheets or database forms Configuring ActiveX control 12 32 With ActiveX control you can map RSView32 tags to an ActiveX object s properties and map RSView32 commands to an ActiveX object s events You can change an ActiveX object s properties without using a tag If you choose this method the object s properties do not change dynamically at runtime For more information about making static changes to an object s properties see page 11 73 For details about how to create an ActiveX object see Creating and editing ActiveX objects on page 11 71 The object s properties versus RSView32 animation Each ActiveX object has a set of properties To view the object s properties right click the object then click ActiveX Property Panel on the context menu The content of the property panel is determined by the application that created the object not by RSView32 Animating graphic objects E Enable Moto To link the ActiveX object to RSView32 you must attach ActiveX control to the object Tyee The runtime behavior of ActiveX objects depends on the vendor s implement
506. s 14 6 Using tag names and tag placeholders 14 8 Using tag placeholders instead of tag names 14 8 CCONSTANES eho ea a EE ene eee Chea oat tee we oe 14 9 Arithmetic operators koi e sn lannaGiess wa ateWasn as 14 9 String operands 4 shots terug wae st aiereeeaens 14 10 Relational operators tcp uoeaceged wapempiains wee ashe rd 14 10 How string operands are evaluated 14 10 Logical operators i is noaa eiA ta ac eN AAE EA Avena ance et 14 11 Bitwise operators seicres oreren eerie ttds ONS ow Rae 14 12 Built in un GUOUS 4 a face Gea a ae ROS Rk Reo 14 14 Tap fUNCONS 5s Sat Sones hae Sade Re aes 14 14 Tim f nctions alr ain pic Galan ss hepa pe vo ee ne 14 16 PUCTONCUONS 545s 3 48 daR5 geeks ONE Rae 14 19 Math functions cet a teres RR Kea ond eo as Be bes 14 20 Evaluation order of operators ssi aac weinds one BREW es 14 20 Ite Seat fits a a viene p wate ea Le poe iCe a e 14 23 Nested if then else structure 00 2 00a ee 14 24 Contents Chapter 15 Setting Up Navigation Developing a hierarchy of displays 0006 15 1 Methods for moving among displays 05 15 2 Commands for moving among displays 15 3 Reducing display call up time is ave sen dines 15 4 Where to use RSView32 commands 15 4 Example of navigation methods i 0 0cc0cteladewsdens 15 5 NG TOOIS ss mmng raner ee La CREATOR EATER Pa BRT PEGE EA OSES 15 7 Preced
507. s follows Alarm Type Select a type For a description of types see Alarms for digital tags on page 6 7 6 46 Configuring alarms Alarm Label Type a description of the alarm up to 21 characters long This description is displayed in the alarm summary and alarm banner Severity Select a severity level Severity 1 is most severe Severity 8 is least severe Severities are configured in the Alarm Setup editor For details see Configuring alarm severity on page 6 32 In Alarm Messages Select the message you want when a tag changes state and goes into alarm If you click Custom Message type the message in the File and or Printer fields You can use both words and placeholders For detailed information about messages see Configuring alarm messages on page 6 34 6 47 Configuring alarms Alarm messages 1 Click the Alarm Messages tab Vd Wi Acked Tag De it Mt Arbed Ta fim 2 Select the the file and printer messages for when a tag goes out of alarm and when an operator acknowledges an alarm If you click Custom Message type the message into the File and or Printer fields You can use both words and placeholders For detailed information about messages see Configuring alarm messages on page 6 34 D 6 48 Configuring alarms Advanced 1 Click the Advanced tab 2 Fill in the fields as follows Alarm Identification Type an RSView32 command or a macro o
508. s once an hour the system is needlessly burdened Conversely if you scan too slowly the system cannot monitor value changes that might occur between scans 2 16 Setting up direct driver communications To configure a scan class E System 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder Ey Channel amp e Node 2 Open the Scan Class editor by doing one of the following double click the Scan Class icon fei Tag Database right click the Scan Class icon and then click Show Select Scan Clase Haine Have Feguni Berd 10 pairi Back pound Paid E m penoreh 3 Select a scan class and fill in a foreground and background period The period specifies in seconds how often the programmable controller address is scanned when its value is required by a foreground or background component The foreground period applies to graphic displays and the tag monitor The background period applies to any component that performs a continual background activity such as derived tags events alarms and data log To specify a period type a number You can use fractional seconds For example if you type 6 the address is scanned every six tenths of a second 4 To save the configuration for a scan class without closing the editor select another scan class 5 When you finish configuring scan classes click OK 2 17 Setting up direct driver communications Monitoring communications 2 18 Use any of the followi
509. s the dBASE IV format RSView32 logs the data to sets of files You can set up your project to create new sets of dbf log files over these time intervals periodically at specified times when a particular event occurs never If you use short file names a maximum of 26 new file sets can be created for each data log model in a given 24 hour period If you attempt to create a 27th file RSView32 continues logging data to the 26th file At midnight the sequence starts over again with a new file set with the new date Log files are saved in the directory you specified in the Paths tab Monitoring disk space If the hard disk space for the primary path is full data logging switches to the secondary path if enabled until space becomes available on the primary path However if you do not set up a secondary path when the primary path runs out of disk space data logging stops and no more log files are created To prevent loss of data you can monitor disk space See page 18 14 Configuring data logging To specify when to start new dbf files 1 In the Data Log Setup editor click the File Management tab Undaied Daa Ley Sete ket Mana Fier a Paak C Atp Timea C pa Ee I Rees Ceca M Hy FE hak haag of Heihi h D sabh Thara ot Haigh Siada 1 Hehe Dhr a Hiiragi a ha Lined Dap o the hoedi Chokete O bebe Fiii M Ahu Pigeons Tine i E P E r Aha Hieman Fin Fua med ho chet fee se dadeded afer che
510. s when an analog tag value is moving back to normal operating range and recrosses the alarm trigger threshold If you don t want to generate these alarms ensure that the checkbox for the option is deselected in the Setup tab of the Alarm Setup editor configure alarm severities For each severity you can specify the destination of alarm messages You can also specify how to annunciate the alarm configure user messages When alarms occur messages are sent to the file and or the printer If you want to create a message that will become the default message instead of using the system default message you can do that here 2 For each tag you want to monitor specify the alarm conditions in the Tag Database editor You can define alarms for analog and digital tags but not string tags 3 Set up ways to display alarm information You can configure alarm summaries or create graphic objects 4 Choose methods for starting and stopping alarm monitoring 6 21 Configuring alarms The Alarm Setup editor E Alarms Alarm Setup a Alarm Log Viewer EA Alarm Summary Ar Suppressed List Specify where to store alarm log files Specify when to delete log files Configure alarm severity Create alarm messages that will replace the system default messages To open the Alarm Setup editor 1 In the Project Manager open the Alarms folder 2 Open the Alarm Setup editor by doing one of the following doubl
511. s you have configured Note that if you click Set as Default the settings for the current display are not saved You must also click OK to save the settings for the current display Using the Display Settings dialog box The Display Settings dialog box has two tabs Properties and Behavior Use the Properties tab to specify these display options display type multiple running copies caching title bar and other display attributes size resizing and position security background color Use the Behavior tab to specify these display options startup and shutdown commands input field colors behavior of interactive objects behavior of objects with input focus on screen keyboard These options are described in the sections that follow Creating graphic displays Specifying the display type Display Typa Beplocg C Overhay On Top Replace Replace is the default display type Use this option if you want the graphic display to replace other open graphic displays when it opens RSView32 will close any graphic display that the newly opened display overlaps This way you don t need to issue separate commands to close the other displays Overlay Use this option if the graphic display doesn t need to replace others or appear on top The display will layer with other displays overlapping some and being overlapped by others as the focus changes between multiple displays Overlay displays
512. sct Objects M Beep on Press F Highbghl hen Cursor Pees Oven ll Highlight Color Interactive objects are those that the operator can interact with at runtime either using a mouse keyboard or touch screen For example a button that has a press action is interactive You can create a tab sequence for interactive objects that use index numbers For details see Creating a tab sequence on page 12 45 11 23 Creating graphic displays _ 11 24 Beep on Press Check this box if you want the computer to beep when a button object or an object with touch animation is clicked Highlight When Cursor Passes Over It Check this box to turn on the highlight for interactive objects Click the colored box to open the color palette and then choose the highlight color At runtime when the mouse cursor is over an interactive object the object will be highlighted When choosing a highlight color be sure to choose a color that stands out from the display s background color Specifying the behavior of objects with input focus Behavior of Object with Input Focus I Disable Highlight When Object has Focus Highlight Color C When an object has input focus that is the object is ready to accept keyboard or mouse input the object will have a highlight box You can enable or disable this highlight box and select the color of the box When choosing a highlight color be sure to choose a color that stands out from the displ
513. se these commands Display PID PLevell Q1 Display PID PLevel2 Q2 PID is a display and Levell and Level2 are parameter files For details about parameter files see Using a parameter file to replace tag placeholders on page 11 38 If multiple copies or several separate displays are running and one is hidden behind another use the SetFocus command to bring the hidden display forward For details see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help However remember that graphic displays of the On Top type will always be at the front regardless of which display has focus Creating graphic displays Specifying caching Cache Afer Cisalaying Ho l Yes r Cache After Displaying Select Yes to load the graphic display into the display cache when it is displayed for the first time Placing the graphic in the cache makes subsequent displays of the graphic faster because it does not have to be read from disk You can have up to 40 graphic displays in the cache We suggest you use this option for large or complex displays only to minimize the use of system resources Select No if you don t want RSView32 to load the display into the display cache Myea Cached displays consume memory Once Windows consumes all physical memory it is forced to swap to disk which slows all system activities Always Updating Check this box to keep the cached display up to date For example choose this option to update trend data cont
514. set the degree of rotation Animating graphic objects type the desired degree of rotation this value is relative to the object s current position For clockwise rotation use a positive number For counterclockwise rotation use a negative number 6 To specify minimum and maximum values click the Specify check box and type the values 7 Click Apply Configuring touch animation With touch animation you can specify press repeat and release actions that are triggered when an operator touches an object with a mouse or a touch screen To highlight touch objects use the options in the Display Settings dialog box You can have a highlight box appear around a touch object when a cursor passes over the object You can also have the computer beep when a touch object is selected Tyee if you require a momentary push button create a button object with a momentary push button action rather than an object with touch animation Animation x Misty Rotation Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider Touch OLE Verb Press Action Display Hopper Repeat Rate Seconds Apply Delete Close Help 12 27 Animating graphic objects To configure touch animation 1 Select the object 2 Click the Touch tab in the Animation dialog box 3 In the Press Action field type an RSView32 command or a macro Separate multiple commands or macros with a semi colon or place them on separate lines Multiple co
515. slash character Matches any single character Viewing suppressed tags The Suppressed List shows which tags are suppressed that is which tags are not being monitored for alarms To open the Suppressed List 1 In the Project Manager open the Alarms folder 2 Open the Suppressed List editor by doing one of the following double click the Suppressed List icon right click the Suppressed List icon and then click Show Configuring alarms 6 70 Using the Suppressed List Use the Suppressed List to see which tags are not being monitored for alarms and to turn alarm monitoring back on List of Sua pressed Taya Click a tag name and then HOPPERN ALAR KEK UD IDE F click here to turn off HO TERU aL eS IE l r i HOPPER ALAR UEI suppression for that tag HOPPE OL es Y ALL FDP PGF ALAFIA Click here to turn off suppression for all tags More RSView32 commands You can also use RSView32 commands to turn off suppression and to open the Suppressed List For details see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Configuring alarms Starting and stopping alarm monitoring There are many ways to start and stop alarm monitoring Choose the way that works best for your project For a complete list of RSView32 commands and their command syntax see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Ways to start alarm monitoring In the Startup editor select the Alarming check box
516. slot of the I O module In RSView32 the first physical module of each type input or output is address slot number 0 The next module of the same type in the next higher numbered rack slot is address slot number 1 and so on Example SLC 5 I O module addressing SLC Type Rack Configuration CV for DOS Address or RSView32 Address APS Address Fixed L40 1 0 module slot O fixed 1 0 0 or 1 0 1 0 0 or 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 or 1 1 0 0 0 0 module slot 2 l 2 l 2 Fixed L30 1 0 module slot O fixed 1 0 0 or 1 0 1 0 0 or 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 or 1 1 0 0 0 0 module slot 1 1 1 l 2 O module slot 2 0 2 0 1 Fixed L20 I O module slot O fixed 1 0 0 or 1 0 1 0 0 or 1 0 0 0 0 0 module slot 1 1 1 1 1 module slot 2 l 2 l 2 Modular CPU slot O N A N A O module slot 1 0 1 0 0 module slot 2 l e 1 0 O module slot 3 0 3 0 1 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers SLC 5 status files F ww bb F File type S Status ww Word address SLC 500 0 15 decimal SLC 5 01 0 15 decimal SLC 5 02 0 32 decimal SLC 5 03 0 68 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Example 15 6 SLC 5 binary and integer files Fnnn www bb F File type B Binary N Integer nnn optional File number Binary 3 9 255 decimal Integer 7 9 255 decimal For direct driver communication binary and integer file types use the default file number if t
517. ss 0 77 octal DH bridged bya Il sss 1785 KA module local bridge address 0 77 octal SSS station address on remote DH 0 376 octal DH bridged by ILrrr ss two 1785 KA I local bridge address 0 77 octal modules rrr remote bridge address 0 376 octal ss station address on remote DH 0 77 octal or ILrss Il local bridge address 0 77 octal rss combined remote bridge address and O 376 octal remote station address The address Il rss is an offlink address that is shortened by combining the remote bridge and remote station addresses into one three digit number The system reads only the first digit of the remote bridge address and adds the two digit remote station address to produce a shorter address that still points to the same node Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices E 10 Example The figure on the following page shows an RSView32 system connected to a TCP IP network through an Ethernet interface with a PI The valid station entries for the nodes in the following figure are Station Address Valid Entries 110 orion 1KA 2 110 17 orion 1KA 3 17 4 orion ORM 2 4 14 orion ORM 3 14 220 orion ORM 3 7 220 21 orion ORM 3 7 310 21 The name orion is a host name that maps to an IP address Station addressing for nodes connecting to Allen Bradley devices
518. st field in a table called Tag Table Table Name TagTable Field Name TagName Type char Length 40 5 Click Add 6 Enter the following to set up the second field in the table Field Name TagIndex Type smallint In the Type field choose the type that most closely matches the SQL Data Type for the field you are adding as listed in the tables on pages 16 15 to 16 16 7 Enter the following to set up the third field in the table Field Name TagType Type smallint 7 19 Configuring data logging 7 20 8 Enter the following to set up the fourth field in the table Field Name TagDataType Type smallint 9 Click Create 10 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to add the FloatTable and StringTable See page 16 15 for information about the field types and lengths If you want to edit a table that already exists after you log in choose the table name and click View The order of the data log fields must match the order listed in the tables on pages 16 15 to 16 16 If you add the data log fields to an existing table the data log fields must be first However you can use different names for the data log fields To add an index for the FloatTable and StringTable 1 In the Select Table dialog box select FloatTable and click Index 2 In the Index Name field type FloatTableIndex 3 In the Index Fields field select DateAndTime or the name you assigned to the first field in the FloatTable 4 Click Add
519. stant character string the symbol pi RSView32 replaces the symbol with its numeric value Arithmetic operators Arithmetic operators calculate values based on two or more numeric values The arithmetic operators are Symbol Operator Example For these examples tag1 5 and tage 7 addition tagl tag2 returns a value of 12 subtraction tag tag2 returns a value of 2 multiplication tag1 tag2 returns a value of 35 division tag tage returns a value of 0 7142857 MOD modulus remainder tag2 MOD tag returns a value of 2 The modulus operator is the remainder of one number divided by another For example the remainder of 13 divided by 5 is 3 so 13 5 3 Important This operator is for integers only not floating point numbers exponent tag1 tag2 returns a value of 78125 Tyee Be sure that any tag value you use as a divisor cannot at some point have a value of zero Expressions that attempt to divide a number by zero produce an error at runtime 14 9 m Creating expressions String operands The operator can be used to join string operands For example the expression hello world returns helloworld Relational operators Relational operators compare two numeric or string values to provide a true or false result If the statement is true a value of 1 is returned If false 0 is returned The re
520. startup settings 18 2 In the Startup editor specify how the project will look and what components will run when the project starts To open the Startup Editor 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Startup editor by doing one of the following double click the Startup icon right click the Startup icon and then click Show I Activity Bar MV Minimize Button M Maximize Button Control Box I Project Manager Disable I Ctr Alt P Project Manager I Ctr Alt Del Alt T ab Windows 9x only I Switch to other Apps Windows 9x and Windows NT 4 0 Cancel Help Running your project If Title Bar is not selected or if Switch to other Apps is selected these fields are grayed out Preferences To specify how the project window will look at startup 1 Click the Preferences tab I Menu T Activity Bar I Project Manager Disable I CtrlAlt P Project Manager I Ctr Alt Del Alt T ab Windows 9x only I Switch to other Apps Windows 9x and Windows NT 4 0 Cancel Help 2 Under Show at Runtime select the check box for each item you want at runtime Each item is shown in the illustration on the following page 18 3 Running your project Close button Maximize button Title bar Minimize w Control box fin Wi TT T Menu bar B ae E Genes D Alene E Oat Lag SF Logic ancl Coral Project Manager Activity bar D 18 4 Running your proje
521. stem activity The information is stored in dBASE IV dbf format and can be viewed with the Activity Log Viewer archived for future processing or analysis used with third party software such as Microsoft Excel Seagate Crystal Reports and Microsoft Visual FoxPro for display or analysis exported to ODBC format while online Which activities can be logged You can log some or all of the following types of system activity command and macro usage operator comments system messages and errors errors from the communication network tag read and write activity You can also log custom messages generated by VBA programs 8 1 m Configuring activity logging Summary of steps By default RSView32 is set up to log activities You can change the default settings and specify where to store activity log files when to create and delete log files which activities to log The Activity Log Setup editor E System To open the Activity Log Setup editor H yy Channel dn Node H MI Scan Class H 2 Tag Database F tes Tag Monitor L User Accounts double click the Activity Log Setup icon F Security Codes mE Activity Log Setup 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Activity Log Setup editor by doing one of the following right click the Activity Log Setup icon and then click Show Activity Log Setup x a Set up the file path select a printer and specify details ab
522. storing new data in the buffer RSView32 continues checking both paths until one becomes available If the data log file is locked by another program for example if it is opened with Excel data is buffered for the time specified for Maximum Time To Buffer in the Advanced Configuration dialog and then a new set of files is created on the primary path If the secondary path is not configured the data is buffered for 10 minutes the default value for maximum time If the maximum time is set to 0 a new file is started immediately 7 21 Configuring data logging 7 22 If the model is logging to the secondary path and the file is locked the behavior is the same That is the data is buffered and then a new file created when the specified time period has elapsed You can also switch back to the primary path or ODBC database manually using the DataLogSwitchBack command see page 7 26 or the DataLogMergeToPrimary command see page 7 27 For models that use the dBASE IV format RSView32 creates a new file set each time the logging path changes Specifying logging paths You can specify the dbf primary and secondary file paths and the ODBC backup file path by editing the data log model in the RSView32 Works Project Manager as described next You can also change the logging paths at runtime using RSView32 Runtime as described in Changing logging paths using RSView32 Runtime on page 7 42 To specify dbf primary and seco
523. string tag that will store the result of the expression A value or string a tag name or a more complex expression Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces when you use them in an expression This distinguishes the characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression Also use braces when using wildcards or to represent multiple tags in an expression Enclose strings in quotes The string can contain any character and can include spaces Do not use braces for the tag name before the equal sign You cannot nest braces Creating expressions Examples The Equal command Tagl Tagl 1 Increases the value of tag by 1 Tagl Tag2 Sets the value of Tag1 to be the same as Tag2 Tag if Tag2 lt Tag1 then 4 else 3 Performs the if then else calculation and stores the result in Tag1 1Pump Industry 2 2Pump Adds the values of Industry 2 and 2Pump and stores the result in 1Pump Braces surround Industry 2 because of the dash in the name Braces surround 2Pump because the name starts with a number No braces are used for 1Pump because this name is on the left side of the equal sign Tank1 Message Tank1 Overflow Sets the tag Tank1 Message to Tank1 Overflow 14 7 Creating expressions Using tag names and tag placeholders 14 8 A tag name can be included as part of an expression or can stand alone as the entire expression
524. t ST String File number 3 4095 decimal For direct driver communication binary integer long integer and floating point file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 3 binary 7 integer and 8 floating point Element number 0 4095 decimal Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal Bit offset is not supported for long integer floating point and string file types Example L4094 4090 SoftLogix 5 binary files optional syntax Fnnnn bbbbb F nnnn optional bbbbb File type B Binary File number 3 4095 decimal For direct driver communication the default file number 3 is used if the file number is absent Bit offset from start of file 0 65535 decimal Example B4095 65308 D 21 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers SoftLogix 5 timer counter control SFC status message PID block transfer and token data files FFnnnn eeee MNE ss bb FF nnnn eece MNE SS bb optional File type T Timer C Counter R Control SC SFC status MG Message PD PID control BT Block transfer TD Token data File number 3 4095 decimal For direct driver communication timer counter and control file types use the default file number if the file number is absent The default numbers are 4 timer 5 counter and 6 control Element number 0 4095 decimal Member mnemonic see
525. t severity is 0 Configuring alarms If you configure the Execute button to run a VBA program and you copy the alarm summary from one project to another project you must ensure that the VBA program is available in the new project otherwise the Execute button will not run the VBA program When passing parameters to VBA programs you must select the checkbox Separate Parameters with commas Example Using the AlarmLogRemark command with the Execute button in an alarm summary You cannot change the order in which parameters are passed to the command line for the alarm summary Execute button To use the alarm summary Execute button with the AlarmLogRemark command and have the tag name added correctly to the AlarmLogRemark s T argument you must make sure that the tag name argument T appears last on the command line Ebadi Catena ied Teed ee ee oe Taasis Eia M Som Tce r ima F na l ie r is M Pigg Pe D Ee pci Patan rei cet he For details about using the AlarmLogRemark command see Adding remarks to the alarm log file at runtime on page 6 38 and see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help 6 67 Configuring alarms Suppressing alarm printing You can stop all alarms from printing while continuing to log alarms to the alarm log file This is useful for testing or performing repairs or maintenance on equipment To suppress alarm printing for all tags use the RSView32 AlarmPrintO
526. t Maximum check box To specify minimum and maximum values that will be written to the tag click the Specify check box and type the values Click Apply 12 29 Animating graphic objects Configuring vertical slider animation 12 30 With vertical slider animation you can create a graphic object that sets the value of a tag To do this define a path for the object and then use the mouse to move the object vertically The pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag An object can have both vertical and horizontal slider animation Hopper yasa Tage ri reer Yaral Osat Proale Athma TT p Aieri E q apecty ir a ll irot Dawi Care Halp To configure vertical slider animation 1 2 Select the object Click the Vertical Slider tab in the Animation dialog box Type the name of the tag whose value will be determined by the slider Set the starting point for the slider object by dragging the object or by typing a value Select the At Minimum check box Set the ending point for the slider object by dragging the object or by typing a value Select the At Maximum check box To specify the minimum and maximum values that will be written to the tag click the Specify check box and type the values Click Apply Animating graphic objects Configuring OLE verb animation With OLE Object Linking and Embedding verb animation y
527. t includes Getting Results with RSView32 A quick start guide to get you up and running with RSView32 RSView32 User s Guide Comprehensive information about RSView32 procedures for creating and running an automation application and reference information RSView32 Runtime User s Guide Information on how to install start and use RSView32 Runtime Help Online procedures and reference information P 1 m Preface ReadMe File Additional information about RSView32 Read this file before you begin working with the software Technical support services If you have questions about RSView32 please consult the user s guides or the Help If you can t find the answer contact Rockwell Software Technical Support at Telephone 440 646 7800 Fax 440 646 7801 World Wide Web Support Library www5 software rockwell com Support staff are available Monday to Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Eastern Standard Time except during holidays When you call When you call you should be at your computer and ready to give the following information the product serial number You ll find this number on the Activation disk label and in the help About dialog box that you access from the RSView32 Project Manager the product version number the type of hardware you are using the exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen a description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred
528. t one or more objects 2 Hold down the mouse button and drag the object 3 When the object is where you want it release the mouse button To drag objects in the same display 1 Select one or more objects 2 Drag the object and then press Ctrl When you press Ctrl a plus sign is added to the cursor 3 When the object is where you want it release the mouse button and Ctrl key A new copy of the object is created 11 79 Creating graphic displays Paste _ 11 80 Copying and pasting objects You can cut copy or paste objects using the menu items on the Edit menu or the buttons on the toolbar When an object is copied any animation attached to the object is also copied If a group is copied the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original Once you copy an object you can paste it anywhere in the drawing area of the same graphic display agraphic display in the same or a different project agraphic library in the same or a different project To cut or copy objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 Click Cut or Copy on the Edit menu or click the Cut or Copy button on the toolbar To remove the original object click Cut To retain the original object click Copy To paste objects 1 Click in the Graphic Display editor 2 Click Paste on the Edit menu or click the Paste button on the toolbar To delete objects Select one or more objects
529. ta log model The DataLogSwitchBack command switches logging for all data log models that are currently running Use these commands anywhere an RSView32 command or macro can be entered For example type the command as the action for an event These commands perform a switchback only if the model is running RSView32 is logging data to the secondary or backup path and the primary path or ODBC database is available For dbf files RSView32 creates a new set of files when it switches back to the primary path In order to prevent an impact on performance data is not moved from the secondary or backup path when you switch back to the primary path or ODBC database You must move it manually using the DataLogMergeToPrimary command RSView32 also switches back to the primary path or ODBC database when you use the DataLogMergeToPrimary command Note that you cannot switch manually from the primary path or ODBC database to the secondary or backup path You can give operators ways to issue these commands at runtime For example you can create a button object and use the DataLogSwitchBack lt file gt command as the press action Configuring data logging Using the DataLogMergeToPrimary command to move secondary files to the primary path When you begin writing to or reading from a data log model RSView32 sends a message to the activity log if there are files on the secondary or backup path You must move data manually from the secondary
530. ta source see page 7 16 Double click Events in the RSView32 Logic and Control folder In the Expression box type time 01 00 This expression runs the command or macro you type in the Action box at 1 00 am every day If the ODBC data source is called RSView32 ActivityLog the target table name is ActivityTable the user name is Derek and the password is golf in the Action box type ActivityLogSendToODBC RSView32ActivityLog Activity Table UDerek Pgolf Click Accept to save the event Click Close to save the event file At the command line type EventOn lt filename gt where lt filename gt is the name of the event file you saved For information about the contents of the activity log ODBC tables see page 16 8 8 11 Configuring activity logging Specifying which activities to log To specify which types of activity to log 1 In the Activity Log Setup editor click the Categories tab Abaty Log Saup Dagin Type Lahol fc ToT Lata Enie ta FF acriiyy Bisr F Logie Lata Wii emir Mi E Arii Elar E Lag Fia Lag bria erak can T Ariiiy Eler F Lewy File 2 In the Select Category area click a category This activity category Logs Commands The execution of a command Applications Applications such as security logins and data logging ActiveX events if the event has been set up to do so in the ActiveX Control Events dialog box Remarks R
531. tag that points to the Plant computer In the tag s Node field you assign the Plant_Computer node In the tag s Address field you enter RejectCount which is the tag you want values for The information in the Address field is the OPC tag address When the RejectCount tag is used anywhere in the Supervisor computer it gets its value from the RejectCount tag in the Bottling project on the Plant computer You can also write to the RejectCount tag in the Bottling project using the RSView32 Set or Equal commands if writes are enabled in the realtime data server on the Plant computer The write will go through to the programmable controller 11 9 m Using networks Connecting to RSLinx Gateway as a remote OPC server RSLinx Gateway provides remote access to OPC clients such as RSView32 over a TCP IP network RSLinx Gateway supports up to 5 remote clients To use OPC with RSLinx Gateway you must configure settings both in RSLinx and in RSView32 Configuring RSLinx Gateway To use RSLinx Gateway do the following in RSLinx configure RSLinx Gateway with drivers for each control network RSLinx is connected to create a DDE OPC topic for each PLC on each control network enable RSLinx Gateway For information about configuring RSLinx Gateway see the documentation supplied with RSLinx Configuring RSView32 for use with RSLinx Gateway To use RSLinx Gateway with RSView32 do the following in RSView32 use
532. tag values and stores them in log files or tables The logged data can then be used for historical trending Configured in the Data Log Setup editor Glossary DDE Dynamic Data Exchange a Microsoft interprocess communication standard When two or more programs that support DDE are running simultaneously they can exchange information and commands When DDE is used over a network it is called NetDDE Deadband A buffer to keep process fluctuations from triggering unnecessary alarms The deadband is linked to the alarm threshold for an increasing threshold the deadband range lies below the threshold for a decreasing threshold the deadband range lies above the threshold Configured in the Analog Alarm editor of the Tag Database Derived tag A tag whose value is calculated or derived from a mathematical expression Configured in the Derived Tags editor Device tag An analog digital or string tag with device as its data source The tag s value comes from a device external to RSView32 such as a programmable controller OPC server or DDE server DH Data Highway link an Allen Bradley floating master baseband link for a local area network DH 485 Data Highway 485 link an Allen Bradley token passing baseband link for a local area network based on the RS 485 standard DH Data Highway Plus link an Allen Bradley token passing baseband link for a local area network Digital tag A tag that can represent two states such
533. tags To specify tags 1 In the Data Log Setup editor click the Tags in Model tab Untitled Data Log Setup x File Management Log Triggers Tags in Model Enter tag names separated by a space if more than one in the T ag s to Add box then choose the Add button to add them OK to the list of tags in the model Cancel Tags toAdd Ej n Tags in Model Help Add Remove Remove All 0 Tag s in the Model 2 In the Tag s to Add field specify the tags that will be logged by typing the tag names separating multiple tag names by a space or a comma using the selection button to open the Tag Browser and then selecting tags To select multiple tags Shift click to select groups of tags or Ctrl click to select individual tags 3 Click the Add button The tags listed in the Tag s to Add field appear in the Tags in Model field 7 41 Configuring data logging To remove a tag from the Tags in Model field click a tag and then click Remove To remove multiple tags Shift click the tags and then click Remove To remove all tags click Remove All Tags that you remove appear in the Tag s to Add field Delete the tags you want to remove from the Tag s to Add field before you click OK Editing the data log model 1 42 You can edit a model during development or runtime If you change a model at runtime the changes will not take effect until you stop data logging and then restart it For
534. tarting and stopping data logging There are many ways to start and stop data logging Choose the way that works best for your project 7 46 For a complete list of RSView32 commands and their command syntax see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Ways to start data logging In the descriptions below lt file gt represents the name of the data log model In the Startup editor select the Data Logging check box and specify a data log model If you want to start more than one data log model for a project include the DataLogOn lt file gt command in a startup or login macro In the Macro editor create a startup or login macro that includes the DataLogOn lt file gt command In the Graphic Display editor specify the DataLogOn lt file gt command in the Startup field in the Display Settings dialog box In the Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the DataLogOn lt file gt command as the press action When the button is pressed data logging of the specified model starts In the Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the DataLogOn lt file gt command as the press action When the object is touched data logging of the specified model starts In the Events editor specify the DataLogOn lt file gt command as the action for an event On the command line type DataLogOn lt file gt and then press Enter Configuring data logging Ways to stop data log
535. ters in the expression Enclose strings in quotes The string can contain any character and can include spaces Do not use braces for the tag name before the equal sign You cannot nest braces You can attach security to the Equal command just as you can for any RSView32 command For more information about security see Chapter 10 Adding security For more information about expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions RSView32 commands Examples The Equal command amp Tagl Tagl 1 Evaluates the command asynchronously Increases the value of Tag1 by 1 Tagl Tag2 Sets the value of Tag1 to be the same as Tag2 Tagl Tag2 Tag3 Adds the values of Tag2 and Tag3 and stores the result in Tag1 1Pump Industry 2 2Pump Adds the values of Industry 2 and 2Pump and stores the result in 1Pump Braces surround Industry 2 because of the dash in the name Braces surround 2Pump because the name starts with a number No braces are used for 1Pump because this name is on the left side of the equal sign Tagl if Tagl lt Tag2 then 3 else 4 If Tag1 is less than Tag2 Tag1 is set to 3 but if Tag1 is equal to or greater than Tag2 Tag is set to 4 Tank1 Message Tankl Overflow Writes the string Tank1 Overflow to the Tank1 Message tag A 9 m RSView32 commands Abort A 10 Abort parameter Closes one or more windows Without a parameter the Abort command closes the win
536. text use the Line Color palette or click Font on the Attributes menu and then click a color in the Font dialog box 11 93 Creating graphic displays Applying fill patte 11 94 rns Fill patterns apply to the interior of objects Closed objects such as rectangles circles polygons text objects and wedges are completely filled Open or partially open objects such as polylines or freehand objects can also take a fill pattern The editor draws an imaginary line from the start and end points and then fills the object as a closed object Hollow polyline object Filled polyline object Selecting fill patterns Fill patterns are available on the Attributes menu or on the Fill Style toolbar To see the toolbar click Fill Style Toolbar on the View menu Fill Style Applying fill patterns You can apply fill patterns to objects before or after you draw them To apply a fill pattern before drawing 1 Select a drawing tool 2 Select a fill pattern from the Attributes menu Creating graphic displays To apply a fill pattern to an existing object 1 Select one or more objects 2 Select a fill pattern from the Attributes menu How colors and patterns work Color is applied to graphic objects with patterns as follows the pattern is the selected line color the background is the selected fill color Changing line properties You can change line width and style You can select a line object and ch
537. th your sean end sour printer Windows 4 Click OK You can also choose font color using the Line Color palette or using the Line Color item on the Attributes menu 11 34 Creating graphic displays Font substitution at runtime If you run a project on a computer that does not have the fonts you used when configuring the project Windows will substitute fonts Reshaping simple objects You can easily reshape any simple object To reshape lines rectangles polylines and polygons 1 Place the pointer on the object you want to reshape and double click or right click and then click Edit Object The cursor changes to the Polygon tool 2 Move the cursor over any line in the object A handle with a cross hair appears 3 Drag the handle until the object is the desired shape ay To maintain the aspect ratio of any object while resizing grab a corner handle press Shift and drag the mouse 11 35 Creating graphic displays To reshape arcs ellipses and wedges 1 Place the pointer on the object you want to reshape and double click or right click and then click Edit Object The cursor changes to the Arc or Wedge tool and handles appear on the object 2 Place the pointer on one of the handles A cross hair appears 3 Drag the handle until the object is the desired shape Creating advanced objects _ 11 36 To create advanced objects use the drawing tools in the Drawing Tools toolbox
538. that does not move For example click Top if you do not want the top of the object to move As the value of the expression changes the object will grow to or shrink from the bottom To specify minimum and maximum values click the Specify check box and type the values Click Apply Configuring rotation animation With rotation animation an object rotates around an anchor point based on the result of an expression in relation to its minimum and maximum values The degree of rotation is proportional to the value of the expression For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will rotate half the specified amount 12 24 Animating graphic objects Text advanced objects except arrows OLE objects ActiveX objects and bitmaps cannot be rotated Windows 9x does not support rotation animation for rounded rectangles Flo Fosi Action Degrees Comey i ve fo _ apply Qala ciso tor To configure rotation animation 1 Select the object 2 Click the Rotation tab in the Animation dialog box 3 Create an expression The expression can be a tag name or a more complex expression If a tag name is used the tag s value determines the object s rotation 4 Set the center of rotation using one of the methods described below The center of rotation is the point around which the object will rotate This point can be inside or outside of the object
539. that includes the ActivityOn command Inthe Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the ActivityOn command as the press action When the button is pressed activity logging starts Inthe Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the ActivityOn command as the action When the object is touched activity logging starts Inthe Events editor specify the ActivityOn command as the action for an event On the command line type ActivityOn and then press Enter Ways to stop activity logging Inthe Macro editor create a shutdown or logout macro that includes the ActivityOff command Inthe Graphic Display editor create a button object and specify the ActivityOff command as the press action When the button is pressed activity logging stops Inthe Graphic Display editor create a graphic object and attach touch animation with the ActivityOff command as the action When the object is touched activity logging stops Inthe Events editor specify the ActivityOff command as the action for an event On the command line type ActivityOff and then press Enter For a complete list of RSView32 commands and command syntax see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Configuring events Events are expressions that trigger actions Expressions are equations containing tag values mathematical operations if then else logic and other built in RSView32 functions Acti
540. the Choose File Oldest File and Newest File Data Sources Historical trends move between files automatically 13 31 Configuring trends 13 32 Masking pens By default all pens in a trend are visible However too many pens on one display can be difficult to read To enable operators to hide or show individual pens set up pen masking The Trends graphic library contains buttons that are already configured for pen masking To use these buttons drag and drop them into your graphic display To set up pen masking create an expression that sets the value of the bit for the PenMask control tag To show the pen the bit must be 1 To hide the pen the bit must be 0 You cannot use binary numbers to set a value you must use decimals The following table shows the decimal value for each pen Pen Number Binary Mask Value Decimal Value 1 0000 0000 0000 0001 1 2 0000 0000 0000 0010 2 3 0000 0000 0000 0100 4 4 0000 0000 0000 1000 8 5 0000 0000 0001 0000 16 6 0000 0000 0010 0000 32 7 0000 0000 0100 0000 64 8 0000 0000 1000 0000 128 9g 0000 0001 0000 0000 256 0 0000 0010 0000 0000 512 1 0000 0100 0000 0000 1024 2 0000 1000 0000 0000 2048 3 0001 0000 0000 0000 4096 4 0010 0000 0000 0000 8192 5 0100 0000 0000 0000 16384 6 1000 0000 0000 0000 32768 Configuring trends Example Showing or hiding a pen The following example describes
541. the node name and scan class if the node type is direct driver 2 In the PLC Database field type the name and path for the database you want to import tags from or click the Browse button to locate and select the database you want to import tags from The addresses and symbols from the selected database are displayed in the box below the Filter data entry field Creating tags To filter the tag list so that only certain addresses or symbols are displayed type a character string then click Search If you want to search on names only check the Symbols button so that only symbol names are displayed If an address does not have a symbol name it will not be displayed Use the filter if the address or symbol list is too big to display entirely Highlight the symbol or symbols you want to import In the Put Tags into Folder field type a folder name if you want the tags to be in a folder If the folder does not already exist in the RSView32 tag database it will be created Click OK The selected symbols are added to the tag database for the current project and displayed in the tag list If you have already imported a particular symbol you are prompted to change its name if you want to import it again Using the Database Import amp Export Wizard You can also import PLC or SLC databases into RSView32 using the Database Import amp Export Wizard To use the wizard 1 Click the Windows Start button point
542. the user defined to help identify the data Wide indicates that this file is in wide file format and may contain both floating point and string tag data Short file names RSView32 uses 8 character file names if you do not choose to use long file names or if either the primary or secondary path does not support long file names or if either path is inaccessible when data logging starts This is the format for 8 character file names YYMMDDnz dbf YY is the year MM is the month DD is the day nis the sequence letter a b c and so on This letter indicates the sequence files were created in You can have up to 26 file sets a to z per day If you attempt to create a 27th file RSView32 continues logging data to the 26th file At midnight the sequence starts at a again 7 5 Configuring data logging D 7 6 zis the file type Narrow format has three file types t for tag names f for floating point analog and digital tag values and s for string tag values Wide format has a two file types t for tag names and w for wide The w file stores both floating point and string values Example of short file names for narrow dbf format For narrow dbf file format data log files are created in sets of three Even if your project does not contain a particular type of data three files are created If data is not available for a file the file remains empty Example Log file name The log file named 9
543. then click Alarm Summary The cursor changes to the Alarm Summary tool Drag the mouse to create a box approximately the size you want for the alarm summary When you release the mouse an empty alarm summary window appears The menu bar changes to display the menus for the Alarm Summary editor Configure the appearance of the alarm summary object as described on the following pages You can edit the alarm summary object as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it and so on You can also use this object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it in another For detailed information about graphic objects see Chapter 11 Creating graphic displays When you are finished save the graphic display Configuring alarms Header area Use the commands on the Insert menu to insert headings here Divider Use the mouse to move the divider up and down Body area The area where alarm information is displayed at runtime Button bar Use the commands on the Format menu to specify what buttons to include on this bar and to specify where to place the bar The parts of an alarm summary The alarm summary is a table for displaying information You decide how many columns you want the table to have how wide the columns will be and what information the columns will contain A new alarm summary looks like this Untied Alen Sem nary 6 55 Conf
544. then click Close 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the StringTable Click Close Setting up an index for these tables enhances logging performance Configuring data logging Setting up logging paths Switching logging paths RSView32 allows you to specify a secondary or backup path to log data to if the primary path for dbf files or the ODBC database becomes unavailable The primary path or ODBC database could become unavailable because of network failures or because of lack of disk space on the primary path or where the ODBC database is located If the primary path or ODBC database becomes unavailable RSView32 begins to store the data in a buffer The buffer can hold up to 64 Kb of data When the buffer fills or when the maximum amount of time to buffer data has elapsed if the primary path or ODBC database is still unavailable RSView32 switches to the secondary or backup path RSView32 checks periodically to determine whether the primary dbf file path or ODBC database has become available again If the primary path or ODBC database has become available RSView32 switches back automatically RSView32 also checks the status of the primary path or ODBC database if the secondary or backup path becomes unavailable and will switch back if possible If both paths are unavailable RSView32 buffers the data If the buffer fills and both paths are still unavailable RSView32 empties the buffer the data in the buffer is lost and begins
545. ting on page D 23 Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers ss Submember Only applies to ADDR and DATA members of PID structure and DATA member of MSG structure bb optional Bit number 0 15 decimal Only applies to analog word members Example MG59 33 DATA 0 15 SLC addressing syntax The following section provides addressing syntax for these types of programmable controllers SLC 5 which includes the fixed I O SLC 5 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 O 300 SLC 5 Enhanced which includes the SLC 5 03 OS 301 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 SLC 5 1 0 files F ss www bb F File type I Input O Output ss I O slot number 0 30 decimal www optional I O word number expansion 0 255 decimal bb optional Bit offset within word 0 15 decimal When input slot is 0 0 23 decimal Example 1 22 254 13 Waele Writing to the output files of an SLC 5 is not recommended However if you do be sure the SLC is not in RUN mode If it is in RUN mode the write will fail and an error message will be logged to the activity log file Addressing syntax for Allen Bradley programmable controllers D 10 Important information for addressing SLC 5 1 0 modules The RSView32 I O module addressing system differs from the corresponding ControlView APS A I 500 and RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 addressing systems The RSView32 I O data section addressing does not match the physical
546. to Programs Rockwell Software RSView32 Tools and then click Database Import amp Export Wizard Read the wizard s Help for details about how to use the wizard 4 25 Creating tags Creating tags using the RSView32 Object Model and VBA You can use the RSView32 Object Model with programming languages like Visual Basic or VBA to create tags For more information about using the RSView32 Object Model see Help Adding alarms to tags Analog and digital tags can have alarms associated with them At runtime RSView32 scans the tag values in the tag database and compares them to the limits you set for the tags If a tag value crosses a limit an alarm is triggered When a tag has an alarm configured for it an X appears in the Alm column of the Tag Database editor s spreadsheet and the Alarm button in the editor s form is highlighted enabled Tag Cal aha Hopped Akiniai der Disder ia jammed Hopper Aarma mpty Divider hopper is empty Hopper WarmslE So Hog per emergeney chuidewn yvabve kos beam blogered Xo Hopper Wama Ful X Hopper i Dare gh hopper 5 tall aima yl ira Owen gh ni For details about alarms see Chapter 6 Configuring alarms 4 26 Creating tags Logging tag values Any tag value can be logged To set up logging use the Data Log Setup editor For details see Chapter 7 Configuring data logging Jritr call nta Leg Ewig Evm iag renar nepamet 3y a ipans i ron banoa n ihs T
547. to assign a logical name and an address to each programmable controller that RSView32 will communicate with Each programmable controller is then referred to throughout RSView32 by this name The node name carries all its configuration information so attributes such as type of programmable controller station number and network type need not be repeated Before you can configure a device node you must set up communication channels For details see Configuring channels on page 2 6 To create a node 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Node editor by doing one of the following double click the Node icon right click the Node icon and then click Show L Esp Deta Source Ohance Fiten or Servo oter Competer WE Server ne pulps Fisei_Campaien DPI Gene Ai Sims JPE irr Piel Lopes UPE Cher TOSS Wika age Pe Prat FLE Dt Serner Ea i CPU HE PRT H Pisat BL ai Erker SLES nance 1a J 2 12 Setting up direct driver communications 3 Fill in the following information for each node Data Source Select Direct Driver For details about the OPC Server and DDE Server data sources see Chapter 3 Setting up OPC and DDE communications Name Type a name of your choice up to 40 characters long This name represents the programmable controller The name can have upper and lower case letters numbers dashes and underscores Spaces are not permitted Enabled Normally nodes are enabled
548. to create a button and use the Password command as the press action When the button is pressed the Password dialog box appears j dure oe HEE Dd Pariso mem y Nes Paneond Bi Password pa r The new A password is Coalirmation OO typed here to confirm it The new password is also added to the Password field of the User Accounts editor aie if your project is using the Windows NT security option and you change your password using the RSView32 Password command your password for the Windows NT domain will automatically be changed as well 10 20 Creating graphic displays This chapter describes the Graphic Display editor and outlines how to set up the drawing environment draw edit and arrange graphic objects use objects from the Graphic Library editor About graphic displays and graphic objects A graphic display represents the operator s view of plant activity The display can show system or process data and provide operators with a way to write values to an external device such as a programmable controller Operators can also print the display at runtime to create a visual record of tag values The components that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects Objects can be created in the Graphic Display editor dragged and dropped from a graphic library copied and pasted from another Windows application created by another Windows application and inserted in th
549. to see more properties Click for help on the Help property panel 3 In the column on the right type the value for the property You cannot specify values for properties that are read only If a selection list or window is available for the property when you click in the column the selection list or window opens Select the value to use for the property 4 If custom property pages are available for the ActiveX object click in the column beside Custom to open the property pages and set up more properties Once the property panel is open you can set up properties for multiple objects at the same time by Ctrl clicking them The properties common to the selected objects are listed in the property panel 11 74 Creating graphic displays This page is selected Using the ActiveX Toolbox You can use the ActiveX Toolbox to set up tools for the ActiveX objects you use frequently This toolbox cannot be docked By default the ActiveX Toolbox contains some of the Forms 2 0 ActiveX controls that are installed with VBA For examples of using these controls see the ActiveX Forms 2 0 sample graphic displays in the Samples project To add tools to the ActiveX Toolbox 1 If the toolbox is not open click ActiveX Toolbox on the View menu 2 Select the page of the toolbox to add objects to 3 Right click the page and click Additional Controls 4 Click the checkboxes of the tools to add from the list of instal
550. top Lock tool in the RSView32 Tools program folder For details about the Startup editor see Chapter 18 Running your project For details about the NT 4 0 Desktop Lock tool see the NT 4 0 Desktop Lock Help Adding security Logging in at runtime When you use the Windows NT security option user authentication at login is performed by Windows NT rather than by RSView32 If your project requires users to log in when the project opens ensure you include a way for them to issue the Login command For example create a button and use the Login command as the press action When a user presses the button the following dialog box appears RS View32 Login x o User DEREK Cancel Password 77 4 Help If your project does not require users to log in when the project opens and you are not using the Windows NT security option the user called DEFAULT is logged in automatically If you are using the Windows NT security option the current Windows NT user is logged into RSView32 instead of DEFAULI if the current Windows NT user also has an RSView32 user account If the user doesn t also have an RSView32 user account RSView32 opens with DEFAULT as the user When the current user logs out DEFAULT is shown as the logged in user 10 19 Adding security Changing passwords at runtime If you want operators to be able to change their passwords include a way for them to access the Password dialog box One way is
551. tops Inthe Events editor specify the DerivedOff lt file gt command as the action for an event On the command line type DerivedOff lt file gt and then press Enter Configuring alarms In RSView32 you can set up a complete alarm system Alarms are an important part of most plant control applications because an operator must know the instant something goes wrong It is often equally important to have a record of the alarm and whether the alarm was acknowledged Summary of features With the RSView32 alarm system you can monitor any analog and digital tag for alarms to a maximum of 10 000 tags display the last 1000 alarms in an alarm summary define up to eight different severity levels to distinguish alarms visually use system default messages or create unique messages to describe an alarm log messages to a file to a printer or to both suppress alarms for maintenance and tuning purposes associate a macro with an alarm to provide custom handling of the alarm 6 1 m Configuring alarms Key concepts share alarm information with other RSView32 components set up global alarm monitoring use the AlarmEvent command to respond to your own alarm detection algorithms for annunciation logging printing and for display in alarm summaries An alarm occurs when something goes wrong It can signal that a device or process has ceased operating within acceptable predefined limits or it can i
552. tor the value from the PLC is multiplied by the scale The offset is a fixed value after the value from the PLC is multiplied by the scale the offset amount is added This formula shows the relationship between the PLC value and the amount stored in the RSView32 value table RSView32 value PLC value x scale offset Waele Values from the programmable controller are first scaled then added to the offset When a value is written to the programmable controller the process is reversed the offset is subtracted and the scale is used for division This ensures that the correct unchanged value is sent to the programmable controller Units Type a text label for display only up to 20 characters long This specifies how the tag value is measured for example gallon PSI min sec Creating tags Data Type The data types are Data type Description Range Default Depends on the data source See below and node type If Device is the data source for direct driver nodes RSView32 matches the data format specified by the address for example N7 0 Integer F8 0 Floating Point Do not use Default for OPC or DDE nodes as this might produce unexpected results If Memory is the data source Default is Floating Point Unsigned Integer Unsigned 16 bit integer 0 to 65 535 Integer Signed 16 bit integer 32 768 to 32 767 Long Integer Signed 32 bit integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 4
553. tors Typically used for single record entry Global key A type of key definition that is not restricted to a single display but is active at all times Configured in the Global Keys editor See also Key definition Graphic display A picture created in the Graphic Display editor to represent part of a plant or process Graphic object An object in the Graphic Display editor Handshake bit A bit in the programmable controller that RSView32 can set when a tag goes into alarm Historical trend A trend display showing data from a data log file Created with the Trend drawing tool in the Graphic Display editor Glossary Key definition A command symbol macro or series of replacement keystrokes assigned to a key The types of key definitions are global display and object Global key definitions are created in the Global Keys editor display and object key definitions are created in the Graphic Display editor Key list A list of the keys that are assigned to a graphic object or graphic display When a user presses one of the specified keys a command or macro runs Configured in the Graphic Display editor Local station A programmable controller or any other computer attached to the same network as RSView32 Log file A file that stores data in dbf dBase IV file format An alarm log file stores alarm messages and other data related to alarms An activity log file stores system activity information A data log file stores
554. ts Double click to select the object A lt rope like border appears This border indicates that this is a group Click again Handles appear The lt handles show the individual objects within the group When you double click you are in group edit mode In this mode you can select individual objects in the group and modify them You can also add new objects to the group To see what objects are selected either look at the status bar or right click to see the Edit menu item on the context menu To stop editing click outside of the group You can stack objects on top of each other Objects are stacked in the order they are created with the most recently created object on top Change the stacking order with Send to Back and Bring to Front Send to Back moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack Bring to Front moves the selected object to the top of the stack Creating graphic displays Bring to Front d e S h b To sth an object to the front 1 Select an object 2 e mp o Front on the Arrange menu or click the Bring to DE a oba To send an oe to the back 1 Select an object Send the objec to back l t n the obje ck on and then click again Do a able click a ad do m e ce pause ove the mous 2 Cli a nd to Back on the Arrange menu or click the Send to Back button on the toolbar el opje T cl ct t ct se i not 11 87 Creating graphic d
555. ts editor create an event that uses the free_bytes function and displays a message when disk space falls below 10 MB See page 14 19 for more information about the free_bytes function See Chapter 9 Configuring events for information about events Running your project Stopping a project To stop a project do any of the following in the Project Manager click the Stop Project button issue the ProjectStop command To issue the ProjectStop command type it on the command line or create a button or global key with ProjectStop as the action When the button or key is pressed the ProjectStop command is issued When a project stops When a project stops the following occurs open displays and RSView32 components close running data log models stop running derived tag files stop running event files stop alarm monitoring stops the OPC or DDE server is disabled execution of VBA programs stops but events may continue to fire if your VBA program does not destroy its objects If a shutdown macro has been specified in the Startup editor the macro will run once the above components have closed and stopped running 18 15 RS View32 commands This appendix describes where and how to use RSView32 commands how to use the command line RSView32 commands and their syntax Using RSView32 commands Where to use commands You can use commands in the following places in a field that requires you to enter an action For
556. ts so the scale is wide enough to display the minimum and maximum values for all your tags If the pen value does not fit it appears in scientific notation To display the division markings on the vertical axis without numbers select 0 Grid Check this box to have horizontal grid lines extend from the major and minor divisions on the vertical axis Choosing a data source The data for trends can be realtime historical or file based Realtime data comes from the value table Historical data comes from a data log model s set of files File based data comes from a single log file at a time For a realtime trend Click the Real Time button Gets Source m Real Dime Hesoncel C Odet File C Meses Fie Choose File The buffer for each realtime trend pen can contain up to 2 000 tag values A tag value is saved to the buffer whenever that value changes When the buffer is full the oldest value is overwritten with a new value 13 13 Configuring trends 13 14 To ensure a realtime trend contains data see Ensuring realtime trends have data on page 13 26 For a local historical trend To display historical data from a data log model in the project you are running click Historical then click Local and specify a data log model in the Model field Gets Source C Feal Tome Histonceal 0 Odet File C Meser Fie Choose File F Local c Aemoia Model For a remote historical trend To display historic
557. ts to the both statements are true returns a 1 right and to the left of the operator are both true OR II or Returns a 1 if either tag1 gt tag2 OR tag1 5 the statement to the tagl 5 is true returns a 1 eft or to the right of the operator is true NOT negation Reverses the logical NOT tag1 lt tag2 value of the statement although tag1 lt tag2 is true NOT it operates on reverses the logical value returns a O yea The parentheses are essential in the above expressions See Evaluation order of operators on page 14 20 14 11 Creating expressions Bitwise operators Bitwise operators examine and manipulate individual bits within a value Tytieiie These operators are for integers only not floating point numbers Symbol Operator Action amp AND Compares two integers or integer tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if both the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1 Otherwise the resulting bit is 0 inclusive OR Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if either or both of the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1 If both bits are O the resulting bit is 0 exclusive OR XOR Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if the corresponding bits in the original numbers differ If both bits ar
558. u can also select colors using the color items on the Attributes menu You can select colors before you draw an object or you can apply them to an existing object Use the Line Color palette to select a color for the outline of an object for text or for hollow objects Use the Fill Color palette to select a color for the inside of an object or for solid objects Creating graphic displays Select tool Selecting and deselecting objects To work with an object you must first select it with the Select tool You can click this tool in the Drawing Tools toolbox or on the Objects menu To deselect a drawing tool click the Select tool in the toolbox or on the Objects menu To select Do this An object Click the object Several objects Click the first object Ctrl click additional objects All objects in an area Drag diagonally to draw a selection border around the objects Ctrl click objects outside the border to add them to the selection All objects in the drawing area Click Select All on the Edit menu To deselect An object Ctrl click the object Several objects Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection border around the objects All selected objects Click in the drawing area away from any objects 11 7 Creating graphic displays 11 8 Using the grid To size and position objects precisely use the grid items on the View menu You can change the
559. ue that passes the threshold click Increasing To monitor for a falling value that passes the threshold click Decreasing Alarm Label Type a description of the alarm up to 21 characters long This description is displayed in the alarm summary and alarm banner Severity Select a severity level Severity 1 is most severe Severity 8 is least severe Severities are configured in the Alarm Setup editor For details see Configuring alarm severity on page 6 32 In Alarm Messages Select the message you want when the tag goes into alarm If you click Custom Message type the message in the File and or Printer fields You can use both words and placeholders For detailed information about messages see Configuring alarm messages on page 6 34 To configure additional thresholds select another threshold and fill in each field When you select another threshold the information you configured for the previous threshold is saved Configuring alarms Alarm messages 1 Click the Alarm Messages tab Ld Tha iA riid Tag 4 Dew 410 didi aii Tag hia T1 x Tid 81 Ania Tg aa h YA Achad Tag yiia 2 Select the file and printer messages for when a tag goes out of alarm and when an operator acknowledges an alarm If you click Custom Message type the message in the File and or Printer fields You can use both words and placeholders For detailed information about messages see Configuring alarm
560. uotes If the string includes quotes use double quotes Weim Before using the DDEExecute command the server application must be running but it can be minimized Examples The DDEExecute command DDEExecute RSlinx _ Drivers Who_Active Sends the Who_Active command which displays the default RSLinx RSWho window Drivers must be preceded by two underscores DDEExecute WINAB5 SYSTEM SR 3 Sends WINtelligent LOGIC 5 WINABS5 the Dot command SR 3 which means search for Rung 3 DDEExecute WINAB5 SYSTEM UI Sends WINtelligent LOGIC 5 WINAB5 the Dot command UI which displays the System Information window DDEExecute Winrecip IcomDdeExe CONTROL PANEL DEFAULTS Sends WINtelligent RECIPE the CONTROL_PANEL_DEFAULTS command which opens the default WINtelligent RECIPE Control Panel A 27 RSView32 commands DDEPokeDisable DDEPokeEnable DDEServerOff DDEServerOn Define A 28 DDEPokeDisable Obsolete Use RTDataWriteDisable DDEPokeEnable Obsolete Use RTDataWriteEnable DDEServerOff Obsolete Use RTDataServerOff DDEServerOn Obsolete Use RTDataServerOn Define lt symbol gt string Creates a symbol A symbol is an abbreviation for a command or a command with parameters The symbol can be used anywhere a command can be used You cannot nest symbols Symbol definitions are valid only during the current session they must be re defined each time RSView32 is restarted
561. using the PLC 5 10 5 12 5 15 or 5 25 For the SOFT5 driver enter the UNC name of the SoftLogix 5 controller without the backslashes For example if the UNC computer name is ORION type ORION The computer name must be 8 characters or less For SoftLogix 5 controllers using the AB_ETH driver enter the controller s IP address Type Select the type of device you are using For this device type Select PLC PLC 2 PLC3 PLC 3 PLC 5 10 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 15 PLC 5 25 PLC 5 PLC 5 11 PLC 5 20 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 60 PLC 5 Enhanced PLC 5 80 SLC 5 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 0S 300 SLC 5 SLC 5 03 0S 301 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 SLC 5 Enhanced SoftLogix 5 SoftLogix 5 To communicate with a SoftLogix 5 device you must use an RSLinx driver and a TCP IP channel Timeout Type the number of seconds you want RSView32 to wait before reporting a communication error A timeout period of three seconds is usually enough Setting up direct driver communications 4 Click Accept to save the node configuration 5 When you finish configuring nodes click Close Changing node information at runtime To permanently change a node s station number at runtime use the NodeSwitch command This command allows you to set up node level redundancy That is if the programmable controller that a node is pointing to fails you can immediately switch to another programmable controller
562. ustification Select Left Center or Right to specify how the values will be aligned within the field 5 Click OK Creating arrows Use the Arrow tool to create arrows that move based on the results of an expression Arrows can move vertically or horizontally Vertical arrows move up or down in relation to a tag s minimum and maximum values Horizontal arrows move left and right in relation to the minimum and maximum values For vertical arrows if the value is less than or equal to the minimum value the arrow is at the bottom If the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value the arrow is at the top For horizontal arrows if the value is less than or equal to the minimum value the arrow is at the left If the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value the arrow is at the right 11 53 Creating graphic displays To create an arrow 1 Click the Arrow tool 2 To draw a rectangle for a vertical arrow drag the mouse vertically To draw a rectangle for a horizontal arrow drag the mouse horizontally 3 Release the mouse button ai Finca Tose Raage Diecon T spesi Min M C Vertical Horizontai Lok Demen tele _ 4 Fill in the fields as follows In this field Do this Expression Create an expression At runtime the numeric result of the expression positions the arrow For details about expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions
563. utline form Once the tags have been initialized and tag values arrive the objects appear in their normal form This option does not affect objects with tags that are in error If an object has a tag that is in error the object will appear in outline form 11 17 Creating graphic displays 11 18 Preventing scroll bars on the RSView32 main window If a graphic display is larger than the RSView32 main window scroll bars will appear on the main window and will remain there even if subsequent displays are smaller than the main window To prevent scroll bars all graphic displays must be smaller than the working area in the RSView32 main window Keep in mind that the size of the working area depends on several factors the size you make the window your monitor s display resolution and whether you select the RSView32 toolbar status bar and activity bar on the View menu To minimize scroll bars RSView32 tries to position all graphic displays within the working area of the RSView32 main window unless explicitly overridden by the X and Y parameters of the Display command To ensure the RSView32 main window never has scroll bars select the Size to Main Window at Runtime option for large displays Do not select this option for smaller graphic displays that are not meant to fill the screen However be sure to position the smaller displays so they are completely visible otherwise scroll bars might appear You can also tu
564. utside the project directory or on another computer Working with projects Viewing component locations To view the location of the component s file select the component in the Project Manager and then check the location displayed in the status bar i HARE AY RSW Propect E System 0 CoOOuES E Graphic a DETAL This is a Ee O HOPPER shortcut to a F Goar D MAA MBL component that Ej Perarnsters D OVER WIE YY is not in the Ti Aecipe O TANET default project 6 dame D TANE directory 0 Dea Log D TANK amp Lagi and Conil G Tene je VALVES The path to the selected component 1S displayed in the status bar CAbakery2 GR VALVES gfx Adding components to a project D 1 4 You can use the same files in more than one project by adding components to a project You can do this using two different methods When you add a component in the Project Manager using the Copy Existing Component into Project option you are creating a copy of the file in the project Working with projects When you add a component using the second option Create Shortcut to Existing Component you are not creating a copy of the file in the project Instead you are creating a link to the file s location outside of the project The advantage of using this option is that there is only one copy of the file and changes made to it are available to all projects using the file The disadvantage of using this option is that it is more diff
565. utton in the Drawing Tools toolbox If you have set up tools in the ActiveX Toolbox as described on page 11 75 click the tool in the toolbox draw a box about the size you want for the object and skip the remainder of these steps 2 Draw a box about the size you want for the object Insert an ActiveX Control Rockwell Compare Control Rockwell Event Master Control OK Cancel Rockwell Numeric Control Rockwell PushButton Control Help Rockwell Slider Control Rockwell Wessel Control Rockwell wheel Control Sheridan T abbed Dialog Control Register Slider Control S pinButton Detegister StatusB ar Control TabStrip Control Themnd Phanlebeu T naten HF EE 3 Click the object you want to add to your graphic display The list of objects depends on what software you have installed If some objects you have installed do not appear in the list the objects might not be registered To register them click Register and then choose the objects you want to add To remove an object from the list select the object and then click Deregister Creating graphic displays 4 Click OK The object appears in the graphic display To edit the object s properties right click the object then click ActiveX Property Panel on the context menu For details see Using the ActiveX Property Panel next To attach control to the object so it can interact with RSView32 use the ActiveX
566. uttons and drag To redock the activity bar click the title bar and drag the bar until it touches the RSView32 status bar To resize the activity bar drag any corner or edge RSView32 commands ActivityLogSend ToODBC ActivityOff ActivityOn ActivityLogSendToOdbc lt data_source gt lt target_table_name gt Wn Uuser_name Ppassword Exports activity log data from DBF files to the ODBC database The connection to the ODBC database is maintained for the length of time specified by the wait W parameter lt data_source gt A valid ODBC data source name If the name has a space embedded in it enclose the name in quotes lt target_table_ The name of a table in the ODBC database where name gt the data will be exported If the table does not exist RSView32 attempts to create it Wn The time the connection to the ODBC database will be maintained If nothing is specified the wait time defaults to about 5 minutes A wait time of zero keeps the connection open until the project is stopped This parameter allows frequent exports to the database without having to connect every time Once the connection is established RSView32 waits the specified time and if another command is received to export data the command is executed and the wait timer is reset If no command is received within the wait time the connection is closed Uuser_name A user ID that is valid on the data source Ppassword A
567. ve the same name If they do the symbol runs instead of the macro The order of precedence is symbol command macro To clear a symbol gt On the command line or in a macro type one of the following This command Does this Undefine lt symbol gt clears the symbol where lt symbol gt is the name of the symbol you want to delete Undefine clears all defined symbols Example Undefining symbols Undefine Show Clears the symbol Show 15 13 Setting up navigation Key definitions 15 14 You can associate RSView32 commands with objects in a display and or with the entire display using object key animation display key animation and touch animation You can also associate commands with keys that will be active at all times throughout the system by creating global keys At runtime operators use these keys to interact with the system for example to change displays or set tag values When deciding what type of key to create use the following table as a guide To Do this For details see Associate a key with a specific Attach object key animation in Page 12 40 graphic object object key the Graphic Display editor Associate a key with a specific Attach display key animation in Page 12 52 graphic display display key the Graphic Display editor Create a key that works Create a key definition file inthe Page 15 19 everywhere global key Global Keys editor General rules about
568. ver the bitmap with RSView32 drawing tools and then deleting the bitmap Avoid many bitmaps Whenever possible create graphical objects using the RSView32 drawing tools When could a bitmap help Bitmaps generally make graphic displays slower However objects with large amounts of detail such as subtle shading might draw more quickly if converted to a bitmap because bitmaps take the same amount of time to draw regardless of their complexity Using graphic libraries 11 102 RSView32 comes with a set of libraries that contain graphic objects and displays Additional libraries are installed if you install the RSView32 Resource Kit Many of the objects are preconfigured with animation You can look at the objects and displays to get ideas for your own project drag and drop objects from the libraries into your own displays Use the objects as they are or change them to suit your needs Creating graphic displays Graphics rej Display rey Library a Parameters H Recipe Graphics rej Display Fey Library 4 Parameters H Recipe Location of library files By default library files are stored in a different directory than RSView32 The default installation places the files in C Program Files Rockwell Software Samples RSView Library To open a graphic library 1 In the Project Manager open the Graphics folder 2 Click the Library icon The libraries are displayed in the right pane of the Proje
569. vered by other displays If you issue the PrintDisplay command when RSView32 is in Edit mode RSView32 sends the last saved version of the display file to the printer Any changes you make after saving the display are not reflected in the printout To ensure the printout is up to date save the display before printing it Project Obsolete Use ProjectHide ProjectRun ProjectShow or ProjectStop A 47 RSView32 commands ProjectHide ProjectRun ProjectShow ProjectStop PullForward A 48 ProjectHide Hides the Project Manager so it is not visible on the screen Ctrl Alt P also hides the Project Manager if it is visible ProjectRun Starts running the project This is the same as choosing the Run Project button in the Run Mode tab of the Project Manager ProjectShow Displays a hidden Project Manager Ctrl Alt P also shows the Project Manager if it is hidden ProjectStop Stops running the project This is the same as choosing the Stop Project button in the Run Mode tab of the Project Manager PullForward lt file gt Moves the specified graphic display in front of all other windows If the specified graphic display is of the Replace or Overlay type and a display of the On Top type is open PullForward positions the specified display behind the back most On Top display and gives the specified display focus lt file gt The name of an open graphic display file without a file extension If the s
570. w the log files are named see The ODBC storage format on page 7 8 DateAndTime Millitm TransType Userld 1999 02 05 11 01 32 00 734 In amp lm Process Ingred1 SUP_P 4 0 A 5 0 1 LOLO 1 N DEFAULT 1999 02 05 11 01 32 00 404 Acked Process Ingred1 SUP_P 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 N DEFAULT 1999 02 05 11 01 33 00 415 Acked Process Ingred1 SUP_P 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 N DEFAULT 1999 02 05 11 01 35 00 308 Acked Process Batch_Tank PY 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 N DEFAULT 1999 02 05 11 01 36 00 400 In lm Process Ingred2 SUP_P 13 0 A 15 0 2 Lo 2 N DEFAULT 1999 02 05 11 01 38 00 653 In amp lm Process Ingred2 SUP_P 4 0 A 5 0 1 LOLO 1 N DEFAULT Dat 1 1 M 1 111 ir i Precast rgdi f Hi CERALLT 5 ee ached T ap Procersingedd AP P PROOUCTION f Hi CERALLT 5 SE 3 Acked Tag Poania UP PY PROOUCTION a f H CERALLT 5 ES Sacked Tag Proce Eetch Tak PROOUCTION i i F H CERALLT 7 BEL TOE indie Tag Proceed SLIP PAY PROCUCTION i LOLO i H CEFALLT 7 17 10 Se Ady Tag Proce gee SP Pe PFa TOH This column Contains SQL Data Type Length DateAndTime The time and date the alarm was SQL_TIMESTAMP Driver generated dependent Millitm The millisecond time when the SQL_SMALLINT 2or alarm transaction was generated orSQL_INTEGER 4 Trans Type The type of alarm that was SQL_VARCHAR 5 generated or SQL_CHAR TagName The name of the tag or alarm SQL_VARCHAR 40 event that caused the alarm or SQL_CHAR TagValue The value of the tag at the time SQL_DOUBLE or 8or the
571. which the value returned by the method will be assigned file object property tag_name or constant sets an object s property to the specified tag s value or to a constant value tag_name file object property sets the specified tag s value to the value of the object s property A 39 RSView32 commands Key KeyEdit Login A 40 Key lt parameter gt Starts or stops running the global key file lt parameter gt One of the following file The name of a global key file without a file extension R Stops running the global key file To have a global key file automatically start when a project starts open the Startup editor click the Global Key File check box and specify a file KeyEdit file Without the parameter opens the Global Key editor With the parameter opens the editor and the specified file file The name of a key file without a file extension Login username password Logs users into the system To log in users must have an account in the User Accounts editor username The user s name as defined in the User Accounts editor password The user s password as defined in the User Accounts editor If this parameter is omitted a window appears prompting the user to enter the password Using this command with both parameters logs the user into the system Using this command with only one parameter displays the login dialog box RSView32 commands Logout Mac
572. wse button next to the Server Name field Sharing data with other Windows applications To request data from RSView32 a third party OPC client application on the same computer must use this information Server RSI RSView32OPCTagServer Type Local Server Since the client and server are on the same computer Computer this field is inaccessible Name or Address Access Path Project name You can leave this blank If you specify a name use the name of the open project Update Rate A rate in seconds Address Name or address of the tag in the server You specify the address when you assign the OPC node to a tag in the Tag editor Each OPC client application uses different delimiters to separate these fields use the delimiters that are appropriate to your application For an example of how to set up an RSView32 station as an OPC client see Using OPC for peer to peer network communications on page 17 5 Setting up a local DDE client application To request data from RSView32 a DDE client application on the same computer must use this information Application RTData Topic Project name Item Tag name Each DDE client application uses different delimiters to separate these three fields use the delimiters that are appropriate to your application 16 25 Sharing data with other Windows applications Example Using Microsoft Excel to read a tag value This example describes how to use Microsoft
573. y command with the Z or ZA parameter For details see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see online help load the graphic when it is displayed for the first time by using the Cache After Displaying option in the Display Settings dialog box of the Graphic Display editor For details see Specifying caching on page 11 15 Where to use RSView32 commands Commands can be used in the following places afield that requires you to enter an action a macro acommand line Many RSView32 commands accept parameters For a complete list and description of commands see Appendix A RSView32 commands or see Help Setting up navigation Example of navigation methods Following are examples of various navigation methods Example Keyboard operation The following graphic display has been designed to act as a menu listing keys users can press to open different displays Main Menu Pi Lined Ai Line 5 To create this display the designer assigned various RSView32 commands to keys using the three types of key definitions object display and global In all cases keys not mouse buttons were defined to run commands Object key and display key animation are configured in the Graphic Display editor For details see Chapter 12 Animating graphic objects Global keys are created in the Global Keys editor For details see Creating global keys on page 15 19 15 5 Setting up navigation The Line 1 L
574. y data log file OldestTime Analog Time of the oldest data sample available for Read only plotting Paused Digital A tag value of 1 pauses the trend Read and write A tag value of O resumes movement of the trend For a realtime trend the Paused tag has a default value of O so the trend scrolls initially For a historical trend the Paused tag has a default value of 1 so the trend pauses initially B 5 m System tags Tag name Type Function Read or Write PenMask Analog A 16 bit mask that controls the visibility of the trend pens If the bit corresponding to a pen is set in this mask the pen is displayed For example PenMask 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 No pens are displayed PenMask 0000 0000 0000 0100 4 Only Pen 3 is displayed Read and write StartTime Analog Integer tag specifying the time at the right margin of the time scale The start time value is the number of seconds elapsed since midnight 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time UTC Read and write StartTimeDate String String tag representing the start time and date for the trend at the right margin of the time scale For example JAN 01 1998 13 00 00 Read and write TimeRange Analog Time range of the time scale in seconds Read and write Updating Digital Digital tag that indicates whether the trend object is retrieving data log data The tag value is
575. y or None By default the Primary driver is active To disable a channel temporarily without removing its configuration click None At runtime users can switch between drivers if necessary For details see Switching communication drivers at runtime on page 2 10 4 When you finish configuring channels click OK Setting up direct driver communications Changing the channel configuration To change the channel configuration once nodes have been assigned for example to move a project from a computer using DH to a computer using TCP IP create a new channel of the correct type Re assign the channel number for each node then delete the original channel configuration Switching communication drivers at runtime 2 10 If the primary network fails at runtime your system can switch to a driver on a pre defined secondary network You can set up your project so drivers switch automatically or so operators manually switch the drivers Commands for switching drivers Use the following commands to switch drivers DriverPrimary lt channel gt Switches from the secondary driver to the primary driver on the specified channel lt channel gt The number of the channel 1 through 4 that is being switched from its secondary to primary driver DriverSecondary lt channel gt Switches from the primary driver to the secondary driver on the specified channel lt channel gt The number of the channel 1 through 4
576. y at 2 00 am and every Friday at 2 00 pm type the following start times Stan Times ana parr lime Wiad 200 Fri 14 00 Creating files when a particular event occurs 4 Click On Event 2 In the Expression field create the expression that will trigger creation of a new file For details about expressions see Chapter 14 Creating expressions Example Creating a new file for a new shift You can set up your project so it creates a new log file at the end of a shift or batch process For example create a tag called NextShift In the Activity Log Setup editor click On Event and type NextShift as the expression Expression HasiShili When the tag evaluates to true a new activity log file is created to store the data from the new shift 8 7 m Configuring activity logging Deleting log files Never creating new files Click Never Logged data is added to a single file When considering how much data to log to a file keep in mind that the Activity Log Viewer can display a maximum of 32 767 records at one time To manage disk space if a log file grows too large stop activity logging delete the activity log file and then restart activity logging You cannot delete a log file while activities are being logged For details about how to monitor disk space see Monitoring disk space on page 18 14 You can delete old log files after a specified period or once a specified number of files has been cre
577. y quotes The drive parameter is the drive letter These are the functions This function Returns this value Example FILE_EXISTS file 1 true if the FILE_EXISTS specified file exists C Proj1 Diglog Aug 97041 ebf dbf returns 1 true if the file exists or O false if the file does not exist Use this function to set a tag when a specified file has been created or deleted FREE_BYTES drive The number of bytes FREE_BYTES c free on the specified returns the number of bytes available drive on drive C up to a maximum of 2 1 GB Use this function to display a message or trigger an alarm when disk space is getting low If you want an expression containing these functions to be evaluated more than once assign the expression to an event rather than to an object in a graphic display 14 19 Creating expressions Math functions These functions perform math on an expression This function Returns this value SQRT expression The square root of the expression LOG expression The natural log of the expression LOG10 expression The base ten log of the expression SIN expression The sine of the expression in radians COS expression The cosine of the expression in radians TAN expression The tangent of the expression in radians ARCSIN expression The arc sine of the expression in radians ARCCOS expression The arc cosine of the expression in radia
578. ying options for deleting dbf files go to Specifying when to log data on page 7 36 i Untitled Data Log Setup Eg File Management Log Triggers Tags in Model OK eee Cancel E Help Purge Oldest Records in ODBC Database I After Maximum Time l E iS Records older than the maximum time are purged in the ODBC database at midnight 3 If you are using ODBC storage format under Purge Oldest Records in ODBC Database select the After Maximum Time check box Type a number to specify when to delete the records and select whether the number is measured in days weeks or months If you do not want records deleted leave the check box blank This option purges records from the ODBC database only not from the backup files RSView32 deletes ODBC backup files only when the DataLogMergeToPrimary command is issued 7 35 Configuring data logging Specifying when to log data 7 36 You can set up logging so tag values are logged periodically periodic logging only when a tag value changes on change logging when a particular event occurs and triggers the DataLogSnapshot command on demand logging DataLogSnapshot lt file gt is the RSView32 command for logging data for a single data log model on demand where lt file gt is the name of the data log model Use the DataLogSnapshot command to loga snapshot of the data for all data log models that are currently running You can combine types
579. you are finished save the graphic display Creating tags PS System ry Charnel dab Node II Scan Class Tag Database Tag Monitor Creating a tag monitor file 1 In the Project Manager open the System folder 2 Open the Tag Monitor editor by doing one of the following double click the Tag Monitor icon right click the Tag Monitor icon and then click New 3 On the View menu click Form to display both the form and the spreadsheet 4 Select the tags you want to display as described below 5 On the File menu click Save and then type a name for the file To select tags the form part of the tag monitor must be visible If it is not visible click Form on the View menu To select the tags you want to display do one of the following type a tag name in the Tag Name field click zl to open a list and then select a tag type a wildcard in the Name field and then press Enter or click OK The wildcards are This character Does this Matches any single character Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Use this wildcard by itself to display all the tags in the tag database If you use a wildcard the Select Tag Names dialog box opens 4 29 Creating tags 4 30 This box lists all the tag names that matched the wildcard Using the Select Tag Names dialog box The Select Tag Names dialog box lists all the tags that matched a wildcard You c
580. yp equivalent field in the Tagname other table a join is TagT ype formed TT aqindex Sharing data with other Windows applications 2 Select the fields in the floating point or string list that you want data for You can select the fields in any order To select fields double click them The data for that field will appear in the Query spreadsheet a Query 1 from dBASE IY Iof Xx 990208at 990208af x TagDataT yp Tagname TagT ype TT agindex _ STagname Date _ Time _ _ Value PAPERSANASDRIVE DM _TORQ 1999 02 08 13 21 20 052 60 0 xl PAPERSANASDRIVESDM7_FPM_ 1999 02 08 13 21 20 052 385 0 PAPERSANA DRIVESDM TORQ 1999 02 08 13 21 22 075 80 0 PAPERMANASDRIVESDM7_FPM_ 1999 02 08 13 21 22 075 525 0 PAPERSANASDRIVESDM TORQ 1999 02 08 13 21 24 408 80 0 PAPERSANASDRIVESDM7_FPM_ 1999 02 08 13 21 24 408 560 0 PAPERSANASDRIVESDM TORQ 1999 02 08 13 21 26 451 80 0 PAPERSANASDRIVESDM7_FPM_ 1999 02 08 13 21 26 451 560 0 PAPERSANA DRIVESDM _ TORQ 1999 02 08 13 21 28 754 80 0 PAPERSANASDRIVESDM7_FPM_ 1999 02 08 13 21 28 754 560 0 PAPERSANA DRIVESDM _ TORQ 1999 02 08 13 21 30 777 85 0 PAPERMANA DRIVESDM FPM 1999 02 08 13 21 30 777 560 0 3 When you have selected all the fields you want open the File menu and then click Return Data to Microsoft Excel When you are back in Microsoft Excel click Next in the PivotTable Wizard PivotT able Wizard Step 2 of 4 BEI Where is your external dat
581. ystem MonthString String Name of the month Read only system Second Analog Seconds 0 59 Read and write system Time String System time Read only system Year Analog The year 1980 2099 Read only D B 4 System tags Trends The following tags are created each time you define a trend control tag in the Trend configuration dialog box These tags are not stored in the system folder Rather they are stored in the folder that is created when you name the trend animation tag For example if you typed Trend as the control tag you would find a folder called Trend in the list of folders displayed in the Tag Database editor The folder would contain the tags listed in the following table but each tag would be prefixed with Trend The CurrentPen tag would be Trend CurrentPen and so on Tag name Type Function Read or Write CurrentFile Analog Number of the current data log file Data Read and write log files are numbered sequentially You can see Function write to this tag if Choose File Oldest File column or Newest File is the trend s data source CurrentPen Analog Number of the current pen 1 16 Read and write highlighted in the legend NewestFile Analog Offset from current data log file to newest Read only data log file NewestTime Analog Time of the newest data sample available Read only for plotting OldestFile Analog Offset from current data log file to oldest Read onl

User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents